cc/td/doc/product/wanbu/bpx8600/9_3_2
hometocprevnextglossaryfeedbacksearchhelp
PDF

Table of Contents

Alphabetical List of Commands addad through cpytrkict

Alphabetical List of Commands addad through cpytrkict

This chapter contains an alphabetical list of CLI commands addad through cpytrkict.

. (a period) (display command history)

Displays the twelve (12) most recently used commands. To reuse one of these commands, enter the associated number. The command appears on the command entry line, where you can edit or re-execute a command.

To edit the command line: backspace through the command's arguments and type in a new value or backspace without typing a new value to restart the command at the cursor position.

Syntax

(A period)

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

No

BPX, IGX

No

Example

Display the command history.

.           (A period)

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.g0 Oct. 20 2000 09:26 GMT Command history 12: addyred 4 11: dspcds 10: dspcd 6 9: dspcd 9 8: addyred 6 9 7: dsptrks 6: addshelf 5.1 5: upcd 4: upcd 6 3: dspcds 2: dncd 9 1: upcd 9 Last Command: upcd 9 Next Command:

addad (add access device)

Adds an access device to a node.

Syntax

addad <slot.port> <access_device_ID> <DLCI> [ IP address ] [ number of mask bits]

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port

Specifies the slot and port number of the trunk to add.

access_device_ID

Device ID of the access device. Range: 0-255

DLCI

Range: 16-1007

IP address

The IP address of the access device. If you enter an IP address, it overrides the IP address that currently exists on the access device.
Optional.

number of mask bits

The number of bits in the IP subnet mask.
Optional.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspads

Example

Add an access device at slot 12, port 3. The access device ID is 3. The DLCI is 990.

addad 12.3 3 990 0

duvel TRM SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 08:19 GMT Access Devices Information Slot.Port Name ID DLCI Type Alarm IP Address 12.1 7 990 UNREACHABLE 12.3 sbrin02 3 990 3800 OK 192.168.6.162/24 Last Command: dspads This Command: addad 12.2 4 990 Enter Cong Mgmt. Timer (0=Disabled or 4-350 in 10ms units): 0 Last Command: addad 12.3 3 990 Next Command:

addalmslot (add alarm card set)

Enables the MAJOR and MINOR alarm indicators on an Alarm Relay Card (ARC) or Alarm Relay Module (ARM) front card. It also configures the slot to provide external alarms from the Alarm Relay Interface (ARI) back card.

Use this command at each node equipped to provide external alarm indications to the customer alarm reporting system. The slot specified for the ARC or ARM may be any shelf slot, but is usually the slot farthest to the right.

Upon executing the command, the system places the alarm card set in the active state and displays the current alarm status.

Syntax

addalmslot <slot number>

Parameter

Parameter Description

<slot number>

Specifies the slot number of the alarm card set.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-4

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

delalmslot, dspalms

Example

Enable alarm reporting from slot 16 in a node. (The system then displays alarm status.)

addalmslot 16

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:27 MST Alarm summary (Configured alarm slots: 16) Connections Failed: None Groups Failed: None PLN Alarms: 1 Major CLN Alarms: None Cards Failed: 1 Missing Cards: None Remote Node Alarms: 1 Major Remote Domain Alarms: None Last Command: addalmslot 16 Next Command:

addapsln/delapsln (add/delete SONET APS line)

Add a SONET APS (Automatic Protection Switching) line. The addapsln and delapsln command lets you add SONET APS (Automatic Protection Switching) for BXM OC-3 or OC-12 lines.

SONET APS is a standard that describes the switching of SONET lines from the active line to a standby line to provide hardware line redundancy. The SONET APS feature applies only to BXM OC-3 and OC-12 cards in this release.

When adding a new APS line pair, you must specify the desired APS protocol. The delapsln command deletes APS for the lines.

When the addapsln command executes, the switch software:

Before the addapsln command has been executed, there is no working or protection line. The addapsln command defines which line is the working line and which line is the protection line. (For APS 1+1 Annex B, the active line is called the "primary section," and the standby line is called the "secondary section," which provides protection for the primary section.)

Feature Mismatching to Verify APS (Automatic Protection Switching) Support

The addapsln command, in addition to other configuration commands, performs mismatch verification on the BXM and UXM cards. For example, the addapsln command verifies whether the cards both have APS support configured. Refer to the BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration Manual.

Whenever you activate a feature by configuring it with CLI commands, switch software performs a verification to ensure that the hardware and firmware support the feature. For example, if you are attempting to add APS on a specific line (by using addapsln), and the BXM card does not support this feature, a warning message is displayed and the addition is not completed.

The Feature Mismatching capability does not mismatch cards unless the actual feature has been enabled on the card. This allows for a graceful card migration from an older release.

Syntax

addapsln <slot.port1> < slot.port2> <protocol>

You must enter the slot.port pair and the protocol option. If you do not enter the protocol option, a menu lists the options.

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port1

The desired working line number

slot.port2

The desired protection line number

protocol

1: 1+1
2: 1:1
3: 1+1 Annex B
4: 1+1, ignore K1K2 bytes

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

Yes

BPX

Yes

Related Commands

delapsln, cnfapsln, dspapsln, dsplog, dspalms

Example

Add an APS redundant pair, with Working line on slot 11, port 1; Protection line on slot 12, port 1; with "1" specifying APS 1+1 protocol.

addapsln 11.1 12.1 1

sw119 TRM StrataCom BPX 8620 9.3.10 Date/Time Not Set Work/Protect Actv Active Line Standby Line Current APS Last User (Work1/Work2)Line Alarm Status Alarm Status Alarm Status Switch Req 11.1 12.1 NONE Deactivated APS Deactivated APS Deactivated Clear Last Command: addapsln 11.1 12.1 1

addcon (add a data channel connection)

Establishes data channel connections between nodes in a network.

After you add a connection by using the addcon command, the node automatically routes the connection. The node where you execute addcon is the "owner" of the added connections. The concept of ownership is important because you must enter information about automatic rerouting and preferred routing at the node that owns the connection. See the cnfpref and cnfcos commands for more information on automatic rerouting. Before the node adds the connection, the proposed connection appears on the screen with a prompt for you to confirm the addition.

When applied to data connections, the addcon command adds a synchronous data connection to the network. You can add synchronous data connections to any node slot equipped with either an LDM or HDM in an IGX node. Before you add a connection, determine the desired data rate. To find the data rates that individual cards support, refer to the card descriptions in the Cisco IGX 8400 Series Reference manual.

When connecting sets of data channels, you do not have to specify the full channel set for the local end of the connection. You have to designate only the first channel in the range. For example, to add connects 27.1-4 at local node alpha to channels 9.1-4 at beta, you can enter:

addcon 27.1-4 beta 9.1


If Y-cable redundancy has been specified, you can add data connections at only primary card slots (not at the secondary card slots). See the addyred definition for more information. Standard Data Rates Table 3-1 through Table 3-9 follow, listing data rates. The following notations appear with some data rates:

  • *

Must be used with 8/8 or 8/8I coding.

  • /n

Specifies a partially filled packet type: the /n allows partial packets to be sent and so avoid the delay incurred by waiting to build a full packet.

  • f

Entered after the data rate, an f specifies fast EIA (interleaved EIA) for the connection.

  • t

Indicates "transparent" (CDP or CVM subrate DS0A): if you include the t-option, the IGX node does not check for supervisory or control information.


Table 3-1: Data Connection Load Table with Normal EIA and No DFM
Bit Rate (Kbps) 7/8 Coding 8/8 Coding

Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt

1.2

43

28

38

32

1.8

65

28

57

32

2.4

35

70

30

80

3.2

46

70

40

80

3.6

52

70

45

80

4.8

35

140

30

160

6.4

46

140

40

160

7.2

52

140

45

160

8

58

140

50

160

9.6

69

140

60

160

12

86

140

75

160

12.8

92

140

80

160

14.4

103

140

90

160

16

115

140

100

160

16.8

120

140

105

160

19.2

138

140

120

160

24

172

140

150

160

28.8

206

140

180

160

32

229

140

200

160

38.4

275

140

240

160

48

343

140

300

160

56

381

147

334

160

57.6

392

147

360

160

54

436

147

381

168

72

490

147

429

168

76.8

523

147

458

168

84

572

147

500

168

96

654

147

572

168

112

762

147

667

168

115.2

784

147

686

168

128

871

147

762

168

144

980

147

858

168

168

1143

147

1000

168

192

1307

147

1143

168

224

1524

147

1334

168

230.4

1568

147

1372

168

256

1742

147

1524

168

288

1960

147

1715

168

336

2286

147

2000

168

384

2613

147

2286

168

448

3048

147

2667

168

512

3483

147

3048

168

672

4572

147

4000

168

768

5225

147

4572

168

772

5252

147

4596

168

896

6096

147

5334

168

1024

6966

147

6096

168

1152

7837

147

6858

168

1344

8000

168

Unshaded connections generate time-stamped data packets. Shaded connections generate non-time-stamped data packets.


Table 3-2: Data Connection Load Table with Interleaved EIA
Bit Rate (Kbps) 7/8 Coding 8/8 Coding

Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt

1.2f

35

35

30

40

1.8f

52

35

45

40

2.4f

35

70

30

80

3.2f

46

70

40

80

3.6f

52

70

45

80

4.8f

69

70

60

80

6.4f

92

70

80

80

7.2f

103

70

90

80

8f

115

70

100

80

9.6f

138

70

120

80

12f

172

70

150

80

12.8f

183

70

160

80

14.4f

206

70

180

80

16f

229

70

200

80

16.8f

240

70

210

80

19.2f

275

70

240

80

24f

343

70

300

80

28.8f

412

70

360

80

32f

458

70

400

80

38.4f

549

70

480

80

48f

686

70

600

80

56f

800

70

700

80

57.6f

823

70

720

80

54f

915

70

800

80

72f

1029

70

900

80

76.8f

1098

70

960

80

84f

1200

70

1050

80

96f

1372

70

1200

80

112f

1600

70

1400

80

115.2f

1646

70

1440

80

128f

1829

70

1600

80

144f

2058

70

1800

80

168f

2400

70

2100

80

192f

2743

70

2400

80

224f

3200

70

2800

80

230.4f

3292

70

2880

80

256f

3658

70

3200

80

288f

4115

70

3600

80

336f

4800

70

4200

80

384f

5486

70

4800

80

448f

6400

70

5600

80

512f

7315

70

6400

80

1.2f

35

35

30

40

1.8f

52

35

45

40

2.4f

35

70

30

80

3.2f

46

70

40

80

3.6f

52

70

45

80

4.8f

69

70

60

80

6.4f

92

70

80

80

DFM is not available on interleaved EIA connections.


Table 3-3: Data Connection Load Table with Partially Filled Packets and No DFM
Bit Rate (Kbps) 7/8 Coding 8/8 Coding

Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt

2.4/4

86

28

75

32

3.2/4

115

28

100

32

3.6/4

129

28

113

32

4.8/10

69

70

60

80

4.8/4

172

28

150

32

6.4/10

92

70

80

80

6.4/4

229

28

200

32

7.2/10

103

70

90

80

7.2/4

258

28

225

32

8/10

115

70

100

80

9.6/10

138

70

120

80

12/10

172

70

150

80

12.8/10

183

70

160

80

14.4/10

206

70

180

80

All of the above connections generate time-stamped data packets.


Table 3-4: Data Connection Load Table with Normal EIA and DFM
Bit Rate (Kbps) 7/8 Coding 8/8 Coding

Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt

1.2

58

21

24

3

1.8

86

21

24

3

2.4

39

63

72

9

3.2

51

63

72

9

3.6

58

63

72

9

4.8

37

133

152

19

6.4

49

133

152

19

7.2

55

133

152

19

8

61

133

152

19

9.6

73

133

152

19

12

91

133

152

19

12.8

97

133

152

19

14.4

109

133

152

19

16

121

133

152

19

16.8

127

133

152

19

19.2

145

133

152

19

24

181

133

152

19

28.8

217

133

152

19

32

241

133

152

19

38.4

289

133

152

19

48

361

133

152

19

56

422

133

152

19

57.6

434

133

152

19

64

482

133

152

19

72

542

133

152

19

76.8

578

133

152

19

84

632

133

152

19

96

722

133

152

19

112

843

133

152

19

115.2

867

133

152

19

128

963

133

152

19


Table 3-5: Data Connection Load Table with Partially Filled Packets and DFM
Bit Rate (Kbps) 7/8 Coding 8/8 Coding

Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt

2.4/4

115

21

100

24

3.2/4

153

21

134

24

3.6/4

172

21

150

24

4.8/10

77

63

67

72

4.8/4

229

21

200

24

6.4/10

102

63

89

72

6.4/4

305

21

267

24

7.2/10

115

63

100

72

7.2/4

343

21

300

24

8/10

127

63

112

72

9.6/10

153

63

134

72

12/10

191

63

167

72

12.8/10

204

63

178

72

14.4/10

229

63

200

72


Table 3-6: Data Connection Load Table with Partially Filled Packets and Interleaved EIA
Bit Rate (Kbps) 7/8 Coding 8/8 Coding

Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt

1.2f/2

86

14

75

16

1.8f/2

129

14

113

16

2.4f/5

69

35

60

40

2.4f/2

172

14

150

16

3.2f/5

92

35

80

40

3.2f/2

229

14

200

16

3.6f/5

103

35

90

40

3.6f/2

258

14

225

16

4.8f/5

138

35

120

40

6.4f/5

183

35

160

40

7.2f/5

206

35

180

40

All of the above connections generate time-stamped data packets. DFM is not available on interleaved EIA connections.


Table 3-7: Sub-Rate Data Connection Load Table (HDM to HDM)
Bit Rate (Kbps) 7/8 Coding 8/8 Coding

Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt

2.4t

35

80

4.8t

35

160

9.6t

70

160

56t

381

168

t

381

168

All sub-rate data connections use 8/8 coding. Unshaded connections generate time-stamped data packets. Shaded connections generate non-time-stamped data packets. DFM is not available on sub-rate connections. Interleaved EIA is not available on sub-rate connections.


Table 3-8: Sub-Rate Data Connection Load Table (HDM to HDM)
Bit Rate (Kbps) 7/8 Coding 8/8 Coding

Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt

2.4/4t

88

32

4.8/10t

70

80

4.8/4t

175

32

9.6/10t

140

80

All sub-rate data connections use 8/8 coding. All of the above connections generate time-stamped data packets. DFM is not available on sub-rate connections. Interleaved EIA is not available on sub-rate connections.


Table 3-9: Super-Rate Data Connection Load Table (LDM to HDM)
Bit Rate (Kbps) 7/8 Coding 8/8 Coding

Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt Pkt/Sec Bits/Pkt

1x56

381

147

334

168

2x56

762

147

667

168

3x56

1143

147

1000

168

4x56

1524

147

1334

168

5x56

1905

147

1667

168

6x56

2286

147

2000

168

7x56

2667

147

2334

168

8x56

3048

147

2667

168

1x64

436

147

381

168

2x64

871

147

871

168

3x64

1307

147

1307

168

4x64

1742

147

1143

168

5x64

2177

147

1524

168

6x64

2613

147

1905

168

7x64

3048

147

2286

168

8x64

2483

147

2667

168

All of the connections generate non-time-stamped data packets. DFM is not available on interleaved EIA connections.

In fast EIA signaling mode, an interleaved byte of EIA signaling information is associated with every byte of data in a packet. This format is appropriate for applications where EIA lead transitions must closely synchronize with user data. Fast EIA can apply to data rates up to 512 Kbps.

When FastPackets are built using the 7/8 coding format, each octet in the FastPacket payload consists of seven user data bits followed by a 1. This "bit-stuffing" allows these FastPackets to be safely carried on trunks that enforce ones density requirements by ensuring that each octet contain at least one 1 (such as IGX trunks configured for ZCS or AMI encoding). The user data may have any format and may contain any pattern, including all 0s. The single 1 inserted in the final bit position of each octet ensures that no more than seven consecutive 0s occur in a FastPacket. The 7/8 coding format is the safest mode to use when the data protocol is unknown and certain trunks in the network use ZCS or AMI.

When FastPackets are built using the 8/8 coding format, each octet in the FastPacket payload consists of eight user data bits. The 8/8 coding format is more efficient than the 7/8 format. However, the ones density requirement on trunks must be met by one of the following:

The vast majority of trunks today use intelligent ones density enforcement schemes, such as B8ZS, HDB3, B3ZS, or CMI. All such trunks can safely carry 8/8 data connections with no risk of data corruption. Data connections can be configured to NOT use ZCS trunks by specifying the optional "*Z" routing restriction.

When FastPackets are built using the 8/8I coding format, each octet in the FastPacket payload consists of eight inverted user data bits, i.e., each 0 is changed to a 1 and each 1 is changed to a 0. The bits are re-inverted at the far end of the connection. For such connections, the ones' density requirement on trunks must be met by one of the following:

As with the 8/8 coding format, 8/8I connections can be safely carried on the vast majority of trunks today. However, the 8/8I format is primarily intended to provide the efficiency of 8/8 coding for any data which is HDLC or SDLC-based. HDLC/SDLC can never send more than six consecutive 1s, which, when inverted, automatically meets the ones density requirements of every possible trunk format.

If the data protocol requires an acknowledgment and is delay-sensitive, avoid routing the connection over a satellite line (*s for avoid). If 8/8 or 8/8I coding is the selected format, avoid trunks with zero code suppression (*z for avoid) because the zero code suppression could corrupt the last bit in the byte.

Syntax

addcon <local channel> <remote node> <remote channel> <type> <coding> [avoid]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<local channel>

Specifies the local channel or set of channels in the format slot.port [-port]. (The brackets indicate you can specify a range of channels.)

<remote node>

Specifies the name of the node at the other end of the connection.

For a DACS-type connection (where a channel on a node connects to a channel on the same node), use the local node name for remote node.

<remote channel>

Specifies the remote channel or set of channels in the format slot.port [-port]. (The brackets indicate you can specify a range of channels.)

<type>

Specifies the data connection bit rate, EIA control lead mode, and in some cases, the number of data bytes in a data packet. Refer to the Standard Data Connection rates for allowable bit rates.

<coding>

Specifies the data coding format for data transmissions. Valid formats:

  • 7/87 = bits of user data plus a 1 inserted in the final bit position of each data byte in a data packet. This is the default coding.

  • 7/8e = used with LDP or LDM application.

  • 8/88 = bits of user data for each data byte in a data packet.

  • 8/8I8 = bits of user data for each data byte in a packet. The data is inverted

[avoid]

Optionally specifies the type of trunk for the connection to avoid. The default is no avoidance. The choices are:

  • s avoid satellite trunks.

  • t avoid terrestrial trunks.

  • z avoid trunks using zero code suppression techniques that modify any bit position to prevent long strings of 0s.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

delcon, dncon, dspcon, dspcons, upcon

Example

Add a low speed data connection of 56 Kbps at 6.1. The connections are highlighted on the screen. A prompt appears asking you to confirm these connections. Respond "y" for yes to add the connection. The connections screen then appears showing that data channel 11.1 on node pubsigx2 is connected to channel 6.1 on node pubsigx1. The 56 under the type category indicates that the data rate for the channel is 56 Kbps.

addcon 6.1 pubsigx2 11.1 56

pubsigx1 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 06:23 PDT From Remote Remote 6.1 NodeName Channel State Type Compress Code CoS 6.1 pubsigx2 11.1 Ok 56 7/8 0 Last Command: addcon 6.1 pubsigx2 11.1 56 Next Command:
Example

For a CDP super-rate connection, add a 256 Kbps (4x64) connection from an SDP at node alpha to the CDP at node beta. Data rates come from the Standard Data Rate Connections in the preceding pages.

addcon 5.1 beta 6.1-4 4x64

The elements on the command line consist of:

addcon slot.port remote nodename slot.start channel at far-end channel rate

Example

For CDP to CDP or CVM to CVM, add a 256 Kbps (4x64) data connection from a CDP (or CVM) at node alpha to the CDP (or CVM) at node beta. The syntax for this example requires that the start and end channel are entered for both ends of the connection and that the data rate is specified to be the same at both ends.

addcon 5.4-7 beta 6.1-4 4x64

The channel numbers can be different on each end if they are contiguous.

addcon

slot.start channel -end channel

remote nodename

slot.start channel -end channel

rate

addcon (add channel voice connections)

Establishes the channel connections between nodes in the network. You can add voice connections to any slot that has a CDP, UVM, or CVM. Before you add a connection, determine its compression type.

If you plan for a port on a UVM to carry more than 16 channels with LDCELP or the G.729 version of CACELP, you must have a second, connected UVM and configure the resultant pair of UVMs for passthrough operation. If you attempt to add more than 16 LDCELP or G.729 channels, the system reports any excess connections as being failed connections after addcon execution finishes. Furthermore, if you execute dspcon, the status display for the excess connections shows "ConnRJ" (connection rejected). Refer to the cnflnpass description in this chapter and the UVM description in the Cisco IGX Reference for a description of passthrough.

After you have established passthrough for a pair of UVM card sets, the system does not allow duplication of channel numbers when you add connections. For example, if you add 7.1.1-16, the node does not allow you to add 8.1.1-8 if you have linked the UVMs by using cnflnpass. Instead, you would add 8.1.17-24.

A UVM with Model B or higher firmware supports CAS switching. Before you can add connections in a network with CAS switching, you must configure the UVM for this feature by using the cnfcassw command. Note that, for CAS switching, you use addcon to add the signaling channels at the near and far end in the format slot.port.24 on a T1 line and slot.port.16 on an E1 line. Also, the connection type for these signaling channels is "t." If you specify D-channel compression, the connection type is "td." See the description of cnfcassw in the "Setting Up Lines" chapter or, for a more detailed description, the manual titled Cisco VNS (Voice Network Switching) Installation and Operation.

When adding a range of channels, you do not have to specify the full channel set at the near-end. You may specify only the first channel in the set. For example, to connect channels 13.1-10 at alpha to channels 12.5-14 at beta, you could enter "addcon 13.1-10 beta 12.5." In this example, channel 13.1 is connected to channel 12.5, and channel 13.2 is connected to channel 12.6, and so on.

Connections are added with a default class of service (CoS). The value of CoS is the number of seconds that the node waits before it reroutes the connection after a failure. The CoS applies to various types of connections other than voice.

Table 3-10 and Table 3-11 describe what you enter for the type parameter for each rate and compression variable.


Table 3-10:
Types of CDP and CVM Operation
Rate VAD No VAD Comment

64 Kbps

v

p

None.

32 Kbps

c32

a32

None.

32 Kbps for FAX

c32d

a32d

Specifies 32 Kbps specially optimized for FAX; c32d incorporates Voice Activity Detection (VAD).

24 Kbps ADPCM

c24

a24

None.

16 Kbps no ZCS

c16z

a16z

For non-ZCS only.

16 Kbps

c16

a16

ZCS is permissible; c16 and a16 use non-standard compression algorithms.


Table 3-11:
Types of UVM Operation
Rate VAD No VAD Comment

64 Kbps

v

p, t

Pass-through does not accept t-type connections.

32 Kbps

c32

a32

None.

24 Kbps ADPCM

c24

a24

None.

16 Kbps no ZCS

l16V

l16

For non-ZCS only.

8 Kbps

g729r8v
g729ar8v

g7298
g729ar8

The UVM supports two forms of CACELP. Both versions can support VAD (or no VAD). The "a" indicates G.729A. The other version is G.729.


Table 3-12: Types of UVM Connections
Connection Description

p

A p-connection carries 64 Kbps PCM voice and supports A-law or micro-law encoding and conversion, gain adjustment, and signaling.

t

A t-connection carries 64 Kbps clear channel data traffic.

td

A td-connection carries compressed, 16 Kbps signaling between an IGX node and VNS unit.

v

A v-connection is the same as "p" (above) but with VAD.

a32
a24

Specifies ADPCM only. You can specify 32 Kbps or 24 Kbps.

c32
c24

Specifies both ADPCM and VAD. You can specify 32 Kbps or 24 Kbps.

l16

LDCELP compression of voice to 16 Kbps.

l16v

LDCELP compression of voice to 16 Kbps with VAD.

g729r8

CACELP voice compression at 8 Kbps according to G.729. This type also supports automatic FAX and modem upgrade.

g729r8v

CACELP voice compression at 8 Kbps with VAD according to G.729.

g729ar8

CACELP voice compression at 8 Kbps according to G.729A.

g729ar8v

CACELP voice compression at 8 Kbps with VAD according to G.729A.

The difference between a PCM (p) connection and a transparent (t) or transparent D-compression (td) connection is that the D4 frame signaling bits are identified and processed as signaling information with PCM connections. PCM connections permit gain adjustment to be applied to the connection. Transparent connections treat all bits, including signaling bits, as data bits and disables any gain adjustment conversion that you may have specified.

The number in the type field indicates the ADPCM rates in Kbps. The "z" suffix indicates that 00 code level is used. Type a16 or c16 uses only 01, 10, and 11 binary codes to avoid long strings of zeros. Type a16z and c16z connections use the 00 code and are automatically configured to avoid ZCS lines (*Z).

Syntax

addcon <local channel> <remote node> <remote channel> <type> [avoid]

Parameters

Parameter Description

local channel

Specifies the local channel or set of channels to add. Right-angle brackets indicate a range of channels. Channel specification on a UVM has one more parameter than the specification on a CDP or CVM:

For a CDP or CVM, the format for channel specification is slot.chan[-chan].

For a UVM, the format for channel specification is slot.line.chan[-chan].

Refer to the Cisco IGX Reference for a description of the UVM's lines. Note that, if you are using CAS switching with Model B firmware, line must be 1.

remote node

Specifies the name of the node at the other end of the connection. For a DAX connection (where channels on a node are connected to channels on the same node), use the local node name.

remote channel

Specifies the remote channel or set of channels to connect. Brackets indicate that a range of channels can be specified. Channel specification on a UVM has one more parameter than the specification on a CDP or CVM.

For a CDP or CVM, the format for channel specification is slot.chan[-chan].

For UVM, the format for channel specification is slot.line.chan[-chan].

Access devices such as the Cisco 3800 use the following format for the remote channel specification: <slot.port> <access_device_connection_ID>

where slot is the slot number of the FTC card, port is the port number, and access_device_connection_ID is in the range 1-252.

type

Specifies the voice connection type. Refer to Table 3-9 or Table 3-10 for voice connection types and compression.

For connections to an access device such as the Cisco 3810, type can be one of the following: 24 Kbps or 32 Kbps ADPCM, LDCELP, or CACELP.

avoid

Specifies the type of trunk for the connection to avoid.
Optional
Default: no avoidance.
The choices are:

  • s avoid satellite trunks.

  • t avoid terrestrial trunks.

  • z avoid trunks using zero code suppression techniques that modify any bit position to prevent long strings of zeros.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

delcon, dncon, dspcon, dspcons, cnfcos

Example

Add a v- type voice connection. This command connects channel 7.2 on node alpha to channel 8.2 on node beta. A prompt asks you to confirm the proposed connections.

Connection type is "v," class of service (CoS) is "2," compression is VAD, and ownership is local. For an explanation of CoS, see the cnfcos description. Because you are entering the addcon command at node alpha, the node alpha is the owner of the connection.

addcon 7.2 beta 8.2 v

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 09:37 PST Local Remote Remote Route Channel NodeName Channel State Type Compression Avoid CoS 7.2 beta 8.2 Ok v VAD L 2 Last Command: addcon 7.2 beta 8.2 v Next Command:

addcon (add a connection to an access device)

Add a connection. Adds a connection between an access device and another endpoint:

If one end of the connection is a CVM or CDP, you must add the connection at the CVM/CDP.

Three connection types are possible for an access device. After you have specified the local and remote connection identifiers, the interface prompts you for a connection type. The type depends on the endpoint cards:

Syntax

The syntax depends on the endpoint cards.

UVM to FTC:
addcon <slot.line.channel> <node> <slot.port>.<Access Device ID>.<Connection ID>
<Algorithm = a32 | c32 | g729r8 | g729r8v | g729ar8 | g729ar8v>

FTC to FTC:
addcon <slot.port>.<Access Device ID>.<Connection ID> <remote node> <slot.port>.<Access Device ID>.<Connection ID>

FTC to FRM/FRP:
addcon <slot.port>.<Access Device ID>.<Connection ID> <remote node> <slot.port>.<DLCI>

CVM/CDP to FTC:
addcon <slot.port> <remote node> <slot.port>.<Access Device ID>.<Connection ID>[compression algorithm]

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port

slot.line.channel

Specifies the slot and port number of the trunk to add. (FRM)

Specifies the slot, line, and channel number of the trunk to add. (UVM/CVM)

access device_ID

Specifies the access device ID number. Access devices on the same trunk are assigned in increasing order.
Range: 1-255

connection_ID

Specifies a connection identifier.
Range: 1-252

DLCI (only for FRP
or FRM endpoints)

Range: 16-1007

compression
algorithm

The optional compression algorithm can be one of these:

  • a16

  • a24

  • a32

  • g729r8

  • g729r8v

  • g729ar8

  • g729ar8v

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspads

Example

Add a local connection from 4.3.5.31 to 4.1.5.31. The access device ID is 5, the connection ID is 31.

addcon 4.3.5.31 sw25 4.1.5.31

sw25 TN SuperUser IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 00:26 GMT From Remote Remote 4.3.31 NodeName Channel State Type Compress Code CoS 4.3.31 sw25 4.1.31 Ok session 4.3.32 sw25 4.1.32 Ok fst 4.3.33 sw25 4.1.33 Ok fst This Command: addcon 4.3.5.31 sw25 4.1.5.31 session Add these connections (y/n)?

addcon (add a Frame Relay connection)

After you add a connection, the system automatically routes the connection. The node on which you execute addcon is the owner of the connection. The concept of ownership is important because you must specify automatic rerouting and preferred routing information at the node that owns the connection. See the cnfpref and cnfcos descriptions for information on automatic rerouting. Before it actually adds the connection, the system displays the parameters you have specified and prompts you to confirm them.


Note   For cards with Y-cable redundancy specified, you can add connections to only primary cards.

Each Frame Relay connection (and associated user device) has a local identification in the form of a unique DLCI. The total range for DLCIs is 1-1023. Typically, DLCIs 16-1007 are available for local and remote channels. According to ANSI standards, DLCIs 1-15 and 1008-1022 are reserved. DLCI 1023 is reserved for LMI signaling.

Only a UFM could come close to using all DLCIs. The maximum number of connections on a UFM is 1000. The maximum number of Frame Relay connections on an FRC or FRM is 252.

If a user device can automatically determine the network configuration by using the LMI, you do not need to specify the DLCIs in the network to the device. If a device cannot interrogate the network to determine the DLCIs in the network, you must specify the network DLCIs to the user device.

As the following sections describe, you can generally differentiate Frame Relay connections as normal, bundled, grouped, and frame forwarding. In particular, a Frame Relay connection can also terminate at a Frame Relay endpoint or an ATM endpoint if the endpoints have firmware to support this arrangement. A connection that terminates at Frame Relay and ATM endpoints uses service interworking (SIW).

Service Interworking

Frame Relay connections that terminate at ATM endpoints require service interworking (SIW) support. At the Frame Relay end, service interworking is one of the optional parameters. The line cards on which you can add service interworking connections are:

The Frame Relay endpoint has an identifier in the format slot.port.DLCI.

For SIW connections, the ATM endpoint identifier has the format slot.port.vpi.VCI.


Note   You cannot group or bundle SIW connections with non-SIW connections.

Adding connections to a virtual port for a BXM card does not require the virtual port number. The slot, port, and VPI map to the supporting virtual port. In addition, VC QDepth is configurable for all connection types.

Bundled Connections

A normal connection is a single PVC. A Frame Relay PVC can terminate at either a Frame Relay endpoint or an ATM endpoint.

Connection bundling creates a full mesh of connections between two groups of Frame Relay ports by executing addcon command only once. When you add a bundle between two groups of ports, you create a connection between each port of one group of ports and each port of the other group of ports. Each group of Frame Relay ports can include up to four ports. Consequently, the maximum number of connections in a bundle is 16 (resulting from a full mesh of connections between two groups of four ports each).

Note that a Port Concentrator Shelf does not support bundling.

Characteristics of connection bundling are:

When you create a connection bundle with addcon, you do not explicitly specify the required DLCI at each endpoint of each connection. Instead, the DLCIs are automatically assigned using global addressing with the Port IDs, which have been previously assigned to the ports. Consequently, you must first assign a Port ID (other than 0) to every port to which you plan to assign a connection bundle. Use cnfport to assign a Port ID or dspport to see an existing Port ID.

For example, the command

addcon 6.1x3 alpha 7.2x3 1

defines a single connection bundle between a local group of 3 ports (ports 1, 2, and 3 on card 6) and a remote group of 2 ports (ports 2 and 3 on card 7). The resulting connection bundle consists of these six connections:

local node slot 6.port 1 to node alpha slot 7.port 2

local node slot 6.port 1 to node alpha slot 7.port 3

local node slot 6.port 2 to node alpha slot 7.port 2

local node slot 6.port 2 to node alpha slot 7.port 3

local node slot 6.port 3 to node alpha slot 7.port 2

local node slot 6.port 3 to node alpha slot 7.port 3

Each connection in the bundle is assigned the parameters of the same Frame Relay class (class 1, in the example above). Notice that no DLCIs were specified for the six connections. The DLCIs are automatically assigned using the Port IDs of the ports.

As an example, assume that the following Port IDs had been previously assigned for the five ports.

port 6.1 Port ID = 22

port 6.1 Port ID = 534

port 6.3 Port ID = 487

port 7.2 Port ID = 92

port 7.3 Port ID = 796

As a result of the addcon command, the six connections that you create are automatically assigned DLCIs using global addressing as follows.

6.1.92 - 7.2.22

6.1.796 - 7.3.22

6.2.92 - 7.2.534

6.2.796 - 7.3.534

6.3.92 - 7.2.487

6.3.796 - 7.3.487

The dspcons display shows the entire bundle as a single item. Therefore, you cannot see the automatically assigned DLCIs on the dspcons screen. (The automatically assigned DLCIs in the preceding list appear in italics.) To see the DLCIs, use dspcon, as in the following example:

dspcon 6.1x3 alpha 7.2x3

The preceding shows one screen for the whole bundle then an additional screen for each connection in the bundle. The assigned DLCIs appear in these individual connection display screens.


Note   If you request help for addcon at the command line prompt, the Help line shows type as a parameter. However, when you are using addcon for a Frame Relay connection, the type shown in the help display is actually the Frame Relay class shown on the preceding syntax line As stated, you can optionally override any or all of the bandwidth parameters and ForeSight-enable in the Frame Relay class by typing the parameters that appear as frp_bw and avoid in the Help display.

Note also that you do not enter the coding parameter shown on the Help line.

Frame Forwarding Connections

A non-Frame Relay data connection (such as HDLC or SDLC) that is routed through Frame Relay cards can bypass a router or take advantage of DFM at higher data rates. The format slot.port.* identifies a frame forwarding connection. For example:

addcon 11.2.* alpha 12.3.* 2

The "*" indicates to the node that a DLCI is meaningless.

Maximum Connections Per Port with Signaling Protocols

For any Frame Relay card set that has a maximum frame length of 4510 bytes, the use and type of signaling protocol you may have (optionally) specified with the cnfport command results in a limit on the possible number of connections per physical or logical port. The maximum number of connections per port for each protocol is:

The addcon command does not prevent you from adding more than the maximum number connections on a port. If the number of connections is exceeded, the particular LMI does not work on the port, the full status messages that result are discarded, and LMI timeouts occur on the port. A port failure results and subsequently leads to A-bit failures in segments of the connection path.

Syntax

addcon <local_channel> <remote_node> <remote_channel> [con_type] <frame_relay_class | [individual parameters]> [route_avoid]

Parameters

Parameter Description

local channel

Specifies the local channel to connect in the format:

slot.port.DLCI | x port | .*

Range for FRP port: 1-24

Range for FRM port: 1-31

Range for UFM-C port: 1-250 (For connections on a UFM-C, line is not necessary because of the port-to-line mapping through addport).

Range for UFM-U (V.35 or X.21) port: 1-12

Range for UFM-U (HSSI) port: 1-4

Range for DLCI : 16-1007

remote node

Specifies the name of the remote node at the other end of the connection.

remote channel

Specifies the connection at the far end. For Frame Relay termination points, use:
slot.port.DLCI | x port | .*

If the far end is an ATM termination (as in interworking), use:
slot.port.vpi.vci

Range vpi: 0-255
Range vci : 1-4095
One exception to these ranges is an interface shelf (which uses Annex G signaling) in a tiered network:

  • For an MGX 8220 shelf,
    VPI range : 1-1015
    VCI range : 1-65535

  • For an MGX 8850 shelf, when adding a connection with a UNI interface to a BPX routing node,
    VPI range : 1-4095
    VCI range : 1-65535

    For an MGX 8850 shelf, when adding a connection with an NNI interface to a BPX routing node,
    VPI range : 1-4095
    VCI range : 1-65535

  • For an IGX/AF shelf,
    Range (VPI and VCI): 1-255

You do not need to specify the virtual port (if one has been activated for this channel) on a BXM card. The slot, port, and VPI will automatically map to the correct virtual port.

Access devices such as the Cisco 3800 use the following format for the remote channel specification: <slot.port> <access_device_connection_ID>

where slot is the slot number of the FTC card, port is the port number, and access_device_connection_ID is in the range 1-252.

Frame Relay class

Specifies a Frame Relay class. Entering a Frame Relay class is a shortcut for specifying bandwidth parameters. You must enter a Frame Relay class, but then you can modify any of the bandwidth parameters specified by the class. To do so, do not press Return after you type the class number but continue typing either a value for the parameter or a * to keep the current value. The system does not display the parameters, but the description of the frp_bw parameters in the "Optional Parameters" table that follows shows the order and ranges of the parameters you can specify.

con_type

Optionally specifies the type of ATM-to-Frame Relay service interworking. (If the connection is Frame Relay-to-Frame Relay, the network selects any necessary interworking.) The possible con_type entries are atft and atfx.

To specify service interworking in transparent mode, type atft.

To specify service interworking in translation mode, type atfx.

In translation mode, a standard set of encapsulation protocols are translated. If system software does not recognize an encapsulation protocol for an atfx connection, it generates one of two Frame Relay endpoint statistics: rcvFramesDscdUnknownProtocol or xmtFramesDscdUnknownProtocol.

frp_bw

Optionally specifies individual bandwidth parameters. The parameter name "frp_bw" is the label for the bandwidth parameters described here. The slash (/) between the repeated parameter name shows that you can specify a value for each direction. (FST is the exception.) Two parameters can be either the (default) Cisco versions or the Frame Relay Forum standard parameters. To switch between Cisco and Frame Relay Forum, use the cnfsysparm command. Note that all parameters you select with cnfsysparm are network-wide and not confined to the current connection addition. The switchable parameters are:

  • Cisco Parameters Standard Parameters

  • PIR (peak information rate) Be (excess burst)

  • VC_Q (VC queue depth) Bc (committed burst)

When you are using the Cisco parameter set, the names and order of specification are:

MIR/MIR, CIR/CIR, VC_Q/VC_Q, PIR/PIR, Cmax/Cmax ECNQ_thresh/ECNQ_thresh, QIR/QIR, FST, %utl/%utl

When you are using the parameters with the two Frame Relay Forum versions, the names and order of specification are:

MIR/MIR, CIR/CIR, Bc/Bc, Be/Be, Cmax/Cmax, ECNQ_thresh/ECNQ_thresh, QIR/QIR, FST, %utl/%utl

For the definition of each parameter and important information on setting CIR=0, refer to the appropriate installation and configuration guide.

avoid

Optionally specifies the type of trunk or route to avoid for the connection. The default is no avoidance. To specify an avoid value, type it after the Frame Relay class or—if you override the Frame Relay class—after the frp_bw values. Be sure to include the asterisk (*). The avoid parameters are:

*s = Avoid satellite trunks.

*t = Avoid terrestrial trunks.

*z = Avoid trunks using zero-code suppression techniques that modify any bit position to prevent long strings of zeros.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX, (BPX service internetworking)

Yes

Related Commands

delcon, dncon, dspcon, dspcons, upcon

Example (local addressing)

Execute these commands at node Alpha to configure the network shown in Figure 3-1.

addcon 6.1.100 beta 6.2.200 3

addcon 6.1 101 delta 4.1.102 2

addcon 4.1.100 beta 6.2.101 4

addcon 4.1.200 gamma 5.1.300 1


Figure 3-1: Local Addressing Example


Example

Add a connection between the user-device at alpha port 9.1 and the user-device at gamma port 8.1. The user-device at alpha refers to the connection using local DLCI 200. The user-device at gamma refers to this connection using local DLCI 300. The DLCIs have only local significance, so a DLCI must apply to only one connection.

addcon 9.1.200 gamma 8.1.300 1

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:12 PST Local Remote Remote Route Channel NodeName Channel State Type Compression Code Avoid CoS O 5.1 beta 25.1 Ok 256 7/8 0 L 9.1.100 gamma 8.1.200 Ok fr 0 L 9.1.200 gamma 8.1.300 Ok fr 0 L 9.2.400 beta 19.2.302 Ok fr 0 L 14.1 gamma 15.1 Ok v 0 L Last Command: addcon 9.1.200 gamma 8.1.300 1 Next Command:
Example

Add another connection at local port 9.1. A DLCI of 100 is used at the local node. A DLCI of 300 can be used at both beta gamma because the DLCIs have only local significance.

addcon 9.1.100 beta 6.2.300 2

Example (global addressing)

The network to configure in this example is shown in Figure 3-2.

addcon 6.1.80 beta 9.2.79 2
addcon 6.1.81 gamma 4.1.79 1
addcon 4.1.80 beta 6.2.81 5


Figure 3-2: Global Addressing Example


Example (bundle connections)

Add a bundle of connections between Frame Relay ports 8.1-3 on node gamma and 19.2-4 on node alpha. For this bundle, the network routes traffic between gamma port 8.2 and alpha port 19.2.

addcon 8.1x3 alpha 19.2x4 1

pubsigx3 VT SuperUser IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 19:41 GMT Local Remote Remote Channel NodeName Channel State Type Compress Code CoS 8.1x3 alpha 19.2x4 Ok fr This Command: addcon 8.1x3 alpha 19.2x4 1 Add these connections (y/n)?
Example (frame forwarding)

Add a frame forwarding connection between the local node's port 8.2 and 19.2 on node alpha.

addcon 8.2.* alpha 19.2.* 1

Locals Remote Remote Route Channel NodeName Channel State Type Compression Code Avoid CoS O 6.1 beta 25.2 Ok 256 7/8 0 R 8.1.200 alpha 9.1.100 Ok fr 0 R 8.2.300 beta 19.1.101 Ok fr 0 R 15.1 alpha 14.1 Ok v 0 R This Command: addcon 8.2.* alpha 19.2.* 1 Add these connections (y/n)?
Example (modifying bandwidth)

Parameters specified by Frame Relay class 7 for this connection are modified by substituting 30 for Cmax in both directions, enabling ForeSight, and reducing percent utilization from 100 percent to 80 percent.

addcon 8.3.101 beta 19.3.201 7 * * * * 30/30 * * Y 80/80

gamma TRM YourID:1 IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 12:10 CST Local Remote Remote Route Channel NodeName Channel State Type Compression Code Avoid CoS O 6.1 beta 25.2 Ok 256 7/8 0 R 8.1.200 alpha 9.1.100 Ok fr 0 R 8.2.300 beta 19.1.101 Ok fr 0 R 15.1 alpha 14.1 Ok v 0 R Last Command: dspcons Next Command: addcon 8.3.101 beta 19.3.201 7 * * * * 30/30 * * Y 80/80

addcon (add an ATM connection)

Establishes an ATM connection between the current node and one or more nodes in the network. You can add ATM connections at a port (UNI or NNI) on either an ASI or a BXM in a BPX node, or a UXM in an IGX node. When used with the syntax in this section, addcon adds either a standard ATM connection or an ATM-Frame Relay interworking connection.

You can also use addcon to add a virtual path connection or to add a VP tunnelling DAX connection between a line port on an IGX UXM as the VP side, and the line port at the ATM cloud entry point as the VCC side.

Syntax

addcon <local_channel> <remote_node> <remote_channel> [con_type] <frame_relay_class | [individual parameters]> [route_avoid]

Parameters

Parameter with Default Settings UXM and BXM T1/E1, T3/E3, OC-3, and OC-12 RANGE ASI Range

PCR(0+1)[50/50]

50-max. T1/E1 cells/sec
50-max. T3/E3 cells/sec
50-max. OC-3 cells/sec
50-max. OC-12 cells/sec

T3: MCR-96000
E3: MCR-80000
OC-3 (STM1): 0-353200
Limited to MCR-5333 cells/sec for ATFR connections.

%Util [100/100]

for UBR [1/1]

0-100%

1-100%

MCR [50/50]

cells/sec
6-max. of T3/E3/OC-3/OC-12

T3: 0-96000 cells/sec
E3: 0-80000 cells/sec

AAL5 Frame-Based Traffic Control:

for rt/nrt-VBR [disable]
for ABR/UBR [enable]
for Path connection [disable]

enable/disable

With the BXM card, FBTC means packet discard on both policing and queueing.

enable/disable

With the ASI card, FBTC means packet discard on both policing and queueing.

CDVT(0+1):

for CBR [10000/10000],
others [250000/250000]

0-5,000,000 microsecs.

T3/E3 1-250,000 usecs.

OC-3/STM1: 0-10000 usecs.

ForeSight [disable]

0 = disable
1 = enable

0 = disable
1 = enable

VSVD [disable]

enable/disable

enable/disable

Flow Control External Segment [disable]

enable/disable

enable/disable

Default Extended Parameters [enable]

enable/disable

enable/disable

CLP Setting [enable]

enable/disable

enable/disable

SCR [50/50]

c50-max. T1/E1 cells/sec
50-max. T3/E3 cells/sec
50-max. OC-3 cells/sec
50-max. OC-12 cells/sec

T3: MCR-96000:T3
E3: MCR-80000: E3
OC-3/STM1: 0-353200
Limited to MCR-5333 cells/sec for ATFR connections.

MBS [1000/1000]

1--5,000,000 cells

T3/E3: 1-24000 cells
OC-3 (STM1): 10-1000 cells

Policing [3]

For CBR: [4]

1 = VBR.1
2 = VBR.2
3 = VBR.3
4 = PCR policing only
5 = off

1 = VBR.1
2 = VBR.2
3 = VBR.3
4 = PCR policing only
5 = off

ICR:

max [MCR, PCR/10]

MCR - PCR cells/sec

MCR - PCR cells/sec

ADTF [1000]

62-8000 msecs.

1000-255000 msecs.

Trm [100]

ABRSTD: 1-100 msecs.
ABRFST: 3-255 msecs.

20-250 msecs.

VC QDepth [16000/16000]

For ATFR/ATFST [1366/1366]

0-61440 cells

Applies to T3/E3 only
ABR: 1-64000 cells
ATFR: 1-1366 cells

CLP Hi [80/80]

1-100%

1-100%

CLP Lo/EPD [35/35]

1-100%

1-100%

EFCI [30/30]

For ATFR/ATFST [100/100]

1-100%

1-100%

RIF:

For ForeSight: =
max [PCR/128, 10]

For ABRSTD [128]

If ForeSight, then in absolute (0-PCR)

If ABR, then 2n
(1-32768)

If ForeSight, then in absolute (0-PCR)

If ABR, then 2n
(1-32768)

RDF:
For ForeSight [93]

For ABRSTD [16]

If ForeSight, then %
(0%-100%)

If ABR, then 2n
(1-32768)

IF ForeSight, then %
(0%-100%)

If ABR, then 2n
(1-32768)

Nrm[32]-BXM only

2-256 cells

not applicable

FRTT[0]-BXM only

0-16700 msec

not applicable

TBE[1,048,320]-BXM only

0-1,048,320 cells

(different maximum range from TM spec. but limited by firmware for CRM (4095 only) where CRM=TBE/Nrm

not applicable

IBS [0/0]

0-24000 cells

T3/E3 ABR: 0-24000 cells ATFR: 1-107 cells
OC-3: 0-999 cells

Trunk Cell Routing Restriction (y/n) [y]

yes or no

For rt-VBR connections, this prompt will not display. (This is because rt-VBR connections should only be routed over ATM trunks such as BXM, UXM, and ASI.) Trunk Cell Routing Restriction will display for all other connections.

yes or no

For rt-VBR connections, this prompt will not display. (This is because rt-VBR connections should only be routed over ATM trunks such as BXM, UXM, and ASI.) Trunk Cell Routing Restriction will display for all other connections.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

delcon, dspcons

Release History

Note that in Release 9.2, on BXM and UXM cards, you can configure port and trunk (routing and feeder trunk) interfaces on the same card slot. For example, you can have port 1 on a BXM slot upped as a trunk interface while having port 2 on the same card slot upped as a line interface. For more information on the port and trunks feature, refer to Chapter 5, "Setting Up Trunks."

In Release 9.2.10, you can add VP tunnelling DAX connections. This type of connection has a VP connection as one end of the connection, and the other end a VC connection. This VP tunnelling DAX connection can be between different port interfaces on the same UXM card, or on different UXM cards. See Example 2 on page 3-43.

In Release 9.2.20, you can add both rt-VBR and nrt-VBR connections. The parameter prompts are the same for both rt-VBR and nrt-VBR, except for Trunk Cell Routing Restrict, which displays for all ATM connections except real-time VBR connections. (This is because rt-VBR connections should be routed only over ATM trunks such as BXM, UXM, and ASI trunks.)


Note   In Release 9.2.20, the rt-VBR class of service is supported on the IGX UXM and BPX BXM, ASI, and BNI cards only. The rt-VBR class of service is not supported on FastPacket trunks, nor is it supported on MGX 8850 or MGX 8220 (AXIS) interface shelves.

Note that for segment connections, all 2- and 3-segment connections must be the same, that is, all rt-VBR or all nrt-VBR. The CLI will not block you from adding any combination of rt-VBR or nrt-VBR segment connections.

The CLI will block you from adding rt-VBR connections in a network of nodes running releases previous to Release 9.2. All nodes in the network must be first upgraded to Release 9.2.10. In a mixed network of Release 9.1 and 9.2.20, or Release 9.2.10 and 9.2.20, the rt-VBR class of service is not supported—in this scenario, all VBR connections will function as nrt-VBR connections. To support rt-VBR, all nodes in the network must be running switch software 9.2.20. See the Cisco WAN Switching 9.2 Release Notes for more information.

In Release 9.2.0, the switch software supports a minimum Peak Cell Rate (PCR) of 6 cps without policing enabled on both the BXM and UXM. In Release 9.3.0, the switch software supports a minimum PCR of 6 cps with policing enabled (with certain card limitations). Use the dspcd command to determine if this feature is supported on a given slot. Use the addcon command to set the minimum PCR values. If these values are less than the minimum values supported on a given card, the command line interface will not allow you to set them until you have disabled policing. (A prompt will let you know about this limitation, and allow you to disable policing.)

Note the following when adding a card:

    1. If this feature is enabled on a card, but is replaced by a card with older firmware (not supporting this feature) the dspcd screen parameter "card status" will display "Mismatch," and indicate the reason for the mismatch.

    2. If two cards are loaded with new firmware supporting this feature and configured for Y-redundancy, and one is replaced with a card with old firmware, the result is a "mismatch."

For ABRSTD, a policing prompt is now added for VSVD=OFF connections.

See Table 3-14 for a list of cards that are supported by this feature and their performance specifications.

Connection Types

The addcon command for ATM adds any one of these types of ATM connections:

Detailed connection sequences can be found in the BPX Installation and Configuration Guide. This description includes this information:

For detailed descriptions of the connection types, traffic classes, policing, and ATM-related topics, refer to the Cisco BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration guide or the ATM Forum specifications.

The node on which addcon executes is the "owner" of the connection. Connection ownership is important because automatic rerouting and preferred routing information is entered on the node that owns the connection. See the cnfpref and cnfcos descriptions for details on automatic rerouting.

The parameter prompts depend on the connection type. The figures on the following pages are flow diagrams showing the sequence of possible parameter prompts according to the connection type. The flow diagrams begin at the point after you have entered the remote node name and VPI and VCI (which are common parameters). The subsequent tables define the parameters and list the defaults and ranges for each parameter.

A form of notation appears for some parameters that may need explanation. The notation is either (0), (1), or (0+1). This refers to the state of the Cell Loss Priority (CLP) bit. The usage of the CLP bit is in the traffic policing schemes: (0+1) means cells with CLP=0 or 1; (0) means cells with CLP=0; (1) means cells with CLP=1. The CLP bit is used in different contexts. For example, CDVT (0+1) refers to Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) for cells with CLP=0 or 1.

Before a connection is added, the proposed connection appears on the screen prompting you to confirm. After addcon executes, the system software automatically routes the connection.

Instead of entering a class of service, the user can instead enter a class number to select a preconfigured template, for example, class 4 for ntr-VBR, and class 3 for rt-VBR. The class of service templates can be modified as required using the cnfcls/cnfatmcls command and displayed using the dspcls/dspatmcls commands.


Note   An IGX switch running NPM-64/4M BRAM, now has increased VC Bandwidth Parameter entries. This provides support for more connections with different bandwidths. When adding or modifying a connection, the input bandwidth parameters are checked against the existing VC Bandwidth Parameters array. If there is a match against an existing parameter in the array, then that particular parameter entry will be used for the connection issued. If there is no match, a new VC Bandwidth Parameter is assigned to the connection. The maximum number of VC Bandwidth Parameters for the NPM-64/4M BRAM was 700. With Release 9.3.0 switch software and higher, the maximum number is 1999.


Note   For a new node running 9.2.20 or later, the rt-VBR connection class number is 3. An upgraded node will retain existing connection classes. Therefore, it won't have the rt-VBR connection class 3. However, you can configure the connection classes to whatever service and parameters you want using the cnfcls/cnfatmcls command.

You can add connections to a virtual port on a BXM card. When adding a connection to a virtual port, the virtual port number is not required. The slot, port, and VPI will map to the supporting virtual port. In addition, VC QDepth is configurable for all connection types.

Network and Service Interworking

Frame Relay-to-ATM Interworking enables Frame Relay traffic to be connected across high-speed ATM trunks using ATM standard Network and Service Interworking.

Two types of Frame Relay-to-ATM interworking are supported, Network Interworking and Service Interworking. The FRSM card on the MGX 8220 supports both Network and Service Interworking.


Figure 3-3: Prompt Sequence for a CBR Connection



Table 3-13:
addcon—Parameter Defaults and Ranges
Parameter with Default Settings UXM and BXM T1/E1, T3/E3, OC-3, and OC-12 RANGE ASI Range

PCR(0+1)[50/50]

50-max. T1/E1 cells/sec

50-max. T3/E3 cells/sec

50-max. OC-3 cells/sec

50-max. OC-12 cells/sec

T3: MCR-96000

E3: MCR-80000

OC-3 (STM1): 0-353200

Limited to MCR-5333 cells/sec for ATFR connections.

%Util [100/100]

for UBR [1/1]

0-100%

1-100%

MCR [50/50]

cells/sec

6-max. of T3/E3/OC-3/OC-12

T3: 0-96000 cells/sec

E3: 0-80000 cells/sec

AAL5 Frame-Based Traffic Control:

for rt/nrt-VBR [disable]

for ABR/UBR [enable]

for Path connection [disable]

enable/disable

With the BXM card, FBTC means packet discard on both policing and queueing.

enable/disable

With the ASI card, FBTC means packet discard on both policing and queueing.

CDVT(0+1):

for CBR [10000/10000],

others [250000/250000]

0-5,000,000 microsecs.

T3/E3 1-250,000 usecs.

OC-3/STM1: 0-10000 usecs.

ForeSight [disable]

0 = disable
1 = enable

0 = disable
1 = enable

VSVD [disable]

enable/disable

enable/disable

Flow Control External Segment [disable]

enable/disable

enable/disable

Default Extended Parameters [enable]

enable/disable

enable/disable

CLP Setting [enable]

enable/disable

enable/disable

SCR [50/50]

c50-max. T1/E1 cells/sec
50-max. T3/E3 cells/sec
50-max. OC-3 cells/sec
50-max. OC-12 cells/sec

T3: MCR-96000:T3
E3: MCR-80000: E3
OC-3/STM1: 0-353200
Limited to MCR-5333 cells/sec for ATFR connections.

MBS [1000/1000]

1--5,000,000 cells

T3/E3: 1-24000 cells

OC-3 (STM1): 10-1000 cells

Policing [3]

For CBR: [4]

1 = VBR.1
2 = VBR.2
3 = VBR.3
4 = PCR policing only
5 = off

1 = VBR.1
2 = VBR.2
3 = VBR.3
4 = PCR policing only
5 = off

ICR:

max [MCR, PCR/10]

MCR - PCR cells/sec

MCR - PCR cells/sec

ADTF [1000]

62-8000 msecs.

1000-255000 msecs.

Trm [100]

ABRSTD: 1-100 msecs.
ABRFST: 3-255 msecs.

20-250 msecs.

VC QDepth [16000/16000]

For ATFR/ATFST [1366/1366]

0-61440 cells

Applies to T3/E3 only
ABR: 1-64000 cells
ATFR: 1-1366 cells

CLP Hi [80/80]

1-100%

1-100%

CLP Lo/EPD [35/35]

1-100%

1-100%

EFCI [30/30]

For ATFR/ATFST [100/100]

1-100%

1-100%

RIF:

For ForeSight: =
max [PCR/128, 10]

For ABRSTD [128]

If ForeSight, then in absolute (0-PCR)

If ABR, then 2n
(1-32768)

If ForeSight, then in absolute (0-PCR)

If ABR, then 2n
(1-32768)

RDF:
For ForeSight [93]

For ABRSTD [16]

IF ForeSight, then %
(0%-100%)

If ABR, then 2n
(1-32768)

If ForeSight, then %
(0%-100%)

If ABR, then 2n
(1-32768)

Nrm[32]-BXM only

2-256 cells

not applicable

FRTT[0]-BXM only

0-16700 msec

not applicable

TBE[1,048,320]-BXM only

0-1,048,320 cells

different maximum range from TM spec. but limited by firmware for CRM (4095 only) where CRM=TBE/Nrm

not applicable

IBS [0/0]

0-24000 cells

T3/E3 ABR: 0-24000 cells ATFR: 1-107 cells
OC-3: 0-999 cells

Trunk Cell Routing Restriction (y/n) [y]

yes or no

For rt-VBR connections, this prompt will not display. (This is because rt-VBR connections should only be routed over ATM trunks such as BXM, UXM, and ASI.) Trunk Cell Routing Restriction will display for all other connections.

yes or no

For rt-VBR connections, this prompt will not display. (This is because rt-VBR connections should only be routed over ATM trunks such as BXM, UXM, and ASI.) Trunk Cell Routing Restriction will display for all other connections.


Table 3-14: Minimum PCR Values with Policing Enabled
Card Name Card Types Minimum PCR Values with Policing

IGX-UXM

T1/E1

6 cps

IGX-UXM

IMA

6 cps

IGX-IUX

T3/E3

12 cps

IGX-UXM

OC-3/STM-1

50 cps

BPX-BXM

T3/E3

12 cps

BPX-BXM

OC-3/STM-1

50 cps

BPX-BXM

OC-12/STM-4

50 cps

Note   The policing accuracy is always within one percent. The maximum PCR policing values are the same as the line rate.


Table 3-15: Traffic Policing Definitions
Connection Type ATM Forum TM spec. 4.0 conformance definition PCR Flow (1st leaky bucket) CLP tagging (for PCR flow) SCR Flow (2nd leaky bucket) CLP tagging (for SCR flow)

CBR

CBR.1

when policing set to 4 (PCR policing only)

CLP(0+1)

no

off

n/a

CBR

when policing set to 5 (off)

off

n/a

off

n/a

UBR

UBR.1

when CLP setting = no

CLP(0+1)

no

off

n/a

UBR

UBR.2

when CLP setting = yes

CLP(0+1)

no

CLP(0)

yes

rt/nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR, ATFST

VBR.1

when policing set to 1

CLP(0+1)

no

CLP(0+1)

no

rt/nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR, ATFST

VBR.2

when policing set to 2

CLP(0+1)

no

CLP(0)

no

rt/nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR, ATFST

VBR.3

when policing set to 3

CLP(0+1)

no

CLP(0)

yes

rt/nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR, ATFST

when policing set to 4

CLP(0+1)

no

off

n/a

rt/nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR, ATFST

when policing set to 5 (off)

off

n/a

off

n/a


Note 1: - For UBR.2, SCR = 0
Note 2:
CLP = Cell Lost Priority
CLP(0) means cells that have CLP = 0
CLP(1) means cells that have CLP = 1
CLP(0+1) means both types of cells: CLP = 0 & CLP = 1
CLP(0) has higher priority than CLP(1)
CLP tagging means to change CLP = 0 to CLP = 1, where CLP= 1 cells have lower priority


Table 3-16:
VBR Policing Definitions
Connection Type ATM Forum TM spec. 4.0 conformance definition PCR Flow (1st leaky bucket) CLP tagging (for PCR flow) SCR Flow (2nd leaky bucket) CLP tagging (for SCR flow)

rt/nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR, ATFST, ATFT, ATFTST, ATFX, ATFXFST

VBR.1

when policing set to 1

CLP(0+1)

no

CLP(0+1)

no

rt/nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR, ATFST, ATFT, ATFTST, ATFX, ATFXFST

VBR.2

when policing set to 2

CLP(0+1)

no

CLP(0)

no

rt/nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR, ATFST, ATFT, ATFTST, ATFX, ATFXFST

VBR.3

when policing set to 3

CLP(0+1)

no

CLP(0)

yes

rt/nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR, ATFST, ATFT, ATFTST, ATFX, ATFXFST

when policing set to 4

CLP(0+1)

no

off

n/a

rt/nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR, ATFS, ATFT, ATFTST, ATFX, ATFXFST

when policing set to 5 for off

off

n/a

off

n/a

Example

Add a standard ABR connection with VSVD and no Default Extended Parameters (which then require user input for SCR, MBS, and so on).

addcon 9.1.100.100 pubsbpx2 9.1.102.102

pubsbpx1 TN SuperUser BPX 15 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 05:22 GMT From Remote Remote Route 9.1.100.100 NodeName Channel State Type Avoid CoS O 9.1.100.100 pubsbpx2 9.1.102.102 Ok abrstd 9.1.102.102 pubsbpx2 9.1.100.100 Ok abrstd This Command: addcon 9.1.100.100 pubsbpx2 9.1.102.102 abr * * * * e e * d * * 1 * * * * * * * * * Add these connections (y/n)?
Example

Add a virtual path connection (VPC) to virtual circuit connection (VCC) between ports 1 and 2. (This is called a VP tunnelling connection.)

addcon 5.2.10.* pubsigx1p 5.1.1.100 CBR ...

pubsigx1 TN SuperUser IGX 8400 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 05:22 GMT From Remote Remote Route NodeName Channel State Type Avoid CoS O 5.2.10.* pubsigx2 5.1.1.100 Ok abrstvp 5.1.1.100 pubsigx2 5.2.10.* s Ok abrstvp This Command: addcon 5.2.10.* pubsigx1p 5.1.1.100 CBR ... Add these connections (y/n)?

addctrlr (add a VSI controller to an IGX node)

Add VSI controller to a UXM line interface. Use the addctrlr command to add an VSI controller to UXM line interface on an IGX node. You can connect a VSI controller to an IGX node by physically connecting a cable from the controller to the UXM line interface.

You cannot connect a VSI controller to these interfaces:

The maximum number of controllers that can be added to an IGX is three, although the valid controller ID range is 1 to 16.

Syntax

addctrlr < slot.port> <controller id> <partition id> <control_vpi> <start_vci>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.port>

Slot and port numbers corresponding to the line or port to which a controller is attached.

<controller id>

Controller ID corresponding to the MPLS controller. Range: 1-16

<partition id>

Partition ID of the VSI partition controlled by the MPLS controller.
Range: 1-3

<control_vpi>

VPI of the VSI control channels used for communication between the VSI master residing on the MPLS controller and VSI slaves residing on the UXM cards. For a 16-slot IGX there are a total of 14 such channels. For a 32-slot IGX there are a total of 30 such channels.

For a line interface with NNI header type:
Range: 0-4095

For a line interface with UNI header type
Range: 0-255

Default value: 0

<start_vci>

Starting VCI of the VSI control channels. This VCI value is assigned to the first VSI control channel (between the VSI master and the VSI slave residing on the UXM card in slot 3).

The last VSI control channel corresponding to communication with the VSI slave on slot 16 or 32 (depending on the number of slots in the particular IGX model) will use the VCI value of (<start_vci> + number of slots on the IGX - 2).

Range for 16-slot IGX: 40-65521
Range for 32-slot IGX: 40-65505

Default value: 40

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Related Commands

delctrlr, dspctrlrs

Example

Add controller to port 1 on slot 12, partition ID of 2 and controller ID of 3.

addctrlr 12.1 3 2 0 40

arnold TN Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.10 Aug. 16 2000 17:04 PST VSI Controller Information CtrlrId PartId ControlVC Intfc Type CtrlrIP VPI VCIRange 3 2 0 40-70 12.1 MPLS 0.0.0.0 Last Command: addctrlr 12.1 3 2 0 40 Controller added successfully! Next Command:

addctrlr (add VSI capabilities to an AAL5 feeder interface (BPX))

Adds VSI capabilities to a trunk interface to which a feeder of type AAL5 is attached. Use the addctrlr command to connect a Private Network-to-Network Interface (PNNI) controller. PNNI controller software resides on the Service Expansion Shelf (SES) hardware.

To add a PNNI controller to a BPX node:


Step 1   Run the command addshelf with shelf type set to X to add an AAL5 feeder. This ensures that Annex G protocol runs between the BPX and the SES.

Step 2   Run the addctrlr command to set up the VSI control channels from the PNNI SES controller to the VSI slave processes running on the BXM cards to ensure full VSI functionality for the PNNI controller. Execute the addctrlr command on an existing AAL5 interface shelf.


Note that you can add a PNNI controller to a trunk interface only if the interface already has an active VSI partition corresponding to the partition that is controlled by the PNNI controller. For example, if a PNNI controller controlling partition 1 were added to a trunk interface 12.1. Then it would be necessary that a VSI partition corresponding to partition 1 be active on the interface 12.1. Otherwise the addctrlr command would fail.

When adding VSI controller capabilities to an AAL5 interface shelf (or feeder), the switch software prompts you for the specifics of the VSI controller:

The PNNI controller controls VSI partitions on those BXM cards that support VSI capability. Hence a separate VSI control channel must be set up from the PNNI control to each BXM card that supports VSI.

Example: You specify a VPI value of 0 and start_VCI value of 40 for the VSI control channels. Then the control channel corresponding to any BXM card on slot 1 would use VPI, start_VCI values <0, 40>. The VSI control channels to other slots would use the VPI, start_VCI values of <0, 40+slot-1>, where "slot" corresponds to the slot number of the BXM card.


Caution   For feeder trunk interfaces, the addctrlr command will fail if the Automatic Routing Management connections terminating on the feeder interface use the same VPI start_VCI as those specified for the VSI control channels. You must delete the connections before proceeding if connections with VPI and start_VCI in the range exist in the range you specified.

The addition of a controller to a node will fail if there are not enough channels available to set up the control VCs in one or more of the BXM slaves.

Syntax

addctrlr < slot.port> <controller id> <partition id> <control_vpi> <start_vci>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.port>

Slot and port numbers corresponding to the feeder trunk.

<controller id>

Controller ID corresponding to the PNNI controller, values 1-32.

<partition id>

Partition ID of the VSI partition controlled by the PNNI controller.

<control_vpi>

Starting VPI of the VSI control channels used for communication between the VSI master residing on the SES and VSI slaves residing on the BXM cards. There can be a total of 12 such channels, one for each slave residing on each BXM card.

For a trunk interface with NNI header type:
Range: 0-4095

For a trunk interface with UNI header type:
Range: 0-255

Default: 0

Note   For a PNNI controller, do not modify control_vpi and start_vci.

<start_vci>

Starting VCI of the VSI control channels. This VCI value is assigned to the first VSI control channel (between the VSI master and the VSI slave residing on the BXM card in slot 1). The last VSI control channel corresponding to communication with the VSI slave on slot 14 will use the VCI value of (<start_vci>+14-1).

Range: 33-65521

Default: 40

Note   For a PNNI controller, do not modify control_vpi and start_vci.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Related Commands

addshelf, delctrlr, dspctrlrs

Example

Add controller to port 4 on slot 10, partition ID of 2, and controller ID of 3.

addctrlr 10.4 3 2 0 40

night TN StrataCom BPX 8600 9.3.10 Aug. 1 2000 14:31 GMT BPX 8620 VSI controller information Ctrl Id Part Id Control_VC Trunk Ctrlr Type Intfc VPI VCIRange 1 1 0 40-54 10.3 VSI VSI 2 2 0 40-54 11.1 VSI VSI Warning partition already in use do you want to add redundant controller Last Command: addctrlr 10.4 3 2 0 40 Next Command:
Example

Adds a controller, such a PNNI controller, to a BPX interface shelf.

addctrlr 10.3 3 1 0 40

night TN StrataCom BPX 8600 9.3.10 Aug. 1 2000 14:31 GMT BPX 8620 VSI controller information Ctrl Id Part Id Control_VC Trunk Ctrlr Type Intfc VPI VCIRange 1 1 0 40-54 10.3 VSI VSI 2 2 0 40-54 11.1 VSI VSI Warning partition already in use do you want to add redundant controller Last Command: addctrlr 10.3 3 1 0 40 Next Command:

addextlp (add external loop)

Places an external device in loopback mode. The addextlp command applies to existing connections on an SDP, HDM, LDP, or LDM. A near loopback causes the NEAR EIA template to be applied. A far loopback causes the FAR EIA template to be applied to the data port. The loopback remains in place until removed by the dellp command.

The dspcons command shows which connections are in loopback mode. Specifying an "n" after the channel indicates a near loopback, and an "f" indicates a far loopback. Because addextlp takes the specified connections out of service, use it only when a service disruption is tolerable.

Syntax

addextlp <channel> < n | f >

Parameters

Parameter Description

channel

Specifies the channel to loopback in the format slot.port.

n | f

Specifies whether the loopback is near or far. An "n" specifies near; an "f" specifies far. For a non-DDS port, the near or far modem is placed in loopback, if it supports this function. For a DDS port, the external DDS device is placed in CSU loopback. Local channels must be configured as OCU in order to place them in external loopback.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dellp, dspcons

Example

Place the device connected to channel 5.1 in near loopback.

addextlp 5.1 n

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 12:53 PST Local Remote Remote Route Channel NodeName Channel State Type Compression Code Avoid CoS O N5.1 beta 25.1 Ok 256 7/8 0 L 9.1.100 gamma 8.1.200 Ok fr 0 L 9.2.400 beta 19.2.302 Ok fr 0 L 14.1 gamma 15.1 Ok v 0 L Last Command: addextlp 5.1 n Next Command:

addjob (add a job)

Creates a job or command script. When you create a new job by using addjob, your privilege level becomes the privilege level of the job itself. When adding commands to the job, you cannot add a command that requires a privilege higher than your privilege level. Furthermore, you must have a privilege level at least as high as the job to run the job (with runjob, for example).

The system does not check the validity of the command with respect to the current state of the network or for relationships to other commands in the job. To ensure that it works as expected, try running the job with runjob.

Syntax

addjob [description] [execution time, execution interval] <commands>

Parameters

Parameter Description

command

Specifies the syntax for a command to include in the job. The number of commands that can be included in a job is limited only by available memory.

Not all commands can be included in a job. A job cannot contain commands that are above your privilege level. For example, if you have privilege level 3, your job cannot include the addtrk command because this command requires privilege level 1.

failure reaction

Specifies the desired reaction to the failure of a command in the job. Each command in the job must have a failure reaction. The failure reaction is specified in the following format <c | a | rc | ra> <number of repetitions>. In this format:

c specifies that the job continues running.

a specifies that the job must abort.

rc specifies that the command should retry for the specified number of times and continue running the job even if the command fails during the retries.

ra specifies that the command should retry for the specified number of times and abort the job if the command always fails during the retries.

job description

A user-specified description of the job. This description can be up to 16 characters, including spaces.

execution time

Specifies the date and time to run the job. Without an execution time, the job can begin running only by the runjob command.

Execution time is specified in the following format. (The seconds parameter is optional.)

year (four digits)
month (two digits)
day
hour (0-23)
minute
[seconds]

execution interval

Specifies an interval between job repetitions. The three possible execution intervals are:

d (days)
h (hours)
m (minutes)

The interval range is 1 minute to 45 days. If you do not specify an execution interval, the job runs once at execution time. If you specify an execution interval (d, h, or m), you must also specify the number of units in the interval.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

deljob, dspjob, dspjobs, editjob, prtjob, runjob, stopjob

Example

The system response is a series of prompts requesting details of the job. The system requests a job description (or name), an execution time for the job, a unit for the interval at which the job is to run (hours, for example), the number of units in the interval, the commands to execute, and what to do with the result.

addjob

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:15 PST Job 1 test Last Execution Results: None Status: Idle Next Execution Time: 08/17/97 20:20:30 Interval: 1 days 1: prtlog - Failure Reaction: Repeat 2 Times and Abort Exec. Results: None Last Command: addjob Next Command:

In this example, a new job is being created. The job number is "1." The job description (or name) is "test." The job is scheduled to run on August 17, at 2:20:30 PM and every day thereafter at the same time. The command in the job is prtlog. If this command fails when the job runs, it tries twice again and aborts if unsuccessful.

The "Enter Cmd" prompt at the bottom of the screen indicates you can enter the next command for the job. To exit addjob, press Return without entering a command.

addjobtrig (add job trigger)

Configures a job to run if a failure or repair occurs on a trunk (narrowband or broadband), a line (voice, data, Frame Relay, ATM, narrowband, broadband), or a T3 (DS3). You can also use addjobtrig to allocate or release bandwidth from other connections. This bandwidth decision depends on whether the EIA lead status is "up" or "down." For example, a job can be triggered to run if the RTS lead of an HDM/LDM port changes state. If the FRM you are using is an FRM-T1 or E1, it qualifies as a line and can be used as a job trigger.

A line failure is any alarm condition that takes the trunk or line out of service. Such a condition is always a major alarm. However, not all major alarms cause the trunk or line to be considered failed. Those that are considered failed are the ones that appear on the dsptrks or dsplns screens with a color associated with it, such as "Major—Local All Ones" or "Major—Remove Packet Out of Frame (Yel)". Specifically excluded are all the statistical alarms, some of which may be major.

A line repair is the opposite of a line failure. A repair of a line occurs when the alarms on the line are removed.

The lead type on HDM/LDM is based on the configuration from cnfleadmon. The display shows: "Front Card Supports Lead State Trap".

Syntax

addjobtrig <job_number> <line_type> <line_specifier> <fail/repair>

Parameters

Parameter Description

job number

Specifies the number of the job to trigger.

line type

Specifies the type of line. A "p" indicates any type of trunk (TRK). A "c" indicates any type of circuit line. (A "d" indicates a DS3 line. Do not specify the "d" option; this represents an obsolete card—the MT3.)

line specifier

Specifies the slot number for trunks and lines. Use the standard nomenclature to designate trunks and lines. For example, depending on the card type (single-line or multi-line), specify either <slot.port>, or just <slot>.

fail/repair

Specifies whether the trigger occurs on the failure or repair of a line.

If the card is an SDP, LDP, HDM, or LDM, the fail and repair triggers occur only on the transitions of RTS (regardless of whether the port is DCE or DTE). If you select fail, the trigger is the transition of RTS from on to off. If you select repair, the trigger is the transition of RTS from off to on.

To enable triggering on leads other than RTS, use the cnfict command.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

No

No

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

addjob, dspjob, dspjobs

Examples

addjobtrig

1 p 14 f

trigger job 1 when TRK 14 fails

addjobtrig

3 c 15 r

trigger job 3 when CLN 15 repairs

addjobtrig

2 p 14 r

trigger job 2 when TRK 14 repairs

addjobtrig

3 d 27 E f

trigger job 3 when DS3 27 E (East) fails

Example

Trigger job 1 whenever a repair of line 14 occurs.

addjobtrig 1 c 14 r

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:22 PST Job Description Next Execution Status Interval Access Group 1 test 08/17/97 11:00:00 Idle 1 days Group 1 Trigger 1 - CLN 14 REPAIR Last Command: addjobtrig 1 c 14 r Next Command:

addlnloclp (add local loopback to line)

Establishes a local-remote loopback on a trunk or port card in a BPX. Applicable cards are the ASI, BNI, BME, and BXM.

While a line loop is present, software suspends the card self-test and the line diagnostic test that normally run when a line goes into alarm. Suspending these tests prevents background test loops from interfering with the user-specified loop.

Line loops are set for a line on the local node, so you cannot specify a remote node, and no network messaging is supported for setting a line loop of any type on a remote node.

Line loop status is displayed on the dsplns screen for an ASI, BME, or a BXM in port mode and the dsptrks screen for a BNI, BME, or a BXM in trunk mode. Line loop status is not displayed for connections (dspcons) affected by a line loop. Instead, a warning is printed if the line has connection traffic travelling on it, and an event is logged when a line loop is set or cleared. A line loop on a trunk generates Comm Fail, causing connections to fail and be rerouted.

For both of the dsplns and dsptrks screens, the "[" character appears before the back card type in the "Type" column to indicate that the line local loopback is active.

The line loop state is not saved in BRAM or on a rebuild but is preserved on a switchover. After a rebuild, a line's loop state is cleared.

Exercise caution when you set up loops on a BNI, BME, or BXM trunk because looping an added BNI/BXM/BME trunk causes Comm Failure and connection rerouting. BNI/BXM/BME addlnlocrmtlp is not supported because of a lack of useful purpose, and Cisco recommends that you use addlnloclp only when the trunk is upped but not added. On the other hand, the system does not prevent you from looping an added BNI/BXM/BME trunk port.

Syntax

addlnloclp <slot.port>

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port

Specifies the port.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX

Yes

Related Commands

dellnlp, dsptrks, dsplns, addlnlocrmtlp

Example

The dsplns display appears with the connection highlighted and a prompt for confirmation.

addlnloclp 11.8

sw53 VT Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.m0 Dec. 14 2000 12:33 GMT Line Type Current Line Alarm Status 11.1 OC3 Clear - OK 11.8 ]OC3 Clear - OK Last Command: addlnloclp 11.8

addlnlocrmtlp (add local-remote loopback to BPX line)

Establishes a local-remote loopback on a trunk or port card in a BPX. Applicable cards are the ASI, BNI, and BXM/BME.

While a line loop is present, software suspends the card self-test and the line diagnostic test that normally run when a line goes into alarm. Suspending these tests prevents background test loops from interfering with the user-specified loop.

Line loops are set for a line on the local node, so you cannot specify a remote node, and no network messaging is supported for setting a line loop of any type on a remote node.

Line loop status is displayed on the dsplns screen for an ASI or a BXM/BME in port mode and the dsptrks screen for a BNI or a BXM/BME in trunk mode. Line loop status is not displayed for connections (dspcons) affected by a line loop. Instead, a warning is printed if the line has connection traffic travelling on it, and an event is logged when a line loop is set or cleared. A line loop on a trunk generates Comm Fail, causing connections to fail and be rerouted.

For both of the dsplns and dsptrks screens, the "[" character appears before the back card type in the "Type" column to indicate that the line local-remote loopback is active.

The line loop state is not saved in BRAM or on a rebuild but is preserved on a switchover. After a rebuild, a line's loop state is cleared.

Exercise caution when you set up loops on a BNI or BXM/BME trunk because looping an added BNI/BXM/BME trunk causes Comm Failure and connection rerouting. BNI/BXM/BME addlnlocrmtlp is not supported because of a lack of useful purpose, and Cisco recommends that you use addlnloclp only when the trunk is upped but not added. On the other hand, the system does not prevent you from looping an added BNI/BXM/BME trunk port.

In this release, you can use the addloclp and addlocrmtlp commands to enable a two-segment connection at the hub node port endpoint in a network of IGX hubs and MGX 8800 interface shelves. The addloclp and addlocrmtlp commands are blocked at the interface shelf trunk endpoint. The addrmtlp command is not supported at either endpoint of the connection. You can use the dellp command to remove the local (or local remote) loopbacks that have been added; however, you cannot use the dellp command at the trunk endpoint of the connection—it will be blocked. Loops of any kind are not supported for the middle segment of a three-segment connection.

Syntax

addlnlocrmtlp <slot.port>

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port

The port on the local node.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX

Yes

Related Commands

dsptrks, dsplns, dellnlp, addlnloclp

Example

The dsptrks screen appears with the loopback highlighted by the "[" character.

addlnlocrmtlp 10.1

pubsbpx1 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 01:27 GMT TRK Type Current Line Alarm Status Other End 1.1 T3 Clear - OK pubsaxi1(AXIS) 1.3 T3 Clear - OK pubsipx1/8 4.1 OC-3 Clear - OK - 10.1 [OC-3 Clear - OK - Last Command: addlnlocrmtlp 10.1 Next Command:

addloclp (add local loopback to connections on a port)

Places these types of channels in local loopback mode:

For voice connections, addloclp creates a signal path from a channel or group of channels on an incoming line then back out to the line. External test equipment can test the integrity of the path at the T1 DS0 level. Figure 3-4 shows a local loopback on a voice channel.


Figure 3-4: Local Loopback on a Voice Channel


For data connections, addloclp creates a signal path from the incoming data port or set of ports back to these same port(s) through the local CDP/CVM, SDP/HDM, or LDP/LDM. External test equipment can then test the integrity of the path. Figure 3-5 illustrates a local loopback on a data connection.


Figure 3-5: Local Loopback on a Data Connection


A local loopback can simultaneously exist at both ends of a connection. However, a local loopback and a remote loopback cannot co-exist on a connection. (See the addrmtlp description for more information.)

Before executing a loopback, the IGX node performs signal and code conditioning to remove the connection from service. The loopback remains in place until removed by the dellp command. Only existing connections can be looped back.

Use the dspcons command to see which connections are looped back. A flashing right parenthesis ")" or left parenthesis "(" is used in the connections display to indicate a loopback. The direction and location of the parenthesis depends on whether the loopback is local or remote and which end of the connection was used to establish the loopback.

A local loopback initiated from the local end of the connection looks like this in the connections display:

Local Channel

Remote Node

Remote Channel

12.1

alpha

15.1

A local loopback initiated from the remote end of the connection looks like this:

Local Channel

Remote Node

Remote Channel

12.1

alpha

15.1

In Frame Relay connection loopback mode (DLCI included in command), all packets from the far-end of the connection are dropped. The far-end system software is informed of the loopback. In port loopback mode (port specified without a DLCI), all packets for this port are dropped and each opposite end is informed of the loopback mode.

Use the format slot.port in port mode to loop just the port. The data is looped directly in the FRI back card, so no data reaches the muxbusor cellbus. Use the format slot.port.DLCI in connection (channel) mode to loop a specific channel. Note that this can affect up to 252 connections (channels) in port loopback mode.

Because the addloclp command causes the connection(s) to be removed from service, you should use loopbacks only when a service disruption can be tolerated. You establish remote loopbacks with the addrmtlp command. You remove local and remote loopbacks with the dellp command. You can also initiate loopbacks for data channels by pressing a button on the front of the associated data card.

Frame Relay Local Loops with Port Concentrator

When a Frame Relay port or connection is located on a Port Concentrator instead of directly on an FRP or FRM card, the data test path is different. When just the <port> parameter is used, incoming data is looped back out on the Port Concentrator port, as shown in Figure 3-6.


Figure 3-6: Local Loop on Port Concentrator


This loop disrupts all Frame Relay connections on the port that is under test.

When you specify a connection with <port.dlci> parameters, the connection is looped back at the FRM-2 or FRP-2 interface with the IGX card bus, as shown in Figure 3-7.


Figure 3-7: Local Loop on FRM-2 or FRP-2


As shown, this test verifies the operation of all components from the Port Concentrator to the IGX interface with the FRP-2 or FRM-2 card.

This tests interrupts only the specified connection on the Port Concentrator port.

In this release, the addloclp and addlocrmtlp commands support the two-segment connection at the hub node port endpoint in a network of IGX hubs and SES interface shelves. The addloclp and addlocrmtlp commands are blocked at the interface shelf trunk endpoint. The addrmtlp command is not supported at either endpoint of the connection. You can use the dellp command to remove the local (or local remote) loopbacks that have been added; however, you cannot use the dellp command at the trunk endpoint of the connection—it will be blocked. Loops of any kind are not supported for the middle segment of a three-segment connection.

Syntax

addloclp channel

Parameters (Voice)

Parameter Description

slot

Specifies the slot number of the card containing the port to loop at the local node.

channel (s)

Specifies the channel or set of channels to loop at the local node.

port

Where applicable for the connection type, specifies the port.

Parameters (Data)

Parameter Description

slot

Specifies the slot number of the card containing the port to loop at the local node.

port

Specifies the local port to loop at the local node.

Parameters (Frame Relay Connection)

Parameter Description

slot

Specifies the slot number of the FRP card containing the port to loop at the local node.

port

Specifies the local port to loop at the local node.

DLCI

Specifies the Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) number of the channel to loop at the local node.

Parameters (ATM Connection)

Parameter Description

slot

Specifies the slot number of the ATM card containing the port to loop at the local node.

port

Specifies the local port to loop at the local node.

VPI/VCI

VPI range : 0-7
VCI range : 1-255
An asterisk (*) indicates a virtual path.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

addrmtlp, dellp, dspcons, dspfrport

Example

The connections screen appears with connection 14.1 highlighted. The system prompts you to confirm the loopback. To confirm it, enter y.

addloclp 14.1

Next Command: alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 11:03 PST Local Remote Remote Route Channel NodeName Channel State Type Compression Code Avoid CoS O 5.1 beta )25.1 Ok 256 7/8 0 L 9.1.100 gamma 8.1.200 Ok fr 0 L 9.1.200 gamma 8.1.300 Ok fr 0 L 9.2.400 beta 19.2.302 Ok fr(Grp) 0 L 14.1 )gamma 15.1 Ok v 0 L Last Command: addloclp 14.1 Next Command:

addlocrmtlp (add local-remote loopback in a tiered network)

Adds support of a local-remote loopback for testing multisegment connections in a tiered network. The effect is to instruct the remote node to set up a remote loopback.

You must execute the addlocrmtlp command before using tstcon and tstdelay for multisegment connections. For interface shelves, you can execute addlocrmtlp on either the interface shelf (after Telnetting to it).

After testing is complete, remove the local-remote loop by executing dellp. A parenthesis on the screen shows the loop's endpoint.

The addloclp and addlocrmtlp commands support a two-segment connection at the hub node port endpoint in a network of IGX hubs and SES interface shelves. The addloclp and addlocrmtlp commands are blocked at the interface shelf trunk endpoint. The addrmtlp command is not supported at either endpoint of the connection.

You can use the dellp command to remove the local (or local remote) loopbacks that have been added; however, you cannot use the dellp command at the trunk endpoint of the connection—it will be blocked. Loops of any kind are not supported for the middle segment of a three-segment connection.

Syntax

addlocrmtlp <channel(s)>

Parameters

Parameter Description

channels(s)

The connection endpoint on the local node.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

tstcon, tstdelay, dellp, dspcons, dspfrport

Example

The connections screen appears with the connection highlighted and prompts you to confirm.

addlocrmtlp 5.1.3.100

pubsbpx1 TN SuperUser BPX 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:41 PDT Local Remote Remote Channel NodeName Channel State Type Compress Code CoS 5.1.3.100 ( pubsbpx3 7.1.2.49 Ok aftr 0 This Command: addlocrmtlp 5.1.3.100 Loopback these connections (y/n)?

addport (add ATM or Frame Relay port)

This command is required to add ports to the IGX and BPX. Use addport to:

The addport command is required before the ports can be activated (upport). The optional <vport> identifier indicates a virtual port. Only BXM cards support virtual ports.

For BPX only, since Release 9.3.0, upln no longer automatically configures a port. You must use the addport command to add the port before you can use the addcon command. You can verify that the line has been activated by using the dsplns command.

Syntax

addport <slot.port>[.<vport>]

For FRP or FRM card sets:
addfrport <slot.port> [DS0 channel] [56 | 64]

For UFM-C card sets:
addfrport <slot.port> <line.DS0_channel>

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port[.vport]

Specifies the slot number of the card, the physical port, and the optional virtual port (BXM card only).

Range (vport identifier): 1-31

slot.port (FRP or FRM series)

slot.port line.DS0 channel (for UFM-C series)

Specifies the FRI T1 or E1 line number and the logical port number. For a UFM-U, specifies the physical slot and port. For an example of a T1 or E1: 8.12 is physical slot 8 and timeslot (or channel) 12.

For the UFM card sets, this parameter specifies the slot and logical port, the physical line (the connector), and one or more contiguous DS0s.
Range (logical ports): 1-250
Range (UFM-4C lines): 1-4
Range (UFM-8C lines): 1-8
Note the space between the port and line.

- chan

Optionally specifies that multiple DS0/timeslots should form one logical port. A "-" separates the starting and ending DS0s/timeslots). Timeslots must be contiguous. For example: addfrport 8.1-5. The system uses the lowest DS0/timeslot number as the logical port number and shows this in related displays.

rate

Optionally specifies the rate of a single, logical port. By default, a single logical port (or channel) is 64 Kbps. A single DS0 (timeslot) may be 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps. Default: 64 Kbps

Error/Warning Messages

Messages Reason for Message

Slot is out of range

Line number not correct for T1/E1. You cannot add slots 0-31, that is, you cannot have a port at E1 speed. The maximum you can get is 31 slots (1984) using CCS (Common Channel signaling) because slot 0 is used for FAS, and so on.

Line must first be upped

Line is down.

Invalid channel range

Channel is out of the range 1-24 or 1-31 (16 is a reserved channel for E1).

Channel is busy

Channel is already assigned to a logical port.

You cannot use signaling channel 16" (E1)

CAS channel 16 included in logical port (E1). CCS permits the use of channel 16 but not in all countries.

Invalid rate

Entered rate is not 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps.

This rate is available for single channel only

Entered rate is 56 Kbps, but multiple channels specified.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

delport, upport, dnport, dspports, dspport, cnfport

Example

Add port 3 to the BXM card in slot 11.

addport 11.3

sw53 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.m0 Dec. 19 2000 12:43 GMT Port configuration for ATM 11 From VPI Min/Max Bandwidth Interface State Protocol Type 11.3 0 / 255 353208 (cps) LM-BXM INACTIVE NONE UNI Last Command: addport 11.3 256 PVCs allocated. Use 'cnfrsrc' to configure PVCs
Example

Add the internal ATM port 11.1 on the Universal Router Module (URM) in an IGX node. The interface type is "INTERNAL". The default configuration is UNI with no protocol and is the same as the default configuration for a UXM port.

addport 11.1

sw190 TRM Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.e9 Oct. 6 2000 05:28 GMT Port configuration for ATM 11 Port Chan Speed Interface State Protocol Type 1 1 353208 (cps) INTERNAL INACTIVE NONE UNI Last Command:addport 11.1 256 LCNs allocated. Use 'cnfrsrc' to configure LCNs Next Command:
Example

Add a single Frame Relay port that occupies DS0s (timeslots) in the range 9-15. For a T1 line, this channel rate is 7 x 64 Kbps = 448 Kbps, as the screen example shows. The card is an FRP.

addport 21.9 -15

gamma TRM YourID:1 IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:28 CST Port configuration for FRP 21 From Chan Speed Interface State
1 9-15 448 FRI T1 INACTIVE Last Command: addport 21.9-15 Next Command:

addrmtlp (add remote loopback to connections)

The addrmtlp command places these types of channels in remote loopback mode:

For voice connections, addrmtlp loops the information stream from the designated channel or group of channels on an incoming circuit line across the network and loops it back to the circuit line by way of the remote CDP or CVM. External test equipment can then test the integrity of the path at the T1 DS0 level. Figure 3-8 illustrates a remote loopback on a voice channel.


Figure 3-8: Remote Loopback on a Voice Channel


For data connections, addrmtlp transfers the information stream from the designated channels through the network and loops it back to the data port(s) through a remote SDP, HDM, LDM, or LDP. External test equipment can then test the integrity of the path. Figure 3-9 illustrates a data connection remote loopback.


Figure 3-9: Remote Loopback on a Data Connection


Prior to executing the loopback, the IGX node applies signaling template bit patterns to the A, B, C, and D signaling bits at the remote end to remove the connection from service. The loopback remains in place until removed by the dellp command. Only existing connections (those that have been entered with the add-on command) can be looped back. You cannot establish a remote loopback on a connection that is already looped back, either locally or remotely. (See the addloclp command for more information on local loopbacks.)

Use the dspcons command to see which connections are looped back. A flashing left parenthesis "(" or right parenthesis ")" is used in the connections display to indicate a loopback. The direction and location of the parenthesis depends on whether the loopback is local or remote and which end of the connection was used to establish the loopback. A remote loopback initiated from the local end of the connection looks like this:

Local Channel

Remote Channel

Remote Node

3.2

alpha

12.1

A remote loopback initiated from the remote end of the connection looks like this:

Local Channel

Remote Node

Remote Channel

3.2

alpha

12.1

For remote loopback of Frame Relay connections, note that in remote loopback mode, if the transmit minimum bandwidth exceeds the receive minimum bandwidth, then loopback data may be dropped. For this reason, the connection speeds will be checked and the user will receive the following message if there is a problem:

Warning—Receiver's BW < Originator's BW-Data may be dropped

Because the addrmtlp command causes the connection to be removed from service, loopbacks should be used only when a service disruption can be tolerated. Local loopbacks are established with the addloclp command. Both local and remote loopbacks are removed by the dellp command. Loopbacks for data channels can also be initiated by pressing a push-button on the front of the associated data card.

Remote Loopbacks and the Port Concentrator Shelf

For Frame Relay remote loops, DLCI MUST be specified; entering only port number only generates an error message.

Unlike local loopbacks, remote loopbacks are not supported for Frame Relay ports; connections must be specified. Data incoming on the Frame Relay port is looped at the remote end FRM-2 or FRP-2 card, as shown in Figure 3-10.


Figure 3-10: Frame Relay Remote Loops


As shown, this test verifies the operation of IGX network components up to the interface with the remote-end FRM-2 or FRP-2. This test interrupts data traffic for only the connection specified by DLCI.

If a port concentrator is attached to the FRM-2 or FRP-2, the only difference in the loop is that the port specified to loop data is on the Port Concentrator, as shown in Figure 3-11.


Figure 3-11: Frame Relay Remote Loops with Port Concentrator


The addloclp and addlocrmtlp commands support the two-segment connection at the hub node port endpoint in a network of IGX hubs and SES interface shelves. The addloclp and addlocrmtlp commands are blocked at the interface shelf trunk endpoint. The addrmtlp command is not supported at either endpoint of the connection. You can use the dellp command to remove the local (or local remote) loopbacks that have been added; however, you cannot use the dellp command at the trunk endpoint of the connection—it will be blocked. Loops of any kind are not supported for the middle segment of a three-segment connection.

Syntax

addrmtlp (see parameter tables)

Parameters (Voice)

Parameter Description

slot

Specifies the slot number of the card containing the port to loop at the local node.

channel (s)

Specifies the channel or set of channels to loop at the local node.

port

Where applicable for the connection type, specifies the port.

Parameters (Data)

Parameter Description

slot

Specifies the slot number of the card containing the port to loop at the local node.

port

Specifies the local port to loop at the local node.

Parameters (Frame Relay)

Parameter Description

slot

Specifies the slot number of the FRP card containing the port to loop at the local node.

port

Specifies the local port to loop at the local node.

DLCI

Specifies the Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) number of the channel to loop at the local node.

Parameters (ATM)

Parameter Description

slot

Specifies the slot number of the card containing the port to loop at the local node.

channel (s)

Specifies the channel or set of channels to loop at the local node.

port

Where applicable for the connection type, specifies the port.

vpi.vci

Specifies VPI/VCI.

Related Commands

addloclp, dellp, dspcons

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

addloclp, dellp, dspcons

Example

The connections screen appears with connection 5.1 highlighted. The system prompts to confirm the loopback. To confirm it, enter y. A flashing parenthesis ")" appears in the "Remote Channel" column of the connection to indicate that the connection is looped back.

addrmtlp 5.1

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 12:57 PST Local Remote Remote Route Channel NodeName Channel State Type Compression Code Avoid CoS O 5.1 beta )25.1 Ok 256 7/8 0 L 9.1.100 gamma 8.1.200 Ok fr 0 L 9.2.400 beta 19.2.302 Ok fr 0 L 14.1 gamma 15.1 Ok v 0 L Last Command: addrmtlp 5.1 Next Command:

addshelf (add interface shelf or controller to a routing node or hub)

In a tiered network, adds an ATM link between:

An MPLS controller is considered an interface shelf from the BPX's perspective.

The interface shelf can be one of these:

The signaling protocol that applies to the trunk on an interface shelf is Annex G. (Annex G is a bidirectional protocol defined in Recommendation Q.2931, used to monitor the status of connections across an UNI interface. The Annex G protocol is used in this release to pass connection status information between an IGX/BPX core switch shelf and an attached feeder.)

For example, the MGX 8850 interface shelf, or feeder, communicates over a UXM/UXM-E interface with the routing hub over Annex G LMI using AAL5 format.


Note   Because tiered network capability is a paid option, personnel in the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) must Telnet to the unit and configure it as an interface shelf before you can execute addshelf.

Each IGX/AF, MGX 8220, MGX 8850, or SES shelf has one trunk that connects to the BPX or IGX node serving as an access hub. A BPX routing hub can support up to 16 T3 trunks to the interface shelves, which can be IGX/AF, MGX 8220, or MGX 8850 interface shelves. An IGX hub can support up to four trunks to the interface shelves, which can be IGX/AF or SES (Service Expansion Shelf) shelves.

Before it can carry traffic, you must "up" the trunk on an interface shelf (using uptrk on both the interface shelf and the IGX/BPX core switch shelf) and "add" it to the network (using addshelf). Also, a trunk must be free of major alarms before you can add it with the addshelf command.

Use the commands addshelf and addctrlr to add an MPLS or PNNI controller to the BPX. Use the command addshelf with option "v" to add a VSI shelf. This is used mainly for MPLS controllers. Use the command addctrlr to add a controller to a shelf that has LMI capabilities.

You can use an IGX as a feeder node to connect via a UXM IMA trunk to an IGX or BPX router node using IMATM. Use addshelf with the "I" option at the IGX node to add the feeder trunk connecting it to an IGX feeder node.

Syntax

Interface shelf:

addshelf <slot.port> <shelf-type> [vpi] [vci]
addshelf <slot>.<primary link> <shelf type>

Label switch controller:

addshelf <slot.port> <device-type> <control partition> <control ID>

VSI controller:

addshelf <trunk slot.port> v <ctrlr id> <part id> <control vpi> <control vci start> <redundant ctrlr warning>


Note   If you manage a tiered network through the command line interface, you can manage only Frame Relay interworking connections (ATFR) across the network. Three-segment connections for carrying serial data or voice between IGX/AFs is allowed, but you must manage them through Cisco WAN Manager.

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port (trunk)

slot.port
Specifies the BXM slot and port number of the trunk. (You can configure the port for either trunk (network) or port (service) mode.

shelf-type

I, A, P, V, X

On a BPX node, shelf type specifies the type of interface shelf when you execute addshelf. The choices are I for IGX/AF, A for the MGX 8220, a type of adjunct processor shelf), V for VSI, or X for the MGX 8800.

In the case of BNI, only two options are available:
I for IGX/AF
A for the MGX 8220.

On an IGX node, shelf type specifies the type of interface shelf you can add. The choices are:
I for IGX/AF
X for AAL5 for an SES (Service Expansion Shelf).

device-type

vsi, for "virtual switch interface", specifies a virtual interface to an ATM-LSR (Label Switch Router) controller such as a Cisco 7200 or 7500 series router.

Note that the "v" option is not applicable when configuring Automatic Routing Management PVCs. You need to enter only the "v" or "vsi" option when configuring VSI options.

vpi vci

vpi,vci are optional when adding an interface shelf (feeder).
(Specifies the vpi and vci (Annex G vpi and vci used). For the MGX 8220 only,
Range vpi : 1-1015
Range vci : 1-65535

control VPI
control VCI start

The (VPI.VCI) of the 15 control VCs is (control_VPI.control_VCI_start) to (control_VPI.control_VCI_start+14).The control VC used for slot n (1<= n<=15) is (control_VPI.control_VCI_start + n -1).

Choose <control_VPI> such that:

  • If <control_VPI> = 0, <control_VCI_start> can be set to a value
    > 40.

  • If any VSI partition exists on the interface, then control_VPI < start_VPI or control_VPI > end_VPI for all partitions on that interface. An error message is displayed if the control VPI falls into the VPI range belonging to a VSI partition.

  • No AutoRoute connection exists on (VPI.start_VCI to VPI.start_VCI+14). If any AutoRoute connection exists on these VPI/VCI values, you are not allowed to use these VPI/VCI values.

  • This VPI is "reserved" for control VCs.

control partition

Specifies the control partition. You can typically leave this field blank when you add an MPLS Controller to a BPX or MGX 8800 node.

control ID

Control IDs must be in the range of 1 to 32, and you must set these identically on the VSI-MPLS Controller and in the addshelf command. A control ID of "1" is the default used by the MPLS Controller.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-4

Yes

Yes

BPX switch with IGX interface shelves

IGX switch with IGX shelves

BPX switch with MGX 8220 interface shelf

BPX with MGX 8850 interface shelf

BPX switch for MPLS controller

IGX switch for the Service Expansion Shelf (SES)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Related Commands

delshelf, dspnode, dsptrks

Release History

Previous to Release 9.2, WAN switching software supported the ability to configure the MGX 8220 as an interface shelf to the BPX. Release 9.1 introduced the ability for the MGX 8850 to serve as an interface shelf to a BPX routing hub. Release 9.2 introduced the ability for an SES (Service Expansion Shelf) to serve as an interface shelf to an IGX 8400 routing hub.

Release 9.2.20 supports:

Signaling Channel Used by MGX 8850 and SES Interface Shelves Connecting to Routing Hubs

The SES interface shelf with a UXM/UXM-E interface communicates with the routing hub over an Annex G LMI interface by using AAL5 format.

Annex G is a bidirectional protocol used to monitor the status of connections across a UNI interface. This includes the real-time notification of the addition or deletion of connection segments and the ability to pass the availability (active state) or unavailability (inactive state) of the connections crossing this interface.

An SES feeder uses the Annex G protocol to pass connection status information between itself and an IGX 8400 routing hub. Similarly, an MGX 8850 feeder uses the Annex G signaling channel to pass connection status information between itself and a BPX routing hub.

The SES interface shelf communicates with an IGX routing hub through ATM cells. Thus, IP data destined for an IGX 8400 is encapsulated in an AAL5 ATM cell format.

addshelf Error Messages

Some of the possible error messages for the addshelf command:

Example (Interface Shelf)

Add an MGX 8220 at trunk 11.1. After you add the shelf, the screen displays a confirmation message and the name of the shelf. Add the MGX 8220 (may be referred to on screen as AXIS):

addshelf 11.1 a

The sample display shows a partially executed command prompting you for the interface shelf type:

nmsbpx23 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3.10    Apr. 4 2000   13:28 PST BPX Interface Shelf Information Trunk Name Type Alarm 1.3 AXIS240 AXIS OK 11.2 A242 AXIS OK This Command: addshelf 11.1 a Enter Interface Shelf Type: I (IGX/AF), A (AXIS), P (APS), V (VSI), X (AAL5) Next Command:
Example (MGX 8850 AAL5 Interface Shelf )

Add an MGX 8850 at trunk 4.8. After you add the MGX 8800 shelf, the screen displays a confirmation message and the name of the shelf.

To add the MGX 8850 (may be referred to on screen as AAL5), use this command:

addshelf 4.8 x

The system response shows that an MGX 8850 was added on trunk 4.8 as an AAL5 (ATM Adaptive Layer 5) type of interface shelf. (Adding an MGX 8850 interface shelf is similar to adding an MPLS controller interface shelf.)

pswbpx3 TN SuperUser BPX 8600 9.3.10    June 6 2000   13:28 PST BPX 8620 Interface Shelf Information Trunk Name Type Part Id Ctrl Id Control_VC Alarm VPI VCIRange 4.8 SIMFDR0 AAL/5 - - - - OK This Command: addshelf 4.8 x Enter Interface Shelf Type: I (IGX/AF), A (AXIS), P (APS), V (VSI), X (AAL5) Next Command:
Example (SES to an IGX)

Add an SES interface shelf to an IGX 8400 (using a UXM or UXM-E interface). After you add the SES interface shelf, the screen displays a confirmation message and the name of the shelf. Add the SES (may be referred to on-screen as AAL5) as follows:

addshelf 6.1 X

Enter Interface Shelf Type: X (AAL5)


Note   You can add an SES (Service Expansion Shelf) feeder only to an IGX routing node.

sw288 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:38 PST TRK Type Type Alarm 9.1 ases1 AAL5 MIN This Command: addshelf 4.1 Enter Interface Shelf Type: I (IGX), A (AXIS), P (APS), V (VSI), X (AAL5) IGX Interface Shelf Information Trunk Name Type Alarm 9.1 ses_fdr AAL5 MIN This Command: addshelf 4.1 x Enter Interface Shelf Type: A (AXIS), P (APS), V (VSI), X (AAL5) Shelf has been added Next Command:

The sample display shows that an SES was added on trunk 9.1 as an AAL5 type of interface shelf. (AAL5 is the ATM Adaptive Layer 5 protocol, which is an ATM standard interface that is used by the routing node or routing hub to communicate with the SES shelves.) Adding an IGX interface shelf is similar to adding an MPLS (Multiprotocol Label Switching) controller as an interface shelf.

The addshelf command will prompt for "Interface Shelf Type." Because the MGX 8220, MGX 8850, and the SES (Service Expansion Shelf) use the same Annex G LMI signaling protocol to communicate with an IGX routing hub, they all use the same interface shelf type of AAL5 (designated by the addshelf "X" option).

Adding a VSI Controller

The maximum number of controllers that can be attached to a given node is limited by the maximum number of feeders (16) that can be attached to a BPX hub. Therefore, the total number of feeders and controllers cannot exceed 16.

You add a VSI controller, such as an MPLS controller, to a switch by using the addshelf command with the vsi option. The vsi option of the addshelf command identifies VSI controllers and distinguishes them from interface shelves (feeders).

The VSI controllers are allocated a partition of the switch resources. VSI controllers manage their partition through the VSI interface. The controllers run the VSI master. The VSI master entity interacts with the VSI slave running on the BXMs through the VSI interface, to set up VSI connections using the resources in the partition assigned to the controller.

Two controllers that are intended to be used in a redundant configuration must specify the same partition when added to the node through the addshelf command.

When a controller is added to the node, switch software sets up the infrastructure so that the controllers can communicate with the slaves in the node. The VSI entities decide how and when to use these communication channels.

The controllers also require a communication channel between them. This channel could be in-band or out-of-band. When a controller is added to the switch, switch software sends controller information to the slaves. This information is advertised to all the controllers in the partition. The controllers may decide to use this information to set up an intermaster channel. Alternatively the controllers may use an out-of-band channel to communicate.

To add a controller to the node, use the addshelf command. You add a redundant controller in the normal way, except that it specifies a partition that may be already in use by another controller. The addshelf command allows for up to three controllers to manage the same partition.

One of the parameters that must be specified with the addshelf command when a VSI controller is added to the switch is the controller ID. This is a number between 1 and 32 that uniquely identifies the controller. Two different controllers must always have different controller IDs.

The management of resources on the VSI slaves requires that each slave in the node has a communication control VC to each of the controllers attached to the node. When a controller is added to the BCC via the addshelf command, the BCC sets up the set of master-slave connections between the new controller port and each of the active slaves in the switch. You specify the master-slave connections by using the <Control VPI> and <Control Start VCI> parameters. The default for these parameters is 0/0.


Note   If you manage a tiered network through the command line interface, you can manage only Frame Relay interworking connections (ATFR) across the network. Three-segment connections for carrying serial data or voice between IGX/AFs is allowed, but you must manage them through WAN Manager.

Feature Mismatching to Verify VSI Support

The cnfrsrc and addshelf commands, in addition to other configuration commands, perform mismatch verification on the BXM and UXM cards. For example, the cnfrsrc and addshelf commands verify whether the cards both have VSI 2.0 support configured.

The Feature Mismatching capability does not check mismatched cards unless the actual feature has been enabled on the card. This allows for a graceful card migration from an older release.

Example (Redundant VSI Controller)

Add a redundant (more than one) VSI controller (as an interface shelf to a BPX node), on slot 11 on port 1, with a control partition of 1 and control ID of 2.

addshelf 11.1 vsi 1 2

night TN StrataCom BPX 8600 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:31 GMT BPX Interface Shelf Information Trunk Name Type Part Id Ctrl Id Alarm 1.1 sww222 IGX/AF - - UNRCH 10.3 VSI VSI 1 1 OK Warning partition already in use do you want to add redundant controller? Last Command: addshelf 11.1 vsi 1 2

Adding an MPLS Controller

For MPLS to carry traffic, you must first up the link to an MPLS controller (by using uptrk) at the BPX node. You can then add the link to the network (by using addshelf).

The link must be free of major alarms before you can add it with the addshelf command.


Note   Once you up a port on the BXM in either trunk or port mode by using either the uptrk or upport commands, respectively, you can up only those ports in the same mode.

Example (MPLS Controller)
Add trunk 4.1 as a VSI-MPLS controller interface shelf with control ID set to 1, partition ID set to 1, control VC VPI set to 0, and control VC VCI start at 40.

addshelf 4.1 vsi 1 1 0 40

nmsbpx23 TN SuperUser BPX 15 9.3.10    Aug. 1 2000 13:28 PST BPX 8620 Interface Shelf Information Trunk Name Type Part Id Ctrl Id Control_VC Alarm VPI VCIRange 4.8 SIMFDR0 AAL/5 - - - - OK 4.1 VSI VSI 1 1 0 40-54 OK This Command: addshelf 4.1 v 1 1 0 40 Next Command:

addtrk (add a trunk between nodes)

You must add a trunk to the network before it can carry traffic. You need only to execute addtrk at one of the nodes terminating the trunk. Before you add a trunk to the network, you must have activated (or "upped") the trunk at both ends by using uptrk.

A trunk must be free of major alarms before you can add it. If you use addtrk to join two networks that were previously separate, the local node verifies that all node names and node numbers in both networks are unique before it adds the trunk.

You cannot add a trunk while any of these conditions are true:


Warning When using the addtrk command, exercise caution when adding a new node to a network or one network to another network. With these particular operations, the user IDs and passwords may be replaced by those in the other network. Consult Customer Service before performing these operations.

Adding a Virtual Trunk

You can add a trunk as a physical trunk or a virtual trunk. A virtual trunk is a way to connect Cisco nodes through a public ATM cloud. You can define virtual trunks on BNI, BXM and UXM cards.

(Note that even though nodes running Release 9.2 can interoperate with 9.1 or 8.5 nodes, if you are running a network with mixed releases, you cannot add UXM and BXM virtual trunks because the networking messages are incompatible due to the virtual trunk number and different cell format on virtual trunks. BNI cards use STI cell format, and BXM and UXM cards use NNI cell format.)

To designate a trunk as a virtual trunk, you use a virtual trunk number, which is used to differentiate the virtual trunks within a physical port. (Refer to the BPX 8600 Series Reference for more information on virtual trunking.)

For the BXM card, you can define a maximum of 32 virtual trunks within one port. Valid virtual trunk numbers are 1-31 per port. The number of virtual trunks available is limited by the number of virtual interfaces (VIs) available on the card. Each logical trunk (physical or virtual) consumes on VI.

For the UXM card, you can define a maximum of 16 virtual trunks within one port. Valid virtual trunk numbers are 1-15.

The addtrk command will be blocked for virtual trunks configured for VSI.

Syntax

addtrk <slot.port>[.vtrk]

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port

Specifies the slot and port number of the trunk to add.

vtrk

Optionally specifies the virtual trunk number. Virtual trunking is supported on a BNI or BXM card on a BPX node, or a UXM card on an IGX node.

The maximum number of virtual trunks per physical port:
BNI card: 32
T3 or E3 line: 32
OC-3/STM1 line: 11

The maximum number of virtual trunks per port:
BXM card: 32
UXM card:16

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

deltrk, dsptrks, uptrk

Example

Add trunk 5.4 to node sw180.

addtrk 5.4

NOTE: update example to show: "Add trunk 5.4 to node sw180." sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.r3 Dec. 19 2000 14:10 GMT TRK Type Current Line Alarm Status Other End 5.4 OC3 Clear - OK - 8 T1/24 Clear - OK sw108/14 Last Command: addtrk 5.4

addtrkred (add trunk redundancy)

Configures trunk redundancy on an ATM trunk. The addtrkred command specifies a backup trunk to the primary trunk. Applicable line types are T3 and E3. The redundancy scheme requires two sets of ATM trunk cards and two standard T3 or E3 cables (not Y-cables). Note the following characteristics of trunk redundancy:

Syntax

addtrkred <primary trunk> <secondary trunk>

Parameters

Parameter Description

primary trunk

Specifies the slot number of the primary trunk card set.

secondary trunk

Specifies the slot number of the secondary trunk card set as backup.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-4

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

deltrkred, dsptrkred

Example

Add bandwidth redundancy for the primary ATM trunk in slot 4 with backup from the ATM trunk in slot 5.

addtrkred 4 5

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:15 MST ATM Line Backup ATM Line 4 5
Last Command: addtrkred 4 5 Next Command:

adduser (add a user)

Adds a user to the network. The first time the new user ID is used for logon, a prompt asks the user to change from the default password to a new password which they enter using the cnfpwd command. Users with privilege levels 1 through 5 may add users with lower privilege levels. Because privilege level 6 has no user levels below it, level 6 cannot add any users.

Syntax

adduser <user_id> <privilege_level>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<user_id>

Specifies the name of the user to add.

<privilege_level>

Specifies the privilege level to grant to the added user.
Range : 1-6, where 1 is the highest level and 6 is the lowest.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfpwd, deluser, dspusers

Example

Add a user sarah with privilege level 5.

adduser sarah 5

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 13:48 PST YourID 1 Sarah 5 Last Command: adduser Sarah 5 Next Command:

addyred (add Y-cable redundancy)

Enables card redundancy for SONET Automatic Protection Switching (APS) across two OC-3 or OC-12 cards. Use the addyred command to specify the slots of the primary and secondary (standby) cards that form the redundant pair. (The addyred command performs the same function as the addcdred alias command.)

Redundant card sets must have these characteristics:

You must use the addyred command to configure a VSI slave redundant card. When a standby slave card is first started (either by having been inserted into the slot, or if you issue the addyred command from the CLI console), the active slave will forward all VSI messages it had received from the master VSI controller card to the standby slave VSI controller card.

In both the single and multiport card sets, if the secondary card set becomes active, the primary card set serves as its backup (assuming the primary card set is complete and not failed). You cannot use the addyred command if the primary and secondary slots are empty. If one or both of the card slots is empty, and you use the addyred command, the command will fail.

Also, the addyred command can fail because of firmware capabilities conflicts. For example, if one of the cards supports virtual trunking, and the other doesn't support virtual trunking, the command might fail. Refer to the Cisco BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration manual for more information on configuring SONET APS 1+1 card and line redundancy for BXM OC-3 and OC-12 cards.

If cards reside in the primary and secondary slots, the system checks for card compatibility. Two types of incompatibility can occur: back card and jumper or cable inconsistencies. (On SDI, FRI, and FTI cards, jumpers determine whether a port is configured as DCE or DTE. On LDI cards, either a DCE or DTE adapter cable connects to the LDI port. For descriptions of the jumper positions and cabling, see the Cisco IGX 8400 Series Installation and Configuration manual.)

Note that the addyred command prevents invalid configurations when you try to configure the SONET APS feature. When SONET Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is configured, you will not be able to use the addyred or delyred commands on a card configured for APS 1:1 architecture. That is, you will not be able to execute the addyred command, then configure the APS 1:1 architecture. Similarly, you will not be able to configure APS 1:1, then execute the addyred command. You will be blocked from executing these commands at the command line interface.

If incompatibilities exist, the message "Y-Cable Conflict" appears on the screen. Specific conflicts are listed in reverse video in the dspyred display. See the dspyred description for more information.

To ensure that only cards with the Idle Code Suppression feature enabled on them are allowed to be a Y-redundancy pair, addyred blocks cards that have different idle code suppression capability.

The addyred commands (addyred, delyred, dspyred, prtyred, switchyred) will perform feature mismatch checking on both the primary and secondary cards. For information on feature mismatch checking, refer to the BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration Guide.

Mismatch Checking Performed by addyred/delyred

During addyred's mismatch checking, the following verifications are done:

With Release 9.3.10, addyred is NOT allowed if the BPX Neighbor Discovery Enable/Disable flag is set to ENABLED on any port on the primary card and the secondary card does not have the BPX Neighbor Discovery capability. An error message is displayed in this situation. The addyred is allowed if the BPX Neighbor Discovery Enable/Disable flag is NOT set to ENABLED on any port on the primary card. If the secondary card does not have the BPX Neighbor Discovery capability, the following events occur:

    1. Mismatch is not declared.

    2. Neighbor's information (Neighbor's IfName and Neighbor's IP Address) are deleted from all ports on the primary card.

    3. BPX Neighbor Discovery Enable/Disable flags on all ports on the primary card are set to DISABLED (if previously set to ENABLED).

    4. The logical card table(s) are updated to indicate that the BPX Neighbor Discovery feature is no longer supported.

    5. CWM is notified via the Robust Port Update message.

Events 1 through 5 also occur in the following situations:

APS 1+1 Environment (Using Redundant Backcards, with Front Card Redundancy)

The same numbered ports on adjacent BXM cards are used. A hardware, firmware, and software upgrade is required. (Firmware that supports APS 1+1 setup, and switch software Release 9.2 is required.)

The APS 1+1 feature requires two BXM front cards, an APS redundant frame assembly, and two redundant type BXM backcards. The two redundant BXM backcards are plugged into the APS redundant frame assembly. (Refer to the SONET APS Configuration chapter in the Cisco BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration guide for more information on APS hardware configuration.) The types of redundant back card and backplane sets required are:

Each of the listed model numbers includes two single back cards and one mini-backplane (providing cross-=coupling of two back cards).

The single back cards and mini-backplane can be ordered as spares. Their model numbers are:

If incompatibilities exist, the message "Y-Cable Conflict" appears on the screen. Specific conflicts are listed in reverse video on the dspcdred display. See the dspcdred description for more information.


Note   When SONET Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is configured, you will not be able to use the addyred or delyred commands on a card configured for APS 1:1 architecture. That is, you will not be able to execute the addyred command, then configure the APS 1:1 architecture. Similarly, you will not be able to configure APS 1:1, then execute the addyred command. You will be blocked from executing these commands at the command line interface.

To ensure that only cards with the Idle Code Suppression feature enabled on them are allowed to be a Y-redundancy pair, addyred blocks cards that have different idle code suppression capability.

Syntax

addyred <primary slot> <secondary slot>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<primary slot>

Specifies the slot number of the primary card set.

<secondary slot>

Specifies the slot number of the secondary card set.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-4

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Related Commands

delyred, dspyred, prtyred

Example (BPX)

Add Y-cable redundancy to the BPX's BXM card sets in slots 2 and 12.

addyred 2 3

sw53 VT Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2J Oct. 26 2000 06:01 GMT Slot Other Front Back Slot Type Slot Card Card 2 Pri 12 ASI-E3 E3-2 12 Sec 2 ASI-E3 E3-2 Last Command: addyred 2 12
Example (IGX)

Add Y-cable redundancy to the UXM/T3 card sets in slots 12 and 13.

addyred 12 13

arnold TN Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.1p Aug. 16 2000 17:27 PST Slot Other Front Back Channel Configuration Slot Type Slot Card Card 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 Pri 13 UXM T3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 13 Sec 12 UXM T3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Last Command: addyred 12 13 Next Command:

burnfwrev (burn firmware image into cards)

Burns a firmware image into the memory of a specific card. Before you use burnfwrev, the firmware image must already reside in the controller card's memory. (Use getfwrev to load the image to the controller.)

A few seconds after you enter burnfwrev, the system displays a screen similar to the one in Figure 3-11, then the Burn Address column starts to indicate the addresses that are being "burned." When burnfwrev finishes, the status changes to "Complete."

After all cards at a node have been updated with burnfwrev, enter the following to clear the firmware image from the controller card's buffer area:

getfwrev 0.0 node_name

Use the dspfwrev command to display the firmware image status on the controller card at any time after burnfwrev has finished.

At the SuperUser level (0), you can use burnfwrev only to change the revision level of a card's firmware. If the firmware revision would result in a new model number for the card, only a user with a higher privilege level can burn the firmware image. In this case, you would have to call the TAC to execute the command.

Syntax

burnfwrev <image name> <slot number>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<image name>

Specifies the name of the firmware image to burn. You should typically enter image names in all capital letters; also, image names are case-sensitive.

<slot number>

Specifies the shelf slot where the card to burn is located. Specifying slot 0 will burn all cards of the appropriate type at the local node.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspfwrev, getfwrev

Example

Burn Firmware Revision into Card

burnfwrev

gamma TRM SuperUser Rev: 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:28 PDT Firmware Size Status F.D.A 256 K Burning into slot 19 (6 lives) File Address Length CRC Burn Address 0 800000 10 E986E939 1 800800 410 22996DDA 2 801000 2D40 B212147F 3 805E60 480 85CB29EA 4 80A630 70 57A938AE 5 80A6B0 20 4B9E8DDC 6 810000 10000 338E45F6 7 820000 4400 95990113 8 835000 1810 875771B2 9 8368A0 15D0 4C597B97 This Command: burnfwrev Continue?

bye (end user session)

Ends a local or remote terminal connection. The local connection ends, and the initial sign-on prompt appears on the screen. With a local terminal connection, the bye command logs out the user. If a local terminal is inactive for a (default) period of 20 minutes, the connection is automatically broken. This is the equivalent of entering the bye command. With a remote terminal connection (vt), the bye command returns the terminal to the local node. After a (default) period of four minutes of inactivity, a remote terminal connection is automatically returned to a local connection. This is equivalent to entering the bye command.

Syntax

bye

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

Yes

No

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

vt

Example

bye

-----------------------------------SCREEN 1-------------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.g0 Oct. 20 2000 06:24 GMT clrclnerrs - Clear Circuit Line Errors Can be included in Jobs. Usage: clrclnerrs [<line_number>] Last Command: help Next Command: bye -----------------------------------SCREEN 2-------------------------------------- sw180 TN No User IGX 8420 9.3.g0 Oct. 20 2000 06:26 GMT Enter User ID:

clrcderrs (clear detailed card errors)

The clrcderrs command clears the history of card failures (errors) associated with the specified slot.

When you enter this command the system responds with Slot Number or *. After you enter the command, the system asks you to confirm that it is OK to clear this data.

Syntax

clrcderrs <slot number | *>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot number | *>

Specifies the slot number to clear. A "*" can be entered to clear all cards.

<start_vci>

Starting VCI of the VSI control channels. This VCI value is assigned to the first VSI control channel (between the VSI master and the VSI slave residing on the UXM card in slot 3).

The last VSI control channel corresponding to communication with the VSI slave on slot 16 or 32 (depending on the number of slots in the particular IGX model) will use the VCI value of (<start_vci> + number of slots on the IGX - 2).

Range 16-slot IGX: 40-65521
Range 32-slot IGX: 40-65505

Default: 40

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspcderrs, prtcderrs

Example
pubsigx1 TN SuperUser IGX 32 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:48 GMT FRM in Slot 3 : 172240 Rev ESJ Failures Cleared: Date/Time Not Set ----------------------------------- Records Cleared: Date/Time Not Set Self Test Threshold Counter: 0 Threshold Limit: 300 Total Pass: 495 Total Fail: 0 Total Abort: 2 First Pass: Date/Time Not Set Last Pass: Apr. 13 2000 19:36:48 GMT First Fail: Last Fail: Background Test Threshold Counter: 0 Threshold Limit: 300 Total Pass: 29849 Total Fail: 0 Total Abort: 0 First Pass: Date/Time Not Set Last Pass: Apr. 13 2000 18:46:34 GMT First Fail: Last Fail: Hardware Error Total Events: 0 Threshold Counter: 0 First Event: Last Event: This Command: clrcderrs 3 OK to clear (y/n)?

After replying "y" (yes) to the confirmation prompt, the screen appears:

pubsigx1 TN SuperUser IGX 32 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:55 GMT FRM in Slot 3 : 172240 Rev ESJ Failures Cleared: Date/Time Not Set ----------------------------------- Records Cleared: Apr. 13 2000 18:55:02 GMT Self Test Threshold Counter: 0 Threshold Limit: 300 Total Pass: 0 Total Fail: 0 Total Abort: 0 First Pass: Last Pass: First Fail: Last Fail: Background Test Threshold Counter: 0 Threshold Limit: 300 Total Pass: 0 Total Fail: 0 Total Abort: 0 First Pass: Last Pass: First Fail: Last Fail: Hardware Error Total Events: 0 Threshold Counter: 0 First Event: Last Event: Last Command: clrcderrs 3 Next Command:

clrchstats (clear channel statistics)

Clears the gathered statistics for either a specific channel or all channels, including Frame Relay channels. When you enter a specific channel number, the current channel statistics display appears, asking if you want to clear the display. If you enter "*" (all channels) for the channel specification, the display prompts you to confirm whether you want to clear all channel statistics. This is sometimes referred to as a summary statistics command.

The Multilevel Channel Statistics lets you configure and display additional levels of statistics beyond level 1 statistics (for example, levels 2 and 3), as supported by the Multilevel Channels Statistics feature. You use the cnfcdparm command to configure the channels statistics level on the BXM or UXM cards.

For example, if you configure slot 5 to support level 3 channel statistics, all connections on that particular card are set to provide level 3 statistics. Switch software collects, displays, and propagates to Cisco WAN Manager the various statistics types. The channel statistic type vary in number and type based on the level of support provided by the BXM and UXM cards. You use the dspchstats and clrchstats to display and clear the statistics.

Syntax

clrchstats <channel | *>

Parameters

Parameter Description

channel

Specifies the channel whose statistics are cleared.

Frame Relay format: slot.port.DLCI.

*

Specifies all channel statistics.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Lock

1-5

Yes

Yes

IGX, BPX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchstats

Example

Clear channel statistics for 3.1.1 (BPX).

clrchstats 3.1.1

Example

Clear channel statistics for 3.1.1.

clrchstats 3.1.1

sw83 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 19:24 PST Channel Statistics: 3.1.1 Cleared: Aug. 17 1997 08:10 MIR: 3.8 kbps Collection Time: 6 day(s) 10:04:58 Corrupted: NO Frames Avg Size Avg Util Packets Avg (bytes) (fps) (%) (pps) From Port: 1516586 198 2 35 To Network: 1516215 198 2 35 16678365 30 Discarded: 371 198 0 0 From Network: 1518665 197 2 35 16705146 30 To Port: 1518629 198 2 35 Discarded: 36 120 0 0 238 0 ECN Stats: Avg Rx VC Q: 0 ForeSight RTD 40 Min-Pk bytes rcvd: 52470 FECN Frames: 0 FECN Ratio (%) 0 Minutes Congested: 0 BECN Frames: 16 BECN Ratio (%) 0 Frames rcvd in excess of CIR: 0 Bytes rcvd in excess of CIR: 0 Frames xmtd in excess of CIR: 0 Bytes xmtd in excess of CIR: 0 This Command: clrchstats 3.1.1 OK to clear (y/n)?
Example

Clear the statistics of channel 9.2.400.

clrchstats 9.2.400

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 13:24 PST Channel Statistics for 9.2.400 Cleared: Apr. 13 2000 13:23 MIR: 9.6 kbps Collection Time: 0 day(s) 00:02:42 Corrupted: NO Frames Avg Size Avg Util Packets Avg (bytes) (fps) (%) (pps) From Port: 0 0 0 0 To Network: 0 0 0 0 0 0 Discarded: 0 0 0 0 From Network: 0 0 0 0 0 0 To Port: 0 0 0 0 Discarded: 0 0 0 0 0 0 ECN Stats: Avg Rx VC Q: 0 ForeSight RTD -- Min-Pk bytes rcvd: 0 FECN Frames: 0 FECN Ratio (%) 0 Minutes Congested: 0 BECN Frames: 0 BECN Ratio (%) 0 This Command: clrchstats 9.2.400 OK to clear (y/n)?

clrclkalm (clear alarm clock)

Clears the alarm status of a clock source, either circuit line or trunk, after a problem is cleared. Before the node can use the original clock source, you must clear the alarm with clrclkalm. The system displays no messages after execution.

The clock test runs continuously in a node, comparing the frequency of the node's clock source to a reference on the BCC/CC/control card. If a clock source is found to be outside preset frequency limits, it is declared defective and another clock source is selected. In order for the node to return to the original clock source, the alarm must be cleared by using the clrclkalm command. The alarm may be either a "Bad Clock Source" or "Bad Clock Path" alarm.

Syntax

clrclkalm <line type> <line number>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<line type>

Specifies the type of line:
"c" indicates a circuit line.
"p" indicates a trunk.

<line number>

Specifies the number of the circuit line or trunk.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfclksrc, dspclksrcs, dspclns, dspcurclk, dsptrks

clrcnf (clear configuration memory)

Clears the configuration memory at the current node and resets the node.

The clrcnf command erases most network configuration data. This configuration data includes connections, trunks, circuit lines, and so on, for the local node. You might need to use the clrcnf command when you upgrade the network with a new software release or when you move a node. A warning and a confirmation prompt appear before the command executes.

This command should be used only on a node that has not yet been placed in service or when the network configuration has been previously saved so it can be quickly reloaded. The configuration can be saved in one of several ways:


Caution   Use clrcnf with extreme caution. Typically, you should use clrcnf only if the Cisco TAC has instructed you to do so. This command can make the node unreachable to the network.

Syntax

clrcnf

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

No

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

loadcnf, runcnf, savecnf

clreventq (clear event queues from the fail handler)

Clears high-water marks for fail handler event queues.

Syntax

clreventq

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspeventq

Example

Clear the fail handler event queue.

clreventq

sw151 TN SuperUser IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 19:18 GMT QUEUE LENGTH THROTTLING NUM NAMES MAX HIGH CURRENT POINT 1 Fail_Xid 26 1 7000 2 Fail_ Q 25 0 3 Mt_Sv_Q[0] 300 9 0 270 4 sv_mt_bufq 9 0 This Command: clreventq OK to clear HIGH counts(y/n)?

clrfrcportstats (clear FRC/FRM port statistics)

Clears port statistics for FRM-2 or FRP-2 physical ports connected to a Port Concentrator Shelf. To see the statistics that you clear with clrfrcportstats, execute dspfrcportstats. The controller card collects statistics from the FRM-2 or FRP-2 once per minute. Because clrfrcportstats clears statistics on the controller card, it might not clear statistics generated within the last minute.

Syntax

clrfrcportstats <slot.port | *>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.port | *>

Slot and port of the physical port. The range for port is 1-4. An asterisk (*) specifies all FRC-2/FRM-2 physical ports.

Related Commands

dspfrcportstats

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

clrlnalm (clear circuit line alarm)

Clears the alarms associated with a circuit line. Since the statistical alarms associated with a circuit line have associated integration times, they can keep a major or minor alarm active for some time after the cause has been rectified. This command allows these alarms to be cleared, allowing any new alarms to be quickly identified. The clrlnalm command can clear only alarms caused by the collection of statistical data. Alarms caused by a network failure cannot be cleared. For example, an alarm caused by a collection of bipolar errors can be cleared, but an alarm caused by a card failure cannot. (Same as alias clrclnalm.)

Syntax

clrlnalm <line_number> <fail_type>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<line_number>

Specifies the number of the line.

<fail_type>

Specifies the type of alarm to clear.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

No

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsplns, dsplnerrs

Example

Clear the minor alarm caused by frame slips on circuit line 14.

clrlnalm 14 2

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 13:10 PST Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 1) Bpv 10E-7 10 min 3 min 10E-3 10 sec 10 sec 2) Fs .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 10 sec 10 sec 3) Oof .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 10 sec 10 sec 4) Vpd 2% 5 min 3 min 5% 60 sec 10 sec 5) Tsdp .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 6) Ntsdp .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 7) Pkterr .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 125 sec 10 sec 8) Los .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 10 sec 10 sec This Command: clrlnalm 14 2 Continue?

clrlnerrs (clear line errors)

Clears the errors associated with a circuit line. Since the statistical alarms associated with a circuit line have associated integration times, they can keep a major or minor alarm active for some time after the cause has been rectified. This command allows these alarms to be cleared, allowing any new alarms to be quickly identified.

The clrlnerrs command can clear only those alarms that the collection of statistical data has caused. You cannot clear alarms caused by a network failure cannot be cleared by clrlnerrs.

Syntax

clrlnerrs [<line_number>]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<line_number>

Specifies the number of the line.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsplnerrs, prtlnerrs

Example

Clear line error counts. In response to the prompt, enter "y" to reset all line error counts to "0."

clrlnerrs

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 13:12 PST Total Errors From Code Frame Out of Loss of Frame CRC Out of CLN Errors Slips Frames Signal BitErrs Errors MFrames AIS-16 14 0 0 0 - 0 - - - Last Command: clrlnerrs Next Command:

clrlog (clear event log)

Clears the event log. When the log is cleared, one entry remains, "Info Log Cleared". Before the event log is cleared, a prompts asks you to confirm. See the dsplog command for more information on the event log.

Syntax

clrlog

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsplog

Example

Clear the event log. When the log is cleared, one entry remains, "Info Log Cleared." Enter "y" to confirm.

clrlog

sw151 TN SuperUser IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 19:19 GMT Most recent log entries (most recent at top) Class Description Date Time Info User SuperUser logged out (Local) 09/12/96 18:18:57 Major LN 5.6 Loss of Sig (RED) 09/12/96 18:12:22 Info User SuperUser logged out (Local) 09/12/96 18:11:17 Info Clock switch to oscillator of SCC 09/12/96 18:10:46 Clear LN 5.6 OK 09/12/96 18:05:11 Minor LN 5.6 Out of Multi-Frames 09/12/96 18:03:27 Info Clock switch to LINE 5.6 09/12/96 18:03:12 Clear LN 5.6 OK 09/12/96 18:02:42 Info Clock switch to oscillator of SCC 09/12/96 17:59:24 Major LN 5.6 Loss of Sig (RED) 09/12/96 17:59:24 Info Clock switch to LINE 5.6 09/12/96 17:59:20 Clear LN 5.6 OK 09/12/96 17:59:20 Major LN 5.6 Loss of Sig (RED) 09/12/96 17:58:51 This Command: clrlog OK to clear (y/n)?

clrmsgalm (clear message alarm)

Clears the minor alarm due to an alarm message received at an alarm collection port.

Syntax

clrmsgalm

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspalms, dsplog

clrphyslnalm (clear physical line alarm)

Clears the specified statistical alarm associated with a physical line on a UXM card. The physical line statistical alarms include LOS, LOF, AIS, YEL, LOP, Path AIS, and Path YEL. You can display these alarms by using the dspphysln command. These alarms are shown as the physical line status, at the top of the display, when you run the dspphysln command.

Alarms caused by a network failure cannot be cleared. For example, an alarm caused by a collection of bipolar errors can be cleared, but an alarm caused by a card failure cannot.

Syntax

clrphyslnalm <line_number> <fail_type>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<line_number>

Specifies the number of the physical line.The format is either slot (for a single-trunk card) or slot.port.

<fail_type>

Specifies the type of alarm to clear. If not specified, the system prompts with Enter Type:.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

No

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspphyslns, dspphyslnerrs

Example

Clear an alarm on physical line 10.1.

clrphyslnalm 10.1

sw199 TN StrataCom IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:10 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 1) Bpv 10E-7 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 2) Fs .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 30 sec 10 sec 3) Oof .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 30 sec 10 sec 4) Los .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 30 sec 10 sec 5) Fer .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 6) CRC .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 7) Oom .001% 10 min 3 min .1% 30 sec 10 sec 8) Ais16 .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 30 sec 10 sec This Command: clrphyslnalm 10.1 Continue? sw199 TN StrataCom IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:11 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 9) Pkoof .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 10) Pkterr .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 125 sec 10 sec 11) Badclk .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 50 sec 10 sec 12) Vpd 2% 5 min 3 min 5% 60 sec 10 sec 13) Tsdp .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 14) Ntsdp .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 15) Pccpd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 16) Bdapd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec This Command: clrphyslnalm 10.1 Continue? sw199 TN StrataCom IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:11 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 17) Bdbpd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 18) Lcv 10E-5 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 19) Pcvl 10E-7 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 20) Pcvp 10E-7 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 21) Bcv 10E-7 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 22) Rxvpd 1% 5 min 3 min 4% 60 sec 10 sec 23) Rxtspd .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 24) Rxbdapd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec This Command: clrphyslnalm 10.1 Continue? sw199 TN StrataCom IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:11 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 25) Rxbdbpd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 26) Rxntspd .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 27) Rxhppd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 28) Atmhec .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 120 sec 10 sec 29) FSyncErr .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 30) Rxspdm .01% 4 min 2 min .001% 30 sec 5 sec 31) CGWpktds .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec 32) CGWcelld .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec This Command: clrphyslnalm 10.1 Continue? sw199 TN StrataCom IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:12 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 33) Txntscds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 34) Txhpcdsc .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 35) Txvcdscd .1% 5 min 3 min .0001% 60 sec 10 sec 36) Txtscdsc .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 37) Txbdacds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 38) Txbdbcds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 39) Txcbrcds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 40) Txabrcds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec This Command: clrphyslnalm 10.1 Continue? sw199 TN StrataCom IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:12 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 41) Txvbrcds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 42) TxGwFPds .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec 43) RxGwCLds .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec This Command: clrphyslnalm 10.1 Enter Type:

clrphyslnerrs (clear UXM physical line errors)

Clears the errors associated with a UXM physical line. Since the statistical alarms associated with a circuit line have associated integration times, they can keep a major or minor alarm active for some time after the cause has been rectified. This command allows these alarms to be cleared, allowing any new alarms to be quickly identified. The clrphyslnerrs command can clear only those alarms that the collection of statistical data has caused. Alarms caused by a network failure cannot be cleared by clrphyslnerrs.

Syntax

clrphyslnerrs [<line_number>]

Parameters

Parameter Description

[<line_number>]

Specifies the physical line.The format is either slot (for a single-trunk card) or slot.port.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspphyslnerrs, prtphyslnerrs

Example

Clear UXM physical line error counts from line on port 3 of slot 11. In response to the prompt, enter "y" to reset all circuit line error counts to "0."

clrphyslnerrs 11.3

sw199 TN StrataCom IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:10 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 1) Bpv 10E-7 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 2) Fs .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 30 sec 10 sec 3) Oof .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 30 sec 10 sec 4) Los .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 30 sec 10 sec 5) Fer .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 6) CRC .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 7) Oom .001% 10 min 3 min .1% 30 sec 10 sec 8) Ais16 .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 30 sec 10 sec This Command: clrphyslnalm 10.1

clrportstats (clear port statistics)

Clears the statistics for any port card. This includes the data byte count in the transmit and receive directions and error counts associated with the port. Statistical accumulation then resumes for that port.

The clrportstats command clears statistics for a virtual port if a virtual port is specified.

Syntax

clrportstats <slot>.<port | *>[.<vport>]

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port

Specifies the slot and port number of the trunk to add.

<port | *>

Specifies the port or asterisk for all ports.

[.<vport>]

Specifies the virtual port

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspportstats

Example

Clear the port statistics for port 1 on an FRP card in slot 9. Type "y" to confirm.

clrportstats 9.1

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:57 PST Port Statistics for 9.1 Cleared: Apr. 13 2000 15:32 Port Speed: 256 kbps Collection Time: 11 day(s) 19:22:09 Corrupted: YES Bytes Average (kbps) Util (%) Frames From Port: 0 0 0 0 To Port: 0 0 0 0 Frame Errors LMI Receive Protocol Stats Misc Statistics Invalid CRC 0 Status Enq Rcvd 0 Avg Tx Port Q 0 Invalid Alignment 0 Status Xmit 0 FECN Frames 0 Invalid Frm Length 0 Asynch Xmit 0 Ratio (%) 0 Invalid Frm Format 0 Seq # Mismatches 0 BECN Frames 0 Unknown DLCIs 0 Timeouts 0 Ratio (%) 0 Last Unknown DLCI 0 Invalid Req 0 Rsrc Overflow 0 Sig Protocol: None DE Frms Dropd 0 This Command: clrportstats 9.1 OK to clear port statistics (y/n)?
Example

Clear the port statistics for port 11.1 for the BXM card. Type "y" to confirm.

clrportstats 11.1

sw53 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.m0 Dec. 13 2000 10:24 GMT Port Statistics for 11.1 Cleared: Dec. 13 2000 10:00 Port Speed: 353208 cps Collection Time: 0 day(s) 00:21:59 Corrupted: NO Cells CLP (EFCI) Rx Port: 0 0 -- Tx Port: 248 0 -- Unkn Addr (UA): 248 Rx OAM Cells : 0 Rx Clp 0 Cells: 0 Rx Clp 0 Dscd : 0 Rx Clp 1 Dscd : 0 Tx Clp 0 Cells: 248 Tx OAM Cells : 248 Rx RM Count : 0 Tx RM Count : 0 Lst Unk VpiVci: 0.0 UA sums across ports in port group. This Command: clrportstats 11.1 OK to clear port statistics (y/n)?

clrscrn (clear terminal screen)

Clears the terminal screen.

Syntax

clrscrn

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

Yes

No

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

redscrn, prtscrn

clrslotalms (clear slot alarms)

Clears the alarm messages associated with the alarms displayed for the Display Slot Alarms command. Alarm messages are cleared for the specified slot only. These counters should be cleared before beginning any monitoring session. This command prompts the user with an "OK to Clear?" message before actually clearing the counters.

Use dspslotalms to observe the slot alarms. Refer to the dspslotalms command for a description of the counters cleared by the clrslotalms command.

Syntax

clrslotalms <slot>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot>

Specifies the number of the shelf slot in the BPX node.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

Yes

Yes

BPX

Yes

Related Commands

dspslotalms

Example

Clear alarm on slot 3.

clrslotalms 3

clrsloterrs (clear slot errors)

Clears the counters for the error counts displayed for the Display Slot Errors command. Counters are cleared for the specified slot only. These counters should be cleared before beginning any monitoring session. This command prompts the user with an "OK to Clear?" message before actually clearing the counters.

Use dspsloterrs to observe the slot errors. Refer to the dspsloterrs command for a description of the counters cleared by the clrsloterrs command.

Syntax

clrsloterrs <slot number | *>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot number | *>

Specifies the shelf slot in the node or an asterisk for all shelf slots.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspsloterrs

Example

Clear the slot errors in slot 3.

clrsloterrs 3

clrtrkalm (clear trunk alarm)

Clears statistical alarms associated with either a physical or virtual trunk. Note that if a virtual trunk is specified for a command that configures information related to the physical port, then the physical port information is configured for all virtual trunks. This means that using clrtrkalm clears parameters on a logical trunk basis, but any changes automatically affect all trunks on the port when you change a physical option. Any changes you make to a virtual trunk on a port affect all virtual trunks on that port.

Since the statistical alarms associated with a trunk have associated integration times, they can keep a major or minor alarm active for some time after the cause has been rectified. The clrtrkalm allows these alarms to be cleared, allowing any new alarms to be quickly identified.

The clrtrkalm command can clear only alarms caused by the collection of statistical data. Alarms caused by a network failure cannot be cleared. For example, an alarm caused by a collection of bipolar errors can be cleared, but an alarm caused by a card failure cannot.

Note that a virtual trunk also has trunk port alarms that are shared with all the other virtual trunks on that port. You clear and set these alarms together for all the virtual trunks sharing the same port.

Alarms for the BXM and UXM card types are cleared and displayed differently.

Syntax

clrtrkalm <trunk number> <failure type>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<trunk number>

Specifies the trunk. Note that for virtual trunks, no virtual trunk parameter is required—just slot.port. The format is either slot (for a single-trunk card) or slot.port.

<failure type>

Specifies the type of alarm to clear.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsptrks, dsptrkerrs

Example

Display trunk alarm configuration.

clrtrkalm 4.2

------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p8 Dec. 13 2000 10:38 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 1) Bpv 10E-7 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 2) Fs .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 30 sec 10 sec 3) Oof .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 30 sec 10 sec 4) Los .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 30 sec 10 sec 5) Fer .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 6) CRC .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 7) Oom .001% 10 min 3 min .1% 30 sec 10 sec 8) Ais16 .0001% 10 min 3 min .01% 30 sec 10 sec This Command: clrtrkalm 4.2 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p8 Dec. 13 2000 10:34 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 9) Pkoof .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 10) Pkterr .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 125 sec 10 sec 11) Badclk .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 50 sec 10 sec 12) Vpd 2% 5 min 3 min 5% 60 sec 10 sec 13) Tsdp .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 14) Ntsdp .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 15) Pccpd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 16) Bdapd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec This Command: clrtrkalm 4.2 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p8 Dec. 13 2000 10:34 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 17) Bdbpd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 18) Lcv 10E-5 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 19) Pcvl 10E-7 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 20) Pcvp 10E-7 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 21) Bcv 10E-7 10 min 3 min 10E-3 30 sec 10 sec 22) Rxvpd 1% 5 min 3 min 4% 60 sec 10 sec 23) Rxtspd .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 24) Rxbdapd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec This Command: clrtrkalm 4.2 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 4----------------------------------- sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p8 Dec. 13 2000 10:34 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 25) Rxbdbpd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 26) Rxntspd .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 27) Rxhppd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 28) Atmhec .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 120 sec 10 sec 29) FSyncErr .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 30) Rxspdm .01% 4 min 2 min .001% 30 sec 5 sec 31) CGWpktds .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec 32) CGWcelld .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec This Command: clrtrkalm 4.2 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 5----------------------------------- sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p8 Dec. 13 2000 10:35 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 33) Txntscds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 34) Txhpcdsc .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 35) Txvcdscd .1% 5 min 3 min .0001% 60 sec 10 sec 36) Txtscdsc .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 37) Txbdacds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 38) Txbdbcds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 39) Txcbrcds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 40) Txabrcds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec This Command: clrtrkalm 4.2 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 6----------------------------------- sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p8 Dec. 13 2000 10:35 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 41) Txvbrcds .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 42) TxGwFPds .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec 43) RxGwCLds .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec 44) CGWfrmab .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec This Command: clrtrkalm 4.2 Enter Type:
Example

Clear alarms on trunk 4.2

------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p8 Dec. 13 2000 11:09 GMT Last Command: clrtrkalm 4.2 4 ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p8 Dec. 13 2000 11:05 GMT TRK Type Current Line Alarm Status Other End 4.2 OC3 Clear - OK sw180/5.1 4.4 OC3 Clear - OK sw53/11.2 14 T1/24 Clear - OK sw180/8 Last Command: dsptrks

clrtrkerrs (clear trunk errors)

Clears the statistical error counters at the node for the specified physical or virtual trunk. You should do this before you begin any monitoring session and periodically thereafter to determine exactly when a trunk problem begins. Use dsptrkerrs to observe errors without clearing counters.

Syntax

clrtrkerrs <trunk_number | *>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<trunk_number | *>

Specifies the trunk counter to clear or asterisk for all trunks.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsptrkerrs, prttrkerrs

Example

Clear all trunk errors.

clrtkerrs *

pubsbpx1 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 19:37 PST Total Errors Code Rx Cell Out of Loss of Frame HCS Tx Cell Cell Cell TRK Errors Dropped Frames Signal BitErrs Errors Dropped Errors Oofs 1.1 0 0 0 0 - 0 0 - - 1.2 0 0 0 0 - 0 0 - - This Command: clrtrkerrs * Clears errors on all trunks. Continue (y/n)?

clrtrkstats (clear trunk statistics)

Clears the node counters used for the Display Trunk Statistics. Counters are cleared for a physical or virtual trunk. You should clear these counters before beginning any monitoring session. This is similar to the clrtrkerrs command for errors. This command prompts you with an "OK to Clear?" message before actually clearing the counters.

Use dsptrkstats to observe the trunk statistics. See the dsptrkstats command for a description of the counters cleared by the clrtrkstats command.

Syntax

clrtrkstats <trunk number>

Parameters

Parameter Description

trunk number

Specifies the trunk. Note that, for virtual trunks, no virtual trunk parameter is required—just slot.port. The format is either slot (for a single-trunk card) or slot.port.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsptrkstats

Example

Clear the statistics on trunk 4.4.

clrtrkstats

sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p8 Dec. 13 2000 11:17 GMT Trunk 4.4 Clear - OK Collection Time: 0 day(s) 00:00:00 Clrd: 12/11/00 16:18:00 Type Count QBIN: NTS Cells Tx to line 0 QBIN: Tx NTS Cells Received 0 QBIN: Tx NTS Cells Discarded 0 QBIN: Hi-Pri Cells Tx to line 0 QBIN: Tx Hi-Pri Cells Received 0 QBIN: Tx Hi-Pri Cells Discarded 0 QBIN: Voice Cells Tx to line 0 QBIN: Tx Voice Cells Received 0 QBIN: Tx Voice Cells Discarded 0 QBIN: TimeStamped Cells Tx to ln 0 QBIN: Tx TS Cells Received 0 QBIN: Tx TS Cells Discarded 0 This Command: clrtrkstats 4.4 OK to clear (y/n)?

cnfabrparm (configure assigned bit rate queue parameters)

Configures parameters for the Assigned Bit Rate (ABR) queue on all ports on the selected UXM.

You can toggle the Egress/Ingress Congestion Information control and/or the ABR RM cell Explicit Rate stamping parameters on and off. All ports on the UXM in the selected slot are dynamically reconfigured according to the new parameters.

Syntax

cnfabrparm <slot> <CI_control> <ER_control>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot>

Specifies the slot number of the UXM card.

<CI_control>

Enables or disables Egress/Ingress Congestion Information control.

<ER_control>

Enables or disables ABR RM cell Explicit Rate stamping.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfportq, dspportq, cnfport, dspport

Example

Configure assigned bit rate queue parameters for slot 5.

cnfabrparm 5

sw205 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 04:50 GMT ABR Configuration for UXM in slot 5 CI Control : N Egress ER Stamping : N This Command: cnfabrparm 5

cnfadcmtmr (configure access device congestion management timer)

The timer is applicable only if ForeSight is active.

The configuration management timer specifies how often rate-adjustment messages are passed between the FTC and the access device. This timer mechanism lets the congestion management provided by ForeSight extend to access devices. If you enter a 0 for the value, the interface card and device do not exchange rate adjustment messages.

Syntax

cnfadcmtmr <slot.port> <Cong. Mgmt. Timer>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.port>

Specifies the slot and port number.

<Cong. Mgmt. Timer>

The setting for the timer. The number you enter is actually a multiplier for the base of 10 milliseconds, so the granularity is automatically
10 milliseconds.
Multiplier range: 4-350
Timer range: 40-3500 milliseconds
Default (no user-input): 100 milliseconds
To disable the timer, enter a 0.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

addad, dspads

Example

Configure the congestion management timer for port 3 of the card in slot 4 for 350 milliseconds.

cnfadcmtmr 4.3 350

sw25 TN SuperUser IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 11:17 GMT FrontCard BackCard Type Rev Type Rev Status 1 Empty 2 Empty 3 CDP BFC E1 AD Active 4 FTC CF15 FPC-V35 AA Active 5 AIT AJF AIT-T3 AE Active 6 NTC EUJ E1 AN Active 7 Empty 8 FTC BHJ FPC-V35 AA Standby This Command: cnfadcmtmr 4.3 Enter Cong Mgmt. Timer (0=Disabld or 40-350 in 10ms units): 350

cnfadcon (configure access device connection)

Configures bandwidth parameters for the trunk connection between an access device and the FTC. The parameters for cnfadcon are bidirectional. (Type a slash between the parameter for each direction.) The first parameter is from the node to the access device. The second parameter is from the access device to the node. An asterisk (*) indicates that the value is to remain unchanged for that direction. The only parameter that is not bidirectional is FST (ForeSight enable = y or n).

The command line interface does not prompt for individual bandwidth parameters. Therefore, refer to the cnfadcon options table to see the order in which you type the parameters.

Syntax

cnfadcon <slot.port> <bw_parameters>

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port

Specifies the slot and port on an FTC for an access device connection.

bw_parameters

The bandwidth parameters are:

  • MIR/MIR is defined as fr_MIR_Tx /fr_MIR_Rx, where fr_MIR is the minimum information rate for a connection.
    Range: 2.4 Kbps-2048 Kbps

  • CIR/CIR is defined as fr_CIR_Tx and fr_CIR_Rx, where fr_CIR is defined as the committed information rate guaranteed to the user. Range: 2.4 Kbps-2048 Kbps

  • VC_Q/VC_Q is defined as fr_vc_q_Tx/fr_vc_q_Rx, where fr_vc_q Tx is the maximum transmit VC queue depth.
    VC_Q range: 1-65535 bytes. (An alternative to this parameter is possible, as the description of Bc shows.)

    OR:

    Bc/Bc is defined as fr_Bc_Tx /fr_Bc_Rx. Bc has meaning for only ForeSight connections. If you have selected Frame Relay Forum standard parameters (through the cnfsysparm command), the Committed Burst (Bc) parameter appears instead of VC_Q. Bc is the amount of data the network can accept over a variable time interval (Tc) for committed delivery on a specific PVC. The range for Bc is 1-65535 bytes. The relationship between Bc and VC_Q is:

    Bc = VC_Q / ((1 - (CIR/port speed))

  • PIR/PIR is defined as fr_PIR_Tx /fr_PIR_Rx, where fr_PIR_Tx is the peak transmit rate for the PVC. The PIR range is 2.4-2048 Kbps. You can also specify the value 0 to cause PIR to default to the port speed. Thus, you can modify PIR, leave it the same, or set it to the port speed. (An alternative specification for this parameter is possible, as the description of Be shows.)

    or

    Be/Be is defined as fr_Be_Tx /fr_Be_Rx. If you have selected Frame Relay Forum standard parameters (through the cnfsysparm command), the PVC uses Excess Burst (Be) instead of PIR. Be is the amount of transmit/receive data above the number of bytes set by Bc if enough bandwidth is available. Specify Be in bytes within the range 1-65535. Delivery of Be-data is not guaranteed. Be has meaning to only ForeSight. The relationship between Be and PIR is:

    Be = Bc * ((PIR/CIR) - 1)

bw_parameters

  • Cmax/Cmax is defined as fr_cmax_Tx /fr_cmax_Rx, where cmax is the maximum credits the connection can accrue. The Cmax range is 1-255 packets per second (pps).

  • ECNQ_thresh/ECNQ_thresh are the transmit and receive threshold settings for the explicit congestion notification control queues. The range for ECNQ_thresh is 1-65535 bytes.

  • QIR/QIR is defined as fr_QIR_Tx /fr_QIR_Rx, where fr_QIR is the quiescent information rate for a connection, which is the initial transmit rate after a period of inactivity on the channel. If you do not specify the quiescent receive rate fr_QIR_Rx, the system sets it to the transmit value. The values are specified in Kbps and must be in the range MIR-PIR. In addition, you can specify the value 0 to default to the MIR. QIR has meaning for only ForeSight connections.

  • FST enables or disables (purchased) ForeSight option for a connection. Valid entries are y (use ForeSight) or n (do not use ForeSight). If the ForeSight status changes, the network reroutes the connection.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspcon, cnffrcon, cnfcon

Example

Configure the device trunk at port 2 of the card in slot 4 to have MIR (and so on) of 76.8 Kbps.

cnfadcon 4.2 76.8/76.8

sw25 TN SuperUser IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:44 GMT Conn: 4.2.100 ] sw25 4.3.101 session 76 Kbps Status:OK MIR CIR VC Q Depth PIR Cmax ECN QThresh QIR 76.8/76.8 76.8/76.8 600/600 76.8/76.8 1/1 300/300 76.8/76.8 Priority: H TestRTD: 0 msec FST: n % Util: 100/100 Path: Route information not applicable for local connections sw25 FTC: OK sw25 FTC: OK FPC: OK FPC: OK Access Device: OK Access Device: OK Last Command: cnfadcon 4.2.100 76.8/76.8 Next Command:

cnfapsln (configure APS line parameters)

Configure SONET APS Line Redundancy according to industry standards. The IGX platform supports ATM trunk redundancy; the BPX supports SONET APS line redundancy. APS line redundancy provides a standards-based solution to line redundancy.


Note   For the Annex A protocol, you cannot set both the Bidirectional and Nonrevertive options—they are invalid combinations. For the Annex B protocol option, the default is Bidirectional and Nonrevertive.

Syntax

cnfapsln <slot.port> <SFBER> < SDBER> <Revertive_mode> <WTR> <Direction>

Parameters

Parameter Description Range/Options

slot.port

Slot and port of the line you want to configure.

-

SFBER (Signal Fail Bit Error Rate)

Signal Fail Bit Error Rate threshold at which point an APS switch occurs.

Default: 3
Range: 3-12

SDBER (Signal Detect Bit Error Rate)

Signal Detect Bit Error Rate for line degradation.

Default 5
Range: 5-12

Revertive mode

Revert to Working line after Wait to Restore interval expires. You must enter the number 0 or 1. This applies only to automatic switches. Revertive switching does not take place as a result of user-initiated switching.

For Annex A, the default is non-revertive.
For Annex B, the default is non-revertive.
For Annex B, you are not allowed to change to unidirectional or revertive mode.

Default: 1
Range: 0-1

0 = revertive
1 = non-revertive

WTR (Wait to Restore)

Wait to restore interval. After a switch from a Working to a Protection line, this is the interval in minutes to wait before attempting to switch back to the Working line. This is not applicable if the Revertive Mode option is set to N (non-revertive).

Default: 5

Range: 1-12 minutes

Direction

Direction of switching. Unidirectional is switching in only one direction. With Bidirectional, after one side switches, then the other side also switches.

For Annex A, the default is unidirectional.
For Annex B, default is bidirectional. For Annex B, you are not allowed to change to unidirectional or revertive mode.

Default: 0 (unidirectional)

Range: 0-1, where
0 is unidirectional and
1 is bidirectional.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-4

No

Yes

BPX

Yes

Related Commands

addapsln, delapsln, cnfapsln, dspapsln, dsplog, dspalms, switchapsln

Example

Configures APS line parameters.

cnfapsln 1.1

alexa TRM genre BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 16:15 PDT APS Configuration parameters for Working, Protection lines 1.1, 1.2 APS Protocol: 1+1 Signal Fail BER threshold (10 to the -n): 3 Signal Detect BER threshold (10 to the -n): 5 Revertive Switching: Yes Wait to Restore Timer: 5 minutes Uni/Bi Directional Switching: Unidirectional Command: cnfapsln 1.1
Example

Configures APS line parameters.

cnfapsln 1.1

colossus TN StrataCom BPX 8600 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 16:08 PDT APS Configuration parameters for Working, Protection lines 1.1, 1.2 APS Protocol: 1+1 Signal Fail BER threshold (10 to the -n): 3 Signal Detect BER threshold (10 to the -n): 5 Revertive Switching: Yes Wait to Restore Timer: 5 minutes Uni/Bi Directional Switching: Unidirectional Command: cnfapsln 1.1
Example

Configures APS line parameters for APS 1:1 line redundancy

cnfapsln 6.3

colossus TN StrataCom BPX 8600 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 16:08 PDT APS Configuration parameters for Working, Protection lines 6.3, 6.4 APS Protocol: 1+1 Channels Halved for APS operation: Yes APS Standard for Card: GR-253 Signal Fail BER Threshold (10 to the -n): 3 Signal Detect BER Threshold (10 to the -n): 5 Uni/Bi Directional Switching: Bidirectional Revertive Switching: Yes Wait to Restore Timer: 5 minute(s) Command: cnfapsln 6.3

cnfasm (configure ASM card)

Sets configurable parameters associated with the BPX Alarm and Status Monitor card in slot 15. Because this card always resides in slot 15, entering the slot number is unnecessary. Robust alarms are generated for these alarm conditions:

These alarm conditions above appear in the maintenance log or in the node command line interface commands (dspasm), and are not also reported as SNMP trap to the customer NMS. (Such traps are generated by the Cisco WAN Manager RTM proxy upon receiving Robust Alarms from a switch.)

In Release 9.2 and above, robust alarms are generated by the BPX when power and temperature alarm conditions are detected by the ASM card. The ASM card monitors and reports events involving:

You configure and control the reporting of these events by using the cnfasm command, where you can enable or disable each alarm. For power supply failure/removal events, you can also specify the alarm class (that is, Major vs. Minor).

A robust alarm is generated by these events:

Syntax

cnfasm

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspasm

Example

Configure parameters for the ASM card

cnfasm

D1.jea TRM SuperUser BPX 8600 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 12:25 GMT [1] Cabinet temp threshold: 50 C [4] Polling interval (msec): 10000 [2] Power A deviation: 6 V [5] Fan threshold (RPM): 2000 [3] Power B deviation: 6 V ALM ALM [6] ACO button - [14] BPX card slot - [7] History button - [15] PSU A failure Y [8] Cabinet temp Y [16] PSU A removed Y [9] Power A volt Y [17] PSU B failure Y [10] Power B volt Y [18] PSU B removed Y [11] Fan 1 RPM Y [12] Fan 2 RPM Y [13] Fan 3 RPM Y This Command: cnfasm Which parameter do you wish to change:

cnfatmcls (configure class template)

Use cnfatmcls to modify the ten Cisco-supplied class templates for ATM connection configuration. (The addcon command can take a class as an input.)

When you enter the number of the class to configure, the display shows the current value of each parameter in the class. For each item in the class, a prompt appears for changing or keeping the current value.

You can use cnfatmcls and cnfcls to configure the rt-VBR ATM connection class. You can use dspatmcls and dspcls to display the connection parameters for the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR connection classes.

The rt-VBR connections are configured per class 3 service parameters, and nrt-VBR connections are configured per class 2 service parameters. You can change these class parameters by using the cnfcls/cnfatmcls commands, or you can enter the parameters individually for each connection by specifying yes to the extended parameters prompt of the addcon command.


Note   For a new node running software Release 9.2.20 or later, the rt-VBR connection class number is 3. An upgraded node will retain existing connection classes. Therefore, it won't have the rt-VBR connection class 3. However, you can configure the connection classes to desired service and parameters by using the cnfcls/cnfatmcls commands. For nrt-VBR connections in a new node, running Release 9.2.20, a number of connection classes are preconfigured, including 2, 4, 5, and 6.

Syntax

cnfatmcls <class number> [optional parameters]

Parameters

Parameter Description

class

Specifies the class to configure. Range: 1-10

optional parameters

Individual parameters are specific to the type of connection (rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, CBR, UBR, ATFST, ATFR, ABRSTD, ABRFST, ATFT, ATFX, ATFTFST, ATFXFST). Each is prompted one at a time. Refer to the dspcls command to see the parameters in each of the classes.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

addcon, cnfatmcls, dspatmcls, cnfcls, dspcls

Example

Configure ATM connection class 10. The command line interface (CLI) displays the current settings and requests the class type (see System Response 1). After you enter a class type, the CLI prompts you to specify each parameter for the selected class type (ABRSTD as System Response 2 shows).

cnfatmcls 10

sw60 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Date/Time Not Set ATM Connection Classes Class: 10 Type: CBR PCR(0+1) % Util CDVT(0+1) Policing 4000/4000 100/100 10000/10000 4 Description: "Default CBR 4000" This Command: cnfatmcls 10 Enter class type (rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR, CBR, ATFST, ATFR, ABRSTD, ABRFST, ATFT, ATFX, ATFTFST, ATFXFST): sw60 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Date/Time Not Set ATM Connection Classes Class: 10 Type: ABRSTD PCR(0+1) % Util MCR CDVT(0+1) AAL5 FBTC 4000/4000 100/100 4000/4000 10000/10000 n Description: "Default CBR 4000" This Command: cnfatmcls 10 abrstd * * * * * Do you want this change (y/n)?
Example

Configure ATM connection class 3 for rt-VBR class type connection parameters. The command line interface (CLI) displays the current settings and requests the class type.

cnfatmcls 3

sw60 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Date/Time Not Set ATM Connection Classes Class: 3 Type: rt-VBR PCR(0+1) % Util CDVT(0+1) AAL5 FBTC SCR 2000/2000 100/100 10000/10000 n 2000/2000 MBS Policing 1000/1000 3 Description: "Default rt-VBR 2000" This Command: cnfatmcls 3 Enter class type (rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR, CBR, ATFST, ATFR, ABRSTD, ABRFST, ATFT, ATFX, ATFTFST, ATFXFST):

cnfbmpparm (configure priority bumping)

Configures priority bumping parameters.

Priority bumping requires a number of configuration parameters saved in the BRAM and sent to the Standby Processor card. The parameters consist of a feature activation flag, a bundle size, and a set of seven CoS bands (0-7), implicitly defining eight CoS bands. Unlike AutoRoute capabilities, which include a number of different operational flavors, priority bumping is strictly a CoS-based (or, more accurately, band-based) algorithm. Each band is defined by the low-end CoS value within the band. Band 0 (implicitly defined) is the most important one, whereas Band 7 is the least important. Each connection within a band is equally important, despite the fact that it might be tagged with a different CoS. Note that Band 0 is not bumpable.

A minimum of two bands are required to be defined for the priority bumping feature to work. A network with only one band is equivalent to having the priority bumping feature disabled.

The entire network must be upgraded to 9.3.0 in order for the priority bumping feature to be operational.

Use these steps to setup priority bumping:


Step 1   For a BPX switch, a license must be purchased for each BPX node on the network using the cnfswfunc 6 e command (see the first Example). The Cisco System Engineer enters the password to purchase priority bumping license. The license is granted immediately with the correct password.

Step 2   From either an IGX switch or a BPX switch, enable priority bumping from any node on the network using the cnfbmpparm. Parameter changes made at one node are propagated to the rest of the network, then updated both to the BRAM and Standby Processor card.

The default configuration when priority bumping is enabled:

Band 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CoS

0/1

2/3

4/5

6/7

8/9

10/11

12/13

14/15

Step 3   To test priority bumping (optional) you can create an environment to "stress" bandwidth resources and see how the feature works. For example:

    1. Delete a trunk.

    2. Physically remove a cable to a connection.

    3. Add connections to create limited bandwidth resources on a trunk.

You then can use the dspcons command to view connection routing.

Step 4   To display the CoS-based loads, use the dspload command. Information about the CoS-based loads within each band helps you determine where to add connections in a priority bumping environment. The loads are displayed for a trunk. The total capacity is shown at the bottom of the display, and the load for each Band is displayed at the top. Any connection that is added to a band could bump and utilize bandwidth resources for the band that follows it; for example, adding a connection to Band 5 can bump connections in Band 6 and Band 7, allowing connections in Band 5 to utilize the bandwidth from those bands.


Limitations
Syntax

cnfbmpparm [1 [<enable>|<disable>] ]

[2 <bundle> ]

[3 <b1> <b2> [<b3> [<b4> [<b5> [<b6> [<b7>]]]]]]

Parameters

Parameter Values Description

Priority Bumping Enabled

ON or OFF

Default OFF

This flag specifies whether the priority bumping feature is activated on the node.

Priority Bumping Bundle

Range: 1-50
Default 10

The number of connections that can be selected in a priority bumping routing request.

Bumping Band 1

Range: 1-50

Default 2

The lowest value in the second most important CoS band. Connections with a CoS value below Bumping Band 1 are implicitly grouped as the most important band, Band 0.

Connections in Band 0 can bump those in other bands, but cannot be bumped.

Connections in Band 1 can bump those in bands 2-7, and can only be bumped by those in Band 0.

Bumping Band 2

Range: 1-15

Default 4

The lowest value in the third most important CoS band. Connections in this band can bump those in bands 3-7, and can be bumped by those in bands 0-1.

Bumping Band 2 cannot be less than Bumping Band 1. If they are equal, the band definition ends.

Bumping Band 3

Range: 1-15

Default 6

The lowest value in the fourth most important CoS band. Connections in this band can bump those in bands 4-7, and can be bumped by those in bands 0-2.

Bumping Band 3 cannot be less than Bumping Band 2. If they are equal, the band definition ends.

Bumping Band 4

Range: 1-15

Default 8

The lowest value in the fifth most important CoS band. Connections in this band can bump those in bands 5-7, and can be bumped by those in bands 0-3.

Bumping Band 4 cannot be less than Bumping Band 3. If they are equal, the band definition ends.

Bumping Band 5

Range: 1-15

Default 10

The lowest value in the sixth most important CoS band. Connections in this band can bump those in bands 6-7, and can be bumped by those in bands 0-4.

Bumping Band 5 cannot be less than Bumping Band 4. If they are equal, the band definition ends.

Bumping Band 6

Range: 1-15

Default 12

The lowest value in the seventh most important CoS band. Connections in this band can only bump those in Band 7, and can be bumped by those in bands 0-5.

Bumping Band 6 cannot be less than Bumping Band 5. If they are equal, the band definition ends.

Bumping Band 7

Range: 1-15

Default 14

The lowest value in the least important CoS band. Connections in this band cannot bump, but can be bumped by those in bands 0-6.

Bumping Band 7 cannot be less than Bumping Band 6.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Card Type and Memory Requirement Lock

1-2

No

No

IGX or BPX

NPM-32
NPM-64
BCC-64.

Yes

Related Commands

dspbmpparm, dspbmpstats

Example

Purchase priority bumping on a BPX using the cnfswfunc command, option 6

cnfswfunc 6 e

--------------------------------------------- bpx1 TN StrataCom BPX 8620 9.3.0K Jan. 26 2000 14:16 PST Index Status Function 1 Enabled Configuration Save/Restore 2 Enabled ForeSight 3 Enabled Multiple VTs (6 sessions enabled) 4 Enabled Virtual Trunks 5 Enabled ABR standard with VSVD 6 Enabled Priority Bumping Last Command: cnfswfunc 6 e
Example

CoS-based loads.

igxaf1 TN StrataCom IGX 8420 9.3 the.0F Jan. 10 2000 15:33 PST Configured Trunk Loading: TRK igxaf1 16.4--10.1 bpx2 Band: CoS Xmt-c Rcv-c B1 : 1- 1 191 191 Conid In Use+Avail 256 B2 : 2- 2 288 288 B3 : 3- 3 1036 1036 VPC conids: 0/256 B4 : 4- 4 216 216 B5 : 5- 5 216 216 Trunk type is Terrestrial B6 : 6-13 900 900 Trunk supports cell routing B7 :14-15 300 300 Trunk does not use ZCS Total In Use 3147 3147 Trunk end supports all gateway types Reserved 400 400 Gateway conns: 28/200 Available 75 75 Traffic: V TS NTS FR FST CBR NRT-VBR ABR Total Capacity 3622 3622 RT-VBR Lcn/GwLcn bmap, oe: 7F/5F,7F/00
Example

Default Setup, Eight CoS Bands.

The default configuration is priority bumping disabled. However, when the feature is simply enabled (without changing the other banding parameters), the network would operate with eight CoS bands.

Band 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CoS

0/1

2/3

4/5

6/7

8/9

10/11

12/13

14/15

Example

Refined Granularity of CoS Banding.

A sample PB_Band configuration of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 11 and 13 provides a better granularity of CoS banding at the more important end of the spectrum.

Band 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CoS

0

1

2

3

4

5-10

11/12

13-15

Another sample PB_Band configuration of 3, 5, 8, 12, 13, 14 and 15 provides a better granularity of CoS banding at the less important end of the spectrum.

Band 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CoS

0-2

3/4

5-7

8-11

12

13

14

15

Example

Reduced CoS Banding, Better Operational Performance.

A sample PB_Band configuration of 1, 2, 8, 9, 9, 9 and 9 provides a reduced CoS banding, thus allowing better routing performance (with fewer iterations through the bands).

Band 0 1 2 3 4

CoS

0

1

2-7

8

9-15

This screen illustrates how the bands are configured, then displayed.

------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw53 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.m0 Dec. 13 2000 10:03 GMT 1 Priority Bumping Enabled [ YES] 2 Priority Bumping Bundle [ 50] (D) 3 Priority Bumping Bands: Band 1 [ 1] (D) Band 2 [ 2] (D) Band 3 [ 8] (D) Band 4 [ 9] (D) Band 5 [ 9] (D) Band 6 [ 9] (D) Band 7 [ 9] (D) Last Command: cnfbmpparm 3 1 2 8 9 9 ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw53 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.m0 Dec. 13 2000 10:00 GMT Priority Bumping Enabled [ YES] Priority Bumping Bundle [ 50] Priority Bumping Bands: Band 0 (non-bumpable) [ 0- 0] Band 1 [ 1- 1] Band 2 [ 2- 7] Band 3 [ 8- 8] Band 4 [ 9-15] Priority Bumping Active on this node [ NO] Number of bumpable Bands [ 0] Last Command: dspbmpparm
Example

Minimum CoS Banding.

Another sample PB_Band configuration of 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 and 1 provides a minimum CoS banding of only two bands).

Band 0 1

CoS

0

1-15

cnfbus (configure active bus)

Use the dspbuses command to display the current bus configuration when configuring the buses with the cnfbus command. It should only be necessary to use this command when a problem is suspected with the currently active System Bus. As a safeguard against bus failure, each node is equipped with redundant System Buses, Bus A and Bus B. Either bus can be configured as the active bus and the remaining bus is reserved as standby.

Syntax

cnfbus <a | b | t | l>

Parameters

Parameter Description

a

Select Bus A as the active bus.

b

Select Bus B as the active bus.

t

Toggles between buses. It changes the standby bus to the active bus and the active bus to the standby bus.

l

Toggles between buses and lanes. It changes the standby bus to the active bus and the standby lane to the active lane and the active bus to the standby bus and the active lane to the standby lane.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-3

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspbuses

Example

Configure the system bus to toggle.

cnfbus t

pubsigx1 TN SuperUser IGX 32 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 19:42 GMT Bus Info Bus Bandwidth usage in Fastpackets/second (Snapshot) Allocated = 20000 ( 2%) Available = 1148000 (98%) ----------- Bus A: Standby - OK Bus B: Active - OK Last Command: cnfbus t Next Command:

cnfbusbw (configure UXM card bus bandwidth)

Configures the amount of bandwidth allocated on the bus for a specified UXM card. The default amount of bus bandwidth allocated depends on the connection type you are adding; 77 Mbps (1/2 OC-3 rate) of bus bandwidth is allocated to an OC-3 port card when the first line is upped. For the T3/E3 line, 44/34 Mbps (T3/E3 rate) is allocated as default bus bandwidth. For a T1/E1 line, the amount of bandwidth allocated will be enough for all T1/E1 lines supported on the card.

After the default bus bandwidth is allocated, the system will not allocate any more bus bandwidth to the card when you activate more lines, so you must manually allocate the bus bandwidth to the card using the cnfbusbw command. All ports on the UXM in the selected slot are dynamically reconfigured according to the new parameters.

Syntax

cnfbusbw <slot><bw>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot>

Specifies the slot number of the UXM.

<bw>

Specifies the amount of bandwidth to be allocated in UBUs, which the system converts to either FastPackets per second or cells per second. The maximum rate you can set is 288,000 cells per second, which is 72 UBUs. Each UBU is the equivalent of 4000 cells per second.

Display Fields

Display Description

Minimum Required Bandwidth

Minimum bandwidth in FastPackets per second and cells per second required for all connections currently configured on this card. This is calculated by UXM firmware as connections are added.

Maximum Port Bandwidth

Total bandwidth of all active trunks/ports on this card in FastPackets per second, cells per second and UBUs.

Average Bandwidth and Peak Used Bandwidth

Statistics counters maintained by UXM firmware. These statistic counters display FastPackets per second, cells per second, and UBUs. Use this information when calculating the amount of bus bandwidth to be allocated. These counters are cleared when the UXM card is reset.

Last Updated time

Shows the time when the counters were last updated. This will be the current time if you answered yes to the Get updated bandwidth info from card (Y/N)? prompt or entered the command with the u parameter.

Allocated Bandwidth

The bandwidth allocated for this card using the cnfbusbw command. Allocated bandwidth is specified in UBU units and converted to either FastPackets per second or cells per second by the system.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspbusbw (a standard user command)

Example

Configure the bandwidth on the UXM card in slot 3 of the IGX.

cnfbusbw 3

sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p8 Dec. 13 2000 11:47 GMT Bus Bandwidth Usage for UXM card in slot 3 Last Updated on 12/13/00 11:45:46 FPkts/sec Cells/sec UBUs Minimum Reqd Bandwidth: 0 19549 5 Average Used Bandwidth: 0 0 0 Peak Used Bandwidth: 0 2 1 Maximum Port Bandwidth: - 1059624 265 Allocated Bandwidth: 1 (Cell Only): - 4000 (Cell+Fpkt): 2000 3000 (Fpkts / 2 + Cells) <= 4000 Reserved Bandwidth: - 4000 1 Last Command: cnfbusbw 3

cnfcassw (configure CAS switching)

Configures a UVM to convert channel associated signaling (CAS) and dual-tone multi-frequency (DTMF) tones to common channel signaling (CCS) call control messages. This conversion is necessary for voice networks in which a Voice Network Switch (VNS) uses SVCs to route calls from a CAS-based PBX through a WAN. Model B or later firmware on the UVM is necessary.

Before you can execute cnfcassw:

Syntax

cnfcassw <line> <mode> <CCS type> <CAS type> <conn type> <country code>
<interdigit timeout> <tone level> <DTMF duration> <idle pattern> <parameters 6-18>


Note   For the initial implementation of CAS switching, you should specify only port 1 for the line parameter (where line has the format slot.port) and select "PBX-end" for mode.

Parameters

Parameter Description Default

line

Specifies the line in the format slot.port. The line must be up before you can execute cnfcassw.

mode

Possible entries are "p" for PBX-end, "s" for server-end, or "o" for off. The applications are as follows:

  • PBX-end applies to a UVM connected to a PBX. Specify PBX-end mode if you plan to add the signaling channel (using addcon) at the UVM connected to the PBX (rather than the CVM or UVM connected to the VNS).

  • Server-end applies to a UVM connected to the VNS. Specify Server if you plan to add the signaling channel (using addcon) at the UVM connected to the VNS (rather than the PBX).

  • Off means the UVM is not in CAS-switching mode.

off

CCS type

Range: 1-4.
A 1 selects Q.SIG.

1

CAS type

Range: 1-32. A 1 specifies AB signaling for 2-wire E&M line.

1

conn type

Specifies the type of voice connection.
Range: a32 and a24.

a32

country code

Range: 0-0xFF. For example, 0 is the U.S. country code.

0

interdigit timeout

Range: 0-0xFF,
where each hexadecimal value you enter is a multiplier of 50 millisecond increments.

05, which results in
250 ms.

tone level

Specifies the dB level of the DTMF below 0 dBm.
Range: 0-0xFF

00 for 0 dB

DTMF duration

Specifies the DTMF on/off duration. Range: 0-0xFF, and the value you enter is multiplied by 5 millisecond increments.

0C, which results in 60 ms on then 60 ms off.

idle pattern

Specifies the data pattern for the data channel.
Range: 0-0xFF

7F for T1,
54 for E1 line

parms 6-19

Parameters 6-18 are reserved for future use.

00

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

No

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspln, dsplncnf

Example

Configure port 1 of the UVM in slot 5 to support CAS switching.

cnfcassw 5.1

sw175 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 06:11 PST Line 5.1 CAS Switching Parameters => CASSW mode [OFF] Parm 11 [00] (H) CCS Type [ 1] (D) Parm 12 [00] (H) CAS Type [ 1] (D) Parm 13 [00] (H) Conn Type [a32 ] Parm 14 [00] (H) Country code [00] (H) Parm 15 [00] (H) Interdigit TO [05] (H) Parm 16 [00] (H) Tone level [00] (H) Parm 17 [00] (H) DTMF duration [0C] (H) Parm 18 [00] (H) Idle pattern [54] (H) Parm 6 [00] (H) Parm 7 [00] (H) Parm 8 [00] (H) Parm 9 [00] (H) Parm 10 [00] (H) This Command: cnfcassw 5.1 Enter mode: Pbx/Server/Off (o):

cnfcdparm (configure card parameters)

Configures the channel statistic level on the BXM/UXM card. This command supports the multilevel channel statistics feature, which lets you configure and display additional levels of statistics on a BXM or UXM card.

Configuration of the channel statistic level is a slot-based parameter. For example, if slot 5 is configured to support level 3 channel statistics, all connections on the card in slot 5 will be set to level 3 statistics.

The multilevel channel statistics feature is supported on the BPX and IGX platforms, for BXM and UXM cards. (Refer to release notes for card firmware release requirements.) The multilevel channel statistics feature requires switch software to collect, display, and propagate to Cisco WAN Manager the various statistics types. The channel statistic types vary in number and type based upon the level of support provided by the BXM and UXM cards.

Apart from the cnfcdparm command that you use to configure the channel statistic level on the BXM/UXM cards, you configure and use the BXM/UXM channel statistics similarly as in previous releases. You use the following commands to configure BXM and UXM card statistics:

Cisco WAN Manager supports the multilevel channel statistics as provided by the BXM and UXM cards.

Syntax

cnfcdparm <slot> <index> <value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot>

Specifies the slot.

<index>

Specifies the index number of the statistics level such as "1" for the BXM Channel Stats Level.

<value>

Value of the parameter specified by index

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

No

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfchstats, dspchstats

Example

Configure channel statistics level 1 on BXM card in slot 2, port 1, with VPI/VCI of 1.1.

cnfcdparm 2.1.1.1 1

sw57 TRM SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Date/Time Not Set Channel Statistics for 2.1.1.1 Cleared: Date/Time Not Set (\) Snapshot MCR: 96000/96000 cps Collection Time: 0 day(s) 00:01:45 Corrupted: NO Traffic Cells CLP Avg CPS %util Chan Stat Addr: 30EBB36C From Port : 0 0 0 0 To Network : 0 --- 0 0 From Network: 0 0 0 0 To Port : 0 --- 0 0 NonCmplnt Dscd: 0 Rx Q Depth : 0 Tx Q Depth : 0 Rx Vsvd ACR : 0 Tx Vsvd ACR : 0 Bkwd SECB : 0 Bkwd Lost Cell: 0 Bkwd Msin Cell: 0 Bkwd BIPV : 0 Fwd SECB : 0 Fwd Lost Cell : 0 Fwd Msin Cell : 0 Fwd BIPV : 0 Last Command: dspchstats 2.1.1.1 1 Next Command:
Example

Configure channel statistics level 1 on UXM card in slot 10, port 2, with VPI/VCI of 205 and 101.

cnfcdparm 10.2.205.101

m2a TN SuperUser IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:19 GMT Channel Statistics: 10.1.205.101 Collection Time: 0 day(s) 23:02:58 Clrd: 05/13/98 14:33:00 Type Count Traffic Rate (cps) Cells Received from Port 82978 From port 0 Cells Transmitted to Network 82978 To network 0 Cells Received from Network 82978 From network 0 Cells Transmitted to Port 82978 To port 0 EOF Cells Received from Port 0 Cells Received with CLP=1 0 Cells Received with CLP=0 82978 Non-Compliant Cells Received 0 Average Rx VCq Depth in Cells 0 Average Tx Vcq Depth in Cells 0 Cells Transmitted with EFCI=1 0 Cells Transmitted with EFCI=0 82978 This Command: cnfcdparm 10.1.205.101 1

Description of Summary and Interval Statistics

Summary statistics are also referred to as real-time statistics or real-time measurements. These statistics show their values updating in real time, for example, the counter for the number of cells transmitted increment as you are watching.

Commands to view real-time statistics:

Interval statistics is a general name for three specific statistic types: TFTP statistics, AUTO statistics, and USER statistics. They are also commonly referred to as detailed statistics or history statistics. Interval statistics show historical information, for example, the number of cells transmitted in the previous 30 minutes.

Commands to view the enabled interval statistics:

Commands to view a single enabled interval statistic in detail:

You can enable the TFTP statistics by using the debug command cnfstatparms or from the Cisco WAN Manager Statistics Collection Manager (SCM). (Note that you need to have either Service or SuperUser level access to use debug commands.) When they are enabled, all objects that can support an enabled statistic will attempt to do so. For example, if enabling trunk statistic #5, all trunks that can support trunk statistic #5 will attempt to enable it. These statistics are generally used for billing and monitoring the network's performance.

AUTO statistics, also referred to as IGX or BPX feature statistics, are used for the switches' statistical alarming feature. As their name implies, these statistics are automatically allocated when certain statistical entities are upped or added. Auto stat entries on the IGX are ADPCM, ADPNO, PCM, Transparent and Data connections, as well as trunks and lines. Auto statistic entities on the BPX are trunks, lines, and cards.

These commands enable USER statistics:

These statistics are enabled on a specified entity; for example, enabled trunk statistic #5 on trunk 4.2. User statistics are mainly used for debugging.

Multilevel Channel Statistics Support

The number of statistics available are based upon the statistics level programmed on the BXM or UXM card. Table 3-17 lists the channel statistics available on the BXM and UXM cards. The four different levels supported are shown, along with the statistics field description as it appears on the related statistics screens (dspchstats, cnfcdparm, clrchstats, dspchstathist, dspchstatcnf, cnfchanstats). Refer to Table 3-20 for descriptions of the channel statistics listed in Table 3-17.

Statistics are available as summary and interval statistics. (The "interval" commands dspchstathist, dspchstatcnf, and cnfchanstats commands are available through the switch software CLI.) Additionally, statistics information collected by the interval commands is sent to Cisco WAN Manager and can be viewed through that interface.


Table 3-17: Channel Statistics Available on BXM and UXM Cards
Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

No Stats

RX Cells from port

All level 1

All Level 2

RX EOFs from port

TX EFCI 1 to Port

RX EFCI 1 from Port

RX cells to NW

RX CLP0 to NW

RX EFCI 0 from Port

RX CPL1 from port

RX CLP1 to NW

TX EFCI 0 from NW

RX cells Non-cmplt

TX EFCI 0 to Port

TX EFCI 1 from NW

RX CLP0 Non-cmplt

RX EFCI 0 to NW

RX CLP1 Non-cmpl

RX EFCI 1 to NW

OAM from Port

Ingress VC Q depth

TX EOFs to Port

RM Cells from Port

TX cells from NW

RM From NW

TX CLP1 to Port

RX EOF CNG DSC

OAM From NW

TX Cells to Port

RM Cells to Port

RX CLP0 Cng Dscd

Rx EFCI 0 Cng Dsc

RX CLP1 Cng Dscd

Rx EFCI 1 Cng Dsc

RX CLP0 from Port

Rx OAM Cng Dsc

TX CLP0 Cells to Port

Rx RM Cng Dsc

TX CLP0 from NW

Rx FRM to NW

TX CLP1 from NW

Rx BRM/Fst to NW

Ingress VSVD ACR

Tx EFCI 0 Cng Dsc

Egress VSVD ACR

Tx EFCI 1 Cng Dsc

Egress VC Q Depth

Tx RM Cng Dsc

Tx OAM Cng Dsc

*TX CLP 0 Dscd

*TX CLP 1 Dscd

*TX CLP0+1 Dscd

*RX CLP0+1 from prt

* OAM State

* indicates summary statistics only

The BXM and UXM cards can be configured for multilevel channel statistics collection. You configure the channel statistic levels by using the cnfcdparm command. You can configure the channel statistics level only on a standby card. If you attempt to execute the cnfcdparm command on an active controller card, you will get a warning telling you that you cannot use the cnfcdparm on an active card.

The cnfcdparm command allows you to set the statistic level on a UXM or BXM card. However, the cnfcdparm command will not allow you to change the statistics level if the card is active. The switch software detects the current channel statistics level available on the UXM or BXM card. Also, switch software performs these card mismatch verification:

UXM/BXM Multilevel Channel Statistics Feature

The multilevel channel statistics feature supports the following functions in card management, channel statistics, and Cisco WAN Manager:

Card Management

Channel Statistics

Cisco WAN Manager

Channel Statistics Collection and Display

The multilevel channel statistics are similar to the statistics supported on the current BXM and UXM cards. These channel statistics are accumulated in a historical format using the same collection technique as the current channel statistics. You configure the interval statistics by using the cnfchstats command, and display them by using the dspchstathist command. In addition, you can get summary statistics by using the dspchstats command. You display the additional channel statistics screens by either pressing Return or "y" for yes, depending on whether you are on a BPX or IGX node.

The actual number of statistics available is based on the channel statistics level you configure by using the cnfcdparm command.

These CLI commands configure and display channel statistics:

Memory Requirements

Additional memory is required to support channel summary statistics on the BPX and IGX platforms.

BPX Platform:
132,000 bytes = (33 new stats) * (1000 summary stat entries) * (4 bytes per stat entry)

IGX Platform:
112,000 bytes = (8 new stats) * (3500 summary stat entries) * (4 bytes per stat entry)

Table 3-18 lists the current controller card memory configurable parameters, and Table 3-19 lists the BPX polling intervals and number of connections supported.


Table 3-18: Maximum Statistics Memory per Controller Card
Control Card TFTP/User Memory

BCC 32

610K

BCC 64

12.7M

NPM 32

2.0M

NPM 64

12.7M


Table 3-19: BPX Polling Interval
Conns Supported Polling Interval

1-3999 conns

5 minutes

4000-7999 conns

10 minutes

9001-12,000 conns

15 minutes

Table 3-20 lists the BXM/UXM channel statistics object name, levels, and descriptions.


Note   In most cases, the statistic's object name is similar or identical to the statistic's field name as it appears at the CLI.


Table 3-20: BXM/UXM Channel Statistics Names, Levels, and Descriptions
Object ID Object Name Level Range/Values Description

05

Rx Cells From Port

1

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the ingress of the connection. [A:ALL, B:ALL] (Note: This count is retrieved from the RCMP chip.)

06

Rx EOFs From Port

1

0 - 232-1

Number of EOFs received at the ingress of the connection. [A:ALL, B:12, B:28]

07

Rx Cells to Backplane

1

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the ingress that were sent to the backplane. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

08

Rx CLP=1 Cells From Port

1

0 -232-1

Number of cells received at the port with CLP=1. [A:ALL, B:ALL] (Note: This count is retrieved from the RCMP chip.)

09-0B

RESERVED

0C

Rx EFCI=1 Cells From Port

3

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the port with EFCI=1. [A:28, B:28]

0D

RESERVED

0E

Non-Compliant Cell Count (Total)

1

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the ingress of the connection that were non-compliant discarded. [A:ALL, B:ALL]. (Note: This is a 16-bit counter in the hardware—it can wrap in less than a second depending upon the non-compliant rate.)

0F

Non-Compliant Cell Count

(CLP 0 Only)

1

0 - 232-1

Number of CLP 0 cells received at the ingress of the connection that were non-compliant dropped. [A:ALL, B:ALL]. (Note: This is a 16-bit counter in the hardware—it can wrap in less than a second depending upon non-compliant rate.)

10

Non-Compliant Cell Count

(CLP 1 Only)

1

0 - 232-1

Number of CLP 1 cells received at the ingress of the connection that were non-compliant dropped. [A:ALL, B:ALL]. (Note: This is a16-bit counter in the hardware—it can wrap in less than a second depending upon non-compliant rate.)

11

Ingress VC Q Depth

1

0 - 232-1

Current Ingress VC Queue Depth. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

12-14

RESERVED

15

Rx Rsrc Ovfl Discards

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the port that were discarded due to Resource Overflow. [B:ALL]

16-1E

RESERVED

1F

Tx Cells From Network

1

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received from the backplane. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

20

Tx CLP=1 To Port

1

0 - 232-1

Number of cells transmitted out the port with CLP=1. [A:ALL, B:12, B:28]

21

Tx EFCI=1 To Port

2

0 - 232-1

Number of cells transmitted out the port with EFCI=1. [A:12, A:28, B:12, B:28]

22

Tx Cells To Port

1

0 - 232-1

Number of cells transmitted out the port. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

23-26

RESERVED

27

Loopback RTD Measurement

N.A.

0 - 232-1

The Loopback Round Trip Delay measurement in msec. (Still under investigation.) Used to initiate the measurement (Set). The Get is used to get the last measurement known; or zero if now known.

28

Local Ingress Rx State

1

0 : Okay

1 : FERF (aka RDI)

2 : AIS

The OAM connection state. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

29

Rx CLP=0 Congested Discards

1

0 - 232-1

Number of CLP=0 Cells received from the port and discarded due to congestion (after the policer). [A:ALL, B:None]

2A

Rx CLP=1 Congested Discards

1

0 - 232-1

Number of CLP=1 Cells received from the port and discarded due to congestion (after the policer). [A:ALL, B:None]

2B

Rx CLP=0 Cells From Port

1

0 - 232-1

Number of CLP=0 Cells received from the port. [A:ALL, B:ALL] (NOTE: This stat is received from the RCMP.)

2C

Tx CLP=0 Cells To Port

1

0 - 232-1

Number of CLP=0 Cells transmitted to the port. [A:ALL, B:12, B:28]

2D

Tx CLP=0 Cells From Backplane

1

0 - 232-1

Number of CLP=0 Cells received from the backplane. [A:ALL, B:28]

2E

Rx CLP=0 Cells To Backplane

2

0 - 232-1

Number of CLP=0 Cells sent to the backplane. [A:ALL, B:12, B:28]

2F

Tx CLP=1 Cells From Backplane

1

0 - 232-1

Number of CLP=1 Cells received from the backplane. [A:ALL, B:28]

30

Rx CLP=1 Cells To Backplane

2

0 - 232-1

Number of CLP=1 Cells sent to the backplane. [A:12, A:28, B:12,B:28]

31

Rx EFCI=0 Cells From Port

3

0 - 232-1

Number of EFCI=0 Cells received from the port. [A:28, B:28]

32

Tx EFCI=0 Cells To Port

2

0 - 232-1

Number of EFCI=0 Cells transmitted to the port. [A:12,A:28, B:12, B:28]

33

Tx EFCI=0 Cells From Backplane

3

0 - 232-1

Number of EFCI=0 Cells received from the backplane. [A:28, B:28]

34

Rx EFCI=0 Cells To Backplane

2

0 - 232-1

Number of EFCI=0 Cells sent to the backplane. [A:12, A:28, B:12, B:28]

35

Tx EFCI=1 Cells From Backplane

3

0 - 232-1

Number of EFCI=1 Cells received from the backplane. [A:28, B:28]

36

Rx EFCI=1 Cells To Backplane

2

0 - 232-1

Number of EFCI=1 Cells sent to the backplane. [A:12, A:28, B:12, B:28]

37

Tx EOFs to Port

2

0 - 232-1

Number of cells with EOF sent to the port. [A:12, A:28, B:28]

38

Tx EOFs from Backplane

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of EOFs received at the backplane. [B:12, B:28]

39

Rx EOFs to Backplane

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells with EOF sent to the backplane. [B:28]

3A

Rx Segment OAM

3

0 - 232-1

Number of Segment OAM cells received at the port. [A:28, B:28]

3B

Tx Segment OAM

3

0 - 232-1

Number of Segment OAM cells received at the egress. [A:28, B:28]

3C

Rx End-to-End OAM

3

0 - 232-1

Number of End-to-End OAM cells received at the port. [A:28, B:28]

3D

Tx End-to-End OAM

3

0 - 232-1

Number of End-to-End OAM cells received at the egress. [A:28, B:28]

3E

Rx Forward RM Cells

3

0 - 232-1

Number of Forward RM cells received at the port. [A:28, B:28]

3F

Tx Forward RM Cells

3

0 - 232-1

Number of Forward RM cells received at the backplane. [A:28, B:28]

40

Rx Backward RM Cells

3

0 - 232-1

Number of Backward RM cells received at the port. [A:28, B:28]

41

Tx Backward RM Cells

3

0 - 232-1

Number of Backward RM cells received at the backplane. [A:28, B:28]

42

Rx Optimized Bandwidth Management RM Cells

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of Optimized Bandwidth Management RM cells received at the port. [B:28]

43

Tx Optimized Bandwidth Management RM Cells

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of Optimized Bandwidth Management RM cells received at the backplane. [B:28]

44

Rx Undefined RM Cells

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of Undefined RM cells received at the port. [B:28]

45

Tx Undefined RM Cells

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of Undefined RM cells received at the backplane. [B:28]

46

Tx Rsrc Ovfl Discards

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the backplane that were discarded due to Resource Overflow. [B:ALL]

47

Rx VI Cell Discards

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the port that were discarded because of a full VI. [B:12, B:28]

48

Tx VI Cell Discards

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the backplane discarded because of a full VI. [B:12, B:28]

49

Rx QBIN Cell Discards

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the port discarded due to QBIN threshold violation. [B:12, B:28]

4A

Tx QBIN Cell Discards

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the backplane that were disc. due to QBIN threshold violations. [B:12, B:28]

4B

Rx VC Cell Discards

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the port that were disc. due to VC threshold violations. [B:12, B:28]

4C

Tx VC Cell Discards

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the backplane that were discarded due to VC threshold violations. [B:ALL]

4D

Rx Cell Filter Discards

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the port that were discarded due to cell filter action. [B:12, B:28]

4E

Tx Cell Filter Discards

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the backplane that were discarded due to cell filter action. [B:12, B:28]

4F

Rx Illegal Event Cells

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the port that caused an reserved event in the hardware. [B:28]

50

Tx Illegal Event Cells

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Number of cells received at the backplane that caused an reserved event in the H/W. [B:28]

51

Ingress VSVD ACR

1

0 - 232-1

Ingress VSVD allowed Cell Rate. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

52

Egress VSVD ACR

1

0 - 232-1

Egress VSVD allowed Cell Rate. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

53

Egress VC Q Depth

1

0 - 232-1

Current Egress VC Queue Depth. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

54

Pkwy. SECB

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Backward reporting Performance Monitoring Severely Errored Cell Blocks. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

55

Bkwd Lost Cells

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Backward reporting Performance Monitoring Lost Cell Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

56

Bkwd Misinserted Cells

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Backward reporting Performance Monitoring Misinserted Cell Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

57

Bkwd BIPV

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Backward reporting Performance Monitoring Bipolar Violation Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

58

Fwd SECB

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Forward reporting Performance Monitoring Severely Errored Cell Blocks. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

59

Fwd Lost Cells

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Forward reporting Performance Monitoring Lost Cell Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

5A

Fwd Misinserted Cells

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Forward reporting Performance Monitoring Misinserted Cell Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

5B

Fwd BIPV

N.A.

0 - 232-1

Forward reporting Performance Monitoring Bipolar Violation Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

5C-5F

RESERVED

60

SAR Good PDUs Rcv

?

0 - 232-1

Number of good PDUs received by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

61

SAR Good PDUs Xmt

?

0 - 232-1

Number of good PDUs transmitted by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

62

SAR Rcv PDUs Discarded

?

0 - 232-1

Number of PDUs discarded on the ingress by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

63

SAR Xmt PDUs Discarded

?

0 - 232-1

Number of PDUs discarded on the egress by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

64

SAR Invalid CRC PDUs Rcvd

?

0 - 232-1

Number of invalid CRC32 PDUs received by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

65

SAR Invalid Length PDUs Rcvd

?

0 - 232-1

Number of invalid-length PDUs received by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

66

SAR Short Length Failures

?

0 - 232-1

Number of short-length failures detected by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

67

SAR Long Length Failures

?

0 - 232-1

Number of long-length failures detected by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

TX FRM to Port

2

0 - 232-1

TX BRM and Fst to Prt

2

0 - 232-1

RX EOF Congestion Discard

2

0 - 232-1

RX EFCI 0 Congestion Discard

3

0 - 232-1

RX EFCI 1 Congestion Discard

3

0 - 232-1

RX OAM Congestion Discard

3

0 - 232-1

RX RM Congestion Discard

3

0 - 232-1

RX FRM to Network

3

0 - 232-1

RX BRM and Fst to Network

3

0 - 232-1

TX EFCI 0 Congestion Discard

3

0 - 232-1

TX EFCI 1 Congestion Discard

3

0 - 232-1

TX RM Congestion Discard

3

0 - 232-1

TX OAM Congestion Discard

3

0 - 232-1

Multilevel Statistics Supported on the UXM Card

The initial release of the UXM firmware supported only four (4) QE per-channel statistics. To support these new statistics, however, more QE memory, on a per-channel basis, is required. As the statistics level is increased, the number of connections supported by the card may decrease.

Setting the Statistics Level on the UXM Card

Setting the statistics level can only be performed with the UXM in the standby state. See the switch software command cnfcdparm for details on how to set the statistics level on the card.

The UXM will retain the last setting and will reboot in that mode. That is, if the statistics were set to 2, the UXM, when reset (reinserted, and so on), will boot with the statistics level set to 2. However, the lowest setting actually set on the card will be the maximum number of statistics with the maximum number of user connections. That is, the UXM can support four ingress and four egress QE statistics with 8,000 user connections. This would be the equivalent of the statistics level being set to 1. The cards will accept the full range of statistics levels (0-3). The UXMe (UXM Enhanced card) will support up to statistics level 2 with no reduction in the number of connections. Table 3-21 shows connection counts for the UXM cards when different statistics levels are configured on the card.


Table 3-21:
Connection Counts for Various Statistics Levels on UXM
Stats Level UXM Conns UXM FP Conns UXMe Conns UXMe FP Conns

0

8126

4000

8126

4000

1 (UXM default)

8126

4000

8126

4000

2 (UXMe default)

4031

4000

8126

4000

3

1983

1983

4031

4000

Levels of Support on UXM Card for Various Statistics

If statistics belonging to a statistics level higher than the level set on the card are requested, the user will receive an error message. Table 3-21 shows statistics support under statistics level 1. The bold text refers to statistics collected from the QE. Statistics fall into four categories: User, OAM, RM, and All. These categories can be further divided into types. User cells are one of four types: Eof0-EFCI0, Eof1-EFCI0, Eof0-EFCI1, and Eof1-EFCI1. OAM cells come in two types: SEg and E2e. RM cells fall into three types: FRm, BRm, and FsRm. CLP0 and CLP1 cells, when tracked, are distinguished only for user cells.

Table 3-22 shows the levels of statistics support that can be configured for the UXM card.


Table 3-22:
Levels of Support That Can Be Configured for Statistics on UXM Card
Ingress Stats Oid Level New Definition

All Cells from port

0x05

All

All CLP1 cells from port

0x08

All

All non-compliant cells

0x0E

All

All CLP0 non-compliant cells

0x0F

All

All CLP1 non-compliant cells

0x10

All

VC queue depth

0x11

All

All CLP0 cells from port

0x2B

All

VSVD ACR

0x51

All

EOF=1 from port

0x06

1->

All cells EOF=1 that arrive at the QE from the port. This includes cells that are discarded due to overflow.

Note: For Level 1 this does not include discards due to overflow.

All cells to NW

0x07

1->

Sum of CLP0 and CLP1 cells that arrive at the QE from the port.

CLP0 overflow discards

0x29

1->

All cells with CLP0 that are discarded at the QE due to overflow.

CLP1 overflow discards

0x2A

1->

All cells with CLP1 that are discarded at the QE due to overflow

CLP0 to NW

0x2E

2->

x

All cells with CLP0 that depart from the QE to the NW.

CLP1 to NW

0x30

2->

x

All cells with CLP1 that depart from the QE to the NW.

EFCI=0 to NW

0x34

2->

x

All cells with EFCI=0 that depart from the QE to the NW.

EFCI=1 to NW

0x36

2->

x

All cells with EFCI=1 that depart from the QE to the NW.

EOF=1 overflow discards

0x0B

2->

x

All cells with EOF=1 that are discarded at the QE due to overflow.

EFCI=0 from port

0x31

3

x

All cells with EFCI=0 that arrive at the QE from the port. This includes cells that are discarded due to overflow.

EFCI=1 from port

0x0C

3

x

All cells with EFCI=1 that arrive at the QE from the port. This includes cells that are discarded due to overflow.

OAM cells from port

0x3A

3

x

OAM cells that arrive at the QE from the port. This includes cells that are discarded due to overflow.

Rm cells from port

0x3E

3

x

Rm cells that arrive at the QE from the port. This includes cells that are discarded due to overflow.

FRm to NW

0x17

3

x

FRm cells that depart from the QE to the NW.

BRm+FsRm to NW

0x18

3

x

BRm + FsRm cells that depart from the QE to the NW.

EFCI=0 overflow discards

0x12

3

x

All EFCI=0 cells that are discarded at the QE due to overflow.

EFCI=1 overflow discards

0x13

3

x

All EFCI=1 cells that are discarded at the QE due to overflow.

OAM overflow discards

0x14

3

x

All OAM cells that are discarded at the QE due to overflow.

RM overflow discards

0x16

3

x

All Rm cells that are discarded at the QE due to overflow.


Table 3-23: Consolidated Ingress Stats (to UXM Card)
Consolidated Ingress Stats Oid Part of Which New Stat New Oid Stat Grp

Seg OAM from port

0x3A

OAM from port

0x3A

3

End-to-end OAM from port

0x3C

OAM from port

0x3A

3

FRm cells from port

0x3E

Rm cells from port

0x3E

3

BRm+FsRm cells from port

0x40

Rm cells from port

0x3E

3


Table 3-24: Egress Statistics (from UXM Card)
Consolidated Egress Stats Oid Part of Which New Stat New Oid Stat Grp

FRm from NW

0x3F

Rm from NW

0x3F

3

BRm+FsRm from NW

0x41

Rm from NW

0x3F

3

Seg OAM from NW

0x3B

OAM from NW

0x3B

3

End-to-end OAM from NW

0x3D

OAM from NW

0x3B

3

FRm cells to port

0x09

Rm cells to port

0xA

3

BRm+FsRm cells to port

0x0A

Rm cells to port

0xA

3

Compatibility with 9.1 Classic Statistics

The statistics as defined for level statistics will not provide the same information as statistics on a UXM running 9.1 firmware. However, backward compatibility is provided for any UXM upgraded from 9.1 to 9.2 firmware. UXMs shipped with 9.2 firmware do not support the classic statistics.


Note   The rsh command can be used to put UXM running 9.2 into classic statistics mode. (Note that you need to have debug level privileges to access this command.) In addition, any UXM upgraded from 9.1 to 9.2 will no longer support classic statistics if a statistics level has been set on the card. The UXMe supports, at a minimum, level 2 statisticss, and since level 2 statistics support all the statistics needed for compatibility with 9.1 software.

Refer to Table 3-25 for a list of the multilevel channel statistics supported on the UXM.


Table 3-25:
UXM with Multilevel Channel Statistics
Statistics Description Level OID Number Stat Number Interv Sum

Cells Received from Port

1

0x05

0x2d

YES

YES

Cells Transmitted to Network

1

0x07

0x2f

YES

YES

Cells Received from Network

1

0x1f

0x30

YES

YES

Cells Transmitted to Port

1

0x22

0x35

YES

YES

EOF Cells Received from Port

1

0x06

0x2e

YES

YES

Cells Received with CLP=1

1

0x08

0x31

YES

YES

Cells Received with CLP=0

1

0x2b

0x37

YES

YES

Non-Compliant Cells Received

1

0x0e

0x32

YES

YES

Average Rx VCq Depth in Cells

1

0x11

0x33

NO

YES

Average Tx Vcq Depth in Cells

1

0x53

0x3b

NO

YES

Ingress Vsvd Allowed Cell Rate

1

0x51

0x39

NO

YES

Egress Vsvd Allowed Cell Rate

1

0x52

0x3a

NO

YES

Cells Rx with CLP=0 from Network

1

0x2d

0x4c

YES

YES

Cells Rx with CLP=1 from Network

1

0x2f

0x4d

YES

YES

Cells Tx with CLP=0 to Port

1

0x2c

0x4e

YES

YES

Cells Tx with CLP=1 to Port

1

0x20

0x4f

YES

YES

Non-Comp Cells Rx w/CLP=0 dropped

1

0x0f

0x50

YES

YES

Non-Comp Cells Rx w/CLP=1 dropped

1

0x10

0x51

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Rx w/CLP=0 dropped

1

0x29

0x52

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Rx w/CLP=1 dropped

1

0x2a

0x53

YES

YES

OAM state (0:OK, 1:FERF, 2:AIS)

1

0x28

0x36

NO

YES

Good PDUs Received by the SAR

1

0x60

0x44

YES

YES

Good PDUs Transmitted by the SAR

1

0x61

0x45

YES

YES

Rx PDUs discarded by the SAR

1

0x62

0x46

YES

YES

Tx PDUs discarded by the SAR

1

0x63

0x47

YES

YES

Invalid CRC32 PDU rx by the SAR

1

0x64

0x48

YES

YES

Invalid Length PDU rx by the SAR

1

0x65

0x49

YES

YES

Shrt-Lgth Fail detected by the SAR

1

0x66

0x4a

YES

YES

Lng-Lgth Fail detected by the SAR

1

0x67

0x4b

YES

YES

Cells Tx with CLP=0 to Network

2

0x2e

0x54

YES

YES

Cells Tx with CLP=1 to Network

2

0x30

0x55

YES

YES

Cells Tx with EFCI=0 to Network

2

0x34

0x56

YES

YES

Cells Tx with EFCI=1 to Network

2

0x36

0x57

YES

YES

Cells Transmitted with EFCI=0

2

0x32

0x38

YES

YES

Cells Transmitted with EFCI=1

2

0x21

0x34

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Rx w/EOF dropped

2

0x0b

0x58

YES

YES

Cells Tx with EOF to Port

2

0x37

0x59

YES

YES

RM Cells Tx to Port

3

0x0a

0x5a

YES

YES

Cells Rx with EFCI=0 from Port

3

0x31

0x5b

YES

YES

Cells Rx with EFCI=1 from Port

3

0x0c

0x5c

YES

YES

OAM Cells Rx from Port

3

0x3a

0x5d

YES

YES

RM Cells Rx from Port

3

0x3e

0x5e

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Rx w/EFCI=0 dropped

3

0x12

0x5f

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Rx w/EFCI=1 dropped

3

0x13

0x60

YES

YES

Overflow OAM Cells Rx and dropped

3

0x14

0x61

YES

YES

Overflow RM Cells Rx and dropped

3

0x16

0x62

YES

YES

Forward RM Cells Tx to Network

3

0x17

0x63

YES

YES

Backward RM + FST Cells Tx to Net

3

0x18

0x64

YES

YES

Cells Rx with EFCI=0 from Network

3

0x33

0x65

YES

YES

Cells Rx with EFCI=1 from Network

3

0x35

0x66

YES

YES

Egress OAM Cells Rx

3

0x3b

0x67

YES

YES

Egress RM Cells Rx

3

0x3f

0x68

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Tx w/EFCI=0 dropped

3

0x19

0x69

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Tx w/EFCI=1 dropped

3

0x1a

0x6a

YES

YES

Overflow RM Cells Tx and dropped

3

0x1b

0x6b

YES

YES

Overflow OAM Cells Tx and dropped

3

0x1c

0x6c

YES

YES

See Table 3-26 for a list for the BXM with no multilevel channel statistics supported.


Table 3-26: BXM Card with No Multilevel Channel Statistics
Statistics Description Level OID Number Stat Number Interv Sum

Port Cells Received

n/a

0x05

0x1d

YES

YES

Port Frames Received

n/a

0x06

0x1e

YES

YES

Network Cells Transmitted

n/a

0x07

0x1f

YES

YES

Port Cells Received with CLP=1

n/a

0x08

0x20

YES

YES

Non-Compliant Cells Received (Port)

n/a

0x0e

0x26

YES

YES

Average Rx Q Depth in Cells

n/a

0x11

0x29

YES

YES

Cells Received from Network

n/a

0x1f

0x2e

YES

YES

Cells Transmitted with CLP (Port)

n/a

0x20

0x31

YES

YES

Cells Transmitted (Port)

n/a

0x22

0x2d

YES

YES

Average Tx Q Depth in Cells

n/a

0x53

0x39

YES

YES

Good PDUs Received by the SAR

n/a

0x60

0x3a

YES

NO

Good PDUs Transmitted by the SAR

n/a

0x61

0x3b

YES

NO

Rx PDUs discarded by the SAR

n/a

0x62

0x3c

YES

NO

Tx PDUs discarded by the SAR

n/a

0x63

0x3d

YES

NO

Invalid Length PDU rx by the SAR

n/a

0x65

0x3f

YES

NO

Shrt-Lgth Fail detected by the SAR

n/a

0x66

0x40

YES

NO

Lng-Lgth Fail detected by the SAR

n/a

0x67

0x41

YES

NO

Invalid CRC32 PDU rx by the SAR

n/a

0x64

0x3e

YES

NO

Cells Received with CLP 0

n/a

0x2b

0x45

YES

YES

Network Cells Received with CLP 0

n/a

0x2d

0x46

YES

YES

Network Cells Received with CLP 1

n/a

0x2f

0x47

YES

YES

Ingress Vsvd Allowed Cell Rate

n/a

0x51

0x48

YES

YES

Egress Vsvd Allowed Cell Rate

n/a

0x52

0x49

YES

YES

Cells Tx with CLP=0 to Port

n/a

0x2c

0x52

YES

YES

Cells Tx with CLP=0 to Network

n/a

0x2e

0x53

YES

YES

Rx Clp0+1 Port

n/a

n/a

0x54

NO

YES

Rx Clp0 Dscd

n/a

n/a

0x55

NO

YES

Tx Clp0 Dscd

n/a

n/a

0x56

NO

YES

Tx Clp1 Dscd

n/a

n/a

0x57

NO

YES

Tx Clp0+1 Dscd

n/a

n/a

0x58

NO

YES

OAM state (0:OK,1:FERF,2:AIS)

n/a

0x28

n/a

NO

NO

See Table 3-27 for a list of multilevel channel statistics supported on the BXM.


Table 3-27:
BXM with Multilevel Channel Statistics
Statistics Description Level OID Number Stat Number Interv Sum

Port Cells Received

1

0x05

0x1d

YES

YES

Port Frames Received

1

0x06

0x1e

YES

YES

Network Cells Transmitted

1

0x07

0x1f

YES

YES

Port Cells Received with CLP=1

1

0x08

0x20

YES

YES

Non-Compliant Cells Received (Port)

1

0x0e

0x26

YES

YES

Average Rx Q Depth in Cells

1

0x11

0x29

YES

YES

Cells Received from Network

1

0x1f

0x2e

YES

YES

Cells Transmitted with CLP (Port)

1

0x20

0x31

YES

YES

Cells Transmitted (Port)

1

0x22

0x2d

YES

YES

Average Tx Q Depth in Cells

1

0x53

0x39

YES

YES

Good PDUs Received by the SAR

1

0x60

0x3a

YES

NO

Good PDUs Transmitted by the SAR

1

0x61

0x3b

YES

NO

Rx PDUs discarded by the SAR

1

0x62

0x3c

YES

NO

Tx PDUs discarded by the SAR

1

0x63

0x3d

YES

NO

Invalid Length PDU rx by the SAR

1

0x65

0x3f

YES

NO

Shrt-Lgth Fail detected by the SAR

1

0x66

0x40

YES

NO

Lng-Lgth Fail detected by the SAR

1

0x67

0x41

YES

NO

Invalid CRC32 PDU rx by the SAR

1

0x64

0x3e

YES

NO

Cells Received with CLP 0

1

0x2b

0x45

YES

YES

Network Cells Received with CLP 0

1

0x2d

0x46

YES

YES

Network Cells Received with CLP 1

1

0x2f

0x47

YES

YES

Ingress Vsvd Allowed Cell Rate

1

0x51

0x48

YES

YES

Egress Vsvd Allowed Cell Rate

1

0x52

0x49

YES

YES

Cells Tx with CLP=0 to Port

1

0x2c

0x52

YES

YES

Rx Clp0+1 Port

1

n/a

0x54

NO

YES

Tx Clp0 Dscd

1

n/a

0x56

NO

YES

Tx Clp1 Dscd

1

n/a

0x57

NO

YES

Tx Clp0+1 Dscd

1

n/a

0x58

NO

YES

Non-Comp Cells Rx w/CLP=0 dropped

1

0x0f

0x59

YES

YES

Non-Comp Cells Rx w/CLP=1 dropped

1

0x10

0x5a

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Rx w/CLP=0 dropped

1

0x29

0x5b

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Rx w/CLP=1 dropped

1

0x2a

0x5c

YES

YES

OAM state (0:OK,1:FERF,2:AIS)

1

0x28

n/a

NO

NO

Cells Tx with CLP=0 to Network

2

0x2e

0x53

YES

YES

Rx Clp0 Dscd

2

n/a

0x55

NO

YES

Cells Tx with CLP=1 to Network

2

0x30

0x5d

YES

YES

Cells Tx with EFCI=0 to Network

2

0x34

0x5e

YES

YES

Cells Tx with EFCI=1 to Network

2

0x36

0x5f

YES

YES

Cells Transmitted with EFCI=0

2

0x32

0x60

YES

YES

Cells Transmitted with EFCI=1

2

0x21

0x2c

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Rx w/EOF dropped

2

0x0b

0x61

YES

YES

Cells Tx with EOF to Port

2

0x37

0x62

YES

YES

RM Cells Tx to Port

3

0x0a

0x63

YES

YES

Cells Rx with EFCI=0 from Port

3

0x31

0x64

YES

YES

Cells Rx with EFCI=1 from Port

3

0x0c

0x65

YES

YES

OAM Cells Rx from Port

3

0x3a

0x66

YES

YES

RM Cells Rx from Port

3

0x3e

0x67

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Rx w/EFCI=0 dropped

3

0x12

0x68

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Rx w/EFCI=1 dropped

3

0x13

0x69

YES

YES

Overflow OAM Cells Rx and dropped

3

0x14

0x6a

YES

YES

Overflow RM Cells Rx and dropped

3

0x16

0x6b

YES

YES

Forward RM Cells Tx to Network

3

0x17

0x6c

YES

YES

Backward RM + FST Cells Tx to Net

3

0x18

0x6d

YES

YES

Cells Rx with EFCI=0 from Network

3

0x33

0x6e

YES

YES

Cells Rx with EFCI=1 from Network

3

0x35

0x6f

YES

YES

Egress OAM Cells Rx

3

0x3b

0x70

YES

YES

Egress RM Cells Rx

3

0x3f

0x71

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Tx w/EFCI=0 dropped

3

0x19

0x72

YES

YES

Overflow Cells Tx w/EFCI=1 dropped

3

0x1a

0x73

YES

YES

Overflow RM Cells Tx and dropped

3

0x1b

0x74

YES

YES

Overflow OAM Cells Tx and dropped

3

0x1c

0x75

YES

YES

Descriptions for Statistics Fields on cnfcdparm Screen

The field names on the cnfcdparm screen are similar to the field names on the dspchstats screen. Table 3-28 provides descriptions for fields that appear on the cnfcdparm screen. Note that the object names given may vary slightly from what actually appears on the cnfcdparm screen fields; similarly, the descriptions for each object (or screen field) correspond in most cases to the related object (or screen field) name, but not in all cases.


Table 3-28:
Descriptions for cnfcdparm for BXM Card
Object ID Object Name Range/Values Default Description

01

Message Tag

Byte 0-3: Tag ID

Byte 4-7: IP Address

0

Identifier and source IP address sent with ComBus message. Both will be copied into the response, if any is to be sent.

02

RESERVED

03

LCN

1 - 64K

R

Identifies which channel to collect statistics.

04

RESERVED

05

Rx Cells From Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the ingress of the connection. [A:ALL, B:ALL] (Note: This count is retrieved from the RCMP chip.)

06

Rx EOFs From Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of EOFs received at the ingress of the connection. [A:ALL, B:12, B:28]

07

Rx Cells to Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the ingress that were sent to the backplane. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

08

Rx CLP=1 Cells From Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the port with CLP=1. [A:ALL, B:ALL] (Note: This count is retrieved from the RCMP chip.)

09-0B

RESERVED

0C

Rx EFCI=1 Cells From Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the port with EFCI=1. [A:28, B:28]

0D

RESERVED

0E

Non-Compliant Cell Count (Total)

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the ingress of the connection that were non-compliant discarded. [A:ALL, B:ALL]. (Note: This is a 16-bit counter in the hardware— it can wrap in less than a second depending upon non-compliant rate.)

0F

Non-Compliant Cell Count

(CLP 0 Only)

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of CLP 0 cells received at the ingress of the connection that were non-compliant dropped. [A:ALL, B:ALL]. (Note: This is a 16-bit counter in the hardware—it can wrap in less than a second depending upon non-compliant rate.)

10

Non-Compliant Cell Count

(CLP 1 Only)

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of CLP 1 cells received at the ingress of the connection that were non-compliant dropped. [A:ALL, B:ALL]. (Note: This is a 16-bit counter in the hardware— it can wrap in less than a second depending upon non-compliant rate.)

11

Ingress VC Q Depth

0 - 232-1

N/A

Current Ingress VC Queue Depth. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

12-14

RESERVED

15

Rx Rsrc Ovfl Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the port that were discarded due to Resource Overflow. [B:ALL]

16-1E

RESERVED

1F

Tx Cells From Network

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received from the backplane. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

20

Tx CLP=1 To Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells transmitted out the port with CLP=1. [A:ALL, B:12, B:28]

21

Tx EFCI=1 To Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells transmitted out the port with EFCI=1. [A:12, A:28, B:12, B:28]

22

Tx Cells To Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells transmitted out the port. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

23-26

RESERVED

27

Loopback RTD Measurement

0 - 232-1

N/A

The Loopback Round Trip Delay measurement in msec. (Still under investigation.) Used to initiate the measurement (Set). The Get is used to get the last measurement known; or zero if now known.

28

Local Ingress Rx State

0: Okay

1: FERF (aka RDI)

2: AIS

0

The OAM connection state. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

29

Rx CLP=0 Congested Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of CLP=0 Cells received from the port and discarded due to congestion (after the policer). [A:ALL, B:None]

2A

Rx CLP=1 Congested Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of CLP=1 Cells received from the port and discarded due to congestion (after the policer). [A:ALL, B:None]

2B

Rx CLP=0 Cells From Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of CLP=0 Cells received from the port. [A:ALL, B:ALL] (NOTE: This stat is received from the RCMP.)

2C

Tx CLP=0 Cells To Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of CLP=0 Cells transmitted to the port. [A:ALL, B:12, B:28]

2D

Tx CLP=0 Cells From Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of CLP=0 Cells received from the backplane. [A:ALL, B:28]

2E

Rx CLP=0 Cells To Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of CLP=0 Cells sent to the backplane. [A:ALL, B:12, B:28]

2F

Tx CLP=1 Cells From Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of CLP=1 Cells received from the backplane. [A:ALL, B:28]

30

Rx CLP=1 Cells To Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of CLP=1 Cells sent to the backplane. [A:12, A:28, B:12,B:28]

31

Rx EFCI=0 Cells From Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of EFCI=0 Cells received from the port. [A:28, B:28]

32

Tx EFCI=0 Cells To Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of EFCI=0 Cells transmitted to the port. [A:12,A:28, B:12, B:28]

33

Tx EFCI=0 Cells From Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of EFCI=0 Cells received from the backplane. [A:28, B:28]

34

Rx EFCI=0 Cells To Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of EFCI=0 Cells sent to the backplane. [A:12, A:28, B:12, B:28]

35

Tx EFCI=1 Cells From Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of EFCI=1 Cells received from the backplane. [A:28, B:28]

36

Rx EFCI=1 Cells To Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of EFCI=1 Cells sent to the backplane. [A:12, A:28, B:12, B:28]

37

Tx EOFs to Port

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells with EOF sent to the port. [A:12, A:28, B:28]

38

Tx EOFs from Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of EOFs received at the backplane. [B:12, B:28]

39

Rx EOFs to Backplane

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells with EOF sent to the backplane. [B:28]

3A

Rx Segment OAM

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of Segment OAM cells received at the port. [A:28, B:28]

3B

Tx Segment OAM

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of Segment OAM cells received at the egress. [A:28, B:28]

3C

Rx End-to-End OAM

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of End-to-End OAM cells received at the port. [A:28, B:28]

3D

Tx End-to-End OAM

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of End-to-End OAM cells received at the egress. [A:28, B:28]

3E

Rx Forward RM Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of Forward RM cells received at the port. [A:28, B:28]

3F

Tx Forward RM Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of Forward RM cells received at the backplane. [A:28, B:28]

40

Rx Backward RM Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of Backward RM cells received at the port. [A:28, B:28]

41

Tx Backward RM Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of Backward RM cells received at the backplane. [A:28, B:28]

42

Rx Optimized Bandwidth Management RM Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of Optimized Bandwidth Management RM cells received at the port. [B:28]

43

Tx Optimized Bandwidth Management RM Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of Optimized Bandwidth Management RM cells received at the backplane. [B:28]

44

Rx Undefined RM Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of Undefined RM cells received at the port. [B:28]

45

Tx Undefined RM Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of Undefined RM cells received at the backplane. [B:28]

46

Tx Rsrc Ovfl Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the backplane that were discarded due to Resource Overflow. [B:ALL]

47

Rx VI Cell Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the port that were discarded because of a full VI. [B:12, B:28]

48

Tx VI Cell Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the backplane discarded because of a full VI. [B:12, B:28]

49

Rx QBIN Cell Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the port discarded due to QBIN threshold violation. [B:12, B:28]

4A

Tx QBIN Cell Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the backplane that were disc. due to QBIN threshold violations. [B:12, B:28]

4B

Rx VC Cell Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the port that were disc. due to VC threshold violations. [B:12, B:28]

4C

Tx VC Cell Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the backplane that were discarded due to VC threshold violations. [B:ALL]

4D

Rx Cell Filter Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the port that were discarded due to cell filter action. [B:12, B:28]

4E

Tx Cell Filter Discards

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the backplane that were discarded due to cell filter action. [B:12, B:28]

4F

Rx Illegal Event Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the port that caused an reserved event in the hardware. [B:28]

50

Tx Illegal Event Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of cells received at the backplane that caused an reserved event in the H/W. [B:28]

51

Ingress VSVD ACR

0 - 232-1

N/A

Ingress VSVD allowed Cell Rate. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

52

Egress VSVD ACR

0 - 232-1

N/A

Egress VSVD allowed Cell Rate. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

53

Egress VC Q Depth

0 - 232-1

N/A

Current Egress VC Queue Depth. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

54

Bkwd SECB

0 - 232-1

N/A

Backward reporting Performance Monitoring Severely Errored Cell Blocks. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

55

Bkwd Lost Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Backward reporting Performance Monitoring Lost Cell Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

56

Bkwd Misinserted Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Backward reporting Performance Monitoring Misinserted Cell Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

57

Bkwd BIPV

0 - 232-1

N/A

Backward reporting Performance Monitoring Bipolar Violation Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

58

Fwd SECB

0 - 232-1

N/A

Forward reporting Performance Monitoring Severely Errored Cell Blocks. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

59

Fwd Lost Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Forward reporting Performance Monitoring Lost Cell Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

5A

Fwd Misinserted Cells

0 - 232-1

N/A

Forward reporting Performance Monitoring Misinserted Cell Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

5B

Fwd BIPV

0 - 232-1

N/A

Forward reporting Performance Monitoring Bipolar Violation Count. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

5C-5F

RESERVED

60

SAR Good PDUs Rcv

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of good PDUs received by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

61

SAR Good PDUs Xmt

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of good PDUs transmitted by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

62

SAR Rcv PDUs Discarded

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of PDUs discarded on the ingress by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

63

SAR Xmt PDUs Discarded

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of PDUs discarded on the egress by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

64

SAR Invalid CRC PDUs Rcvd

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of invalid CRC32 PDUs received by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

65

SAR Invalid Length PDUs Rcvd

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of invalid-length PDUs received by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

66

SAR Short Length Failures

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of short-length failures detected by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

67

SAR Long Length Failures

0 - 232-1

N/A

Number of long-length failures detected by the SAR. [A:ALL, B:ALL]

cnfcdpparm (configure CVM card parameters)

Configures CVM parameters for Modem Detection (MDM), certain reserved debug parameters, and In Frame and Out of Frame (I Frm and O Frm) thresholds for DS0A-type T1 applications. (See the cnfln description for information on assigning % Fast Modem on a per-channel basis.) All CVMs in the node are dynamically reconfigured according to the new parameters. When you enter the command, the system prompts for a parameter number.

Syntax

cnfcdpparm <parameter number> <new value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<parameter number>

Specifies the number of the parameter to change. (See Table 3-29.)

<new value>

Specifies the new value for the parameter.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfchts, dchst, cnfecparm


Caution   You should consult the Cisco TAC before changing any of these parameter.


Table 3-29:
cnfcdpparm—Parameters and Descriptions
No. Parameter Description Default1

1

MDM Low Power Threshold

Power level for Modem Detect high-range threshold.

3160 (H)

2

MDM Stationary Coefficient

Indicates how rapidly the power level is changing to not be detected as modem.

14 (H)

3

MDM ZCR High Freq Threshold

Defines upper frequency value for 2100 Hz tone used in V.25 modem detection.

5A (H)

4

MDM ZCR Low Freq Threshold

Defines lower frequency value for 2100 Hz tone used in V.25 modem detection.

56 (H)

5

MDM Detect Failure Count

Defines number of failures above which fast modem is not declared.

4 (H)

6

MDM Detect Window Min.

Number of 5.25-milliseconds windows used in modem tests.

39 (H)

7

MDM Detect Silence Max.

Amount of time a channel stays in a modem-detected state. The parameter equals the value you enter times 84 milliseconds. Default=1008 milliseconds.

C (H)

8

MDM Pkt Header

Changes packet type from voice to non-time-stamped for modems.

6 (D)

9

Null Timing Pkt Header

Gives a higher priority to the specified number of voice packets to decrease delay for spurts of talking.

4 (D)

10

Debug Parameter A

A reserved engineering debug parameter. This parameter does not actually go to the card.

0 (H)

11

Debug Parameter B

A reserved engineering debug parameter. This parameter does not actually go to the card.

0 (H)

12

I Frm 2.4 Threshold(msecs)

Specifies In Frame threshold for DS0 2.4 Kbps overhead data channel.

500 (D)

13

O Frm 2.4 Threshold (msecs)

Specifies Out of Frame threshold for DS0 2.4 Kbps overhead data channel.

500 (D)

14

I Frm 4.8 Threshold (msecs)

Same as 19 for DS0 4.8 Kbps channel.

500 (D)

15

O Frm 4.8 Threshold(msecs)

Same as 20 for DS0 4.8 Kbps channel.

500 (D)

16

I Frm 9.6 Threshold(msecs)

Same as 19 for DS0 9.6 Kbps channel.

500 (D)

17

O Frm 9.6 Threshold (msecs)

Same as 20 for DS0 9.6 Kbps channel.

500 (D)

1 Enter value in either decimal (D) or hexadecimal (H).
Example

cnfcdpparm

      pubsigx1 TN SuperUser IGX 32 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:06 PDT 1 MDM Low Pwr Thrsh [3160] (H) 15 0 Frm 4.8 Thrsh (msecs) [ 500] (D) 2 MDM Stationary Coef. [ 14] (H) 16 I Frm 9.6 Thrsh (msecs) [ 500] (D) 3 MDM ZCR High Frq Thrsh [ 5A] (H) 17 O Frm 9.6 Thrsh (msecs) [ 500] (D) 4 MDM ZCR Low Frq Thrsh [ 56] (H) 5 MDM Detect Failure Cnt [ 4] (H) 6 MDM Detect Window Min. [ 39] (H) 7 MDM Detect Silence Max. [ 24] (H) 8 MDM Pkt Header [ 6] (D) 9 Null Timing Pkt Header [ 4] (D) 10 Debug Parm A [ 0] (H) 11 Debug Parm B [ 0] (H) 12 I Frm 2.4 Thrsh (msecs) [ 500] (D) 13 O Frm 2.4 Thrsh (msecs) [ 500] (D) 14 I Frm 4.8 Thrsh (msecs) [ 500] (D) This Command: cnfcdpparm Which parameter do you wish to change:

cnfcftst (configure communication fail test pattern)

The communication fail test pattern is used to periodically test for failure of nodes to communicate with each other. This test pattern is also used to recover from communication fail conditions.

A communication fail is defined as a loss of controller communication over one or more trunks to a particular node. A communication fail differs from a communication break condition in that the node may be reachable over other paths. The communication fail test is used to test the failed trunk for proper controller traffic.

Use cnfcftst to configure the communication fail test pattern byte by byte. It defaults to a pattern of 4 bytes of 1s followed by 4 bytes of 0s. Varying the length of the test pattern makes the communications test more or less rigorous. Changing the characters determines the pattern sensitivity for strings of less than 14 bytes.

The dspcftst command displays the current communication test pattern. The parameters used for declaring and clearing communication fails are set by the cnfnodeparm command.

Syntax

cnfcftst

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspcftst

Example

Configure Communication Fail Test Pattern.

cnfcftst

pubsigx1 TN SuperUser IGX 32 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 21:17 GMT Comm Fail Test Pattern ==> Byte 0: FF Byte 12: 00 Byte 24: FF Byte 36: 00 Byte 48: FF Byte 1: FF Byte 13: 00 Byte 25: FF Byte 37: 00 Byte 49: FF Byte 2: FF Byte 14: 00 Byte 26: FF Byte 38: 00 Byte 50: FF Byte 3: FF Byte 15: 00 Byte 27: FF Byte 39: 00 Byte 51: FF Byte 4: 00 Byte 16: FF Byte 28: 00 Byte 40: FF Byte 52: 00 Byte 5: 00 Byte 17: FF Byte 29: 00 Byte 41: FF Byte 53: 00 Byte 6: 00 Byte 18: FF Byte 30: 00 Byte 42: FF Byte 54: 00 Byte 7: 00 Byte 19: FF Byte 31: 00 Byte 43: FF Byte 55: 00 Byte 8: FF Byte 20: 00 Byte 32: FF Byte 44: 00 Byte 56: FF Byte 9: FF Byte 21: 00 Byte 33: FF Byte 45: 00 Byte 57: FF Byte 10: FF Byte 22: 00 Byte 34: FF Byte 46: 00 Byte 58: FF Byte 11: FF Byte 23: 00 Byte 35: FF Byte 47: 00 Byte 59: FF This Command: cnfcftst Enter Byte 0:

cnfchadv (configure channel adaptive voice)

Enables the adaptive voice (ADV) feature for individual channels. ADV must also be enabled at each node that terminates the connection. The channel-specific cnfchadv command has no effect at nodes that do not support ADV enabled.

If the ADV feature is enabled for a channel with a "c" or "v" connections, VAD is automatically disabled on that channel when trunk bandwidth is available and enabled when trunk bandwidth is needed. If the Adaptive Voice feature is not enabled for a channel with a "c" or "v" connections, VAD is always turned on for that channel. In order for a voice ("c" or "v") connection to use ADV, both ends must have ADV enabled by the cnfchadv command.

Syntax

cnfchadv <channel> <e | d>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel>

Specifies the channel or range of channels over which you specify Adaptive Voice.

e

Enables ADV (default)s

d

Disables ADV

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchcnf

Example

Enable Adaptive Voice for channel 13.1.

cnfchadv 13.1

sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2T Dec. 20 2000 00:36 PST % Adaptive Gain (dB) Dial Interface OnHk Cond Channels Util Voice Fax In Out Type Type A B C D Crit 13.1-24 60 Enabled - 0 0 Inband Unconfig ? ? - - a Last Command: cnfchadv 13.1

cnfchdfm (configure channel DFM)

Enables or disables Data Frame Multiplexing (DFM) for individual channels and sets the DFM parameters for the channels. The default state when the DFM feature is activated on a card is enabled. Because DFM is a purchased option, the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) must activate on the applicable nodes before you use the cnfchdfm command.

The DFM feature must be both installed and enabled. The DFM feature must be installed through software control at each node terminating the connection. If DFM is not installed for a pertinent node in the network, the cnfchdfm command has no effect at that node. Furthermore, you must use cnfchdfm at both ends of the connection to enable DFM.

Syntax

cnfchdfm <channel(s)> <7 | 8 | 16> [e | d]

Parameters

Parameter Description

channel

Specifies the channel or range of channels.

7 | 8 | 16

Specifies the pattern length in bits for the DFM algorithm.
Default: 8 bits

e | d

Optionally enables or disables DFM. Note that DFM works at rates no higher than 128 Kbps.
Default: e

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchcnf

Example

Set the DFM pattern length to 8 bits for data channel 5.1.

cnfchdfm 5.1 8

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 16:21 PST Maximum EIA % DFM Pattern DFM Channels Update Rate Util Length Status 5.1 15 100 8 Enabled 5.2-4 2 100 8 Enabled Last Command: cnfchdfm 5.1 8 Next Command:

cnfchdl (configure dial type for channels)

Configures the dial type for a channel or set of channels. The dial type may be inband, pulse, or user-configured. The user-configured option allows non-default timing values to be used. The parameters associated with the cnfchdl command are timing constants used to ensure that signaling pulses are not distorted in time by transmission through the network.

If you select inband, the node assumes that the A and B bits are not used for loop-disconnect dialing. Therefore, any change in signaling bit status goes in a packet to the far end of the connection.

If you select pulse, the transmitting node waits (normally 72 ms) after an A or B bit transition for another transition to arrive. If a transition arrives, the new transition goes into the same signaling packet that is sent to the far end of the connection. This step increases the delay of the signaling transition across the network but decreases the amount of trunk bandwidth used for signaling.

If the default timings are not correct for the network, you must configure the options. The dialing type should be set correctly. If a connection-designated pulse is used for inband signaling, a greater than necessary delay across the network results. If a connection-designated inband is used for pulse signaling, the relative timing of signaling transitions may be lost and so distort the pulses.

Syntax

cnfchdl <channel(s)> <dial_type> [<sig_delay> <min_wink> <int_dig_time>
<playout delay>]

Parameter

Parameter Description

channel

Specifies the channel or range of channels over which to configure dial type.

dial type

Specifies the dial type to assign. The three possible dial types are:

i = inband
p = pulse
u = user-configured

Inband is the default dial type. If you designate "u" for a user-configured dial type, you are prompted, as applicable, from among the following: sig delay, min wink, interdigit time, and playout delay.

signaling delay

Specifies the signaling delay for the user-configured dial type. Range: 12-96 ms. Your entry is rounded to the closest multiple of 1.5 ms.

minimum wink

Specifies the minimum wink to assign to the user-configured dial type. Range: 3-765 ms. Your entry is rounded down to the nearest multiple of 3 ms. This parameter does not apply to CDP, UVM, or CVM channels.

interdigit time

Specifies the interdigit time for the user-configured dial type. Range: 3-765 ms. Your entry is rounded down to the nearest multiple of 3 ms. This parameter does not apply to CDP, UVM, or CVM channels.

playout delay

Specifies the signaling delay assign to the user-configured dial type. Range: 12-96 ms. Your entry is rounded to the closest multiple of
1.5 ms.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchcnf, dspchdlcnf

Example

Configure the dial type of channel 14.1 to pulse.

cnfchdl 14.1 p

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 09:46 PST % Adaptive Gain (dB) Dial OnHk Cond Channels Util Voice In Out Type Interface Type A B C D Crit. 14.1 40 Enabled 0 - Pulse Unconfig ? ? - - a 14.2-24 40 Enabled 0 - Inband Unconfig ? ? - - a Last Command: cnfchdl 14.1 p Next Command:

cnfchec (configure channel echo canceller)

Configures the echo canceller and other channel parameters associated with a voice channel. (You cannot configure CAS and data channels using the cnfchec command.) The CDP/CVM and UVM have slightly different parameters. Unavailable parameters appear on the screen as a dashed line, so no prompts for these unavailable options appear.

Syntax

For CDP/CVM:
cnfchec <chan> <ec> <erl> <td> <convergence> <nlp>

For UVM:
cnfchec <chan> <ec> <td> <nlp> <bkgd_filter>

Parameters

Parameter Description

channel

Specifies the channel or range of channels. For a CDP or CVM, "channel" has the format slot.channel(s). For a UVM, "channel" has the format slot.line.channels(s).

echo canceller

Enable or disable the echo canceller. An "e" enables. A "d" disables.

echo return loss

Sets the echo return loss as high/low). An "h" specifies high. An "l" specifies low.

tone disabler

Enables or disables the tone disabler. An "e" enables. A "d" disables.

convergence

Enables or disables convergence. An "e" enables. A "d" disables. Except for test purposes, the normal state for convergence is enabled.

nonlinear processing

Enables or disables nonlinear processing. An "e" enables. A "d" disables.

bkgd_filter

Enables or disables the background filter.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

No

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchec

Example

Enable and configure the Echo Canceller in channel 7.1 with high echo loss tone disabled, convergence enabled, and non-linear processing enabled. In this example, the card is either a CDP or CVM because the channel is specified with slot.channel rather than slot.line.channel.

cnfchec 7.1 e h e e e

pubsigx1 TN cisco IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 06:06 PDT Echo Echo Return Tone Conver- Non-Linear Voice Channels Cancel Loss (.1 dBs) Disabler gence Processing Tmplt 7.1 Enabled High 60 Enabled Enabled Enabled USA 7.2-31 Disabled High 60 Enabled Enabled Enabled USA Last Command: cnfchec 7.1 e h e e e Next Command:
Example

Enable the echo canceller in channel 10.1.1. In this example, the card is a UVM because the channel is specified with slot.line.channel. Note the available parameters differ slightly from a CDP/CVM.

cnfchec 10.1.1

igxr03 VT Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.2V Jan. 18 2001 12:21 PST Echo Echo Return Tone Conver- Non-Linear Voice Bkgrnd Channels Cancel Loss(.1 dBs) Disabler gence Processing Tmplt Filter 10.1.1-24 Disabled - Enabled - Enabled - Enabled 10.2.1-24 Disabled - Enabled - Enabled - Enabled This Command: cnfchec 10.1.1 Enable or Disable Echo Cancel (e/d)? [d]:

cnfcheia (configure EIA update rate for channels)

Sets the sampling rate for the updating EIA control leads. You can set this rate from 0 (no sampling) to packet-generation rate for the EIA leads associated with the channel.

At 20 updates/second, the control leads are polled for changes every 50 msec. Therefore, changes occurring more rapidly than that might not be detected. If there is no change in EIA lead status, no packet is sent. A minimum of one update per second is sent if the maximum update rate chosen is from 1 to 20.

If the connection is configured in such a way that an implied isochronous clock is detected, the update rate is always 20 per second in the same direction as that of the clock signal. For 1.544 Mbps data connections, this defaults to 0. This does not affect EIA sampling rates of fast EIA or embedded EIA leads.

Syntax

cnfcheia <channel> <update_rate>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel>

Specifies the channel or range of channels over which to configure the EIA update rate.

<update_rate>

Specifies the maximum EIA update rate in updates per second.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchcnf

Example 1

Set the EIA update rate to 15 sec. for data channel 5.1.

cnfcheia 5.1 15

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 16:20 PST Maximum EIA % DFM Pattern DFM Channels Update Rate Util Length Status 5.1 15 100 8 Enabled Last Command: cnfcheia 5.1 15 Next Command:

cnfchfax (configure FAX modem detection for channels)

Configures a channel on a UVM for either FAX detection or FAX relay. If you enable FAX detection, the UVM suspends voice compression when it detects a FAX or modem tone on the channel. For the duration of the FAX, transmission takes place at 64 Kbps.

FAX relay is a mechanism for compression the FAX transmission rate across a network to 9.6 Kbps.

To view the current configuration, use the dspchcnf command.

Syntax

cnfchfax <slot.line> <channel> <e | d>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.line>

Specifies the line of the UVM.

<channel>

Specifies the DS0 or range of DS0s.

<e | d>

Enable or disable FAX detection.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Command

dspchcnf

Example

Configure channels 1-24 on line 1 of the UVM in slot 7 to have FAX modem detection.

cnfchfax 7.1.1

sw109 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 19:10 PST % Adaptive Gain (dB) Dial Interface OnHk Cond Channels Util Voice Fax In Out Type Type A B C D Crit 7.1.1-24 40 Enabled Disabled 0 0 Inband 2W E&M 0 X - - a 7.2.1-24 40 Enabled Disabled 0 0 Inband Unconfig ? ? - - a Last Command: cnfchfax 7.1.1 Next Command:

cnfchgn (configure gain insertion for channels)

Configures the amount of gain inserted by the IGX node for a given circuit line channel or range of channels. Gain can be configured between +6 dB and -8 dB. The input gain is inserted at the receive side of a voice card and is therefore applied before the signal is packetized by the card. The output gain is inserted at the transmit side of a voice card and is applied after the signal has been depacketized by the card. Gain is meaningless for channels that carry data.

Syntax

cnfchgn <channel(s)> <input_gain> <output_gain>

Parameters

Parameter Description

channel

Specifies the channel or range of channels.

input_gain

Specifies the gain, in decibels, to assign to the channel.
Range: -8 dB-+6 dB.

output_gain

Specifies the gain, in decibels, to assign to the channel.
Range: -8 dB -+6 dB.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchcnf

Example

Configure input gain of -4 dB and an output gain of +2 dB for channel 1 of circuit line 1.

cnfchgn 14.1 -4 2

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 09:52 PST % Adaptive Gain (dB) Dial OnHk Cond Channels Util Voice In Out Type Interface Type A B C D Crit. 14.1 40 Enabled -4 -2 User Unconfig ? ? - - a 14.2-24 40 Enabled 0 -2 Inband Unconfig ? ? - - a Last Command: cnfchgn 14.1 -4 2 Next Command:

cnfchpri (configure Frame Relay channel priority)

Sets the channel priority for a Frame Relay connection. The Channel Priority feature permits some Frame Relay connections to receive a higher priority within a port queue than other Frame Relay traffic on a per-connection basis. The default priority is low. You can configure Frame Relay LMI ports to communicate the priority to a router. You must change the priority on both ends of a connection.


Note   Note that data of high-priority (hi-pri) connections is sent to the CPE (customer premises equipment) ahead of data from low priority (low-pri) connections. Note that this parameter has nothing to do with how the connection is routed through the network, but affects only how data is sent to the CPE.

Syntax

cnfchpri <slot.port.DLCI.> <h | l>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.port.DLCI.>

Specifies the channel or range of channels. The format is slot.port.DLCI.

<h | l>

The priority: h = high; l = low.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchcnf

Example

Configure a high priority for Frame Relay connection 9.1.100.

cnfchpri 9.1.100 h

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 16:00 PST Conn: 9.1.100 gamma 8.1.200 fr MIR CIR VC Q Depth PIR Cmax ECN QThresh QIR FST 9.6/9.6 9.6/9.6 5/5 256/256 10/10 65535/65535 9.6/9.6 n % Util: 100/100 Owner: LOCAL Restriction: NONE CoS: 0 Status: OK Group: NONE Priority: H TestRTD: 0 msec Path: alpha 14--13beta 15--15gamma Pref: Not Configured alpha 9.1.100 gamma 8.1.200 FRP: OK FRP: OK FRI: OK FRI: OK Last Command: cnfchpri 9.1.100 h Next Command:

cnfchstats (configure channel statistics collection)

Enables statistics collection for various channel parameters. The cnfchstats command is sometimes referred to as an "interval statistics" command—the statistics information collected is propagated to Cisco WAN Manager.

To configure the channel statistics level on the BXM and UXM card, use the cnfcdparm command. This command lets you configure a specific card slot to support additional levels of statistics (levels 2 and 3) that were supported in releases previous to Release 9.2 (level 1). See the cnfcdparm command for more information.

This debug command enables statistics collecting for channel parameters. Table 3-30 lists the statistics by type. Not all statistic types are available for all connections. Only valid statistics are displayed for you to select; inapplicable statistics appear in gray. If you are unsure of the size parameter to specify, select four bytes per sample.

The dspchstatcnf command displays the channel statistics configuration. Statistics are collected by and displayed on the Cisco WAN Manager workstation. Cisco WAN Manager allows statistics collection to be customized. You can disable a Cisco WAN Manager-enabled channel statistic by specifying the optional node name of the workstation as the last parameter on the command line.

Syntax

cnfchstats <channel> <stat> <interval> <e | d> [<samples> <size> <peaks>] [nodename]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel>

Specifies the channel (connection) to configure.

<stat>

Specifies the type of statistic to enable/disable. (See Table 3-30.)

<interval>

Specifies the time interval of each sample (1-255 minutes).

<e|d>

Enables/disables a statistic. E to enable; D to disable a statistic.

[samples]

Specifies the number of sample to collect (1-255).

[size]

Specifies the number of bytes per data sample (1, 2 or 4).

[peaks]

Enables/disables the collection of one-minute peaks. Y to enable; N to disable.

[nodename]

Specifies the name of the node to which the Cisco WAN Manager terminal connects.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchstatcnf, cnfdparm, dspchstathist, cnfchanstats

Example

cnfchstats 9.2.1.100

sw199 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 09:28 PDT Channel Statistic Types 46) Cells Received from Port 60) Average Tx Vcq Depth in Cells 47) EOF Cells Received from Port 61) Bkwd Severely Errored Cell Blocks 48) Cells Transmitted to Network 62) Bkwd Lost Cell Count 49) Cells Received from Network 63) Bkwd Misinserted Cell Count 50) Cells Received with CLP=1 64) Bkwd Bipolar Violation Count 51) Non-Compliant Cells Received 65) Fwd Severely Errored Cell Blocks 52) Average Rx VCq Depth in Cells 66) Fwd Lost Cell Count 53) Cells Transmitted with EFCI=1 67) Fwd Misinserted Cell Count 54) Cells Transmitted to Port 68) Fwd Bipolar Violation Count 56) Cells Received with CLP=0 69) Good Pdu's Received by the Sar 57) Cells Transmitted with EFCI=0 70) Good Pdu's Transmitted by the Sar 58) Ingress Vsvd Allowed Cell Rate 71) Rx pdu's discarded by the Sar 59) Egress Vsvd Allowed Cell Rate 72) Tx pdu's discarded by the Sar sw199 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 09:28 PDT Channel Statistic Types 73) Invalid CRC32 pdu rx by the sar 74) Invalid Length pdu rx by the sar 75) Shrt-Lgth Fail detected by the sar 76) Lng-Lgth Fail detected by the sar This Command: cnfchstats 9.2.1.100 Statistic Type:


Table 3-30:
Channel Statistics
Statistic Number Statistic Type

1

Frames Received

2

Receive Frames Discarded

3

Frames Transmitted

4

Transmit Frames Discarded

5

Packets Received

6

Receive Packets Discarded

7

Packets Transmitted

8

Projected Packets Transmitted

9

Supervisory Packets Transmitted

10

Bytes Received

11

Receive Bytes Discarded

12

Bytes Transmitted

13

Transmit Bytes Discarded

14

Seconds V.25 Modem On

15

Seconds DSI Enabled

16

Seconds Off-Hook

17

Seconds In Service

18

Frames Transmitted with FECN

19

Frames Transmitted with BECN

20

Supervisory Packets Received

21

Minutes Congested

22

DE Frames Received

23

DE Frames Transmitted

24

DE Frames Dropped

25

DE Bytes Received

26

Frames Received in Excess of CIR

27

Bytes Received in Excess of CIR

28

Frames Transmitted in Excess of CIR

29

Bytes Transmitted in Excess of CIR

32

Rx Frames Discarded—Deroute/Down

33

Rx Bytes Discarded—Deroute/Down

34

Rx Frames Discarded—VC Queue Overflow

35

Rx Bytes Discarded—VC Queue Overflow

36

Tx Frames Discarded—Queue Overflow

37

Tx Bytes Discarded—Queue Overflow

38

Tx Frames Discarded—Ingress CRC

39

Tx Bytes Discarded—Ingress CRC

40

Tx Frames Discarded—Trunk Discard

41

Tx Bytes Discarded—Trunk Discard

42

TX Frames During Ingress LMI Fail

43

TX Bytes During Ingress LMI Fail

44

Unkn Prot Frms Dscd at Ingress

45

Unkn Prot Frms Dscd at Egress

46

Cells Received from Port

47

EOF Cells Received from Por

48

Cells Transmitted to Network

49

Cells Received from Network

50

Cells Received with CLP=1

51

Non-Compliant Cells Received

52

Average Rx VCq Depth in Cells

53

Cells Transmitted with EFCI=1

54

Cells Transmitted to Port

56

Cells Received with CLP=0

57

Cells Transmitted with EFCI=0

58

Ingress Vsvd Allowed Cell Rate

59

Egress Vsvd Allowed Cell Rate

60

Average Tx Vc Depth in Cells

61

Bkwd Severely Errored Cell Blocks

62

Bkwd Lost Cell Count

63

Bkwd Misinserted Cell Count

64

Bkwd Bipolar Violation Count

65

Fwd Severely Errored Cell Blocks

66

Fwd Lost Cell Count

67

Fwd Misinserted Cell Count

68

Fwd Bipolar Violation Count

69

Good PDUs Received by the SAR

70

Good PDUs Transmitted by the SAR

71

Rx PDUs discarded by the SAR

72

Tx PDUs discarded by the SAR

73

Invalid CRC32 PDU rx by the SAR

74

Invalid Length PDU rx by the SAR

75

Invalid Length PDU rx by the SAR

76

Lng-Lgth Fail detected by the SAR

cnfchts (configure channel timestamp)

Configures a pre-aging parameter for data channels. Applicable cards are the SDP, LPD, LDM, and HDM. Applicable traffic is time-stamped data.

This command configures the pre-age parameter for data channels. The pre-age parameter specifies the initial age of a time-stamped packet. With a non-zero pre-age, the packet has less time to wait at the destination before it reaches the Max Time-Stamped Packet Age and is taken out of the ingress queue. (Data channels with the greater pre-age value are processed sooner.) However, if the pre-age value is too high because of queuing delays in the network, packets could be discarded because they appear too old at the destination.

The value you enter for pre-age should be a multiple of 250 microseconds (otherwise, the system rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of 250 microseconds). The default value is 0. Acceptable values are in the range 0 to the Max Time Stamped Packet Age (set by the cnfsysparm command). After you change a time-stamp, the connection should be rerouted or restarted for the new value to take effect.


Note   You can see the value for pre-age in the screen display for the dspchcnf command. If dspchcnf is entered at a user-privilege level below SuperUser level, the pre-age parameter does not appear in the dspchcnf output.

Syntax

cnfchts <channel> <pre-age>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel>

Specifies the data channel.

<pre-age>

Specifies a value in 250-microsecond increments to go in the age field in the header of a time-stamped packet.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfcdpparm

Example

cnfchts 3.1 1000

pubsipx1 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 03:50 GMT Maximum EIA % DFM Pattern DFM PreAge Channels Update Rate Util Length Status (usec) 3.1 2 100 8 Enabled 1000 3.2-4 2 100 8 Enabled 0 Last Command: cnfchts 3.1 1000 Next Command:

cnfchutl (configure channel utilization)

Informs the system software of the expected utilization rate of connections with traffic-dependent compression algorithms (voice connections with VAD, data connections with DFM, Frame Relay connections). The software load model then takes the user-specified rate of the connection and modifies it by using the percent of utilization you specify with cnfchutl. The resulting rate is used in calculations for loading trunks. The load model uses these figures instead of calculated estimates from real traffic patterns.

For the full benefits of the compression algorithms to be used, the default utilizations should be modified after traffic studies have been performed. Traffic studies of Frame Relay connections should be used to determine optimum utilization settings. When calculating loads in a network, the load allocated to a connection is:

channel utilization x full load for the connection type

For example, with a channel utilization of 50percent and a full load of 480 packets per second, the load allocated to a connection is:

0.50 x 480 pps = 240 pps

For voice connections with VAD turned off, the bandwidth allocated is always the maximum bandwidth for the connection type. In other words, the utilization, although configurable, is ignored for a voice channel without VAD and a data channel without DFM.

If you use cnfchutl to increase the utilization of a connection, the system verifies that the additional bandwidth is available on the connection's current route. If the bandwidth is not available, the system attempts to reroute the connection. If no other route is found, the connection is failed.

If you use cnfchutl to decrease the utilization of a connection, the system makes the bandwidth available to other connections that require a route. The screen displayed by the cnfchutl command depends upon whether a data channel, voice channel, or Frame Relay channel is specified.

Syntax

cnfchutl <channel> <%_util>

Parameters

Parameter Description

channel

Specifies the channel for configuring utilization. The channel can be in voice, data, Frame Relay. The format for channel depends on the technology:

  • Voice connection: slot.channel

  • Data connection: slot.port

  • Frame Relay connection: slot.port.DLCI

  • Access device connection: slot.port.device_ID

percent utilization

Specifies the percentage of utilization of the channel.
Range: 0-100
Default value (data or Frame Relay): 100%
Default value (voice): 40%

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchcnf

Example

Set utilization on data channel 5.1 at 40%.

cnfchutl 5.1 40

salpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:45 PST Maximum EIA % DFM Pattern DFM Channels Update Rate Util Length Status 5.1 15 40 8 Enabled 5.2-4 2 100 8 Enabled Last Command: cnfchutl 5.1 40 Next Command:
Example

Set utilization on voice channel 14.1 at 55%.

cnfchutl 14.1 55

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:10 PST % Adaptive Gain (dB) Dial OnHk Cond Channels Util Voice In Out Type Interface Type A B C D Crit. 14.1 55 Enabled -4 - User Unconfig ? ? - - a 14.2-24 40 Enabled 0 - Inband Unconfig ? ? - - a Last Command: cnfchutl 14.1 55 Next Command:
Example

Set utilization on Frame Relay channel 8.1.100 at 60%.

cnfchutl 8.1.100 60

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:45 PST Frame Relay Channel Configuration Port: 8.1 From Minimum Peak AvgFrame Cmax VC Q ECN Q % Util
8.1.100 9.6 * 70 10 65535 65535 60
8.1.301 9.6 * 70 10 65535 65535 100 Last Command: cnfchutl 8.1.100 60 Next Command:

cnfcldir (configure control lead direction)

Sets the control lead direction for pins 11 and 23 on the EIA/TIA-232 data channels of an SDP or HDM card set. This allows the control leads to carry "backward" channels. Pins 11 and 23 on an EIA/TIA-232 interface are bidirectional. The signals on these pins can have various names, such as SI, SF, CH, CI, and QM. To display control lead information about pins 11 and 23, use the dspbob command. Use the cnfict command to configure the behavior of all output leads.

Syntax

cnfcldir <channel> <lead> <direction>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel>

Specifies the EIA/TIA-232 data channel whose control lead direction to configure.

<lead>

Specifies the pin number of the control lead.
Range: 11 and 23

<direction>

Specifies the direction of the control lead signal.
Valid control lead directions are:

Input = The control lead acts as an input to the IGX node (default).
Output = The control lead acts as an output from the IGX node.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfict, dspbob, dspict

Example

Configure lead number 11 of channel 3.1 to be an input. The screen example shows the display after the system has accepted the input as valid.

cnfcldir 3.1 11 input

pubsigx1 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 00:30 GMT Port: 3.1 Interface: V35 DCE Clocking: Normal Inputs from User Equipment Outputs to User Equipment Lead Pin Lead Pin Lead Pin Lead Pin RTS C CTS D DTR H DSR E TxD P/S DCD F TT U/W RI J TM K RxD R/T RxC V/X TxC Y/a Last Command: cnfcldir 3.1 11 input Next Command:

cnfclksrc (configure network clock source)

Specifies a network-wide clock source. The clocking scheme ensures that all nodes in the network automatically synchronize to the nearest, most stable clock available. After you specify a clock source, the location and type of the network clock source goes out to all nodes in the network. This synchronization remains in effect despite line failures, power outages, controller card switchovers, line repairs, and the joining of subnetworks and all other network topology changes. Each node in the network maintains a list of the available clock sources for the network.

A clock source can be:

The clock type can be:

To remove a clock source, enter its type as "r" at the end of the cnfclksrc command line.

Designation of the clock type depends on the stratum (or stability) of the clock source. In a large network, for example, you could designate all stratum 2 clocks as "primary," all stratum 3 clocks as "secondary," and all stratum 4 clocks as "tertiary." The network regards all primary clocks as equal in the network clocking hierarchy, regards all secondary clocks as equal, and regards all tertiary clocks as equal. Each node synchronizes to the highest stratum clock source that is available. If multiple, equal clock sources are available, the node synchronizes to the source that is physically the closest. If none of the sources is available, the network synchronizes to the internal oscillator of one of the nodes in the network.

When you are planning clock sources, consider these points:

Syntax

cnfclksrc <line type> <line number> <source type> [freq]

Parameters

Parameter Description

line type

Specifies whether the clock source is a trunk (p), circuit line (c), or external (e).

line number

For a network clock source of either a circuit (c) or trunk (p), this specifies the back slot location of the source. For external clock sources (e), enter either front card slot 1 or 2 as long as either slot has a card. This external source designation applies to IGX, and BPX nodes.

source type

Specifies where the clock fits in the hierarchy: p = primary; s = secondary; and t = tertiary. To remove the clock source configuration for the current type and line, enter an "r."

freq

Specifies the frequency of the clock source. An entry is necessary only if the line type is an external line. The supported frequencies are 1.544 MHz and 2.048 MHz. Enter a "1" for 1.544 MHz or a "2" for 2.048 MHz.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspclksrcs, dspcurclk

Example

Configure circuit line 15 as a primary clock. The network clock sources screen shows that circuit line 15 has been configured as a primary clock source for the network.

cnfclksrc c 15 p

bootzilla TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:31 MST Network Clock Sources Primary bootzilla CLN 15 Secondary None Tertiary None Last Command: cnfclksrc c 15 p Next Command:

cnfclnparm (configure circuit line parameter)

Configures the alarm integration time for circuit lines originating on a UVM, CDP, or CVM and for T1/E1 Frame Relay circuits originating on an FRP, FRM, or UFM.

This command configures the circuit line alarm integration times for RED and YELLOW circuit line alarms. These integration times are specified in milliseconds and should be set to correspond to the local carrier's alarm integration times. Carrier integration times are typically 800 to 1500 ms. for RED Alarm and 1500 to 3000 ms. for YELLOW Alarm. The allowable range for these parameters are 60 to 3,932,100 ms.

Syntax

cnfclnparm <line>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<line>

Specifies the circuit line to configure.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

No

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfclnsigparm, dchst

Example

cnfclnparm 11

gamma TRM SuperUser Rev: 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:27 PDT CLN 11 Parameters 1 Red Alarm - In/Out [ 1000 / 2000] (Dec) 2 Yel Alarm - In/Out [ 1000 / 2000] (Dec) This Command: cnfclnparm 11 Which parameter do you wish to change:

cnfclnsigparm (configure circuit line signaling parameters)

Configures signaling parameters for a UVM or CVM.

The CVM & UVM Heartbeat parameter (option 1) is the rate, in seconds, at which the card sends a signaling (ABCD bits) state update to the other end of the connection, even when there is no change in the state of the signaling bits. This is done because signaling packets are time-stamped data packets, and there is a small chance that a signaling packet might be discarded somewhere in the network. This mechanism is a recovery mechanism to ensure that on-hook and off-hook notifications are not lost.

Increasing this interval will probably have no impact as long as none of the normal signaling time-stamped data packets are discarded in the network.

Syntax

cnfclnsigparm <parameter number> <parameter value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<parameter number>

Specifies the parameter number of the signaling parameter to change.

<parameter value>

Specifies the new value to enter.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

No

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfclnparm, dspsig

Example

cnfclnsigparm

sw219 TRM SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 08:12 GMT 1 CVM & UVM Heartbeat [ 2] (sec) 2 CVM & UVM Sig. Polling Rate [ 10] (sec) 3 CVM & UVM Default Inband Sig Delay [ 96] (msec) 4 CVM & UVM Default Inband Playout Delay [ 200] (msec) 5 CVM & UVM Default Pulse Sig Delay [ 96] (msec) 6 CVM & UVM Default Pulse Playout Delay [ 200] (msec) 7 CVM & Number of Packet Slices [ 1] 8 CVM & UVM Packet Rate [ 200] (pkt/sec) 9 CVM & UVM Condition E1 CCS Lines? [ NO] 10 CVM & UVM Default Inband Min. Wink [ 140] (msec) 11 CVM & UVM Default Pulse Min. Wink [ 140] (msec) 12 CVM & UVM Condition T1 Lines? [ YES] (yes/no) Last Command: cnfclnsigparm Which parameter do you wish to change:


Table 3-31:
Display Fields
No. Parameter Description Range

1

Heartbeat

The current state of the signaling is periodically transmitted to the far end even if no signaling transitions are detected. This interval is determined by the value of "heartbeat."

The CVM & UVM Heartbeat parameter (option 1) is the rate, in seconds, at which the card sends a signaling (ABCD bits) state update to the other end of the connection, even when there is no change in the state of the signaling bits. This is done because signaling packets are time-stamped data packets, and there is a small chance that a signaling packet might be discarded somewhere in the network. This recovery mechanism ensures that on-hook and off-hook notifications are not lost.

Increasing this interval will probably have no impact as long as none of the normal signaling time-stamped data packets are being discarded in the network.

2-30 sec.

2

Signal Polling Rate

How often the control card polls the UVM/CVM for the status of the signaling. This parameter is used to update displays and statistics.

2-60 sec.

3

Default Inband Signal Delay

The transmit buffer timer value set after a valid signaling transition for in-band signaling arrives. After timeout, a signaling packet is sent.

30-96 msec.

4

Default Inband Playout Delay

The receive buffer timer that "ages" an incoming, time-stamped packet. When the age of the packet reaches the time-stamp value, it moves on to depacketization and then to the user equipment. This parameter is used to even out the delay between signaling packets and voice packets.

0-200 msec.

5

Default Pulse Signal Delay

Same as number 3 but applied to pulse signaling.

30-96 msec.

6

Default Pulse Playout Delay

Same as number 4 but applied to pulse signaling.

100-200 msec.

8

Packet Rate

Reserves trunk bandwidth for carrying UVM/CVM signaling.

0-1000 packets/sec.

9

Condition CCS Lines

If you specify "yes" for this parameter, the card applies signaling conditioning during an alarm to all channels on E1 CCS circuit lines to notify marked for Common Channel Signaling to notify PBX of a line failure.

YES or NO

10

Inband Min. Wink

Same as 6 for in-band signaling.

120-300 msec.

11

Pulse Min. Wink

For UVM/CVM connections only, this parameter controls both wink and inter-digit intervals for signaling that arrives over the NPM signaling channel from a far end UVM/CVM.

120-300 msec.

12

Condition T1 Lines?

If you specify "yes" for this parameter, the card applies signaling conditioning during an alarm to all channels on T1 circuit lines to notify PBX of a line failure.

YES or NO

cnfcls (configure class template)

Modify the ten Cisco-supplied class templates for connection configuration. (The addcon command can take a class as an input.)

When you enter the number of the class to configure, the display shows the current value of each parameter in the class. For each item in the class, a prompt appears for changing or keeping the current value.

You can use cnfatmcls and cnfcls to configure the rt-VBR ATM connection class. You can use dspatmcls and dspcls to display the connection parameters for the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR connection classes.

The rt-VBR connections are configured per class 3 service parameters, and nrt-VBR connections are configured per class 2 service parameters. You can change these class parameters by using the cnfcls or cnfatmcls commands, or the parameters can be entered individually for each connection by specifying yes to the extended parameters prompt of the addcon command.


Note   For a new node running software Release 9.2.20 or later, the rt-VBR connection class number is 3. An upgraded node will retain existing connection classes. Therefore, it cannot have the rt-VBR connection class 3. However, you can configure the connection classes to desired service and parameters by using the cnfcls/cnfatmcls commands. For nrt-VBR connections in a new node, a number of connection classes are pre-configured, including 2, 4, 5, and 6.

Syntax

cnfcls <class number> [optional parameters]

Parameters

Parameter Description

class number

Specifies the class to configure. Range: 1-10

optional parameters

Individual parameters are specific to the type of connection (CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, ABR, ATFR). Each is prompted one at a time. Refer to the dspcls command to see the parameters in each of the classes.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

addcon, dspcls, cnfatmcls, dspatmcls

Example

Configure connection class 10. The command line interface (CLI) displays the current settings and requests the class type. After you enter a class type, the CLI prompts you to specify each parameter for the selected class type (ABRSTD in the second screen display).

cnfcls 10

sw60 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Date/Time Not Set ATM Connection Classes Class: 10 Type: CBR PCR(0+1) % Util CDVT(0+1) Policing 4000/4000 100/100 10000/10000 4 Description: "Default CBR 4000" This Command: cnfcls 10 Enter class type (VBR, CBR, UBR, ABRSTD, ABRFST, ATFR): _______________________________________________________ sw60 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Date/Time Not Set ATM Connection Classes Class: 10 Type: ABRSTD PCR(0+1) % Util MCR CDVT(0+1) AAL5 FBTC 4000/4000 100/100 4000/4000 10000/10000 n Description: "Default CBR 4000" This Command: cnfcls 10 abrstd * * * * * Do you want this change (y/n)?

This screen is an example of a cnfcls/cnfatmcls command and response:

pubsbpx1 TN silves:1 BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:42 PDT ATM Connection Classes Class: 2 Type: nrt-VBR PCR(0+1) % Util CDVT(0+1) AAL5 FBTC SCR 1000/1000 100/100 10000/10000 n 1000/1000 MBS Policing 1000/1000 3 Description: "Default nrt-VBR 1000 " This Command: cnfcls atm 2 Enter class type (rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, CBR, UBR, ABRSTD, ABRFST, ATFR, ATFST, ATFT, ATFTFST, ATFX, ATFXFST):

cnfcmb (configure combined timeout parameters)

Configures the time the node waits for a second packet to become available for placing in an ATM cell. Use the cnfcmb command to control the time that the node waits for individual traffic types.

Syntax

cnfcmb <parameter> <value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<parameter>

Specifies the number of the parameter to change.

<value>

Specifies the value of the parameter to change. When you enter a value for a parameter, switch software multiplies the value by 125 microseconds to derive the timeout.

Parameter Values

Parameter Description Default

1

Timeout for Voice (multiplied by 125 microseconds)

2

2

Timeout for Time-Stamped Traffic (multiplied by 125 microseconds)

2

3

Timeout for High Priority Traffic (multiplied by 125 microseconds)

0

4

Timeout for Non-Time-Stamped Traffic (multiplied by 125 microseconds)

2

5

Timeout for Bursty Data 1 Traffic (multiplied by 125 microseconds)

255

6

Timeout for Bursty Data 2 Traffic (multiplied by 125 microseconds)

255

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

service

Yes

No

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspchcnf

Example

Change the timeout for voice packets from the default of 2 * 125 microseconds to 1 * 125 microseconds.

cnfcmb 1 1

pubsigx1 TN SuperUser IGX 32 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 23:38 PDT System-Wide Combine Timeout Parameters 1 Packet Combining Timeout for Voice (125 usec *)...................... 2 2 Packet Combining Timeout for Time Stamped Traffic (125 usec *)....... 2 3 Packet Combining Timeout for High Priority Traffic (125 usec *)...... 0 4 Packet Combining Timeout for Non Time Stamped Traffic (125 usec *)... 2 5 Packet Combining Timeout for Bursty Data 1 Traffic (125 usec *)...... 255 6 Packet Combining Timeout for Bursty Data 2 Traffic (125 usec *)...... 255 This Command: cnfcmb Which parameter do you wish to change: 1 1

cnfcmparm (configure connection management parameters)

Configure various connection management parameters for the node.

The cnfcmparm command is used to enable cost-based route selection and the use of delay as the trunk cost. By default, delay is enabled. This worst-case delay for each connection type is calculated from the configured voice and non-time-stamped trunk queue depths.

For delay sensitive connections on the IGX (voice and non-time-stamped), the worst-case trunk delay can be used as the per-trunk cost.

For delay sensitive connections on the BPX (ATM CBR), end-to-end delay is not used as a routing constraint in AutoRoute.

This command configures parameters (see Table 3-32 for parameter values) that affect Adaptive Voice, Rerouting, and Courtesy Up/Down. These parameters are used only at the local node.

Syntax

cnfcmparm <parameter> <value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<parameter>

Specifies the number of the parameter to change. See Display Fields below.

<value>

Specifies the new parameter value to enter.


Table 3-32:
Parameter Values
No. Parameter Description Range Default

1

Normalization Interval

The time delay in minutes between attempts to disable VAD (that is, to "normalize") on groups of voice connections. It is in force once the network has been stable for a while (see parameter 4, "Setting Interval").

1-10 minutes

2

2

Max Number To Normalize

The maximum number of connections that may be normalized at each normalization interval (see parameter 1).

1-50 connections

5 connections

3

Normalization Logging

This boolean specifies whether changes in VAD status are recorded in the event log.

y=yes
n=no

No

4

Settling Interval

The length of time, in minutes, following a disturbance in the network (trunk failure, and so on) before normalization attempts are allowed.

1-10 minutes

4 minutes

5

Minimum Open Space

The minimum trunk bandwidth required, in packets/second, before normalization attempts are allowed. This is in addition to the statistical reserve for the trunk. Increasing this parameter causes all connections in the network to reroute (although the parameter governs only the local node).

0-8000 packets per second (pps)

1000 pps

6

Normalization Priority

Determines the order in which connections are considered for VAD removal. It may be class of service (CoS) or load.

While CoS is a simple test, the load option is more complex. The load, in packets/second, over the last "Load Sample Period" (see parameter 7) for all eligible connections (with or without VAD) is sampled. For every "Normalization Interval" (see parameter 1), the IGX node takes the "Max Number To Normalize" (see parameter 2) connections with VAD applied and compares their utilization with those with VAD already disabled. Those with the greatest load will have VAD disabled, if necessary, at the expense of some that were already disabled, where VAD is now applied. In this way, the most heavily used connections are continually found and have VAD disabled.

CoS or Load (c/l)

l (Load)

7

Load Sample Period

The period during which voice activity is sampled for load determination if parameter 6 is set to Load.

1-10 minutes

4 minutes

8

Maximum Routing Bundle

For rerouting, the maximum number of connections allowed in a routing request. For derouting, the maximum number of connections chosen using the CoS-based criterion. The value of this parameter should be set to less than that of parameter 21.

A larger value provides a faster rerouting/derouting time. A smaller value provides better load balancing.

1-250

90

9

Reroute Timer

The number of seconds since the last reroute to wait before attempting another reroute of the same connection. After a connection has been successfully routed, it does not get rerouted again (especially for a connection that has previously experienced a failure at its preferred route) until this amount of time has elapsed. The time delay permits the preferred route to stabilize its operational status before a working connection with a preferred route is returned to the preferred route. A zero timer means the request is re-attempted immediately.

0-900 seconds

0 seconds

10

Timer Reset on Line Fail

This boolean specifies that the reroute timer in parameter 9 can be ignored if the current route actually fails (instead of attempting a rerouting of working connections on non-preferred routes).

y=yes
n=no

y

11

Max Down/Up Per Pass

The maximum number of connections allowed to be upped or downed per pass.

A larger value provides a faster completion of state update notifications, at the expense of potentially flooding the network.

A smaller value provides better control of network traffic, but at the expense of prolonged state update notifications.

0-255

50

12

Down/Up Timer

The amount of time to wait before the next pass of upping/downing connections.

A larger value provides slower-paced state update notifications, thus allowing time for the node to process other requests.

A smaller value provides faster-paced state update notifications.

1000-65535 msecs

30000 msecs

13

Maximum Route Errors per Cycle

The maximum number of failed rerouting attempts allowed for a connection. Once this threshold has been reached, the connection is removed from the reroute group (see parameters 25, 26, and 27) and placed in a block waiting for the next cycle. (See also parameters 14 and 15.)

A larger value provides a more resilient rerouting attempt.

A smaller value allows a faster declaration of rerouting failure.

0-65535 failures

BPX: 50 IGX: 200

14

Maximum Time Between Routing Cycles

All connections that have waited for this amount of time are allowed to be returned into the reroute group. The expiration of this timer starts off another cycle of rerouting attempts. (See also parameters 13 and 15.)

A larger value provides more time for the network topology to settle before re-attempting a connection reroute.

A smaller value allows more frequent reroute attempts.

1-8 minutes

5 minutes

15

Maximum Routing Error Cycles

The maximum number of cycles of rerouting attempts. Once this threshold has been reached, the connection is declared failed. You must use the rrtcon command to reroute the failed connection. (See also parameters 13 and 14.) Alternatively, the failed connection is rerouted when the BCC becomes active (for example, due to card reset or switchcc).

A larger value provides a more resilient rerouting attempt.

A smaller value allows a faster declaration of rerouting failure.

0-255 cycles

BPX: 10 IGX: 1

16

Routing pause timer

The amount of time to wait before the next rerouting attempt. Do not wait when set to 0.

A larger value provides a slower-paced rerouting attempt, taking advantage of possible network topology updates.

A smaller value allows for a faster-paced rerouting attempt that does not depend on the changing network topology.

0-65535 msecs

0

17

Max. messages sent per update

The maximum number of CMUPDATE messages that may be sent into the network without acknowledgment. This parameter permits the transmitting node to throttle the networking traffic to prevent jamming.

A larger value allows the broadcasting to complete faster, at the risk of jamming the network.

A smaller value slows down the broadcasting without flooding the network, but at the expense of more broadcasting iterations.

0-223 decimal

10

18

Send SVC urgent msgs

IGX only. This parameter enables an IGX node to inform each via node to remove an SVC connection during deletion. When disabled, the via nodes are not immediately informed through an update message. This causes the trunk loading occupied by a deleted SVC to remain unavailable until the update message is received by the via node.

y=yes
n=no

BPX: n
IGX: y

19

Max SVC Retry

IGX only. The maximum number of failed routing attempts before the SVC connection is declared failed. If the routing attempt fails due to a reason other than being "blocked," the connection is immediately declared failed. A blocked attempt means that the routing state machine on the via/slave node is already processing a route request, or is locked by some other state machines.

A larger value provides a more resilient SVC rerouting attempt.

A smaller value allows a faster declaration of rerouting failure.

0-30 decimal

0

20

Wait for TBL updates

After routing all connections based on CoS, wait roughly this amount of time before the routing of other connections in need of rerouting (for example, those failed connections due to lack of critical internal resources). This delay allows the topology to settle after the CoS-based rerouting phase. This wait period should typically be one or two seconds longer than the time specified by the Fast Interval parameter (default 5 seconds) of the cnftlparm command.

0-65000 decimal

70
(x100 msecs)

21

Max derouting bundle

The maximum number of connections chosen based on load, that can be derouted concurrently. The value of this parameter should be set to greater than that of parameter 8. The actual number of connections concurrently derouted can reach the sum of this parameter and of parameter 8.

A larger value provides a faster rerouting/derouting time.

A smaller value provides better load balancing.

0-16000 decimal

500

22

Enable cost-based routing

This boolean specifies whether the cost-based routing algorithm should be used in preference to the hop-based routing algorithm. Yes means enable cost-based routing.

Cost-based routing allows the network operation to better tune the network utilization based on the least cost.

Hop-based routing is a simpler algorithm that selects a path strictly based on the least number of hops.

y=yes
n=no

n

23

Enable route cache usage

This boolean specifies whether the most recent successfully used routes are to be placed in cache in order to avoid performing route selection. Yes enables route cache usage. The cache route can be either a cost-based route or a hop-based route.

y=yes
n=no

n

24

Use delay for routing

This boolean specifies whether queuing delay is considered in the cost-based routing algorithm. Yes means use delay for routing. The parameter is particular useful for time-sensitive or voice connections.

y=yes
n=no

n

25

# of reroute groups used

Specifies the number of reroute groups allowed for the node. Each reroute group is categorized based on the load requirement for each connection. The node reroutes connections with the highest load units first and proceeds with successively decreasing load unit ranges.

A larger value provides more groups at the cost of more iterations stepping through the reroute groups during rerouting.

A smaller value provides a faster completion of the iterations.

1-200 groups

50

26

Starting size of RR groups

The first reroute group is defined to consist of connections with load units at or below this parameter value. During rerouting, connections from this reroute group are considered last. Connections with load units above this value but at or below the sum of this value and that of the next parameter (increment between RR groups) are placed in the second reroute group.

A larger value provides a bigger range of bandwidth for the first reroute groups.

A smaller value provides a more refined range of bandwidth included in the first reroute group.

0-96000 cell load units (CLUs)

0 CLUs

27

Increment between RR groups

Each of the remaining reroute groups is defined to consist of connections with load units higher than the previous reroute group, but at or below the sum of the previous reroute group threshold and this parameter value. The last reroute group can accommodate any load units above the second-last reroute group threshold.

(See parameter 26 for a definition of the first reroute group.)

A larger value provides a bigger range of bandwidth for each of a smaller number of reroute groups.

A smaller value provides a smaller range of bandwidth for each of a larger number of reroute groups.

1-96000 cell load units (CLUs)

100 CLUs

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsprrst, cnftlparm

Example

The example shows the two screens required to display all cnfcmparm parameters.

------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw53 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.m0 Dec. 13 2000 12:22 GMT 1 Normalization Interval [ 2] (D) 2 Max Number To Normalize [ 5] (D) 3 Normalization Logging [ No] 4 Settling Interval [ 4] (D) 5 Minimum Open Space [ 1000] (D) 6 Normalization Priority [ Load] 7 Load Sample Period [ 4] (D) 8 Maximum Routing Bundle [ 90] (D) 9 Reroute Timer [ 3] (secs) 10 Reset Timer on Line Fail [ Yes] 11 Max Down/Up Per Pass [ 50] (D) 12 Down/Up Timer [30000] (msecs) 13 Max Route Errs per cycle [ 50] (D) 14 Time between Rrt cycles [ 5] (mins) 15 Max. Rrt Err cycles [ 10] (D) This Command: cnfcmparm Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw53 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.m0 Dec. 13 2000 12:25 GMT 16 Routing pause timer [ 0] (msecs) 17 Max msgs sent per update [ 10] (D) 18 Send SVC urgent msg [ No] 19 Max SVC Retry [ 0] (D) 20 Wait for TBL Updates [ 70] (100 msecs) 21 Max Derouting Bndl (0=all)[ 500] (D) 22 Enable Cost-Based Routing [ No] 23 Enable Route Cache Usage [ No] 24 Use Delay for Routing [ No] 25 # of reroute groups used [ 50] (D) 26 Starting size of RR grps [ 0] (CLU) 27 Increment between RR grps [ 100] (CLU) 28 CM updates app timeout [ 5] (10 secs) This Command: cnfcmparm Enter parameter index:

cnfcon (configure connection)

Configures the ATM bandwidth parameters for a specified connection. The initial cell rate (ICR) normally is set to the port speed. It may be lower if other constraints exist on the data-generation rate. If ICR is too low, cells are dropped. If it is too high, bandwidth may be wasted unless ForeSight is used. Statistical reports are the best source of information for deciding what to adjust.

If the connection type includes ForeSight (ABR enabled), the results of the last test round-trip delay command (tstdelay) appear. Note that this is not the current RTD but the result of the last test that ran. Connection priority—high or low—is displayed for standard Frame Relay connections and ForeSight connections. Several checks are done on the parameters that specify bandwidth to assist users in efficient use of network bandwidth.

These messages describe the performance evaluation:

Warning messages are informational only, so the related operation continues. If an error message appears, the operation does not continue.

Syntax

cnfcon <slot.port.vpi.vci> [bandwidth parameters]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.port.vpi.vci>

Specifies the connection to configure. This command configures one connection at a time.

You need not to specify the virtual port (if one has been activated for this channel). The slot, port, and VPI automatically map to the correct virtual port.

[bandwidth parameters]

Optional. Refer to the addcon command for descriptions and connection types.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

addcon, dspcon

Example

Configure ASI connection 11.1.1.15.

cnfcon 11.1.1.15

bpx01 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2V Jan. 19 2001 07:53 PST Conn: 11.1.1.15 bpx02 11.2.21.15 nrt-vbr Status:OK PCR(0+1) % Util CDVT(0+1) AAL5 FBTC SCR 50/50 100/100 250000/250000 n 50/50 MBS Policing VC Qdepth CLP Hi CLP Lo 1000/1000 3 1280/1280 80/80 35/35 Trunk Cell Routing Restrict: Y Last Command: cnfcon 11.1.1.15

cnfcond (configure conditioning template)

Creates a conditioning template that specifies the bit patterns to be transmitted for each of the T1 and E1 timeslots and their A, B, C, and D signaling bits while the channel is in the failed state. Its purpose is to prevent the signaling bits from returning to the idle (on-hook) bit pattern during a channel failure and to force a known bit pattern (usually busy). If a connection fails and the template has been specified as the conditioning template for the failed connection, the data parameter in the template is transmitted in the channels timeslot, and the A, B, C, and D bits are processed according to the specified parameters.

A two-character sequence in the ID parameter field identifies the template. The Data Pattern field displays the pattern transmitted in the channels timeslot. The Signaling Pattern field displays the pattern transmitted in the channel's A, B, C, and D signaling bit positions. Each of the A, B, C, and D signaling bits are specified independently and may be held high or low or toggled to the on-hook condition for a short time then off-hook (the name of this latter action is a wink). You can control the timing of the bit-toggling by specifying the duration of winks in increments of 50 ms.

A typical failure response is for the node to:

    1. Transmit idle characters in the channel's timeslot

    2. Signal off-hook for a period of 2 seconds

    3. Return permanently to the on-hook condition

Syntax

cnfcond <id> <data> <A bit> <B bit> <C bit> <D bit>

Parameters

Parameter Description

id

Specifies the identifier of conditioning template. The identifier may be any two character combination of lowercase letters (a-z) and numeric digits (0-9).

data

Specifies an eight-bit binary string to use instead of the voice in the event the channel fails.

A bit

B bit

C bit

D bit

Specifies the signaling sequence to be transmitted for these bits in the event of a channel failure. You can independently set each of these parameters. Each element in the sequence is expressed as a 1 or 0 (to indicate the logic state of the line) followed by a number in parenthesis to indicate the duration that the state remains on the channel. The duration number is expressed in 50 ms intervals. If you do not enter a duration value, the state remains the same indefinitely.

For example, if <B> is set to 1(40); upon a channel failure, the B bit remains in the 1 state for 2 seconds (40 x 50 ms=2 seconds).

For another example, <C> set to 0 would cause the C bit to be held permanently at 0 during a failed channel condition because no duration value is present.

Note that you can specify a sequence of states by entering several states separated by slash symbols. The maximum number of states in a sequence is 5. For example, you could set <A> to 1(40)/0(20)/1 to vary the duration of the 0 and 1 states.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfvchtp, dspchcnf, dspcond

Example

Configure the conditioning template.

cnfcond lm 01010100 0(40)/1 1 1 1

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 09:59 PST Conditioning criterion lm: Data Pattern 01010100 - E1/T1 Signaling Pattern A 0(40)/1 B 1 C 1 D 1 Last Command: cnfcond lm 01010100 0(40)/1 1 1 1 Next Command:

cnfcos (configure CoS)

Determines the priority for rerouting a connection. You determine the priority by specifying a delay before the network reroutes one or more failed connections. The CoS applies to:

When connections have failed (typically due to a trunk failure), the network reroutes them according to priorities that are set primarily by the class of service (CoS). The value of CoS is the number of seconds the network waits before it begins to reroute the connection, so the CoS determines the rerouting order for connections owned by a node. The range of possible CoS values is 0-15.

The number of connections in a network has an effect on the increment between CoS values you should use. For larger numbers of connections, you should allow more time to reroute the connections in a class. To facilitate the greater time required to reroute larger numbers of connections, use a larger increment between CoS values. In a larger network, for example, you could specify CoS values that are 3 seconds apart (such as 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, and so on, for example). For a network with less traffic, assign CoS values in increments of 1 or 2. This strategy ensures that all connections of a given CoS reroute before the connections with the next CoS start to reroute.

Syntax

cnfcos <group | channel> <cos>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<group | channel>

Specifies the voice, data, Frame Relay, or FastPAD voice/data channel(s), where channel is one of the following:

  • Voice connections: slot.channel

  • Serial data connections: slot.port

  • Frame Relay connections: slot.port.DLCI

<cos>

Specifies the class of service number to assign to the channel, range of channels, or connection group.
Range: 0-15 seconds
The rerouting priority is inversely proportional to the CoS (a low CoS values means a high routing priority).

Related Commands

dspcons

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Example

Set the CoS for channel 5.1 to 0.

cnfcos 5.1 0

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:12 PST Local Remote Remote Route Channel NodeName Channel State Type Compression Code Avoid CoS O 5.1 beta 25.1 Ok 256 7/8 0 L 9.1.100 gamma 8.1.200 Ok fr 0 L 9.2.400 beta 19.2.302 Ok fr 0 L 14.1 gamma 15.1 Ok v 0 L Last Command: cnfcos 5.1 0 Next Command:

cnfctrlr (configure controller with new VPI and start_VCI for control channels)

Reassign the VPI and start_VCI for the control channels between the VSI controller and the UXM slaves. The required input parameters are:

The command will delete all existing control channels to release the old VPI and start_VCI and then reprogram the control channels with the new VPI and start_VCI.

During the process of channel deprogramming and reprogramming, communication between the controller and slaves will be disrupted.

Syntax

cnfctrlr <controller_id> <VPI> <start_VCI>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<controller_id>

The controller identifier (1-16)

<VPI>

The VPI for control channel
UNI ports: 0-255
NNI ports: 0-4095

<start_VCI>

The starting VCI for the control channel
16-slot IGX: 40-65521
32-slot IGX: 40-65505

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

No

IGX

No

Yes

Yes

No

Example

Configure controller 3 with a new VPI (5) and a new start_VCI (100).

cnfctrlr 3 5 100

Description
arnold TN Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.1p Aug. 16 2000 17:16 PST VSI Controller Information CtrlrId PartId ControlVC Intfc Type CtrlrIP VPI VCIRange 3 2 0 100-70 12.1 MPLS 0.0.0.0 Last Command: cnfctrlr 3 5 40 Controller VPI.VCI reconfigured successfully! Next Command:

cnfdate (configure date and time)

Sets the date and time for the entire network. The node broadcasts the specified date and time to every node in the network. The time displayed at each node is consistent with the time zone where the node resides. (See the cnftmzn command description.) For the first-time configuration of the date and time in a network, cnfdate requires all the parameters except for second. The default for second is 0. If a date and time already exist in the network, the defaults are the existing values at the moment you enter the cnfdate command. Note that changes to date and time alter the time-stamps on WAN Manager statistics.

Syntax

cnfdate <year> <month> <day> <hour> <minute> [second]

Parameters

Parameter Description

year

Specifies the year.

month

Specifies the month. Range: 1-12

day

Specifies the day. Range (depending on the month): 1-31

hour

Specifies the hours. Range: 0-23
For example, enter 6 AM as 6 and 6 PM as 18.

minute

Specifies the minute of the hour. Range: 0-59; Default: 0

second

Specifies the seconds. Range: 0-59; Default: 0

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnftime, cnftmzn

Example

Set the time to 1:54:11 PM, December 16, 1997. The system prompts:
"Warning: Changing time of day affects StrataView statistics time-stamps.

Continue?"
Enter "y" to continue or "n" to abort." Upon a "y" response, the system further prompts with: "Hit RETURN to change clock, DEL to abort."

cnfdate 1997 12 16 13 54 11

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 13:54 PST YourID 1 Sarah 5 Last Command: cnfdate 1997 12 16 13 54 11 Warning: Changing time of day affects StrataView statistics timestamps Continue?

cnfdch (configure voice connection for idle code suppression)

Configure a super-rate data connection that has idle code suppression (ICS) enabled or disabled, before adding a connection. The ICS information in the cnfdch screen is identical to that of dspchcnf.

The idle code suppression feature provides a way to stop FastPacket generation on an Nx64 super-rate PVC connection when the connected PBX has terminated a video call and there are no video calls in progress. It enables the UVM and CVM to detect the on-hook condition of video conferencing calls. No video traffic will be generated when a video call has terminated. Traffic on the data network is therefore reduced.

During the on-hook phase, FastPacket generation ceases, resulting in more trunk bandwidth becoming available. All connections that use ForeSight can use this unused bandwidth, resulting in higher information rate.

Because there are multiple channels involved in an Nx64 data connection, the idle code suppression configuration of the first channel in the Nx64 channel will be used for the entire connection bandwidth.

Configuration must be done for each endpoint of a connection. When the state of an ICS connection changes, no network message is sent to the other end. You can choose to configure the other end if ICS is supported on the other end also. To maximize the benefit of the idle code suppression feature, you should enable ICS on both endpoints of the connection.

If some of the specified channels do not yet have any connection attached, those channels will be initialized to a data type channel.

To interwork with HDM/LDM/SDP/LDP cards, idle code suppression on UVM/CVM/CDP channel will be turned off for any super-rate connection that also terminates on HDM/LDM/SDP/LDP.

All super-rate data connections will have their ICS state set to "disabled" state unless they have been specifically configured with the cnfdch command to be enabled, or through Cisco WAN Manager (or another SNMP manager application).

Use the cnfdchl command to configure a channel before you add a connection. The configuration remains the same when connections are removed and added again. This configuration will be removed when the associated line is deactivated.

The cnfdch command is available for level 2 users and above; that is, you must have at least privilege level 2 or above to use this command.

The cnfdch command is blocked if one or more specified channels is carrying a voice connection (including t-type).

The cnfdch command prompts you to enable or disable idle code suppression:

Enable or Disable Idle Code Suppression (e/d)?[d]:
Syntax

cnfdch <channel><ch_ics_state>

Parameters

Parameter Description

channel

slot.line.channel for UVM or line.channel for CVM/CDP. A channel range is allowed.

ch_ics_state

Channel idle code suppression state: d for disabled; e for enabled.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

2-6

Yes

No

IGX

No

Related Commands

dspchcnf, dspcons

How Idle Code Suppression Works

When a video call terminates, the PBX generates the appropriate line idle code (for example, 0x7f for mu-law). Per ITU H.221 video coding scheme, no byte will be repeated on one DS0 for more than
80 times. In the case of BONDING protocol, the maximum is 256 (32 msec). The firmware can distinguish a video call and an idle channel carrying idle code. Idle code suppression is not programmable. Any byte that repeats for more than 32 msec in all DS0s in a super-rate connection will be suppressed.

Switch software determines idle code suppression capability on a card based on firmware model and revision number (for example, it considers that the CVM card supports idle code suppression starting with model B revision E firmware).

The idle code suppression feature for the UVM and CVM cards on the IGX detects the idle (on-hook) state of a video call, which uses an Nx64K data connection, and suppresses packet transmission during this idle condition. The UVM or CVM at the far end plays out the idle code during this time. You disable or enable and display the status of idle code suppression on a per-connection basis through the switch software CLI cnfdch and dspchcnf commands.

The UVM and CVM card firmware identifies an on-hook or idle condition by detecting repetition of idle codes. These codes can be present in the regular video traffic also (that is, in H.221 or BONDING frames). The code must repeat a certain number of times before it can be concluded that the call is on-hook. It is not necessary to look for specific idle codes. Any byte-code repeating beyond the threshold (about 32 ms) indicates idle channels. The firmware monitors byte repetition on each Nx64 connection for which this feature is enabled. On detecting repetition beyond the specified threshold, FastPacket generation for such a connection would cease. This results in the remote side of the connection to under-run. In this condition, it would transmit the previously transmitted byte on each DS0 for the connection. The UVM/CVM continues to monitor DS0s for the connection to detect a change in data received. Any change would indicate an off-hook condition, after which FastPacket transmission would resume.

The idle code suppression feature consists of IGX switch software Release 9.2, and requires UVM model E firmware and CVM/CDP model B revision E firmware. The new UVM/CVM/CDP firmware ensures that idle code suppression can interoperate with UVM/CVM/CDP cards that do not have idle code suppression capability. Such a configuration means that FastPacket generation stops in one direction while the other end continues to generate FastPackets. This behaves exactly the same as enabling idle code suppression on one side but not on the other side.

All back card types supported by UVM/CVM/CDP support idle code suppression.

Configuring Idle Code Suppression

The standard configuration involves UVM/CVM/CDP cards on both ends of the video connections. An Nx64 super-rate PVC is set up between the two cards. Each video codec is connected through a PBX, which is attached to the UVM/CVM/CDP cards.

The idle code suppression feature is available on IGX. When idle code suppression is disabled on a connection (the default), switch software behaves the same as in releases previous to Release 9.2.

UVM/CVM/CDP cards that support idle code suppression can interwork with HDM/LDM/SDP/LDP cards. If the UVM/CVM/CDP channels are configured with idle code suppression enabled, the actual channel will not have idle code suppression enabled if the other end of the connection is not a UVM/CVM/CDP (that is, HDM/LDM/SDP/LDP).

All connection limitations that exist in Release 9.1 remain the same. A t-type connection is not supported. On a VNS controlled network, t-type SVCs are used for video calls. VNS does not support Nx64 super-rate connections.

The idle code suppression feature provides a way to stop FastPacket generation on an Nx64 super-rate PVC connection when the connected PBX has terminated a video call. No video traffic will be generated when a video call has terminated. Current UVM/CVM/CDP implementation restricts N to between 1 and 8. This feature is intended to work with video codecs that implement H.221 or BONDING protocol only.

The basic idea is that when a video call terminates, the PBX will generate the appropriate line idle code (for example, 0x7f for mu-law). Per the ITU H.221 video coding scheme, no byte will be repeated on one DS0 for more than 80 times. In the case of BONDING protocol, the maximum is 256 (32 msec). The firmware can distinguish a video call and an idle channel carrying idle code. It is important to understand that the idle code is not programmable. It is a more general approach where any byte that repeats for more than 32 msec in all DS0s in a super-rate connection will be suppressed.

Switch software's job is mainly one of providing interfaces for configuring of channels by enabling/disabling idle code suppression for super-rate data connections. In turn, switch software informs the UVM/CVM/CDP card if idle code suppression should be used on each of the super-rate connections.

No new hardware is needed. All back card types supported by UVM/CVM/CDP support the idle code suppression feature.

Interface with Cisco WAN Manager and Other Network Management Systems

The SNMP agent interface on the IGX provides the following operations: Get/Set of MIB information of the desired state of idle code suppression (enabled/disabled).

If a request fails, a General Error is returned to Cisco WAN Manager. An error string is logged in the switch software error table. Cisco WAN Manager can then optionally obtain the error string from switch software. Examples of error messages are "Card in slot does not support Idle Code Suppression" and "E1 CAS and Voice Channels - Not Configured".

Inserting/Removing Cards (Idle Code Suppression Mismatch)

Given an active non-Y-redundant UVM/CVM/CDP card without ICS support, upgrades to a card with ICS are allowed. However, you cannot downgrade a card with ICS capability to a card that does not support ICS (see Table 3-33).

Given a pair of cards in a Y-redundancy configuration, whether any of them is active or not, they must have the same ICS capability (see Table 3-34).


Table 3-33: Active Line that Is Not in Y-Redundant Pair
ICS Support Comment
Old Card New Card

NO

NO

OK—same card

NO

YES

OK

YES

NO

mismatch

YES

YES

OK—same card


Table 3-34: Card Is Configured for Y-Redundancy
ICS Support Comment
Old Card New Card

NO

NO

OK

NO

YES

OK but ICS is not available until both cards support ICS

YES

NO

Mismatch if both cards support ICS before

YES

YES

OK

Y-Redundancy

To ensure that cards with the same ICS capability be allowed to be a Y-redundancy pair, addyred blocks cards that have different idle code suppression capability (see Table 3-35).


Table 3-35: Addyred Blocked Cards
ICS Support Comment
Primary
Card
Secondary Card

NO

NO

OK

NO

YES

addyred blocked

YES

NO

addyred blocked

YES

YES

OK

Upgrading and Downgrading the Idle Code Suppression Feature

Given an active non-Y-redundant UVM/CVM/CDP card (see Table 3-36) without idle code suppression support, an upgrade to a card with ICS support is allowed. Downgrading a card with ICS capability to a card without ICS capability is not allowed.

Upgrading the ICS feature to a Y-redundancy pair (see Table 3-37) that does not support the ICS feature is not allowed. The Y-redundancy pair must be deleted first to upgrade the feature. After both cards complete the ICS upgrade, the cards can be added as a Y-redundancy pair.


Table 3-36: Active Line that is Not in Y-Redundant Pair
ICS Support Comment
Old Card New Card

NO

NO

OK—same card

NO

YES

mismatch

YES

NO

mismatch

YES

YES

OK—same card


Table 3-37: Card is Configured for Y-Redundancy
ICS Support Comment
Old Card New Card

NO

NO

OK

NO

YES

OK but ICS is not available until both cards support ICS

YES

NO

Mismatch if both cards support ICS before

YES

YES

OK

Limitations with Idle Code Suppression

T-type connections are not supported. On a VNS controlled network, t-type SVCs are used for video calls. VNS does not support Nx64 super-rate connections.

This feature is intended to work with video codecs that implement H.222 or BONDING protocol only.

Example

Display configuration values for channels 9.1.3 through 9.1.5.

cnfdch 9.1.3—5

sw176 TRM StrataCom IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:28 PST Maximum EIA % DFM Pattern DFM Idle Code PreAge From 9.1.3 Update Rate Util Length Status Suppr (usec) 9.1.3-5 - - - - Disabled 0 This Command: cnfdch 9.1.3-5

cnfdchtp (configure data channel interface type)

Configures a CDP, CVM, or LDP or LDM DDS port interface type to OCU or DSU. When configuring DDS operations, this command returns an error if executed on a slot with an EIA/TIA-232 back card. It forces a back card slot from EIA/TIA-232 mode to DDS mode if a back card is not installed and there are no connections. Any Y-cable association is deleted in this case. The clocking tracks the DDS port interface type. OCU type interfaces are configured as looped, and DSU type interfaces are configured as normal. The default interface is DSU.

When configuring CDP, CVM, LDP, or LDM operation, this command configures DCE types as normal clocking and DTE types as looped clocking. The default type is DCE. For T1 lines, DS0A on T1 unassigned signaling is configurable. When a connection is not present, voice channels are converted to data channels.

Syntax

cnfdchtp <channel> <interface type> [unassigned signaling]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel>

Specifies the channel to configure in the format <slot>. <port>.

<interface type>

Specifies the interface type to configure. An LDP or LDM DDS port can be configured as DSU or OCU (enter ds or oc). A CDP or CVM port can be configured as DCE or DTE (enter dce or dte).

[unassigned signaling]

Optionally specifies an optional parameter for T1 lines to indicate DS0A or T1 unassigned signaling. Enter d for DS0A or t for T1.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Example

Configure DDS channel 31.1 as OCU.

cnfdchtp 31.1 oc

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:30 MST Data Channel: 31.1 Interface: DDS-4 OCU Config Clocking: Looped Interface Control Template for Connection while ACTIVE Lead Output Value Lead Output Value DSR ON CTS ON DCD ON Last Command: cnfdchtp 31.1 oc Next Command:
Example

Configure channel 22.1 as DCE with T1 unassigned signaling.

cnfdchtp 22.1 dce

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 32 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:30 MST Data Channel: 22.1 Interface: Missing DDS0A DCE Configuration Clocking: Normal Interface Control Template for Connection while ACTIVE Lead Output Value Lead Output Value DSR ON CTS ON DCD ON Last Command: cnfdchtp 22.1 dce t Next Command:

cnfdclk (configure data channel clocking type)

The clock configuration of each channel of a connection determines how the clock will be propagated through the network, and how external equipment should be synchronized.

If clocking is not set correctly, there might be no synchronization, and the connection would operate in a plesiochronous mode. Each data port can be configured independently to act as either DCE or DTE by adjusting the jumper (SDI card) or changing the adapter cable (LDI card) on the data interface card. The effect of the clocking type designated depends on whether each data port is configured as DTE or DCE.

Syntax

cnfdclk <channel> <normal | split | looped>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel>

Specifies the channel to configure in the format <slot>. <port>.

<normal | split | looped>

Specifies the clocking type to assign to the channel. Valid clocking types are:

  • n for Normal

  • s for Split

  • l for Looped for an SDP or HDM
    (fewer options for an LDP or LDM)

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

These data clocking configurations are possible with the cnfdclk command:

DCE-Configured Data Port: Normal Clocking

When the data port is configured as DCE, selecting a clocking type of n (for normal) results in clocking as illustrated in Figure 3-12. The IGX node, acting as DCE, provides both the transmit and receive data clocks to the user equipment.


Figure 3-12: Normal Clocking on a DCE


DCE-Configured Data Port: Split Clocking

When the data port is configured as DCE, selecting a clocking type of s (for split) results in clocking as illustrated in Figure 3-13. In split clocking, TT may be generated independently of RxC. The maximum data rate for split clocking is 112 Kbps.


Figure 3-13: Split Clocking on a DCE


DCE-Configured Data Port: Looped Clocking

When the data port is configured as DCE, selecting a clocking type of l (for looped) results in clocking as illustrated in Figure 3-14. The Terminal Timing signal, called TT or XTC, is simply RxC looped back from the user equipment. In this configuration, it is important that the two clocks (RxC and TT) be frequency locked. This clocking configuration is supported for all data rates.


Figure 3-14: Looped Clocking on a DCE


DTE-Configured Data Port: Normal Clocking

When the data port is configured as DTE, selecting a clocking type of n (for normal) results in clocking as illustrated in Figure 3-15. The IGX, acting as DTE, receives both the transmit and receive data clocks from the user equipment. When the user equipment is not referenced to the network clock, the maximum data rate for this configuration is 112 Kbps. The two clocks must be frequency-locked for proper operation.


Figure 3-15: Normal Clocking on a DTE


DTE-Configured Data Port: Split Clocking

When the data port is configured as DTE, selecting a clocking type of s (for split) results in the clocking as illustrated in Figure 3-16. When the user equipment is not referenced to the network clock, the maximum data rate for this configuration is 112 Kbps. The two clocks must be frequency-locked for proper operation.


Figure 3-16: Split Clocking on a DTE


DTE Configured Data Port: Looped Clocking

If you specify clocking type of l (looped) when the data port is in DTE mode, the result is the clocking arrangement shown in Figure 3-17 . The RxC clock signal is the TT(XTC) signal looped back to the IGX node by the user equipment. The network supports this clocking configuration for all data rates. The restrictions to the data clocking schemes are:


Figure 3-17: Looped Clocking on a DTE


Example

Configure the clocking for channel 5.1 to normal.

cnfdclk 5.1 n

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:41 PST Data Channel: 5.1 Interface: V35 DCE Clocking: Normal Interface Control Template for Connection while ACTIVE Lead Output Value Lead Output Value RI(J) OFF DSR (E) ON CTS(D) ON TN (K) OFF DCD(F) ON Last Command: cnfdclk 5.1 n Next Command:

cnfdiagparm (configure diagnostic test parameters)

Sets various diagnostic test parameters for the nodes. These parameters affect the three IGX and BPX automatic diagnostic tests. Use this command to set test parameters on the internal system clock.

Syntax

cnfdiagparm

Display Parameters

No. Parameter * Description Default *

1

VDP Test Frequency

This parameter is OBSOLETE.

Interval between VDP background tests
(in seconds).

50

2

LDP tstport delay

Seconds delayed before test data is sent.

10

3

System clock drift (8.192 MHz)

Range of allowable drift of system clock.

±480

4

UEC-B's PLL railing (8.192 MHz)

This parameter is OBSOLETE.

Range of UEC-B's phase lock loop rail.

± 2720

5

NPM PLL Min. (8.192 MHz)

Lower limit of controller card's PLL.

- 92000

6

NPM PLL Max. (8.192 MHz)

Upper limit of controller card's PLL.

+ 508000

7

Clock Test Window

Number of samples that make up a window.

10

8

Clock Test Max Error in Window

Errors within window before fault isolation.

4

9

Clock Test Isolation Window

Window size during fault isolation.

10

10

Clock Fault Max. Error in Window

Errors allowed during fault isolation.

3

11

Clock Test Frequency

Interval between clock tests.

200 ms.

12

Clock Test Switch Delay

Delay clock testing after any clock transfers to allow settling.

3000 ms.

13

Card Reset Threshold

255

14

Card Reset Increment

0


* Clock Test parameters—Frequencies are in Hz, offset from 8.192 MHz

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnftstparm


Note   Parameters 1 and 4 are obsolete.

Example

cnfdiagparm

sw197 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 01:39 GMT 1. Vdp Test Frequency (seconds) [50] 2. LDP tstport delay [10] 3. System clock drift (8.192 MHz) +- [480] 4. UEC-B's PLL railing (8.192 MHz) +- [2720] 5. PCC's PLL minimum (8.192 MHz) - [92000] 6. PCC's PLL maximum (8.192 Mhz) + [508000] 7. Clock Test Window [10] 8. Clock Test Max Error in Window [4] 9. Clock Fault Isolation Window [10] 10. Clock Fault Max Error in Window [3] 11. Clock Test Frequency (msec) [200] 12. Clock Test Switch Delay (msec) [2000] 13. Card Reset Threshold [60] 14. Card Reset Increment [10] Last Command: cnfdiagparm Next Command:

cnfdlparm (configure download parameters)

Sets various software and firmware downloader parameters that affect the SW/FW download protocol. It is primarily a debug command, included only to accommodate the possibility that some future software or firmware revision may need to be adjusted for optimizing the downloading process.


Caution   You should not change downloader parameters except under specific direction from the Technical Assistance Center (TAC).

When you enter cnfdlparm, the system displays an indexed list of parameters.

Syntax

cnfdlparm

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

BPX, IGX

Display Fields

No. Parameter Description Range Default

1

Rmt Blk Freq

For downloads to a remote node, Rmt Blk Freq is the time between blocks.

1-9999999 msecs

100 msecs

2

Rmt Blk Size

For downloads to a remote node, Rmt Blk Size is the number of bytes in each block.

1-7C0 hex

400 hex

3

Lcl Blk Freq

For downloads to the other processor in the same (local) node, Lcl Blk Freq is the time (in msecs) between blocks.

1-9999999 msecs

100 msecs

4

Lcl Blk Size

For downloads to the other processor in the same (local) node, Lcl Blk Size is the number of bytes in each block.

1-7C0 hex

400 hex

5

Image Req Freq

The time between requests for a description of an image. When a node seeks a new software image from other nodes, it first sends requests for a full description of the image residing on a node to determine if that node has the correct image. The requesting node sends its request one node at a time. Image Req Freq is the time between the last request and the request to another node. (This parameter is not a frequency but rather a time period.)

1-9999999 msecs

10000 msecs

6

Dnld Req Freq

After a node seeking a new software image has found a node with the correct image, it requests a download of the image. If the node with the correct image is not available to send the image, the requesting node waits a period of time before it again requests the image. Dnld Req Freq is the period of time the requesting node waits before it again requests the image. (This parameter is not a frequency but rather a time period.)

1-9999999 msecs

10000 msecs

7

Session Timeout

The time a receiving node waits for a block transfer to resume. If a block transfer stops after downloading begins, the Session Timeout is the time the receiving node waits to resume before it gives up and requests the download again.

1-9999999 msecs

30000 msecs

8

Request Hop Limit

Limit on the number of hops the local node can go to request a download. (The number of hops is the number of trunks that are crossed for one node to communicate with another node.) Request Hop Limit=1 means the request can go to only an immediate neighbor.

1-9999999

1

9

Crc Throttle Freq

The number of CRC calculations per second. Crc Throttle Freq lets you reduce the number of calculations so the node does not use processor time for CRC calculations.

1-9999999

5000

10

Crc Block Size

Number of bytes that a CRC calculation covers. The default is intentionally the same as Rmt Blk Size and Lcl Blk Size.

1-7C0 hex bytes

400 hex

11

Rev Change Wait

The time to wait before the node actually loads the software for loadrev or runrev execution.

0-99999 msecs

0

12

CCs Switch Wait

A wait period before the node actually switches control cards during switchcc execution. During normal operation, you should have no reason to increase CCs Switch Wait.

1-9999999 msecs

1000 msecs

13

Lcl Response TO (Time Out)

On a local node, a processor that is downloading to another processor must receive an acknowledgment from the receiving processor for each block that correctly arrived. If the sending processor does not receive an acknowledgment by the time Lcl Response TO (Time Out) has elapsed, the downloading processor sends the block again.

1-9999999 msecs

5000

14

Rmt Response TO (Time Out)

When one node downloads to another node, the sending node must receive an acknowledgment for each block correctly received. If the sending node receives no acknowledgment by the time Rmt Response TO (Time Out) has elapsed, the sending node sends the block again.

1-9999999 msecs

30000

15

FW Dnld Block TO (Time Out)

The wait period that a controller card waits for an acknowledgment from a receiving card that it correctly received a block.

1-9999999 msecs

50 msecs

16

FW Dnld Msgs/Block

Number of Cbus messages per CRC block CRC check on the payload of the FW download message.

1-9999999 msecs

4

17

Flash Write TO

During flash memory programming, Flash Write TO (Time Out) is the time to wait for an acknowledgment that a write cycle finished before timing out.

1-9999999 msecs

16000 msecs

18

Flash Erase TO

During a flash memory erasure, Flash Erase TO (Time Out) is the time to wait for an acknowledgment that the erase cycle finished before timing out.

1-9999999 msecs

100

19

Erase Verify TO

Erase Verify TO (Time Out) is the time to wait for an acknowledgment of the completion of the second (or "true") verification of the erasure before timing out. The Erase Verify TO parameter is useful only if write/erase performance characteristics of a flash memory device change.

1-9999999 msecs

16000 msecs

20

Standby Flash TO

During flash memory programming, Standby Flash TO (Time Out) is the time to wait for an acknowledgment that the standby flash is available before timing out.

1-9999999 msecs

300 msecs

21

Lcl Flash Init TO

During flash memory programming, Lcl (local) Flash Init TO (Time Out) is the time to wait for an acknowledgment that a initialization of local flash memory finished before timing out.

1-9999999 msecs

1000

22

Flsh Write Blk Sz

Number of bytes per write cycle.

1-10000 hex

10000 hex

23

Flsh Verify Blk Sz

Second (or "true") verification of the block write. The Flsh Verify Blk Sz parameter is useful only if performance characteristics of a flash memory device change.

1-10000 hex

400 hex

24

Chips Per Write/Erase

Number of bytes per write/erase cycle

1, 2, or 4

1

Example

cnfdlparm

pubsbpx1 VT SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 23:18 GMT 1 Rmt Blk Freq (msec) [ 100] 16 FW Dnld Msgs/Block(dec) [ 4] 2 Rmt Blk Size (hex) [ 400] 17 Flash Write TO(msec) [ 16000] 3 Lcl Blk Freq (msec) [ 100] 18 Flash Erase TO(msec) [ 100] 4 Lcl Blk Size (hex) [ 400] 19 Erase Verify TO(msec) [ 16000] 5 Image Req Freq (msec) [ 10000] 20 Standby Flash TO(sec) [ 300] 6 Dnld Req Freq (msec) [ 10000] 21 Lcl Flash Init TO(msec) [ 1000] 7 Session Timeout (msec) [ 30000] 22 Flsh Write Blk Sz (hex) [ 10000] 8 Request Hop Limit (dec) [ 1] 23 Flsh Verfy Blk Sz (hex) [ 400] 9 Crc Throttle Freq (dec) [ 5000] 24 Chips Per Write/Erase [ 1] 10 Crc Block Size (hex) [ 400] 11 Rev Change Wait(dec) [ 0] 12 CCs Switch Wait(dec) [ 1000] 13 Lcl Response TO(msec) [ 5000] 14 Rmt Response TO(msec) [ 20000] 15 FW Dnld Block TO(msec) [ 50] This Command: cnfdlparm Which parameter do you wish to change:

cnfecparm (configure echo canceller parameters)

Configures the CDP or CVM integrated echo canceller (IEC) parameters for specified voice circuit line.

The cnfecparm command configures IEC parameters associated with all voice channels for the specified circuit line. Setting these parameters allows you to optimize the IEC performance.

The dspecparm command description lists the defaults and provides a sample display. Also, refer to the cnfchec command.

Syntax

cnfecparm <line> <parameter number> <parameter value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<line>

Specifies the circuit line to configure.

<parameter number>

Specifies the number of the parameter to change.

<parameter value>

Specifies the new value to enter for the parameter.

Parameter Values

Index Parameter Description Options

1

Echo Return Loss High

Maximum ERL required for echo canceller to converge on speech (value X 0.1 dB).

0-99 dB

2

Echo Return Loss Low

Minimum ERL required for echo canceller to converge on speech (value X 0.1 dB).

0-99 dB

3

Tone Disabler Type

Selection of protocol to enable tone disabler.

G.164, G.165

4

Non-Linear Processing

Selects type of post-canceller signal.

Center Clipper, Multiplying

5

NLP Threshold

Threshold below which non-linear processing is enabled
(value X 0.1 dB).

0-99 dB

6

Noise Injection

Determines if noise will be injected when NLP is active.

Enable, Disable

7

Voice Template

Selection of template to use; normal voice levels or high voice levels.

USA—normal UK—high-level

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfchec, dspecparm

Example

Show integrated echo canceller (IEC) parameters for slot 13:

sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2Q Dec. 13 2000 12:41 PST IEC Slot 13 Parameters 1 IEC Echo Return Loss High (.1 dBs) [ 60] (D) 2 IEC Echo Return Loss Low (.1 dBs) [ 30] (D) 3 IEC Tone Disabler Type [ G.164] 4 IEC Non-Linear Processing [Center Clipper] 5 IEC Non-Linear Processing Threshold [ 18] (D) 6 IEC Noise Injection [ Enabled] 7 IEC Voice Template [ USA] This Command: cnfecparm 13

cnffrcls (configure Frame Relay class)

Configures a system-wide Frame Relay connection class. Be aware of these factors:

Syntax

cnffrcls <class_num> [<BW params>] [<description>]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<class_num>

Specifies network-wide Frame Relay connection class to be configured.

frp_bw

Optionally specifies individual bandwidth parameters. The parameter name "frp_bw" is the label for the bandwidth parameters described here. The slash (/) between the repeated parameter name shows that you can specify a value for each direction. (FST is the exception.) Two parameters can be either the (default) Cisco versions or the Frame Relay Forum standard parameters. To switch between Cisco and Frame Relay Forum, use the cnfsysparm command.

Note   All parameters you select with cnfsysparm are network-wide and not confined to the current connection addition.

The switchable parameters are:

  • Cisco Parameters Standard Parameters

  • PIR (peak information rate) Be (excess burst)

  • VC_Q (VC queue depth) Bc (committed burst)

When you are using the Cisco parameter set, the names and order of specification are:

MIR/MIR, CIR/CIR, VC_Q/VC_Q, PIR/PIR, Cmax/Cmax ECNQ_thresh/ECNQ_thresh, QIR/QIR, FST, %utl/%utl

When you are using the parameters with the two Frame Relay Forum versions, the names and order of specification are:

MIR/MIR, CIR/CIR, Bc/Bc, Be/Be, Cmax/Cmax, ECNQ_thresh/ECNQ_thresh, QIR/QIR, FST, %utl/%utl

description

Any text string up to 25 characters terminated by a <RET>. This is used to provide the user with a descriptive identifier for the class.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Lock

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

addcon, dspfrcls

Example

Configure Frame Relay class #1 to operate with ForeSight. The list of * parameters leaves those parameters unchanged, and "y" enables ForeSight. Because the utilization and description parameters have not been entered, any existing values for these parameters remain in effect.

cnffrcls 1 *

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 16:05 PST Frame Relay Connection Classes # MIR CIR VC Q Depth PIR Cmax ECN QThresh QIR FST .6/9.6 9.6/9.6 65535/65535 128/128 10/10 65535/65535 9.6/9.6 y % Util: 100/100 Description: "Default 9.6" 2 19.2/19.2 19.2/19.2 65535/65535 */* 10/10 65535/65535 19.2/19.2 n % Util: 100/100 Description: "Default 19.2" 3 16/16 16/16 65535/65535 */* 10/10 65535/65535 16/16 n % Util: 100/100 Description: "Default 16" 4 32/32 32/32 65535/65535 */* 10/10 65535/65535 32/32 n % Util: 100/100 Description: "Default 32" 5 56/56 56/56 65535/65535 */* 10/10 65535/65535 56/56 n % Util: 100/100 Description: "Default 56" Last Command: cnffrcls 1 * * * * * * * y Continue (y): y _____________________________ alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 16:03 PST Frame Relay Connection Classes # MIR CIR VC Q Depth PIR Cmax ECN QThresh QIR FST 6 64/64 64/64 65535/65535 */* 10/10 65535/65535 64/64 n % Util: 100/100 Description: "Default 64" 7 128/128 128/128 65535/65535 */* 10/10 65535/65535 128/128 n % Util: 100/100 Description: "Default 128" 8 192/192 192/192 65535/65535 */* 10/10 65535/65535 192/192 n % Util: 100/100 Description: "Default 192" 9 256/256 256/256 65535/65535 */* 10/10 65535/65535 256/256 n % Util: 100/100 Description: "Default 256" 10 512/512 512/512 65535/65535 */* 10/10 65535/65535 512/512 n % Util: 100/100 Description: "Default 512" Last Command: cnffrcls 1 * * * * * * * y Next Command:

cnffrcon (configure Frame Relay connection)

Configures bandwidth parameters or enables ForeSight for an individual Frame Relay connection. Because you normally specify bandwidth parameters through the Frame Relay class or by the option of overriding bandwidth parameters through specific arguments for addcon, it is more common to use cnffrcon where you need to customize a single connection's bandwidth parameters.

Be sure the MIR you specify is appropriate. If the MIR is too high, bandwidth is wasted. If it is too low, the connection may drop data. The statistics reports are the best source of information to help you determine the appropriate MIR.

The PIR usually is set to the port speed. You can specify a lower PIR if other constraints on the data generation rate exist. If the PIR you specify is too low, frames are dropped. If it is too high, bandwidth may be wasted unless the network has ForeSight.

The Cmax, VC Q, and ECN Q values should be changed only by knowledgeable users and when tuning data is available to support the determination of appropriate values. These values affect system buffering resources, so any change from the defaults requires caution. Refer to the Cisco WAN Switching System Overview for more details on connection parameters.

If the connection type has ForeSight (FST = y), the result of the last test round-trip delay command (Test RTD) is displayed. Note that this is not the current RTD but the result of the last, user-specified test. High or low connection priority is displayed for both standard Frame Relay connections and ForeSight connections.

The node checks the bandwidth parameters to promote efficient use of network bandwidth. These messages reflect the checks on bandwidth usage:

Warning messages are informational and do not indicate that the command is failing to execute. Error messages indicate the command is not executing.

When you specify the frp_bw parameters, enter all changes (or unchanged values indicated by an asterisk) on the line. You must specify either a change or a place-holder (*) up to at least the last changed value (after which place-holders are unnecessary). Decide on any changes before starting this command. The parameters section of this command description lists frp_bw parameters.

Syntax

cnffrcon <channel> [bandwidth_parameters]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel>

Specifies the channel to configure connection parameters. The command configures connection information for one channel at a time. You cannot specify a set of channels. The channel has this format:

slot.port.DLCI

[bandwidth_parameters]

Optionally specifies the bandwidth parameters in these format:

MIR/MIR, CIR/CIR, VC_Q/VC_Q, PIR/PIR, Cmax/Cmax ECNQ_thresh/ECNQ_thresh, QIR/QIR, FST, %utl/%utl

A slash indicates you can specify a value for each direction. FST is either ForeSight enable (y) or disable (n). An "*" is a placeholder for a parameter you do not change.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

addcon, dspcon

Example

Configure Frame Relay connection 14.3.4.

cnffrcon 14.3.4

igxr03 VT Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.2V Jan. 18 2001 12:49 PST Conn: 14.3.4 igxr02 27.3.4 fr Status:OK MIR CIR VC Q Depth PIR Cmax ECN QThresh QIR 64/64 64/64 65535/65535 64/64 100/100 65535/65535 64/64 Owner: LOCAL Restriction: NONE CoS: 0 FST: n % Util: 25/25 Pri: L Test-RTD: 0 msec Path: igxr03 19.1--12.3igxr02 Pref: Not Configured igxr03 UFM: OK igxr02 UFM: OK Line 14.3 : OK Line 27.3 : OK This Command: cnffrcon 14.3.4

cnffrcport (configure Frame Relay port)

Configures the port speed and percent of utilization on the concentrated link of a Port Concentrator Shelf (PCS). This is not a standard command. Primarily, you would use cnffrcport to adjust the rate on the concentrated link due to some unusual system configuration.

Because this command applies to the FRC interface (the concentrated link) rather than the user port for the CPE, the port number and the range of speeds is the same as that of the FRP or FRM card. Thus, the port numbers are 1-4 with rates varying from 56 Kbps through 2 Mbps. During port configuration, a prompt for each parameter appears. To keep the current value of the parameter, press the Return key without typing anything.

Syntax

cnffrcport <slot.port> <speed>< utilization>

Frame Relay

Parameter Description

<slot.port>

Specifies the card slot and port number. Because the port number is that of the concentrated link rather than the user port number, the range is 1-4 (not 1-44).

<speed>

Specifies the port clock speed for a 2.0 Mbps FRP-2 or FRM-2. The display shows the configured speed as Configured Clock and the actual speed as Measured Rx Clock. The available speeds are:

1 port (selected speeds, 56-2048 Kbps)
2 ports (selected speeds, 56-1024 Kbps)
3 ports (selected speeds, 56-672 Kbps)
4 ports (selected speeds, 56-512 Kbps)

< utilization>

Specifies the percent of utilization of the concentrated link.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

upfrport, dnfrport, dspfrport, dspcd

Example

Reconfigure PCS port 6.1 to have a speed of 512 Kbps and a concentrated link utilization of 88 percent. Note that executing dspcd for this slot would show a port count of 44, which indicates that the card set supports a PCS. The Configured Clock of 512 Kbps by itself does not indicate a PCS because a standard FRP-2 or FRM-2 also supports this rate.

cnffrcport 6.1 512 88

minnow TN SuperUser IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:16 PST Physical Port: 6.1 [INACTIVE] Interface: FRI-X21 DCE Configured Clock: 512 Kbps Clocking: Normal Measured Rx Clock: 0 Kbps Min Flags / Frames 1 Port ID 1022 Port Queue Depth 65535 OAM Pkt Threshold 3 pkts ECN Queue Threshold 65535 T391 Link Intg Timer 10 sec DE Threshold 100 % N391 Full Status Poll 6 cyl Signaling Protocol None EFCI Mapping Enabled No Asynchronous Status No CLLM Enabled/Tx Timer No/ 0 msec T392 Polling Verif Timer 15 IDE to DE Mapping Yes N392 Error Threshold 3 Interface Control Template N393 Monitored Events Count 4 Lead I Communicate Priority No State ON Upper/Lower RNR Thresh 75%/ 25% Concentrated Link Util 88% Last Command: cnffrcport 6.1 512 88 Next Command:

cnffstparm (configure ForeSight node parameters)

Configures the Optimized Bandwidth Management (formerly called ForeSight) parameters for Frame Relay ports.

This command has an effect only if the Frame Relay Optimized Bandwidth Management option is enabled. The parameter values set by this command apply to all Frame Relay connections enabled with Optimized Bandwidth Management. These parameters must be configured on each node in the network that has Optimized Bandwidth Management connections. (The cnffrcon command enables Optimized Bandwidth Management on a connection.)

Syntax

cnffstparm

No line or port number need be entered.

Parameters

Number Parameter Description Default

1

FRP Increase Rate

If free bandwidth is available, the rate at which FRP increases transmission (as a percentage of MIR).

10%

2

FRP Decrease Rate

If free bandwidth becomes unavailable, the rate at which FRP decreases transmission (as a percentage of current rate).

87%

3

FRP Fast Decrease Rate

If a cell is dropped or the TxQ is full, the rate at which FRP decreases transmission (as a percentage of current rate).

50%

4

RTD Measurement Time

The polling interval for measuring round-trip delay on each Frame Relay PVC.

5 sec.

5

Default RTD

The default RTD the connection uses before RTD is measured.

100 ms.

6

Minimum RTD

Min. value used for RTD in FR calculation regardless of measured RTD.

40 ms.

7

Maximum RTD

Max. value used for RTD in FR calculation regardless of measured RTD.

250 ms.

8

FECN for congested mins

When this percentage of packets received have the FECN bit set, a congested minutes field in the dspfrport command is indicated.

50%

9

QIR Time-out

Time before the allowable transmit rate is reset to QIR.

10 secs.

10

Max Test Delay Retries

Maximum number of delay test retries after a timeout.

2

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnffrcon

Example

cnffstparm

sw66 TN SuperUser BPX 15 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 23:50 GMT 1 FST Increase Rate [ 10] (%) 2 FST Decrease Rate [ 93] (%) 3 FST Fast Decrease Rate [ 50] (%) 4 RTD Measurement Time [ 5] (secs) 5 Default RTD [ 100] (msecs) 6 Minimum RTD [ 40] (msecs) 7 Maximum RTD [ 250] (msecs) 8 FECN for congested mins [ 50] (%) 9 QIR Time-out [ 244] (secs) 10 Max TstDelay Retries [ 2] (dec) Last Command: cnffstparm Next Command:

cnffunc (configure system functions)

Enables or disables a specified node function.

Upgrading from Release 9.1 to Release 9.2 When IMA Trunks Exist

When IMA trunks exist in a Release 9.1 network, and you are upgrading from Release 9.1 to 9.2, ensure that the following steps have been performed:

You are now ready to upgrade the switch software from Release 9.1 to 9.2.

Syntax

cnffunc <function_index> <e | d>

Each function has an index number. By entering the command, the index parameter, and the letter "e" or "d," the function is either enabled or disabled.

Function Index Parameters

Index Function Description Default

1

Automatic CLN/TRK Loopback Test on Local/Remote Alarms

A remote-end loopback is automatically set up on a failed line or trunk. Used to check the integrity of the back card alarm circuitry.

enabled

2

FDP Loopback button

For an IGX node, enables loopback button on SDP or HDM card faceplate. (Disable it to prevent accidental operation by contact.)

enabled

3

User Command Logging

All commands entered by the user is entered in the system log when enabled. When disabled, system log does not become so large but there is no audit trail of operator commands kept.

enabled

4

Automatic Card Reset on
Hardware Error

The controller card (BCC or NPM) issues a hardware reset to a card when firmware detects an error during normal operation. This allows the node to return a card to service after a firmware error.

enabled

5

TXR Model D Download

(Not used)

enabled

6

Card Error Record
Wraparound

Allows the log entry for each card error to wrap for long entries. When disabled, only first ten failures are logged.

enabled

7

Card Test After Failure

Indicates card function self-tests and background test should continue to be executed after a card has been declared as failing these tests.

disabled

8

Download from Remote
WAN Manager NMS

Allows a node to download software images from a WAN Manager not directly connected to the node.

disabled

9

Logging of connection events in local event log

All connection event messages are entered in the system log when enabled. When disabled, system log does not become so large but there is no audit trail of connection events kept.

disabled

10

Logging of connection events in WAN Manager event log

All connection event messages are entered in the WAN Manager event log when enabled. When disabled, WAN Manager event log does not become so large but there is no audit trail of connection events kept.

disabled

11

Force Download From a Specific IP address

Forces the node to only download software images from a WAN Manager with the specified IP address.

disabled

12

Logging of SVC connection events

All SVC connection event messages are entered in the local event log when enabled. When disabled, local event log does not become so large but there is no audit trail of SVC connection events kept.

disabled

13

CDP WinkStart Signaling

Toggles WinkStart signaling on the CDP.

disabled

14

Logging of Bus Diagnostic Events in local event log

All Bus Diagnostic event messages are entered in the local event log when enabled. When disabled, local event log does not become so large but there is no audit trail of Bus Diagnostic events kept.

enabled

15

Automatic Card Reset after Burnfw for CBI Cards

While the network is running Release 9.1, use the cnffunc command option 15 to disable the Automatic Card Reset after Burnfw for CBI cards option. (By default, this option is enabled.) You need to perform this step so that you can burn the UXM firmware revision on the flash and delay execution of the new firmware revision until the card is reset with the resetcd command. After the UXM at both ends of the trunk are burned with the new firmware revision, you can reset the UXM cards at the same time so that the new ATM Forum-Compliant protocol is invoked at both ends of the trunk at the same time. It is important that you perform this step, because a node potentially may be not be reached if this is an IMA trunk, and it is the only trunk connected to that remote node. Also note that if an IMA trunk is not used within the Release 9.1 network, then you do not need to perform this step.

Then upgrade all UXM cards in the Release 9.1 network with UXM firmware model B.

Enabled/
Disabled [Default: Enabled]

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Example (IGX)

Enables automatic card testing after a card failure has been detected.

cnffunc 15 e

-----------------------------------SCREEN 1-------------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2J Oct. 25 2000 12:20 GMT Index Status Function 1 Enabled Automatic CLN/PLN Loopback Test on Local/Remote Alarms 2 Enabled FDP Loopback button 3 Enabled User Command Logging 4 Enabled Automatic Card Reset on Hardware Error 5 Enabled TXR Model D Download 6 Enabled Card Error Record Wraparound 7 Disabled Card Test After Failure 8 Disabled Download From Remote CWM 9 Disabled Logging of conn events in local event log 10 Disabled Logging of conn events in CWM event log 11 Disabled Logging SVC Connection Events 12 Disabled Force Download From a Specific IP address 13 Disabled CDP WinkStart Signaling This Command: cnffunc Continue? -----------------------------------SCREEN 2-------------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2J Oct. 25 2000 12:22 GMT Index Status Function 14 Enabled Logging of Bus Diagnostic Events in local event log 15 Enabled Automatic Card Reset after Burnfw for CBI cards 16 Enabled Logging of router state events in CWM event log Last Command: cnffunc 15 e
Example (BPX)

cnffunc 1 e

sw53 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2J Oct. 25 2000 12:18 GMT Index Status Function 1 Enabled Automatic TRK Loopback Test on Local/Remote Alarms 2 Enabled User Command Logging 3 Disabled Automatic Card Reset on Hardware Error 4 Enabled Card Error Record Wraparound 5 Disabled Card Test After Failure 6 Disabled Download From Remote Cisco StrataView Plus 7 Disabled Logging of conn events in local event log 8 Disabled Logging of conn events in Cisco StrataView Plus event log 9 Disabled Force Download From a Specific IP address Last Command: cnffunc 1 e

cnffwswinit (configure firmware and software downloader's WAN manager IP address)

Informs the IGX or BPX the IP address of the machine used to initiate a firmware or software download. This is a safety measure to prevent downloads from being started anywhere in the network. You must have access to a node, and use the cnffwswinit command to set the IP address before a download will be accepted from that address.

Syntax

cnffwswinit <IP address>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<IP address>

Specifies IP address of machine running WAN Manager from which the firmware and software download will be initiated to other nodes in the network.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsppwd, adduser, deluser, dspusers

Example

Configures the IP address of the machine running WAN Manager from which the firmware and software download will be initiated to other nodes. If you do not provide the IP address for the WAN Manager node from which to initiate the firmware/software download, you will be prompted to enter it.

cnffwswinit 172.29.52.17

cnfict (configure interface control template)

Sets the interface control template signals. The signals that can be set by using cnfict depend on the type of back card used and whether the hardware is configured for DCE or DTE. On an IGX node, the applicable front cards are the LDM, HDM, FRM, and CVM (for data). Each data channel has a default interface control template for its active, conditioned, and looped near and far states. Use the cnfict command is used to individually configure each interface control lead in each template.

When Y-cable redundancy is in effect, the control template configuration for the data channels terminating at the primary slot is also applied to the data channels of the secondary slot. Any configuration information for the secondary slot is ignored.


Note   The cnfict command is not valid for V.11 and X.21 interfaces. For FRP V.35 and Port Concentrator V.35 and V.28 interfaces, only the active template is usable, and you can configure the leads to On or Off.

Syntax

cnfict <port> <template> <output> <source>

Parameters

Parameter Description

port

Specifies the data channel or Frame Relay port whose interface control template is to be configured. Entered as <slot.port>. On an IGX node, the applicable cards are the LDM, HDM, FRM, and CVM.

template

Specifies which interface control template to configure for the channel and has the format <a | c | l | n | f>. Valid entries are listed below. The only valid template for a Frame Relay port, X.21 or V.35, is the ACTIVE template. Also, all the output leads have steady state values and do not follow local or remote inputs

Entry Template Description

a

Active

The active control template is in effect while the data channel is active (normal operation) i.e., when the connection is routed and not failed.

Entry Template Description

c

Conditioned

The conditioned control template is in effect when conditioning is applied to the data channel. The conditioned template is used when the network detects that it cannot maintain the connection because of card failures or lack of bandwidth (the connection failed).

l

Looped

The looped template is in effect when the data channel is being looped back in either direction. The looped template is used when addloclp or addrmtlp has been used to loop the connection within the network.

n

Near loopback

The near template is in effect when running a tstport n command or an addextlp n command on a port. The port is configured such that the external near modem is placed in a loopback.

f

Far loopback

The far template is in effect when running a tstport f command or an addextlp f command on a port. The port is configured such that the external far-end modem is placed in a loopback.

output

Specifies the output lead. Refer to the Configurable Lead information in the command description for abbreviations. Configurable output leads vary with the type of data interface (EIA/TIA-232, V.35, X.21, or EIA/TIA -449).

source

Specifies how the lead is to be configured and has the format
<on | off |local | remote> <input> [delay]. Valid source choices follow:

Source Options

on

The output lead is asserted.

off

The output lead is inhibited.

l

Local. Indicates that the output follows a local lead.

r

Remote. Indicates that the output follows a remote lead.

input

Specifies the name of the local or remote input lead that the output lead follows.

delay

Specifies the time in milliseconds that separates the off to on lead transitions. Delay is valid only when the output lead is CTS and the input lead is local RTS. On to Off lead transitions are not subject to this delay.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

addextlp, dspict, tstport

Configurable Lead Names and Functions

Table 3-38 shows the configurable leads and the equivalence between EIA/TIA-232C, EIA/TIA-232D, EIA/TIA-449, V.35, and X.21 interfaces. The leads are configurable for each type of data interface supported by the IGX node.An IGX treats leads impartially for non-interleaved connections.

The entries under the IGX Name column indicate the abbreviations to use when specifying input or output leads on the command line. A node treats leads impartially for non-interleaved connections. Any signal received on an EIA pin at one end may be transmitted to any pin at the other end, up to the maximum of 12 EIA leads on any interface type. For interleaved EIA connections, refer to the Fast EIA column. The column shows which leads are carried in the interleaved bytes of the data packets. All remaining leads are carried in standard control lead packets.


Table 3-38: Configurable Lead Names and Functions
Configurable Leads
Source IGX Name EIA/TIA-
232C
EIA/TIA-
232D
EIA/TIA- 449 V.35 X.21 Fast EIA Function

DTE

RTS

CA

CA

RS

C

F4

Request to Send

DCE

CTS

CB

CB

CS

D

F4

Clear to Send

DCE

DSR

CC

CC

DM

E

F3

Data Set Ready

DCE

DCD

CF

CF

RR

F

F7

Data Carrier Detect (RLSD)

DCE

QM

QM

QM

Equalizer Mode

DTE

pin 11

11

11

Sometimes used for Data

DCE

SDCD

SCF

SCF

Secondary Data Carrier Detect

DCE

SCTS

SCB

SCB

Secondary Clear to Send

DTE

STxD

SBA

SBA

F5

Secondary Transmit Data

DTE

NS

NS

F7

New Sync

DCE

SRxD

SBB

SBB

F5

Secondary Receive Data

DCE

DCR

DCR

Divided Receiver Clock

DTE

RL

RL

RL

F6

Remote Loopback

DTE

SRTS

SCA

SCA

Secondary Request to Send

DTE

DTR

CD

CD

TR

H

F3

Data Terminal Ready

DCE

SQ

CG

CG

SQ

Signal Quality Detect

DCE

RI

CE

CE

IC

J**

Ring Indicator

DTE

SF

CH

CH

SF

Signal Rate Select (to DCE)

DCE

SI

CI

CI

SI

Signaling Rate Select. (to DTE)

DTE

BSY

BSY

IS

F1

Busy (In Service)

DCE

SB

TST

SB

F1

Test Indicator

DTE

LL

LL

F2

Local Loopback

DCE

TM

TM

K1

F6

Test Mode

DTE

SS

SS

Select Standby

DTE

C

C

Control

DCE

I

I

Indicator

1Applicable to SDP cards only.

Note that pins 11 and 23 on an EIA/TIA-232 port are bidirectional, and their default direction is input. See the cnfcldir command for information on changing the direction of these pins. The cpyict command can be used to copy an interface control template from one data channel to another. You can then edit it by using the cnfict command. The dspbob command displays the state of leads at specified intervals.

Example

Configure the conditioned interface control template for channel 31.1 to SB on (DDS).

cnfict 31.1 c SB on

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:30 MST Data Channel: 31.1 Interface: DDS-4 OCU Config Clocking: Looped Interface Control Template for Connection while CONDITIONED Lead Output Value Lead Output Value SB ON RI OFF DSR OFF CTS ON DCD OFF Last Command: cnfict 31.1 c sb on Next Command:
Example

Configure the active interface control template for channel 25.1 to CTS-on (EIA/TIA-232). CTS-on means that when the port is active, the CTS lead is asserted.

cnfict 25.1 a cts on

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:36 MST Data Channel: 25.1 Interface: EIA/TIA-232 DCE Clocking: Normal Interface Control Template for Connection while ACTIVE Lead Output Value Lead Output Value RI OFF DSR ON CTS ON SRxD ON DCR OFF DCD ON SCTS ON SDCD ON SQ ON Last Command: cnfict 25.1 a cts on Next Command:
Example

Configure the active interface control template for channel 5.1 to CTS on (V.35).

cnfict 5.1 active CTS on

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:29 PST Data Channel: 5.1 Interface: V35 DCE Clocking: Normal Interface Control Template for Connection while ACTIVE Lead Output Value Lead Output Value RI (J) OFF DSR (E) ON CTS (D) ON TM (K) OFF DCD (F) ON Last Command: cnfict 5.1 a cts on Next Command:
Example

Configure the active interface control template to have RTS-on. This means that when the port is active. the RTS lead is asserted.

cnfict 9.1 a rts on

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:23 PST Port: 9.1 [ACTIVE ] Interface: FRI-V35 DTE Configured Clock: 256 Kbps Clocking: Normal Measured Rx Clock: 0 Kbps Port ID 7 Port Queue Depth 65535 OAM Pkt Threshold 3 pkts ECN Queue Threshold 65535 T391 Link Intg Timer 6 sec DE Threshold 100 % N391 Full Status Poll 10 cyl Signaling Protocol None ForeSight (CLLM) No Asynchronous Status No CLLM Status Tx Timer 0 msec T392 Polling Verif Timer 15 Interface Control Template N392 Error Threshold 3 Lead State N393 Monitored Events Count 4 RTS ON Communicate Priority No DTR ON Upper/Lower RNR Thresh 75%/ 25% Min Flags / Frames 1 Last Command: cnfict 9.1 a rts on Next Command:
Example

Configure the near interface control template for 31.1, to DSR on (DDS trunk).

cnfict 31.1 n dsr on

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:38 MST Data Channel: 31.1 Interface: DDS-4 OCU Config Clocking: Looped Interface Control Template for Connection while NEAR EXT LOOPED Lead Output Value Lead Output Value DSR ON CTS ON DCD ON Last Command: cnfict 31.1 near dsr on Next Command:

cnflan (configure LAN)

Configures node communication parameters, to enable the node to communicate with a Cisco WAN Manager terminal over an Ethernet LAN using TCP/IP protocol. The parameters all contain address information about the Ethernet TCP/IP network that connects the Cisco WAN Manager station to an IGX or BPX node. The values must conform to those of the network. The network administrator can supply the parameters.

Syntax

cnflan <IP_Address> <IP_Subnet_Mask> <Maximum LAN Transmit Unit> <TCP Service Port>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<IPAdd>

Specifies the Internet address of the node used in the TCP/IP protocol.

<IP subnet mask>

Specifies a 32-bit mask that contains information about the bit lengths of the subnet ID and host ID address fields. The format of this field uses 1s for the subnet ID field and 0s for the host ID address field as defined in the TCP/IP protocol.
Default: 255 255 255.0. This mask denotes both subnet ID and host ID fields as 8-bit fields.

<Max. LAN Transmit Unit>

BPX nodes only: typical length is 1500 bytes.

<TCPServicePort>

Specifies the node's service point used by the transmission control protocol (TCP).

<GatewayIPAddr>

Specifies the Internet gateway address.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

upln, dnln, cnfln

Example

Configure node parameters to communicate with Cisco WAN manager.

cnflan sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2Q Dec. 13 2000 12:51 PST Active IP Address: 172.29.10.238 IP Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 IP Service Port: 5120 Default Gateway IP Address: 172.29.10.1 Maximum LAN Transmit Unit: 1500 Ethernet Address: 00.C0.43.00.EC.BA Type State LAN READY TCP UNAVAIL UDP READY Telnet READY TFTP READY TimeHdlr READY SNMP READY This Command: cnflan Enter IP Address:

cnfleadmon (monitor LDM/HDM data port leads)

Monitors the IGX node's LDM/HDM ports for failures. You can set each of the twelve control lead types to be monitored by firmware on the LDM/HDM card. The monitor reports only lead state changes; no event is reported if the lead remains up from one poll to the next.

You can also set the interval value that determines how frequently the firmware will check the card's serial port leads. To turn off the feature, set the interval value to zero.

Syntax

cnfleadmon <index> <interval>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<index>

Index number of the serial data port leads. Values 1 through 12. When you enter a different lead index number, an arrow moves to highlight the current monitoring data on that lead.

<interval>

The timer value in seconds. This determines how frequently the firmware on the LDM/HDM card will check the specified lead.
Values: 5 through 255 seconds
Default = 0
Enter 0 to turn off the feature.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsplogcd, dspcd, addjobtrig

Example

Tells the LDM/HDM card firmware to monitor data port lead number 4, every 5 seconds.

cnfleadmon 4 5

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.r5 Dec. 20 2000 13:34 GMT | LDM | HDM/SDI-RS232 | HDM/SDI-RS449 | HDM/SDI-V35 | index | DCE : DTE | DCE : DTE | DCE : DTE | DCE : DTE | 1 : :TST/25 IS/28 :SB/36 : 2 : LL/18 :RI/22 LL/10 :IC/15 :RI/J 3 DTR/20 :DSR/6 DTR/20 :DSR/6 TR/12&30 :DM/11&29 DTR/H :DSR/E ===> 4 RTS/4 :CTS/5 RTS/4 :CTS/5 RS/7&25 :CS/9&27 RTS/C :CTS/D 5 : STxD/14 :SRxD/16 : : 6 : RL/21 : RL/14 :TM/18 :TM/K 7 :DCD/8 :DCD/8 NS/34 :RR/13&31 :DCD/F 8 : SRTS/19 :SCTS/13 : : 9 : :SDCD/12 : : 10 : SF/23 :SI/23 SF/16 :SI/2 : 11 : : :SQ/33 : 12 : ***/11 :QM/11 SS/32 : : Sampling interval for HDM or LDM control lead shown above ...... 5 seconds Last Command: cnfleadmon 4 5

cnfln (configure line)

Configures a line to be compatible with the device to which it connects. (Older alias: cnfcln). The cnfln command applies to voice, data, Frame Relay, ATM, and IMA lines. See the table in this definition section for a list of the front and matching back cards.

Because of the variety of line types and characteristics, separate parameters sections define the parameters for specific line types. The system automatically presents the correct options on the command line for each line type. If a parameter is not applicable to a card type, the system displays the parameter in half-tone or the parameter value field with dashed lines.

For an IMA line, you can add or delete links in an IMA group, or specify the number of retained links for an IMA configuration. By default, the number of retained links is the same as the number of lines grouped together when the IMA group is created. For example, the command "upln 3.1-4" results in 4 lines in an IMA group with 4 retained links. If one link fails, the IMA line fails. Using the cnfln command, you can change the Retained Links parameter to a lesser number, for example, 3. Therefore, if one of the lines fails, the IMA line remains active.


Note   In Release 9.3.20, the cnfln command is not supported on the Universal Router Module (URM) introduced on the IGX 8400. Consequently, the cnfln command is no longer used to configure the VC Shaping parameter on IGX ATM ports. You must use the cnfport command to configure VC Shaping. This change applies to all ATM ports in the IGX, that is, ports on the UXM and URM. Refer to the cnfport command for more information specific to ATM port configuration and the URM.

Syntax

cnfln <line> <parameters>

Syntax for IMA

cnfln <slot>.<primary link>

Parameters (Voice, Data, Frame Relay)

Parameter Description Default

slot or slot.line

Specifies the line. If the back card has one line connector and cable, enter the slot number. If the card has more than one physical line, include a line number. If the card is a UVM, however, enter just the slot number.

loop clock

Enables the transmit and receive control leads to use the same clock. Format for the parameter is Y or N.

N

line framing

Configures T1 line framing to be D4 or ESF.

Note that UFM-C series is ESF only.

With Release 9.3.0, changing the line framing for BXM-T3 cards from PLCP to HEC no longer automatically changes the port's bandwidth to the new maximum. It merely raises the upper limit for the port's bandwidth. After changing the framing, you must use cnfport to increase the port's bandwidth.

D4 (ESF
on UFM/FRM)

line coding

Configures T1 and E1 coding:

T1: ZCS
B8ZS
AMI

ZCS
B8ZS for FRM

E1:HDB3
ZCS

HDB3

line CRC on

Enables CRC-4 detection for E1 lines. Use either Y or N.

N

E1 recv impedance

A parameter, in the range 1-7.

1 is 75 ohm impedance, unbalanced

2 is 75 ohm impedance, unbalanced

3 is 20 ohm impedance, balanced

4 is 0-133 ft impedance, ABAM cable

5 is 133-266 ft impedance, ABAM cable

6 is 266-399 ft impedance, ABAM cable

7 is 399-533 ft, ABAM cable

1

signaling

E1: Common channel signaling (CCS) or ABCD signaling bits with channel associated signaling (CAS)

CAS

T1: ABCD or ABAB (with ESF line framing) or AB (with D4 line framing); CCS is available in timeslot 24 if applicable PBXs need it.

AB

encoding

A-law
micro-law

depends on the back card

cable type/length

A parameter, in the range 1-8.

1 = voice circuit: 0-220 ft MAT cable,
Frame Relay circuit: CSU Network Interface

2 = voice circuit: 220-440 ft MAT cable,
Frame Relay circuit: 0-133 ft ABAM cable

3 = voice circuit: 440-655 ft MAT cable,
Frame Relay circuit: 133-266 ft ABAM cable

4 = voice circuit: 0-133 ft ABAM cable,
Frame Relay circuit: 266-399 ft ABAM cable

5 = voice circuit: 133-266 ft ABAM cable,
Frame Relay circuit: 399-533 ft ABAM cable

6 = voice circuit: 266-399 ft ABAM cable,
Frame Relay circuit: 533-655 ft ABAM cable

7 = voice circuit: 399-533 ft, Frame Relay circuit: not used

8 = voice circuit: 533-655 ft, Frame Relay circuit: not used

4

56 Kbps bit stuffing

most significant byte (msb)
least significant byte (lsb)

msb

pct fast modem

Expected ADPCM fast connections. High speed modems preclude the use of ADPCM. Consequently, channel load requirements increase over that required for a voice channel. The pct fast modem parameters specify the expected channel utilization (%) by a high-speed modem. Range: 0-100

20

Parameters (ATM on BPX's ASI Card)

Parameter Description

line number

Specifies the ASI line to configure.

line options

Specifies the ATM line options:

Parameter Description Options Default

Loop clock

Enable loop clocking.

Yes/No

No

Idle Code

Hex data placed in unused payload of cells.

0 - FF
(hex)

7F

Cable
Type/Length

Length and type of cable used for trunk.

1 = 0 - 225
2 = >225

1

HCS Masking

Masking of cell header checksum to disable error checking.

Yes | No

Yes

Payload Scramble

Whether or not to scramble (randomize) the cell payload data. Note: for E3, this must always be set to Yes.

Yes | No

No

Parameters (ATM on IGX's UXM Card)

Parameter Description

slot.line

Specifies which line on which slot to configure.

line options

Specifies the ATM line options:

Parameter Description Options Default

Loop clock

Enable loop clocking

Yes/No

No

Idle Code

Hex data placed in unused payload of cells.

0 - FF
(hex)

7F

HCS Masking

Masking of cell header checksum to disable error checking.

Yes | No

Yes

Payload Scramble

Whether or not to scramble (randomize) the cell payload data. Note: for E3, this must always be set to Yes.

Yes | No

Yes

Frame Scramble

Whether or not to scramble (randomize) the frame data. Note: for E3, this must always be set to Yes.

Yes | No

No

Cell Framing

Choose the cell framing format. Select either STS-3C (SONET) or STM-1 (SDH).

STS-3C | STM-1
PLCP
HEC

STS-3C for OC-3
PLCP for T3
HEC for E3

Parameters (IMA on IGX's UXM)

Parameter Description

slot.line

Specifies which line on which slot to configure.

Line DSO-Map

Line DSO mapping.

IMA Group Members

Displays the line numbers of the individual links composing the IMA group.

Retained Links

The minimum number of links in the IMA group that must be active in order for the IMA line to operate. If the number of links fails and falls below the retained link number specified, the IMA line fails.

IMA Protocol Option

Specify one of the following:

Enable-to enable the IMA protocol on a line
Disable-to disable the IMA protocol on a line

Note: Changing the protocol option on an active line results in port failure. The user should always change this option at the CPE side or the other end of the physical line to ensure the protocol is running.

  • At the CPE end, decrease the port speed to be below T1/E1 rate less protocol overhead. An IGX switch will inform the user of the proper port speed value.

  • At the node (line side), change port speed.

  • At the CPE end, disable IMA protocol.

  • At the node (line side), use the cnfln command to disable IMA protocol.

IMA Max Diff. Dly

Specify a value. Range: 0-200 msec. Default: 200 msec.

IMA Clock Mode:

The clock speed mode is CTC.

Loop Clock

Enables the transmit and receive control leads to use the same clock. Specify Yes or No. Default: No.

Line Coding

Configures T1 and E1 coding. Valid options are:

T1-ZCS , B8ZS , AMI

The T1 default is ZCS (for FRSM, B8Zs)

E1-HDB3, ZCS

The E1 default is HDB3

Line CRC

Enables CRC-4 detection for E1 lines. Use either Y or N. The default is N.

Line recv impedance

For E1, a parameter in the range 1-7.

1 is 75 ohm impedance, unbalanced

2 is 75 ohm impedance, unbalanced

3 is 20 ohm impedance, balanced

4 is 0-133 ft impedance, ABAM cable

5 is 133-266 ft impedance, ABAM cable

6 is 266-399 ft impedance, ABAM cable

7 is 399-533 ft, ABAM cable

Idle Code

Hex data placed in unused payload of cells
Range: 0 - FF (hex)
Default: 7F

HCS Masking

Masking of cell header checksum to disable error checking. Specify either Yes or No. Default: Yes.

Payload Scramble

Whether or not to scramble (randomize) the cell payload data. Specify either Yes or No. Default: No

Note: for E3, this must always be set to Yes.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspln, dsplncnf, dsptsmap, dnln, upport, dspport, dspports

Example

Configure voice line 14.

cnfln 14

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 09:55 PST CLN 14 Configuration T1/24 CDP slot: 13 Loop clock: -- Line framing: -- coding: -- CRC: -- recv impedance: -- E1 signaling: -- encoding: -- T1 signaling: -- cable type: -- length: -- 56KBS Bit Pos: -- pct fast modem: -- Last Command: cnfcln 14 Next Command:
Example

Configure a Frame Relay T1 line for the following option: no loop clock.

cnfln 15 N ESF 4

sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2T Dec. 19 2000 22:50 PST LN 15 Config T1/24 FRM slot:15 Loop clock: No Line framing: ESF Line coding: B8ZS Line cable type: ABAM Line length: 266-399 ft. Last Command: cnfln 15 N ESF 4
Example

Configure ASI port 5.1.

cnfln 5.1

sw167 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 13:24 PST LN 5.1 Config T3 [96000 cps] ASI-T3 slot: 5 Loop clock: No Idle code: 7F hex Line framing: -- coding: -- recv impedance: -- E1 signaling: -- encoding: -- cable type: T1 signaling: -- length: 0-225 ft. HCS Masking: Yes Payload Scramble: No 56KBS Bit Pos: -- Frame Scramble: -- pct fast modem: -- Cell Framing: -- Last Command: cnfln 5.1
Example

Configure line 1 on the UVM in slot 10 with no loop clock, D4 framing, Zero Code Suppression coding, AB T1 signaling, and 20 percent expected channel utilization by a high-speed modem. You are prompted to configure a UVM line for SVC Caching. The SVC Caching feature speeds up call setup for most VN-controlled calls by avoiding some of the call setup/tear-down operations when a call originates or terminates. Refer to the VNS Installation and Configuration Manual for more information on SVC Caching.

cnfln 10.1 N D4 ZCS AB 4 20 _

sw176 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 13:37 PST LN 10.1 Config T1/24 UVM slot: 10 Loop clock: No Line framing: D4 cnfg: External coding: ZCS slot.line: -- CRC: -- CAS-switching: PBX-end recv impedance: -- SVC-Caching : On E1/J1 signaling: -- encoding: u-law T1 signaling: AB cable type: ABAM length: 0-133 ft. 56KBS Bit Pos: msb pct fast modem: 20 This Command: cnfln 10.1 N D4 ZCS AB 4 20 _ Turn on SVC-Caching (Y):
Example

Configure the number of retained links from the default (8 for this configuration) to 6.

cnfln 5.1 1-15,17-31 1-8 6 200 N 54 Y Y N

sw225 TN StrataCom IGX 8420 9.3.l3 Feb. 2 2000 10:14 GMT LN 5.1(8) Config E1/238 UXM slot:10 Line DS-0 map: 1-15,17-31 IMA Group Member(s): 1-8 Retained links: 6 IMA Protocol Option: Enabled IMA Max. Diff. Dly: 200 msec. IMA Clock Mode: CTC Loop clock: No Line coding: HDB3 Line CRC: Yes Line recv impedance: 75 ohm Idle code: 54 hex HCS Masking: Yes Payload Scramble: Yes This Command: cnfln 5.1 1-15,17-31 1-8 6 200 N 54 Y Y N
Example

Configure CVM card.

sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2T Dec. 20 2000 00:17 PST LN 13 Config T1/24 CVM slot:13 Loop clock: No Line framing: D4 Line coding: ZCS Line encoding: u-LAW Line T1 signaling: AB Line cable type: ABAM Line length: 0-133 ft. Line 56KBS Bit Pos: msb Line pct fast modem: 20 Line SVC-Caching: Off Last Command: cnfln 13
Example (BPX)

cnfln 6.3

sw167 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 13:26 PST LN 6.3 Config OC3 [353208cps] BXM slot: 6 Loop clock: 0 Idle code: 7F hex Line framing: -- coding: -- recv impedance: -- E1 signaling: -- encoding: -- cable type: -- T1 signaling: -- length: -- HCS Masking: Yes Payload Scramble: Yes 56KBS Bit Pos: -- Frame Scramble: Yes pct fast modem: -- Cell Framing: STS-3C Last Command: cnfln 6.3
Example (IGX)

Configure line 5.3 on a UXM in an IGX node. With Release 9.3.20, the VC Shaping parameter is not configured with the cnfln command. The cnfport command is used to configure VC Shaping on all ATM ports in the IGX.

cnfln 5.3 N 7F Y Y Y

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2a July 20 2000 15:35 GMT LN 5.3 Config OC3 UXM slot:5 Loop clock: No Line framing: STS-3C Idle code: 7F hex HCS Masking: Yes Payload Scramble: Yes Frame Scramble: Yes Last Command:cnfln 5.3 N 7F Y Y Y

cnflnalm (configure line alarm)

Sets the trunk and line alarm values for failures that are statistical in nature. Statistical alarms are declared by the switch software when cards supporting these trunks or lines report too many errors. The switch declares an alarm if the detected error rate equals the cnflnalm parameter error rate for the period of time designated by the alarm time parameter. Error rates that exceed the specified error rate cause an alarm in a proportionately shorter period of time. An alarm is cleared when the error rate remains below the rate specified by error rate for a period of time designated by the clear time.

You can configure the thresholds for alarms caused by the collection of statistics but not for the alarms caused by a network failure. For example, you can configure the threshold for an alarm caused by a collection of bipolar errors, but you cannot configure an alarm caused by a card failure.

Six parameters exist for each failure type—three for minor alarms and three for major alarms. When configuring any item for a minor or major alarm, you must enter a value. You can enter a new value or enter the current value.

The tables show for each failure type, the alarm classes, the possible error rate options, and default alarm times and clear times.

Syntax

cnflnalm <fail_type> <alarm_class> <rate> <alarm_time> <clear_time>

Parameters

Parameter Description

Failure type

Specifies the failure type. The list that follows gives the number for each failure type. (Items with an asterisk pertain to ATM only.)

    1. Bpv—Bipolar violations

    2. Fs—Frame slip

    3. oof—Out of frame

    4. Vpd—Voice packets dropped (TX)

    5. Tspd—Time-stamped packets dropped (TX)

    6. Ntspd—Non-time-stamped packets dropped

    7. Pkterr—Packet error

    8. Los—Loss of signal

    9. Fer—Frame error

    10. CRC—Cyclic Redundancy Check

    11. Pkoof—Packet out of frame

    12. Oom—Out of multiframe

    13. Ais16—Alarm information signal—E1/E3 Only

    14. Bdapd—Bursty data A packets dropped

    15. Bdbpd—Bursty data B packets dropped

    16. Badclk—Bad clock

    17. Pccpd—PCC packets dropped

    18. * Lcv—Line code violations

    19. * Pcv1—P-bit parity code violations

    20. * Pcvp—C-bit parity code violations

    21. * Bcv—PLCP BIP-8 code violations

    22. * Rxvpd—Receive voice packets dropped

    23. * Rxtspd—Receive time stamped packets dropped

    24. * Rxntspd—Receive non-time-stamped packets dropped

    25. * Rxbdapd—Receive bursty data A packets dropped

    26. * Rxbdbpd—Receive bursty data B packets dropped

    27. * Rxhppd—Receive high-priority packets dropped

    28. * Atmhec—Cell header HEC errors

    29. * Plcpoof—PLCP out of frame

    30. * 30—Rxspdm: Receive spacer packets dropped

alarm class

Specifies the class of alarm to be configured for the specified alarm type. Valid alarm classes are:

  • Minor alarm

  • Major alarm

rates

Specifies the error rate at which the error must occur before an alarm is declared. The choices for error rates vary depending on the failure type and the alarm class. The choices are called out as Error Rate Options. The default error rates are indicated. With the exception of a Vpd (voice packets dropped) failure, you enter the number corresponding to the error rate. For Vpd (voice packets dropped) failures, you enter a percentage for the dropped packet rate in the range 1%-10%.

alarm time

Specifies the time that a condition must exceed a threshold before an alarm is declared.
Range (minor alarms): 3-10 minutes
Range (major alarms): 10-250 seconds

clear time

Specifies the time that the condition must exceed the selected threshold before the alarm is cleared.
Range (minor alarms,): 3-10 minutes
Range (major alarms): 10-250 seconds

Parameters (Error Rate Options)

Error Rate Options
Option Alarm Class Error Rate

A

1 - minor

1 - 1% 2 -.1% 3 -.01% 4 -.001% 5 -.0001%

2 - major

1 - 1% 2 -.1% 3 -.01%

B

1 - minor

1 - 10E-4 2 - 10E-5 3 - 10E-6 4 - 10E-7 5 - 10E-8

2 - major

1 - 10E-2 2 - 10E-3 3 - 10E-4 4 - 10E-5 5 - 10E-6

Parameters (Failure Type)

Failure Type Alarm Class Error Rate Options * Alarm Time Clear Time


1-Bpv


1-minor
2-major

Option B
Default = 4
Default = 2


10 Minutes
10 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


2-Fs


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 3
Default = 2


10 Minutes
10 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds

3-Oof

1-minor

1: 1%
2: 0.1%
3: 0.01%
4: 0.001%
5: 0.0001% (Def.)

10 Minutes

3 Minutes

2-major

1: 1%
2: 0.1%
3: 0.01% (Def.)
4: 0.001%

10 Seconds

10 Seconds

4- Vpd

1-minor
2-major

Any dropped packet
rate from 1% to 10%

5 Minutes
60 Seconds

3 Minutes
10 Seconds


5- Tspd


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 3
Default = 2


5 Minutes
60 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


6-Ntspd


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 3
Default = 2


5 Minutes
60 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds

7- Pkterr

1-minor
2-major

Any error count
from 1-10,000

10 Minutes
125 Seconds

3 Minutes
10 Seconds


8-Los


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 5
Default = 3


10 Minutes
10 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


9- Fer


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 3
Default = 2


10 Minutes
200 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


10- CRC


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 3
Default = 2


10 Minutes
200 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


11-Pkoof


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 3
Default = 2


10 Minutes
200 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


12- Oom


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 4
Default = 2


10 Minutes
10 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


13- Ais16


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 5
Default = 3


10 Minutes
10 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


14-Bdapd


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 4
Default = 2


5 Minutes
60 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


15- Bdbpd


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 4
Default = 2


5 Minutes
60 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


16-Badclk


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 2
Default = 1


10 Minutes
50 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


17-Pccpd


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 4
Default = 2


5 Minutes
60 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


18-Lcv


1-minor
2-major

Option B
Default = 3
Default = 1


10 Minutes
10 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


19-Pcv1


1-minor
2-major

Option B
Default = 3
Default = 1


10 Minutes
10 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


20-Pcvp


1-minor
2-major

Option B
Default = 3
Default = 1


10 Minutes
10 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


21-Bcv


1-minor
2-major

Option B
Default = 3
Default = 1


10 Minutes
10 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


22-Rxvpd


1-minor

2-major

1-10%
Default =1%
1-10%
Default = 4%


5 Minutes

60 Seconds


3 Minutes

10 Seconds


23-Rxtspd


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 3
Default = 2


5 Minutes
60 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


24-Rxbdapd


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 3
Default = 2


5 Minutes
60 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


25-Rxbdbpd


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 4
Default = 2


5 Minutes
60 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


26-Rxntspd


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 4
Default = 2


5 Minutes
60 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


27-Rxhppd


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 4
Default = 2


5 Minutes
60 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


28-Atmhec


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 4
Default = 2


10 Minute
120 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


29-Plcpoof


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 4
Default = 2


10 Minutes
200 Seconds


3 Minutes
10 Seconds


30-Rxspdm


1-minor
2-major

Option A
Default = 4
Default = 2


4 Minutes
10 Seconds


2 Minutes
5 Seconds

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-3

No

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

clrnalm, clrtrkalm, dspclnerrs, dsplnalmcnf, dsptrkerrs

Example

Display current alarm types.

cnflnalm

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 13 2000 12:54 GMT Line Alarm Types 1) Bpv 13) Tsdp 25) Rxbdbpd 37) Txbdacdscd 2) Fs 14) Ntsdp 26) Rxntspd 38) Txbdbcdscd 3) Oof 15) Pccpd 27) Rxhppd 39) Txcbrcdscd 4) Los 16) Bdapd 28) Atmhec 40) Txabrcdscd 5) Fer 17) Bdbpd 29) FSyncErr 41) Txvbrcdscd 6) CRC 18) Lcv 30) Rxspdm 42) TxGwFPdscd 7) Oom 19) Pcvl 31) CGWpktdscd 43) RxGwCLdscd 8) Ais16 20) Pcvp 32) CGWcelldscd 44) CGWfrmabrt 9) Pkoof 21) Bcv 33) Txntscdscd 10) Pkterr 22) Rxvpd 34) Txhpcdscd 11) Badclk 23) Rxtspd 35) Txvcdscd 12) Vpd 24) Rxbdapd 36) Txtscdscd This Command: cnflnalm Enter Type:
Example

Set Alarm Type 27, the Minor alarm time threshold, to 4 minutes. In this example, the cnflnalm command is followed by the alarm type (27), the alarm minor or major (1 for minor, 2 for major), the current rate (which is the default of 0.001%, (which is a 4), the new value for Alarm Time of 4 minutes (which is a "4" entry), and the existing Alarm Clear time of "3."

cnflnalm 27 1 4 4 3

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 13 2000 13:01 GMT Line Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 25) Rxbdbpd .001% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 26) Rxntspd .01% 5 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 27) Rxhppd .001% 4 min 3 min .1% 60 sec 10 sec 28) Atmhec .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 120 sec 10 sec 29) FSyncErr .01% 10 min 3 min .1% 200 sec 10 sec 30) Rxspdm .01% 4 min 2 min .001% 30 sec 5 sec 31) CGWpktds .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec 32) CGWcelld .01% 5 min 3 min 1% 60 sec 10 sec Last Command: cnflnalm 27 1 4 4 3

cnflnparm (configure ATM line card parameters)

Configures several parameters for ATM lines originating on the BPX or IGX nodes. The cnflnparm command is quite similar to the cnfln command.

This command configures the circuit line alarm integration times in milliseconds for Red and Yellow circuit line alarms. You should set them to correspond to the local carrier's alarm integration times. The cnflnparm range for each of these parameters is 60-3932100 ms. Carrier integration times are typically 800 ms-1500 ms for Red Alarm and 1500-3000 ms for Yellow Alarm.

You can also set the queue depth for the two queues associated with the ASI-0 card, the constant bit rate (CBR) queue and the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) queue. The queue depths may be increased to
16,000 bytes per queue.

Syntax

cnflnparm <slot.port> <option 1-4>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.port>

Specifies the line to configure.

<option >

Specifies the parameter to configure.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

upln, dnln, cnfln

Example

cnflnparm 5.1

sw197 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 01:54 GMT LN 5.1 Parameters 1 Red Alarm - In/Out [ 2500 / 15000] (Dec) 2 Yel Alarm - In/Out [ 2500 / 15000] (Dec) This Command: cnflnparm 5.1 Which parameter do you wish to change: Which parameter do you wish to change:

cnflnpass (configure line pass-through)

Configures a pair of ports so that unprocessed channels go from a primary UVM to a secondary UVM. The cnflnpass command primarily applies to channels that use LDCELP or G.729 CACELP (although pass-through is possible on any type of connection except t-type or td-type). For a description of pass-through, refer to the UVM description in the Cisco IGX Reference.

To return ports to the non-passing configuration, execute cnflnpass with a 0 as the second argument.

Syntax

To configure pass-through, enter:
cnflnpass <primary line> <secondary line>

To remove pass-through from the primary and secondary lines, enter:
cnflnpass <primary line> 0

Parameters

Parameter Description

<primary line>

Specifies the channels that the primary card supports.
The format is slot.port.

<secondary line>

Specifies the channels that the secondary card supports.
The format is slot.port.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsplncnf

Example

Configure line 13.1 to pass any unsupported channels to line 12.1.

cnflnpass 13.1 12.1

Upon successful execution of the command, the screen displays the slot and line of the passing channel on the right. The screen also shows other characteristics of the line.

sw176 TN IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 00:18 GMT LN 13.1 E1/30 UVM slot: 13 Loop clock: No Line framing: On cnfg: Passing coding: HDB3 slot.line: 12.1 CRC: No recv impedance: 75 ohm + gnd E1/J1 signaling: CAS encoding: A-LAW T1 signaling: -- cable type: -- length: -- 56KBS Bit Pos: msb pct fast modem: 20 Last Command: cnflnpass 13.1 12.1 Next Command:

Note that, when you remove pass-through by entering a 0 for the secondary line, the screen also still line characteristics but with dashed lines in the column for the secondary (or passing) line.

cnflnsigparm (configure line signaling parameters)

Configures the line signaling parameters associated with a line for the CVM and UVM voice cards.

The CVM and UVM Heartbeat parameter (option 1) is the rate, in seconds, at which the card sends a signaling (ABCD bits) state update to the other end of the connection, even when there is no change in the state of the signaling bits. This is done because signaling packets are time-stamped data packets, and there is a small chance that a signaling packet might be discarded somewhere in the network. This recovery mechanism ensures that on-hook and off-hook notifications are not lost. Increasing this interval will probably have no impact as long as none of the normal signaling time-stamped data packets are being discarded in the network.

In Release 9.2 and higher, the CVM and UVM cards are supported. The CIP and CDP cards are not supported.

Syntax

cnflnsigparm <parameter number> <parameter value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<parameter number>

Specifies the number of the parameter to change.

<parameter value>

Specifies the new value to enter.

Parameter Values

No. Parameter Description Range

1

Heartbeat

The current state of the signaling is periodically transmitted to the far end even if no signaling transitions are detected. This interval is determined by the value of the "heartbeat."

The CVM & UVM Heartbeat parameter (option 1) is the rate, in seconds, at which the card sends a signaling (ABCD bits) state update to the other end of the connection, even when there is no change in the state of the signaling bits. This is done because signaling packets are time-stamped data packets, and there is a small chance that a signaling packet might be discarded somewhere in the network. This recovery mechanism ensures that on-hook and off-hook notifications are not lost.

Increasing this interval will probably have no impact as long as none of the normal signaling TS data packets are being discarded in the network.

2-30 sec.

2

Signal Polling Rate

How often the control card polls the UVM/CVM for the status of the signaling. This parameter is used to update displays and statistics.

2-60 sec.

3

Default Inband Signal Delay

The transmit buffer timer value set after a valid signaling transition for in-band signaling arrives. After timeout, a signaling packet is sent.

30-96 msec.

4

Default Inband Playout Delay

The receive buffer timer that "ages" an incoming, time-stamped packet. When the age of the packet reaches the timestamp value, it moves on to depacketization and then to the user equipment. This parameter is used to even out the delay between signaling packets and voice packets.

0-200 msec.

5

Default Pulse Signal Delay

Same as number 3 but applied to pulse signaling.

30-96 msec.

6

Default Pulse Playout Delay

Same as number 4 but applied to pulse signaling.

100-200 msec.

7

CVM Number of Packet Slices

1

8

Packet Rate

Reserves trunk bandwidth for carrying UVM/CVM signaling.

0-1000 packets/sec.

9

Condition CCS Lines

If you specify yes for this parameter, the card applies signaling conditioning during an alarm to all channels on T1 circuit lines to notify PBX of a line failure.

YES or NO

10

Inband Min. Wink

Same as 6 for in-band signaling.

120-300 msec.

11

Pulse Min. Wink

For UVM/CVM connections only, this parameter controls both wink and inter-digit intervals for signaling that arrives over the NPM signaling channel from a far end UVM/CVM.

120-300 msec.

12

Condition T1 Lines?

If you specify yes for this parameter, the card applies signaling conditioning during an alarm to all channels on T1 circuit lines to notify PBX of a line failure.

YES or NO

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnflnparm, cnflnstats, dsplnstatcnf, dsplnstathist, upln, dnln, cnfln

Example

Configure line signaling for CVM and UVM voice cards.

cnflnsigparm

cc2 LAN SuperUser IGX 32 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 11:16 PST 1 CVM & UVM Heartbeat [ 2] (sec) 2 CVM & UVM Sig. Polling Rate [ 10] (sec) 3 CVM & UVM Default Inband Sig Delay [ 96] (msec) 4 CVM & UVM Default Inband Playout Delay [ 200] (msec) 5 CVM & UVM Default Pulse Sig Delay [ 96] (msec) 6 CVM & UVM Default Pulse Playout Delay [ 200] (msec) 7 UVM Number of Packet Slices [ 1] 8 CVM & UVM Packet Rate [ 200] (pkt/sec) 9 CVM & UVM Condition T1 CCS Lines or T1 Lines? [ YES] 10 UVM Default Inband Min. Wink [ 140] (msec) 11 UVM Default Pulse Min. Wink [ 140] (msec) 12 CVM & UVM Condition T1 Lines? [ YES] (yes/no) This Command: cnflnsigparm Which parameter do you wish to change

cnflnstats (configure line statistics collection)

Configures statistics collection for a line. Primarily, cnflnstats is a debug tool (older alias: cnfclnstats). The cnflnstats command enables you customize statistics collected on each line. Table 3-38 lists the statistics for FastPacket-based cards with T1 or E1 lines. For other available parameters, refer to the actual screens on a node. The examples show available statistics for a UXM port and an ASI-155 port.

Not all statistic types are available for all lines. Valid statistics appear in full brightness while unavailable types appear dimmed.

Bipolar violations are not generally accumulated on E1 trunk and circuit lines. They are accumulated only on T1 lines connected to Frame Relay ports.

Syntax

cnflnstats <line> <stat> <interval> <e | d> [<samples> <size> <peaks>]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<line>

Specifies the port to configure.

<stat>

Specifies the type of statistic to enable/disable.

<interval>

Specifies the time interval of each sample. Range: 1-255 minutes

<e|d>

Enables/disables a statistic. Range: E to enable, D to disable.

[samples]

Specifies the number of samples to collect. Range: 1-255

[size]

Specifies the number of bytes per data sample. Range: 1, 2, or 4

[peaks]

Enables the collection of one minute peaks. Range: Y to enable, N to disable.

Statistics for FastPacket Cards

Statistic Index Number Statistic Line Type

1

Bipolar Violations

E1 and T1

2

Frame Slips

E1 and T1

3

Out of Frames

E1 and T1

4

Loss of Signal

E1 and T1

5

Frame Bit Errors

E1 only

6

CRC Errors

E1 only

7

Out of Multi-Frames

E1 only

8

All Ones in Timeslot 16

E1 only

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsplnstatcnf, dsplnstathist

Example (FastPacket)
cc2 LAN SuperUser IGX 8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 11:20 PST Line Statistic Types 1) Bipolar Violations 2) Frames Slips 3) Out of Frames 4) Losses of Signal 5) Frames Bit Errors 6) CRC Errors 7) Out of Multi-Frames 8) All Ones in Timeslot 16 Last Command: cnflnstats 15 6 255 e Next Command:
Example (UXM Port)
------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 13 2000 13:35 GMT Line Statistic Types 1) Bipolar Violations 37) Severely Err Secs - Path 3) Out of Frames 38) Severely Err Frame Secs 4) Losses of Signal 40) Unavail. Seconds 5) Frames Bit Errors 41) BIP-8 Code Violations 6) CRC Errors 42) Cell Framing Errored Seconds 29) Line Code Violations 43) Cell Framing Sev. Err Secs. 30) Line Errored Seconds 44) Cell Framing Sec. Err Frame Secs 31) Line Severely Err Secs 45) Cell Framing Unavail. Secs. 32) Line Parity Errors 62) Total Cells Tx to line 33) Errored Seconds - Line 69) Total Cells Rx from line 34) Severely Err Secs - Line 98) Frame Sync Errors 35) Path Parity Errors 141) FEBE Counts 36) Errored Secs - Path 143) Cell Framing FEBE Err Secs This Command: cnflnstats 4.1 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 13 2000 13:36 GMT Line Statistic Types 144) Cell Framing FEBE Sev. Err. Secs. 202) Section BIP8 Err. Secs. 151) Yellow Alarm Transition Count 203) Line BIP24 Err. Secs. 152) Cell Framing Yel Transitions 204) Line FEBE Err. Secs. 153) AIS Transition Count 205) Path BIP8 Err. Secs. 193) Loss of Cell Delineation 206) Path FEBE Err. Secs. 194) Loss of Pointer 207) Section BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 195) OC3 Path AIS 208) Section Sev. Err. Framing Secs. 196) OC3 Path YEL 209) Line BIP24 Severely Err. Secs. 197) Section BIP8 210) Line FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 198) Line BIP24 211) Path BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 199) Line FEBE 212) Path FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 200) Path BIP8 213) Line Unavailable Secs. 201) Path FEBE 214) Line Farend Unavailable Secs. This Command: cnflnstats 4.1 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 13 2000 13:36 GMT Line Statistic Types 215) Path Unavailable Secs. 228) INVMUX: Tx Failure Count 216) Path Farend Unavailable Secs. 229) INVMUX: Rx Failure Count 217) HCS Uncorrectable Error 218) HCS Correctable Error 219) INVMUX: line violations 220) INVMUX: Severely Err. Secs. 221) INVMUX: Farend Sev. Err. Secs. 222) INVMUX: Unavailable Secs. 223) INVMUX: Farend Unavail Secs. 224) INVMUX: Tx Unusable Seconds 225) INVMUX: Rx Unusable Seconds 226) INVMUX: Farend Tx Unusable Secs. 227) INVMUX: Farend Rx Unusable Secs. This Command: cnflnstats 4.1 Statistic Type:
Example (BXM-155)
------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw53 VT Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.m0 Dec. 13 2000 13:52 GMT Line Statistic Types 1) Loss of Frames 39) Path FEBE 2) Loss of Signal 40) Section BIP8 Err. Secs. 19) HCS Errors 41) Line BIP24 Err. Secs. 28) YEL Transitions 42) Line FEBE Err. Secs. 30) Alarm Indication Signal 43) Path BIP8 Err. Secs. 31) Loss of Cell Delineation 44) Path FEBE Err. Secs. 32) Loss of Pointer 45) Section BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 33) OC3 Path AIS 46) Section Sev. Err. Framing Secs. 34) OC3 Path YEL 47) Line BIP24 Severely Err. Secs. 35) Section BIP8 48) Line FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 36) Line BIP24 49) Path BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 37) Line FEBE 38) Path BIP8 This Command: cnflnstats 11.1 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw53 VT Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.m0 Dec. 13 2000 13:53 GMT Line Statistic Types 50) Path FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 51) Line Unavailable Secs. 52) Line Farend Unavailable Secs. 53) Path Unavailable Secs. 54) Path Farend Unavailable Secs. 55) HCS Correctable Error 56) HCS Correctable Error Err. Secs This Command: cnflnstats 11.1 Statistic Type:

The table below provides BXM object names and some line statistics descriptions for the BXM card. Note that the object name given is, in most cases, the same as the screen field name when the cnflnstats screen is displayed.


Note   Where interface type is not specified it is implied to be of generic nature, and is good for all BXM interfaces (T3, E3, OC-3, OC-12).

Line Statistics Descriptions (BXM Card)

Object ID Object Name Range Description

01

Message Tag

Byte 0-3:
Tag ID

Byte 4-7:
IP Address

Identifier and source IP address sent with ComBus message. Both will be copied into the response, if any is to be sent.

02

Line Number

1 - 12

Identifies the target line number. If multiple line numbers are sent during the operation, then each line number object terminates the configuration for the string of objects for the previous line number.

03

Statistical Subset

Byte 0:
Subset #
0: All stats
1-4: Subset #

Byte 1-n:
List of Stat
Objects in subset

The set operator configures the subset template. The get operator uses the subset number to build a response. It ignores the "byte 1-n" string.

04

Statistics Auto-Reset Option

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Statistics will be automatically reset after sent to the BCC in an Event Message if the Auto-Reset option is enabled. After the instance of an enable or disable command, the condition will persist until another Auto-Reset command is encountered. Note reset is on a line basis.

05

Total Cells Transmitted

0 - 232-1

Total cells transmitted at the physical layer interface.

06

Total Cells Received

0 - 232-1

Total cells received at the physical layer interface.

07

RESERVED

08

LOS

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of LOS.

09

LOF

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of LOF.

0A

Line AIS

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of AIS.

0B

Line RDI (YEL)

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Yellow Alarm detection.

0C

T3/E3 LCV

0 - 232-1

T3/E3 Line Code Violation Count.

0D

T3 PCV

0 - 232-1

T3 P-Bit Code Violations (Line) Count.

0E

T3 CCV

0 - 232-1

T3 C-Bit Code Violations (Path) Count.

0F

T3 FEBE

0 - 232-1

Far End Block Error.

10

T3/E3 FERR

0 - 232-1

Framing Errors Count.

11

T3/E3 LES

0 - 232-1

Line Errored Seconds Count. Incremented for each second there was at least one LCV.

12

T3 PES

0 - 232-1

T3 P-bit Errored Seconds Count. Incremented for each second there was at least one PES.

13

T3 CES

0 - 232-1

T3 C-bit Errored Seconds Count. Incremented for each second there was at least one CES.

14

T3/E3 LSES

0 - 232-1

Line Severely Errored Seconds Count. Incremented for each second there were 44 or more LCVs.

15

T3 PSES

0 - 232-1

T3 P-bit Severely Errored Seconds Count. Incremented for each second there were 44 or more P-bit Errors.

16

T3 CSES

0 - 232-1

T3 C-bit Severely Errored Seconds Count. Incremented for each second there were 44 or more C-bit Errors.

17

T3/E3 SEFS

0 - 232-1

T3/E3 Severely Errored Framing Seconds Count incremented for each second there was one or more Severely Errored Framing Errors (OOF).

18

T3/E3 UAS

0 - 232-1

Unavailable Seconds. Count starts from the onset of LOS, LOF, or AIS.

19

T3 PLCP LOF

0 - 232-1

PLCP Loss of Frame. Number of times Loss of Frame was detected by the PLCP.

1A

T3 PLCP YEL

0 - 232-1

PLCP Yellow Alarm count.

1B

T3/E3 PLCP BIP-8

0 - 232-1

PLCP/G.832 BIP-8 Errors. Incremented each BIP-8 Error was detected by PLCP.

1C

T3/E3 PLCP FEBE

0 - 232-1

T3/E3 PLCP/G.832 Far End Block Errors.

1D

T3 PLCP FOE

0 - 232-1

T3 PLCP Framing Octet Errors

1E

T3/E3 PLCP BIP-8 ES

0 - 232-1

T3/E3 PLCP/G.832 BIP-8 Errored Seconds. Incremented each second at least one PLCP BIP-8 Error was detected.

1F

T3/E3 PLCP FEBE ES

0 - 232-1

T3/E3 PLCP/G.832 FEBE Errored Seconds. Incremented each second at least one PLCP FEBE was detected.

20

T3/E3 PLCP BIP-8 SES

0 - 232-1

T3/E3 PLCP/G.832 BIP-8 Severely Errored Seconds. Incremented each second there were at least 5 BIP-8 Errors.

21

T3/E3 PLCP FEBE SES

0 - 232-1

T3/E3 PLCP/G.832 FEBE Severely Errored Seconds. Incremented each second there were at least 5 FEBE Errors.

22

T3 PLCP SEFS

0 - 232-1

T3 Severely Errored Framing Seconds.Incremented each second there was at least one SEF event. (PLCP OOF).

23

T3 PLCP UAS

0 - 232-1

T3 PLCP Unavailable Seconds. Count starts at the onset of LOS, LOF, AIS, or PLCP LOF.

24

RESERVED

25

HCS uncorrectable errors

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Loss of Cell Delineation.

26

RESERVED

27

LOC

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Loss of Cell Delineation.

28

OC-3 LOP

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Loss of Pointer.

29

OC-3 Path AIS

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Path AIS.

2A

OC-3 Path RDI (YEL)

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Path Yellow.

2B

OC-3 Section BIP-8 Errors

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Section BIP-8 Errors.

2C

OC-3 Line

BIP-24

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Line BIP-24 Errors.

2D

OC-3 Line FEBE

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Line Far-End Blocking Errors.

2E

OC-3 Path

BIP-8

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Path BIP-8 Errors.

2F

OC-3 Path FEBE

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Path Far-End Blocking Errors.

30

OC-3 Section BIP-8 ES

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least one instance of Section BIP-8 Errors.

31

OC-3 Line BIP-24 ES

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least one instance of Line BIP-24 Errors.

32

OC-3 Line FEBE ES

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least one instance of Line Far-End Blocking Errors.

33

OC-3 Path BIP-8 ES

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least one instance of Path BIP-8 Errors.

34

OC-3 Path FEBE ES

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least one instance of Path Far-End Blocking Errors.

35

OC-3 Section BIP-8 SES

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least 2500/8800 (OC-3/OC-12) instances of Section BIP-8 Errors.

36

OC-3 Section SEFS

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least 2500/8800 (OC-3/OC-12) instances of OOF.

37

OC-3 Line BIP-24 SES

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least 2500/10000 (OC-3/OC-12) instances of Line BIP-24 Errors.

38

OC-3 Line FEBE SES

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least 2500/10000 (OC-3/OC-12) instances of Line Far-End Blocking Errors.

39

OC-3 Path BIP-8 SES

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least 2400 instances of Path BIP-8 Errors.

3A

OC-3 Path FEBE SES

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that had at least 2400 instances of Path Far-End Blocking Errors.

3B

OC-3 Line UAS

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that the line was unavailable, in LOS, LOF, AIS, or after the occurrence of 10 contiguous Line SESs.

3C

OC-3 Line Far End UAS

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that the line experienced at least 10 contiguous Line FEBE SESs.

3D

OC-3 Path UAS

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that the line was unavailable, in LOP, Path AIS, or after the occurrence of 10 contiguous Path SESs.

3E

OC-3 Path Far End UAS

0 - 232-1

Number of seconds that the line experienced at least 10 contiguous Path FEBE SESs.

3F

HCS correctable errors

0 - 232-1

Number of instances of Loss of Cell Delineation.

40 -41

RESERVED

cnfmode (configure mode)

Selects a mode of the card for a UFM-U back card. The mode of a card is combination of maximum port speeds and for specific port numbers. Table 3-39 lists the maximum port speeds and active ports for each mode. The cnfmode command lets you select 1 of 27 modes for either a UFI-12V.35 back card or a UFI-12X.21 back card. For a UFI-4HSSI back card, three modes are available.

To specify the actual speed of an individual port, use the command cnfport. The IGX documentation describes the application of the modes and the sequence of execution of these commands.


Note   The cnfmode and cnfufmumode commands are the same command.

Syntax

cnfmode <port> <mode>

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot

Specifies the slot of the UFM-U card.

mode

Specifies the mode of the UFM-U card set. The range for V.35 and X.21 ports is 1-27. The range for HSSI ports is 1-3. You may have to delete connections and down one or more ports before you execute cnfmode. To determine if you must delete connection or for a detailed description of the modes of a UFM-U, see the Cisco IGX 8400 Series Reference.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Node

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfport, dspmode, dspmodes

Example

Configure the UFM-U card set in slot 13 to have mode 4. Note that the display shows which ports are active for each mode number but does not show the current mode of the UFM-U. To see the current mode of the UFM-U, use dspmode.

cnfmode 13 4

w180 TN SuperUser IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 01:25 GMT UFMU MODES AND PORT AVAILABILITY BITMAP Mode[ 1]:111111111111 Mode[ 2]:101010101010 Mode[ 3]:100010001000 Mode[ 4]:101011111111 Mode[ 5]:100011111111 Mode[ 6]:101010101111 Mode[ 7]:100010101111 Mode[ 8]:100010001111 Mode[ 9]:100010101010 Mode[10]:100010001010 Mode[11]:111110101111 Mode[12]:111111111010 Mode[13]:111110001111 Mode[14]:111111111000 Mode[15]:101011111010 Mode[16]:111110101010 Mode[17]:101010001111 Mode[18]:101011111000 Mode[19]:111110101000 Mode[20]:111110001010 Mode[21]:100011111010 Mode[22]:100011111000 Mode[23]:111110001000 Mode[24]:101010001010 Mode[25]:101010101000 Mode[26]:100010101000 Mode[27]:101010001000 This Command: cnfmode 13 Enter The New UFMU Mode [1]: 4


Table 3-39:
Card Modes for Unchannelized Back Cards
V.35 and X.21 Ports HSSI Ports
Group A Group B Group C A B
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4

1

3 3 3 3

3 3 3 3

3 3 3 3

8 8

8 8

2

8 - 8 -

8 - 8 -

8 - 8 -

16 -

16 -

3

10 - - -

10 - - -

10 - - -

16 -

- -

4

8 - 8 -

3 3 3 3

3 3 3 3

5

10 - - -

3 3 3 3

3 3 3 3

6

8 - 8 -

8 - 8 -

3 3 3 3

7

10 - - -

8 - 8 -

3 3 3 3

8

10 - - -

10 - - -

3 3 3 3

9

10 - - -

8 - 8 -

8 - 8 -

10

10 - - -

10 - - -

8 - 8 -

11

3 3 3 3

8 - 8 -

3 3 3 3

12

3 3 3 3

3 3 3 3

8 - 8 -

13

3 3 3 3

10 - - -

3 3 3 3

14

3 3 3 3

3 3 3 3

10 - - -

15

8 - 8 -

3 3 3 3

8 - 8 -

16

3 3 3 3

8 - 8 -

8 - 8 -

17

8 - 8 -

10 - - -

3 3 3 3

18

8 - 8 -

3 3 3 3

10 - - -

19

3 3 3 3

8 - 8 -

10 - - -

20

3 3 3 3

10 - - -

8 - 8 -

21

10 - - -

3 3 3 3

8 - 8 -

22

10 - - -

3 3 3 3

10 - - -

23

3 3 3 3

10 - - -

10 - - -

24

8 - 8 -

10 - - -

8 - 8 -

25

8 - 8 -

8 - 8 -

10 - - -

26

10 - - -

8 - 8 -

10 - - -

27

8 - 8 -

10 - - -

10 - - -

cnfmxbutil (configure muxbus utilization)

Configures the Muxbus or cell bus utilization factor for each FRP or FRM, respectively.

Use the cnfmxbutil command to configure the Muxbus or cell bus utilization factor for each FRP or FRM in the node on a slot-by-slot basis. (System software automatically allocates a certain amount of bandwidth for each FRP or FRM in a node. Since the maximum data rate for an FRP or FRM is 2 Mbps, this bandwidth is also the maximum amount of the bus reserved for an FRP or FRM.)

In many applications, each of the four FRP or FRM ports is configured for a large number of 56 or
64 Kbps connections. System software totals the bandwidth required for all the connections, multiplies the total by 121% to reserve extra bandwidth for overhead, then subtracts this amount from the total available bus bandwidth.

However, statistically full utilization is not often required on ports with a large number of connections, so the reserved bus bandwidth may be further reduced. In a node with a T3 or E3 ATM trunk card, much of the bus bandwidth may be assigned to the ATM trunk, so you should exercise caution when allocating the remaining bus bandwidth.

Syntax

cnfmxbutil <slot number> <percentage>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot number>

Specifies the slot number of the associated FRP card.

<percentage>

Specifies the percent of Muxbus or cell bus bandwidth to allocate.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

IGX

Yes

Example

Configure Muxbus Utilization. The screen displays "N/A" for a slot where no FRP or FRM exists. Once the slot is selected, the system displays the message "Enter Utilization Factor." The range is 1-250%. The default is 121%. The extra 21% for the default is for the overhead for encapsulating the Frame Relay frame into the FastPackets or ATM cells.

cnfmxbutil

gamma Cisco WAN Manager SuperUser IGX 8420 Rev: 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:27 PDT Slot 1: N/A Slot 9: N/A Slot 17: 121% Slot 25: N/A Slot 2: N/A Slot 10: N/A Slot 18: 121% Slot 26: N/A Slot 3: N/A Slot 11: N/A Slot 19: N/A Slot 27: N/A Slot 4: N/A Slot 12: N/A Slot 20: N/A Slot 28: N/A Slot 5: N/A Slot 13: N/A Slot 21: N/A Slot 29: N/A Slot 6: N/A Slot 14: N/A Slot 22: N/A Slot 30: N/A Slot 7: N/A Slot 15: N/A Slot 23: N/A Slot 31: N/A Slot 8: N/A Slot 16: N/A Slot 24: N/A Slot 32: N/A This Command: cnfmxbutil Enter Slot:

cnfname (configure node name)

Specifies the name by which a node is known within the network. It may be changed at any time. The new node name is automatically distributed to the other nodes in the network.

Node names are case sensitive. For example, an upper-case "A" is not considered to be the same as a lower-case "a". Duplicate names are not allowed in the same network.

Node names may be configured from within a job sequence. If the node name is changed and the corresponding name in the job is not changed, the job will not function properly.

In these situations, the cnfname command cannot be executed:

Syntax

cnfname <nodename>

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfterm, cnfprt, and window

Example

The name changes to "alpha." The network topology screen displays indicating the new name. See the dspnw description for more information on the network topology screen.

cnfname alpha

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 12:02 PST NodeName Alarm Packet Line Packet Line Packet Line alpha 10- 7/beta 14- 13/beta beta MAJOR 7- 10/alpha 9- 10/gamma 13- 14/alpha 15- 15/gamma 20- 11/gamma gamma MAJOR 10- 9/beta 11- 20/beta 15- 15/beta Last Command: cnfname alpha Next Command:

cnfnodeparm (configure node parameter)

Sets a variety of general parameters for the nodes in a network.

The defaults for the network parameters are selected by Cisco engineering to operate under normal conditions. With few exceptions, you should change them only with the guidance of the Cisco TAC.

In Release 9.2 and higher, two new options are provided that you can use to determine the maximum frequency with which hitless rebuilds can occur before a full rebuild of the node is started.

Syntax

cnfnodeparm

ILMI Neighbor Discovery

In switch software Release 9.3.10 and higher, the ILMI Neighbor Discovery feature is available for use with ports (not virtual ports) on the BXM card and UXM card. This feature enables a network management system, such as Cisco WAN Manager or CiscoWorks 2000, to discover other attached ATM devices, such as Cisco ATM routers or switches. The attached devices also must support ILMI Neighbor Discovery for this feature to work.

When ILMI Neighbor Discover is enabled on a port, the BPX or IGX and the attached ATM device will exchange their management IP addresses together with other interface information with each other using the ILMI protocol. The exchanged information consists of the following:

Use parameter option 56 (BXM) or 53 (UXM) from the cnfnodeparm command to configure the ILMI Management IP address. The Management IP address is used by the NMS application to access the BPX, IGX, or the ATM device. Depending upon your network set up, you can configure the BPX or IGX to send either the LAN IP address or Network IP address as part of the neighbor information exchange with the attached ATM device. Enter 0 for LAN IP address, or 1 for Network IP address. The default is the network IP address for the BPX or IGX.

Use the dspnebdisc command to display all the neighbor's information discovered by the BPX or the IGX via the ILMI Neighbor Discovery procedure.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfport, dspnebdisc

Parameters (ILMI Neighbor Discovery)

Parameters Value

Protocol

ILMI

Protocol by Card

Yes

NebrDisc Enabled

Yes

ILMI Polling Enabled

Yes

Parameters (BPX)

Index Parameter Description Default

1

Update Initial Delay (sec.)

This delay, multiplied times the number of nodes in the network, is the delay before conditional updates are transmitted to the network after a BCC switchover.

5000 seconds

2

Update Per-Node Delay (ms.)

Delay between transmission of conditional updates to nodes.

30000 msecs

3

Comm. Break Test Delay (ms.)

Interval between tests for communication breaks on any node.

3000 msecs

4

Comm. Break Test Offset

Factor between number of communication test failures and successful tests to declare a node in communication break condition.

10 (D)

5

Network Time-out Period

The time a node waits for a response to a communication test transmission before it declares a failure. Four failures allowed.

1700 (D)

6

Network Inter-p Period

The time a node waits for a response to a communication test transmission on inter-domain connections before it declares a failure. The maximum number of failures is four.

4000 (D)

7

NW Sliding Window Size

Controls the number of BCC messages that can be transmitted simultaneously. Defines number of "no acknowledgments outstanding" on a controller before NACKS declared.

1 (D)

8

Num. Normal Time-outs

Number of normal network retransmissions allowed before issuing a communication break condition (for intra-domain connections).

7 (D)

9

Num. Inter-p Time-outs

Number of normal network retransmissions allowed before issuing a communication break condition (for inter-domain connections).

3 (D)

10

Num. Satellite Time-outs

Number of satellite network retransmissions allowed before issuing a communication break.

6 (D)

11

Number of Blind Time-outs

Maximum number of communication fail time-outs and retransmissions performed when using the blind channel. "Blind" refers to the message being sent across the trunk without knowing what node is on the other end of the trunk. The Comm Fail test uses this blind channel.

4 (D)

12

Number of CB Msg Time-outs

Number of communication break time-outs and retransmissions before declaring a communication break (CB) condition. One successful acknowledgment clears CB.

2 (D)

13

Comm. Fail Interval (ms.)

Minimum time allocated for communication fail testing of all trunks terminating on the current node.

10,000 (D)

14

Comm. Fail Multiplier

Number of Comm. Fail Intervals to skip for good lines.

3 (D)

15

CC Redundancy Configured

Yes indicates a redundant controller card is required to prevent an alarm.

Y

16

Stats Memory (x 100 KB)

The amount of controller memory to allocate to statistics collection.

132 (D)

17

Standby Update Timer

Determines how often to send update messages to a standby controller.

10 (D)

18

Stby Updts Per Pass

Number of messages that can be sent to standby card for each update interval.

50 (D)

19

Gateway ID Timer

An inter-domain rerouting timer. How often to look for junction nodes for new route.

30 (D)

20

GLCON Alloc Timer

Another inter-domain rerouting timer controlling the gateway LCON function.

30 (D)

21

Comm Fail Delay

Number of seconds before starting to detect communication failures after a controller switchover.

60 (D)

22

Nw. Hdlr Timer (msec)

Network handler timer determines how long to wait to send messages to or receive messages from a remote node.

50 (D)

23

SAR CC Transmit Rate

Transmit data rate for BCC traffic to standby BCC (Kbps).

560 (D)

24

SAR High Transmit Rate

Transmit data rate for BCC traffic to other BCC nodes (Kbps).

280 (D)

25

SAR Low Transmit Rate

Transmit data rate for BCC traffic to ICC nodes (Kbps).

56 (D)

26

SAR VRAM Cngestn Limit

The threshold for BCC traffic receive queue congestion that causes cell discards.

7680 (D)

27

SAR VRAM Cell Discard

BCC traffic receive queue discard amount in cells.

256 (D)

28

ASM Card Cnfged

Yes indicates an Alarm/Status Monitor card is required or an alarm will be generated.

Y

29

TFTP Grant Delay (sec)

The number of seconds the node waits before resending a TFTP request after a TFTP error has occurred. This field is display-only; you set the value in Cisco WAN Manager.

1

30

TFTP ACK Timeout (sec)

The number of seconds the node waits for an acknowledgment of a TFTP request before it declares the request as timed out. This field is display-only; you set the value in Cisco WAN Manager.

10

31

TFTP Write Retries

The number of times the node retries a TFTP operation (not just writes) after a failed attempt. This field is display-only; you set the value in Cisco WAN Manager.

3

32

SNMP Event logging

Enables maintenance logging of global SNMP messages. These SNMP events are not errors but any GET, SET, and so on. Output goes to a printer connected to the node's auxiliary port or a terminal server (accessible via Telnet). Without a connected output device, the parameter is meaningless.

y=yes

33

Job Lock Timeout

Range: 1-1000 seconds
Default: 0 (disables this parameter)

60

34

Max Via LCONs

The maximum number of "via" connections a via node can support. The default is the maximum for the node and should remain the default under normal operating conditions.

50000

35

Max Blind Segment Size

The maximum size of each segment of a blind message. (The full message may be longer than the segment, especially in a large network.) A blind message is a message the local node sends to the far end node when you execute addtrk. If the trunk has many errors, smaller message segments increase the possibility of a successful addtrk. Under normal conditions, this parameter should remain the default.

3570

36

Max XmtMemBlks Per NIB

Maximum number of memory blocks available for messages that are awaiting transmission. Under normal conditions, this parameter should remain the default.

3000

37

Max Mem on Stby Q (%)

Maximum number of update messages that can reside in queues awaiting transmission to the standby processor. This percentage is used to determine when to flush the standby message queue when the percentage is reached. Only rare circumstances could provide a reason to change this parameter, so do not change it without first consulting the TAC.

5000

38

Stat Config Proc Cnt

Stat Config Proc Cnt is the number of statistics that will be enabled before pausing and allowing other processes to run. The default value of 1000 specifies that 1000 statistics should be enabled. But the count is checked only once for every object, so if the number of objects exceeds the count there will be one statistic enabled for each object.

For example, if there are 1000 connections and the default count is set, one statistic will be enabled for each connection before pausing. If there are 2000 connections, one statistic will be enabled for each connection, then the number of statistics enabled (2000) will be compared to the count (1000). Since the number enabled exceeds the count, the enabling of statistics will pause.

1000
(where count is between 1 and 100000)

39

Stat Config Proc Delay

Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds (ms) that statistics processing pauses between enabling passes. On a heavily loaded switch, you may increase this number to reduce the load when enabling statistics, but the enabling process takes longer.

The total (approximate) amount of time to process a statistics-enable request is calculated as shown below:

total_time = (num_of_stats / count_per_pass) * delay_per_pass

where num_of_stats is the sum of all statistics for this switch

(conns * conn stats + lines * line stats + ...)

count_per_pass is described above

delay_per_pass is described above

Using an example of a switch with 1000 connections (10 statistics per connection), three trunks (10 statistics per trunk), 10 ports (10 statistics per port), and the default settings (count = 1000, delay = 2000 msec) yields the following:

total_time = ([(1000 * 10) + (3 * 10) + (10 * 10)] / 1000 * 2000

= (10130 / 1000) * 2000

= 11 * 2000

= 22000 msec

= 22 seconds

2000
(where delay is between 50 and 60000 ms)

40

Enable Degraded Mode

Enables or disables the rebuild-prevention feature on the node. Enabling this parameter causes a graceful switchover of the active controller card without having to do a rebuild. User connections and user traffic are maintained even when bugs or system overload would cause repeated aborts. Remaining updates are completed as fast as possible without affecting existing connections.

If this parameter is disabled and an abort occurs during the update of the standby processor, the node rebuilds. On the BPX, the active/standby/fail lights on the active card flash at the same time indicating the node is in degraded mode.

No (disabled)

41

Trk Cell Rtng Restrict

Specifies whether connections can be routed using cell-based trunks only. The Trk Cell Rtng Restrict parameter lets you specify a default for an option to the addcon command; that is, you can specify what the addcon parameter "Trunk cell routing restricted" prompts the user as a default, for example: "Trunk cell routing restricted? y/n [y]" or "Trunk cell routing restricted? y/n [n]". If "n" is specified, then FastPacket-based routing is used.

Yes/No

42

Enable Feeder Alert

When degraded mode is entered, this parameter is set to yes, then a message is sent to the MGX 8220 interface shelves to update the nodes' status so that connections will not fail. This parameter works in conjunction with degraded mode parameters (for example, Auto Switch on Degrade).

If Enable Feeder Alert is disabled (the default) or, due to network congestion, the messages cannot be exchanged between the hub and the feeder to disable LMI, manual intervention can still be achieved by using the addfdrlp and delfdrlp commands on the BPX. (Note that addfdrlp and delfdrlp commands are service-level commands and can be used only by Cisco personnel.)

[No is default] Yes/No

43

Reroute on Comm Failure

Default value is False. If there is communication failure, the node will not send the topology update message to the other nodes. If the value is set to True, the node will send out a line change message and the remote nodes (master/slave) will deroute/condition the connections.

You would sometimes use this parameter in conjunction with the A-bit Notifications on LMI/ILMI Interface feature (which you enable with the cnfnodeparm SuperUser command). For information about the A-bit Notifications feature, see the <CommandItalic>Cisco WAN Switch Command Reference.

True/False

44

Auto Switch on Degrade

When degraded mode is entered, the standby card is updated and ready. If the default is enabled (yes) then the card switchover happens automatically. If this parameter is set to yes, when degraded mode is entered, then the standby card is ready, and the card switchover happens automatically.

[Yes is default] Yes/No

45

Max Degraded Aborts

Use this parameter to determine the maximum frequency with which degraded mode aborts can occur before some other action is taken. In other words, they will be used to threshold degraded mode aborts. Another action could be a full rebuild, or it could be entering degraded mode. The allowable configurable range is shown in the Default column to the right.

For example, using the default values of 100 for Max Hitless Rebuild Count, and 1000 hours Hitless Counter Reset Time, a maximum of 100 hitless rebuilds can occur within a 1000 hour period before it is determined that degraded mode should be entered. For each hitless rebuild that occurs, if 1000 hours pass without the maximum hitless rebuild count having been exceeded, then that hitless rebuild will have aged beyond the point where it is still considered for thresholding purposes.

100 is default

(range is
0-100
or 255 (infinite)

46

Max Hitless Rebuild Count

Use this parameter to determine the maximum frequency with which hitless rebuilds can occur before some other action is taken. In other words, they will be used to threshold hitless rebuilds. Another action could be a full rebuild, or it could be entering degraded mode. The allowable configurable range is shown in the Default column to the right.

For example, using the default values of 100 for Max Hitless Rebuild Count, 1000 hours Hitless Counter Reset Time, a maximum of 100 hitless rebuilds can occur within a 1000 hour period before it is determined that degraded mode should be entered. For each hitless rebuild that occurs, if 1000 hours pass without the maximum hitless rebuild count having been exceeded, then that hitless rebuild will have aged beyond the point where it is still considered for thresholding purposes.

If the maximum hitless rebuild counts is set to "255" for "infinite," then an unlimited number of hitless rebuilds can occur without the thresholding mechanism triggering a full rebuild or a change to degraded mode. In this case, the configurable hitless counter reset time will be ignored, no full rebuilds will be automatically performed. This allows you to determine when the best time is to manually perform a full rebuild, probably during a period of low traffic.

At the other extreme, if the maximum hitless rebuild is set to zero, then no hitless rebuilds will be attempted. This disables the feature.

When the configurable parameters Max Hitless Rebuild Count and Hitless Counter Reset Time are reconfigured, then the statistical counters for hitless rebuilds will be reset. The Max Hitless Rebuild Count and Hitless Counter Reset Time are stored in BRAM.

100

(range is
0-100
or 255 (infinite)

47

Hitless Counter Reset Time

Use this parameter to determine the maximum frequency with which hitless rebuilds may occur before some other action is taken. In other words, they will be used to threshold hitless rebuilds. Some other action could be a full rebuild, or it could be entering degraded mode. The allowable configurable range is shown in the Default column to the right.

For example, using the default values of 100 for Max Hitless Rebuild Count, 1000 hours Hitless Counter Reset Time, a maximum of 100 hitless rebuilds may occur within a 1000 hour period before it is determined that degraded mode should be entered. For each hitless rebuild that occurs, if 1000 hours pass without the maximum hitless rebuild count having been exceeded, then that hitless rebuild will have aged beyond the point where it is still considered for thresholding purposes.

1000 hours

(range is 1-1000)

48

Send A-bit Early

Specifies whether A-bit is sent on deroute. The default is set to no initially. If you issue this command again, the prompt then shows the previously provisioned value.

Use the Send A-bit Early parameter (option 48) to enable or disable the A-bit Notifications feature. (The default is N which means the A-bit Notifications feature is disabled.) If the Send A-bit Early parameter is set to N, then the settings for parameter 49 (A-bit Timer Multiplier M) and parameter 50 (A-bit Timer Granularity N) are ignored and have no effect.

After you enable the Send A-bit Early parameter by setting it to yes, you can set the A-bit Timer Granularity N and A-bit Timer Multiplier M parameters.

The Send A-bit Early parameter works in conjunction with the A-bit Timer Multiplier M and A-bit Timer Granularity N parameters. You must set the Send A-bit Early parameter to yes to enable it, then you can set the A-bit Timer Multiplier M and A-bit Timer Granularity N parameters.

Note that a pre-Release 9.1.07 node or Release 9.1.07 node with the Release 9.1.07 cnfnodeparm Send A-bit immediately parameter turned off behaves the same way as a Release 9.2 node with the Early A-bit Notifications on ILMI/LMI Interface using Configurable Timer feature disabled. A 9.1.07 node with the cnfnodeparm Send A-bit immediately parameter turned on behaves the same as a Release 9.2 node with the Send A-bit Early (option 48 in cnfnodeparm) set to yes and the A-bit Timer Multiplier M (option 49 in cnfnodeparm) set to 0.

The different A-bit behavior in Release 9.2 is completely local to the node and is applicable to the master and slave ends of connections when the connections are derouted. When only one of the nodes connected by a connection has the Send A-bit Early enabled (set to Y), the timing in which that the A-bit notification feature is sent at one end of the connection may be drastically different from the other end of the connection. Thus, it is recommended that the Send A-bit Early parameter be configured the same on all nodes.

For more information on the Send A-bit Notification on ILMI/LMI using Configurable Timer feature, refer to the BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration manual.

[N is default] (Y/N)

49

A-bit Timer Multiplier M

The A-bit Timer Multiplier M and A-bit Timer Granularity N parameters are used in conjunction with the Send A-bit Early parameter. You must set the Send A-bit Early parameter to yes to enable it, then you can set A-bit Timer Multiplier M and A-bit Timer Granularity N parameters.

You can set the A-bit Timer Multiplier M option from 0 to 100. The default value is 0. When you execute the cnfnodeparm command, the prompt shows the previously configured value, or the default value if no upgrade or no configuration on these values was done previously.

A value X is the time to wait before A-bit = 0 is sent out if the connection is in a derouted state. A connection derouted at a time period between 0 and N will send out A-bit = 0 at a time between X and X + N, if the connection continues to be in a derouted state. In cases where there are many A-bit status changes to report to the CPE, the last A-bit updates may be delayed much longer because A-bit updates process about 47 connections per second. To make a compromise between performance and the granularity of timers, A-bit Timer Multiplier N can be configured to be from 3 to 255 seconds. The bigger the value of N, the better the system performance will be.

The value of X is M * N (A-bit Timer Multiplier M * A-bit Timer Granularity N values). To compromise between performance and the granularity of timers, N can be configured to be from 3 to 255 seconds; the bigger the value of N, the better the system performance will be. The value of X (M * N) is set such that M can be configured to be from 0 to 100. The default value for N is 3 seconds. The default value for M is 0, meaning A-bit = 0 sent out on deroute.

It is recommended that the value of X (value of A-bit Timer Multiplier M * value of A-bit Timer Granularity N) be set such that when a trunk fails, the connections are given sufficient time to reroute successfully, avoiding the need to send out A-bit = 0.

If the value of X is set to be smaller than the normal time to reroute connections when a trunk fails, the time to complete rerouting them may take longer. This can happen for line cards and feeder trunks that have LMI/ILMI protocol runs on those cards, such as BXM on BPX and Frame Relay cards on IGX. Note that it takes time for those cards to process A-bit status information for each connection coming from controller card through CommBus messages.

Note that a pre-Release 9.1.07 node or a 9.1.07 node with the Send A-bit Early parameter turned off behaves the same way as a Release 9.2 node with the Release 9.2 Early A-bit Notifications feature disabled. A 9.1.07 node with the Send A-bit Early parameter turned on behaves the same way as a Release 9.2 node with the Send A-bit Early parameter set to on, and the A-bit Timer Multiplier M parameter set to 0.

To follow the general Release 9.2 interoperability, it is recommended that the A-bit Notifications feature not be used when the standby control processor is in a locked state.

[Default is 0]

(D)

50

A-bit Timer Granularity N

You can set the A-bit Timer Granularity N option from 3 to
255 seconds. The default value is 3 seconds. You use the A-bit Timer Granularity N and A-bit Timer Multiplier M parameters in conjunction with the Send A-bit Early parameter to configure the Early A-bit Notifications on LMI/ILMI Interface using Configurable Timer feature in Release 9.2 and beyond. (The Send A-bit Early parameter must be enabled before you can set the A-bit Timer Multiplier M and A-bit Timer Granularity N parameters.)

The Early A-bit Notifications feature lets the user specify the timer interval to wait before A-bit = 0 is sent out if a connection fails to reroute and is in the derouted state too long. No precise timer is kept for each connection. Instead, all connections derouted during a certain time period go to the same bucket. This time period is N, which defines the granularity of the timers, and is specified by the A-bit Timer Granularity N parameter. Also, the value X is the time to wait before A-bit = 0 is sent out if the connection is in a derouted state. A connection that is derouted at a time period between 0 and N will send out A-bit = 0 at a time between X and X + N if the connection continues to be in a derouted state. In cases where there are many A-bit status changes to report to the CPE, the last A-bit updates may be delayed much longer because A-bit updates process about 47 connections per second.

To compromise between performance and the granularity of timers, you can configure the N value (A-bit Timer Granularity N) to be from 3 to 255 seconds. The bigger the value of N, the better the system performance will be. The value of X should be M * N, where M can be configured to be from 0 to 100. The default value for N (specified by the A-bit Timer Multiplier N parameter) is 3 seconds. The default value for M is 0, meaning that A-bit = 0 is sent out on deroute. It is recommended that the value of X (A-bit Timer Multiplier M value * A-bit Timer Granularity N value) be set such that when a trunk fails, the connections are given sufficient time to reroute successfully, avoiding the need to send out A-bit = 0.

[Default is 3 seconds]

51

FBTC with PPD Policing

If you have installed a BXM card with the Routing Control Monitoring and Policing (RCMP) chip, which supports PPD on policing, you may enable this feature by setting this parameter to Y. Older BXM cards do not support PPD on policing.

After enabling this parameter, a warning appears: "Warning: Must switchyred or reset PPDPolic BXM line cards after change." Note that these operations are not supported in remote NMS stations.

Next you must choose one of two options by entering either Y or N:

Y = BXM FBTC on thresholds and PPD policing. This option is supported only on BXM cards with the new version of the RCMP chip that provides this functionality.

N = BXM FBTC on thresholds. Provides FBTC on CLP thresholds only.

Although it is not recommended to use both an older BXM card and a BXM card that supports PPD on policing on a Y-redundant pair, you can do so. The severity of the feature mismatch is minor because FBTC can still function based on the CLP thresholds on the BXM card that does not support PPD on policing. This parameter is a one-time installation task; it should not be frequently changed.

[N is default]

(Y/N)

52

CommBrk Hop Weight

In order to do concentric Comm Break clearing, nodes are ordered by hop count as well as by the time they have been waiting for the Comm Break test. This ensures that the running of route op if no topology change was detected does not change the order of testing. Also, distant nodes are guaranteed to be tested after a finite time regardless of how many nodes go in and out of Comm Break.

The function used is:

h * w - s

Where h is the number of hops a node is away, s is the number of second since it is in Comm Break (and not in path fail), w is the Comm Brk Hop Weight.

[ 25 is the default] (D)

53

CB Fail Penalty Hops

A node that fails a Comm Break test is entered into the list mentioned in the previous description of Comm Brk Hop Weight, plus a penalty. The penalty is at least p * w, where p (by default 2) is configurable as the CB Fail Penalty Hops parameter. This means the node gets another chance after p rings have been tested. In the old way the node did not get another chance after all nodes had been tested.

[ 2 is the default] (D)

54

Auto BXM Upgrade

Used for legacy BXM to BXM-E upgrades. If the parameter is set to Y, SWSW upgrades the logical database as soon as both legacy BXMs are replaced by BXM-Es in yred case, or the active legacy BXM is replaced by a BXM-E in non-yred case. Set this parameter to N if you want to manually upgrade. Refer to the BPX 8600 Installation and Configuration Guide, 9.3.0 Release, for upgrade scenarios and procedures.

[ Y default is yes] (Y/N)

55

LCN reprgrm batch cnt

Specifies the number of LCN(s) to be reprogrammed in a batch before giving up CPU. This is typically used for dynamic partitioning.

[100 is the default] (D)

56

Download LAN IP or Network IP Address

Specifies whether to use the configured LAN IP or Network IP address as the Management IP Address to be used for ILMI Neighbor Discovery procedure.

[Nw is default] (Lan/Nw)


* Enter value in either decimal (D) or hexadecimal (H).

Parameters (IGX)

Index Parameter Description Default

1

Update Initial Delay (sec.)

Specifies a factor for generating a delay before conditional updates are transmitted to the network after a controller card switchover. The Update Initial Delay is multiplied by the number of nodes in the network.

5000 (D)

2

Update Per-Node Delay (ms.)

Specifies the delay between transmission of conditional updates to the nodes.

30000 (D)

3

Comm. Break Test Delay (ms.)

Normal interval between tests for communication break on any node.

30000 (D)

4

Comm. Break Test Offset

Factor between number of communication test failures and test successes to declare a node in communication break condition.

10 (D)

5

Network Time-out Period

Number of milliseconds to wait for a response to a communication test transmission before declaring a failure. The maximum is four failures.

1700 (D)

6

Network Inter-p Period

In inter-domain connections, Network Inter-p Period is the number of milliseconds to wait for a response to a communication test transmission before declaring a failure. The maximum is four failures.

4000 (D)

7

Network Sliding Window Size

Controls the number of control card messages that the node can simultaneously transmit to the network. This parameter defines the number of "no acknowledgments outstanding" on a controller before NACKS is declared.

1 (D)

8

Number of Normal Time-outs

For intra-domain connections: Number of Normal Time-outs is the maximum number of normal network retransmissions before the node signals a communication break.

7 (D)

9

Number of Inter-p Time-outs

For inter-domain connections: Number of Inter-p Time-outs is the maximum number of normal network retransmissions before the node signals a communication break.

3 (D)

10

Number of Satellite Time-outs

Maximum number of satellite network retransmissions before the node signals a communication break.

6 (D)

11

Number of Blind Time-outs

Maximum number of communication fail time-outs and retransmissions performed when using the blind channel. "Blind" refers to the message being sent across the trunk without knowing what node is on the other end of the trunk. The Comm Fail test uses this blind channel, however, the Comm Fail application has a non-configurable limit of three comm failures before declaring Comm Fail. For example, the network handler task will attempt to deliver the Comm Fail request message four times before reporting a failure back to the Comm Fail application, which will retry twice more (each with four retries on the blind channel) before declaring Comm Fail.

The Number of Blind Time-outs parameter is the number of communication fail time-outs and retransmissions performed when using the blind channel.

4 (D)

12

Number of CB Msg Timeouts

Number of communication break time-outs and retransmissions before the node declares a communication break condition (CB). One successful acknowledgment clears the CB condition.

2 (D)

13

Comm. Fail Interval (ms.)

Minimum time allocated for communication fail testing of all trunks terminating on the local node.

10,000 (D)

14

Comm. Fail Multiplier

Number of Comm. Fail Intervals to skip for good lines.

3 (D)

15

Temperature
Threshold (ºC.)

Temperature in the enclosure that causes an over-temperature alarm to go to the controller card.

50 (D)

16

Redundancy Configured

A y indicates a redundant controller card is required. The absence of a redundant controller card generates an alarm.

Y

17

MT3 Pass Through Delay

The parameter is OBSOLETE.

18

Network Packet TX Rate

Rate for transmitting control card packets to the network. The range is a series of discreet values: 100 200 333 500 1000 1100 1200 1333 1500 2000. The units of measure are packets per second (pps). The purpose of this parameter is to prevent the control card from flooding the trunk with packets.

500 pps

19

TFTP Memory (x 10 KB)

Specifies the amount of controller memory to allocate for statistics collection.

76 (D)

20

Standby Update Timer

Specifies how often to send update messages to standby controller.

10 (D)

21

Stby Updts Per Pass

Number of messages that can be sent to the standby card for each update interval.

30 (D)

22

Gateway ID Timer

An inter-domain rerouting timer. How often to look for junction nodes for new route.

30 (D)

23

GLCON Alloc Timer

Another inter-domain rerouting timer controlling the gateway LCON function.

30 (D)

24

Comm Fail Delay

Number of seconds before starting to detect communication failures after a controller switch over.

60 (D)

25

Nw Hdlr Timer (msec)

Network handler timer determines how long to wait to send messages to or receive messages from a remote node.

50 (D)

26

CBUS Delay

Specifies the minimum number of milliseconds the NPM must wait before it places the next command on the CBUS.

20 (D)

27

SNMP Event Logging

Enables maintenance logging of global SNMP messages. These SNMP events are not errors but any GET, SET, and so on. Output goes to a printer connected to the node's auxiliary port or a terminal server (accessible via Telnet). Without a connected output device, the parameter is meaningless.

y=yes

28

TFTP Grant Delay (sec)

The number of seconds the node waits before resending a TFTP request after a TFTP error has occurred. This field is display-only; you set the value in Cisco WAN Manager.

1

29

TFTTP ACK Time-out (sec)

The number of seconds the node waits for an acknowledgment of a TFTP request before it declares the request as timed out. This field is display-only; you set the value in Cisco WAN Manager.

10

30

TFTP Write Retires

The number of times the node retries a TFTP operation (not just writes) after a failed attempt. This field is display-only: you set the value in Cisco WAN Manager.

3

31

FRP/FRM Link Status Alarm

Determines whether a signaling failure on an FRP or FRM port causes a major alarm. This parameter applies to any port configured as an NNI.

y=yes

32

Job Lock Time-out

The range is 1-1000 seconds. The default of 0 disables this parameter.

0

33

Max Via LCONs

The maximum number of "via" connections a node can support. (A via connection does not terminate on the node but merely passes through.) This maximum is configurable, but you cannot lower the number below the current limit on the node. The default is the current maximum and should remain unchanged for normal operating conditions.

On an IGX node: 20000

On a BPX node: 50000

34

Max Blind Segment Size

The maximum size of each segment of a blind message. (The full message may be longer than the segment, especially in a large network.) A blind message is a message the local node sends to the far end node when you execute addtrk. If the trunk has many errors, smaller message segments increase the possibility of a successful addtrk. Under normal conditions, this parameter should remain the default.

3570

35

Max XmtMemBlks Per NIB

Maximum number of memory blocks available for messages that are awaiting transmission. Under normal conditions, this parameter should remain the default.

3000

36

Max Mem Stby Update Q Size

Maximum number of update messages that can reside in queues awaiting transmission to the standby processor. This percentage is used to determine when to flush the standby message queue when the percentage is reached. Only rare circumstances could provide a reason to change this parameter, so do not change it without first consulting the TAC.

5000

37

Trk Cell Rtng Restrict

Specifies whether or not trunks on a UXM on an IGX node can route only cell traffic. The Trk Cell Rtng Restrict parameter lets you specify a default for an option to the addcon command; that is, you can specify what the addcon parameter "Trunk cell routing restricted" prompts the user as a default, for example: "Trunk cell routing restricted? y/n [y]" or "Trunk cell routing restricted? y/n [n]." If "n" is specified, then FastPacket-based routing is used.

When adding or configuring ATM connections, this prompt will display for all connections (for example, CBR, ABR, UBR, and so on) except for real-time VBR (rt-VBR) connections because rt-VBR connections should not be routed over FastPacket trunks.

Yes/No

38

Stat Config Proc Cnt

Stat Config Proc Cnt is the number of statistics that will be enabled before pausing and allowing other processes to run. The default value of 1000 specifies that 1000 statistics should be enabled. But the count is checked only once for every object, so if the number of objects exceeds the count there will be one statistic enabled for each object.

For example, if there are 1000 connections and the default count is set, one statistic will be enabled for each connection before pausing. If there are 2000 connections, one statistic will be enabled for each connection, then the number of statistics enabled (2000) will be compared to the count (1000). Since the number enabled exceeds the count, the enabling of statistics will pause.

1000 (where count is between 1 and 100000)

39

Stat Config Proc Delay

Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds (ms) that statistics processing pauses between enabling passes. On a heavily loaded switch, you may increase this number to reduce the load when enabling statistics, but the enabling process takes longer.

The total (approximate) amount of time to process a statistics-enable request is calculated as shown below:

total_time = (num_of_stats / count_per_pass) * delay_per_pass

where num_of_stats is the sum of all statistics for this switch

(conns * conn stats + lines * line stats + ...)

count_per_pass is described above

delay_per_pass is described above

Using an example of a switch with 1000 connections (10 statistics per connection), three trunks (10 statistics per trunk), 10 ports (10 statistics per port), and the default settings (count = 1000, delay = 2000 msec) yields the following:

total_time = ([(1000 * 10) + (3 * 10) + (10 * 10)] / 1000 * 2000

= (10130 / 1000) * 2000

= 11 * 2000

= 22000 msec

= 22 seconds

2000
(where delay is between 50 and 60000 ms)

40

Enable Degraded Mode

Enables or disables the rebuild-prevention feature on the node. Enabling this parameter causes a graceful switchover of the active controller card without having to do a rebuild. User connections and user traffic are maintained even when bugs or system overload would cause repeated aborts. Remaining updates are completed as fast as possible without affecting existing connections.

If this parameter is disabled and an abort occurs during the update of the standby processor, the node rebuilds. Note that on the IGX, the active/standby/fail lights on the active card do not flash (as they do on the BPX node to indicate that the node is in degraded mode).

If enabled, an abort condition will transition the node into degraded mode rather than rebuilding the node. You can disable this parameter (it is enabled by default) so that an abort will result in a rebuild. After degraded has been entered, a minimal set of functionality is available. (See the "High Priority Login" section for more information.) Disabled functions include provisioning and routing, network communications, event logging, and LAN access. However, connections continue to pass traffic. Once in degraded mode, a configurable parameter indicates whether to switch to the standby once it's ready.

If Enable Degraded Mode is enabled (Y), an abort condition will transition the node into degraded mode rather than rebuilding the node. You can disable this parameter so that an abort will result in a node rebuild.

Y (enabled)

41

Enable Feeder Alert

When degraded mode is entered, this parameter is set to yes, then a message is sent to the MGX 8220 interface shelves to update the nodes' status so that connections will not fail. This parameter works in conjunction with degraded mode parameters (for example, Auto Switch on Degrade).

If Enable Feeder Alert is disabled (the default) or, due to network congestion, the messages cannot be exchanged between the hub and the feeder to disable LMI, manual intervention can still be achieved by using the addfdrlp and delfdrlp commands on the BPX. (Note that addfdrlp and delfdrlp commands are service-level commands and can be used only by Cisco personnel.)

[No is default] Yes/No

42

Trk Cell Rtng Restrict

Specifies whether connections can be routed using cell-based trunks only. The Trk Cell Rtng Restrict parameter lets you specify a default for an option to the addcon command; that is, you can specify what the addcon parameter "Trunk cell routing restricted" prompts the user as a default, for example: "Trunk cell routing restricted? y/n [y]" or "Trunk cell routing restricted? y/n [n]". If "n" is specified, then FastPacket-based routing is used.

Yes/No

43

Enable Reroute on Comm Fail

Default value is False. If there is communication failure, the node will not send the topology update message to the other nodes. If the value is set to True, the node will send out a line change message and the remote nodes (master/slave) will deroute/condition the connections. You would sometimes use this parameter in conjunction with the A-bit Notifications on LMI/ILMI Interface feature (which you enable with the cnfnodeparm SuperUser command). See the A-bit Notifications feature description in the Cisco WAN Switching Command Reference.

[ F] (T/F)

44

Auto Switch on Degrade

When degraded mode is entered, the standby card is updated and ready. If the default is enabled (yes) then the card switchover happens automatically. If this parameter is set to yes, when degraded mode is entered, then the standby card is ready, and the card switchover happens automatically.

After a node has entered degraded mode (see Enable Degraded Mode parameter), this parameter indicates whether to switch to the standby card once it is ready. The default setting is to enable switching. You can set this parameter to disable switching if you want to allow further time to diagnose the problem rather than switching to the other processor, or to stop switching due to repeated aborts.

[Yes is default] Yes/No

45

Max Degraded Aborts

Use this parameter to determine the maximum frequency with which degraded mode aborts can occur before some other action is taken. In other words, they will be used to threshold degraded mode aborts. Another action could be a full rebuild, or it could be entering degraded mode. The allowable configurable range is shown in the Default column to the right.

This parameter indicates the maximum number of aborts while in the degraded state. In the case where the processor continues to reset while in degraded mode, each reset will result in the processor staying in degraded mode unless this threshold has been reached, in which case the next reset will cause a full rebuild of the node. The desired result is to avoid infinite aborts while in degraded mode, which would essentially lock the node indefinitely.

You can set Max Degraded Aborts to its maximum value (255) to indicate that the processor will be allowed to abort indefinitely without going through a full rebuild. This approach can be used to avoid a full rebuild (which will impact the user plane) until an appropriate time is reached when it may be reset or replaced.

100 is default
(range is
0-100
or 255 (infinite)

46

Max Hitless Rebuild Count

Use this parameter to determine the maximum frequency with which hitless rebuilds can occur before some other action is taken. In other words, they will be used to threshold hitless rebuilds. Another action could be a full rebuild, or it could be entering degraded mode. The allowable configurable range is shown in the Default column to the right.

For example, using the default values of 100 for Max Hitless Rebuild Count and 1000 hours Hitless Counter Reset Time, a maximum of 100 hitless rebuilds can occur within a 1000 hour period before it is determined that degraded mode should be entered. For each hitless rebuild that occurs, if 1000 hours pass without the maximum hitless rebuild count having been exceeded, then that hitless rebuild will have aged beyond the point where it is still considered for thresholding purposes.

If the maximum hitless rebuild count is set to "255" for "infinite," then an unlimited number of hitless rebuilds can occur without the thresholding mechanism triggering a full rebuild or a change to degraded mode. In this case, the configurable hitless counter reset time will be ignored, no full rebuilds will be automatically performed. This allows you to determine when the best time is to manually perform a full rebuild, probably during a period of low traffic.

At the other extreme, if the maximum hitless rebuild is set to zero, then no hitless rebuilds will be attempted. This disables the feature.

When the configurable parameters Max Hitless Rebuild Count and Hitless Counter Reset Time are reconfigured, then the statistical counters for hitless rebuilds will be reset. The Max Hitless Rebuild Count and Hitless Counter Reset Time are stored in BRAM.

100
(range is
0-100
or 255 (infinite)

47

Hitless Counter Reset Time

Use this parameter to determine the maximum frequency with which hitless rebuilds can occur before some other action is taken. In other words, they will be used to threshold hitless rebuilds. Another action could be a full rebuild, or it could be entering degraded mode. The allowable configurable range is shown in the Default column to the right.

For example, using the default values of 100 for Max Hitless Rebuild Count and 1000 hours Hitless Counter Reset Time, a maximum of 100 hitless rebuilds can occur within a 1000 hour period before it is determined that degraded mode should be entered. For each hitless rebuild that occurs, if 1000 hours pass without the maximum hitless rebuild count having been exceeded, then that hitless rebuild will have aged beyond the point where it is still considered for thresholding purposes.

If the maximum hitless rebuild count is set to "255" for "infinite", then an unlimited number of hitless rebuilds can occur without the thresholding mechanism triggering a full rebuild or a change to degraded mode. In this case, the configurable hitless counter reset time will be ignored, no full rebuilds will be automatically performed. This allows you to determine when the best time is to manually perform a full rebuild, probably during a period of low traffic.

At the other extreme, if the maximum hitless rebuild is set to zero, then no hitless rebuilds will be attempted. This disables the feature.

When the configurable parameters Max Hitless Rebuild Count and Hitless Counter Reset Time are reconfigured, then the statistical counters for hitless rebuilds will be reset. The Max Hitless Rebuild Count and Hitless Counter Reset Time are new in Release 9.2, and will be stored in BRAM.

1000 hours
(range is 1-1000)

48

Send A-bit Early

Specifies whether A-bit is sent on deroute. The default is set to no initially. If you issue this command again, the prompt then shows the previously provisioned value.

Use the Send A-bit Early parameter (option 48) to enable or disable the A-bit Notifications feature. (The default is N, which means the A-bit Notifications feature is disabled.) If the Send A-bit Early parameter is set to N, then the settings for parameter 49 (A-bit Timer Multiplier M) and parameter 50 (A-bit Timer Granularity N) are ignored and have no effect.

After you enable the Send A-bit Early parameter by setting it to yes, you can set the A-bit Timer Granularity N and A-bit Timer Multiplier M parameters.

The Send A-bit Early parameter works on conjunction with the A-bit Timer Multiplier M and A-bit Timer Granularity N parameters. You must set the Send A-bit Early parameter to yes to enable it, then you can set the A-bit Timer Multiplier M and A-bit Timer Granularity N parameters.

The different A-bit behavior in Release 9.2 and higher is completely local to the node and is applicable to the master and slave ends of connections when the connections are derouted. When only one of the nodes connected by a connection has the Send A-bit Early enabled (set to Y), the timing in which that the A-bit notification feature is sent at one end of the connection may be drastically different from the other end of the connection. Thus, it is recommended that the Send A-bit Early parameter be configured the same on all nodes.

For more information on the Send A-bit Notification on ILMI/LMI using Configurable Timer feature, refer to the BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration Manual.

[N is default] (Y/N)

49

A-bit Timer Multiplier M

The A-bit Timer Multiplier M and A-bit Timer Granularity N parameters are used in conjunction with the Send A-bit Early parameter. You must set the Send A-bit Early parameter to yes to enable it, then you can set A-bit Timer Multiplier M and A-bit Timer Granularity N parameters.

You can set the A-bit Timer Multiplier M option from 0 to 100. The default value is 0. When you execute the cnfnodeparm command, the prompt shows the previously configured value, or the default value if no upgrade or no configuration on these values was done previously.

A value X is the time to wait before A-bit = 0 is sent out if the connection is in a derouted state. A connection derouted at a time period between 0 and N will send out A-bit = 0 at a time between X and X + N, if the connection continues to be in a derouted state. In cases where there are many A-bit status changes to report to the CPE, the last A-bit updates may be delayed much longer because A-bit updates process about 47 connections per second. To make a compromise between performance and the granularity of timers, A-bit Timer Multiplier N can be configured to be from 3 to 255 seconds. The bigger the value of N, the better the system performance will be.

The value of X is M * N (A-bit Timer Multiplier M * A-bit Timer Granularity N values). To compromise between performance and the granularity of timers, N can be configured to be from 3 to
255 seconds; the bigger the value of N, the better the system performance will be. The value of X (M * N) is set such that M can be configured to be from 0 to 100. The default value for N is 3 seconds. The default value for M is 0, meaning A-bit = 0 sent out on deroute.

It is recommended that the value of X (value of A-bit Timer Multiplier M * value of A-bit Timer Granularity N) be set such that when a trunk fails, the connections are given sufficient time to reroute successfully, avoiding the need to send out A-bit = 0.

If the value of X is set to be smaller than the normal time to reroute connections when a trunk fails, the time to complete rerouting them may take longer. This can happen for line cards and feeder trunks that have LMI/ILMI protocol runs on those cards, such as BXM on BPX and Frame Relay cards on IGX. Note that it takes time for those cards to process A-bit status information for each connection coming from controller card through Comm Bus messages.

To follow the general Release 9.2 interoperability, it is recommended that the A-bit Notifications feature not be used when the standby control processor is in a locked state.

[Default is 0]

(D)

50

A-bit Timer Granularity N

You can set the A-bit Timer Granularity N option from 3 to
255 seconds. The default value is 3 seconds. You use the A-bit Timer Granularity N and A-bit Timer Multiplier M parameters in conjunction with the Send A-bit Early parameter to configure the Early A-bit Notifications on LMI/ILMI Interface using Configurable Timer feature in Release 9.2 and beyond. (The Send A-bit Early parameter must be enabled before you can set the A-bit Timer Multiplier M and A-bit Timer Granularity N parameters.)

The Early A-bit Notifications feature lets the user specify the timer interval to wait before A-bit = 0 is sent out if a connection fails to reroute and is in the derouted state too long. No precise timer is kept for each connection. Instead, all connections derouted during a certain time period go to the same bucket. This time period is N, which defines the granularity of the timers, and is specified by the A-bit Timer Granularity N parameter. Also, the value X is the time to wait before A-bit = 0 is sent out if the connection is in a derouted state. A connection that is derouted at a time period between 0 and N will send out A-bit = 0 at a time between X and X + N if the connection continues to be in a derouted state. In cases where there are many A-bit status changes to report to the CPE, the last A-bit updates may be delayed much longer because A-bit updates process about 47 connections per second.

To compromise between performance and the granularity of timers, you can configure the N value (A-bit Timer Granularity N) to be from 3 to 255 seconds. The bigger the value of N, the better the system performance will be. The value of X should be M * N, where M can be configured to be from 0 to 100. The default value for N (specified by the A-bit Timer Multiplier N parameter) is 3 seconds. The default value for M is 0, meaning that A-bit = 0 is sent out on deroute. It is recommended that the value of X (A-bit Timer Multiplier M value * A-bit Timer Granularity N value) be set such that when a trunk fails, the connections are given sufficient time to reroute successfully, avoiding the need to send out A-bit = 0.

[Default is 3 seconds]

51

CommBrk Hop Weight

In order to do concentric Comm Break clearing, nodes are ordered by hop count as well as by the time they have been waiting for the Comm Break test. This ensures that the running of route op if no topology change was detected does not change the order of testing. Also, distant nodes are guaranteed to be tested after a finite time regardless of how many nodes go in and out of Comm Break.

The function used is:

h * w - s

Where h is the number of hops a node is away, s is the number of second since it is in Comm Break (and not in path fail), w is the Comm Brk Hop Weight.

[ 25 is the default] (D)

52

CB Fail Penalty Hops

A node that fails a Comm Break test is entered into the list mentioned in the previous description of Comm Brk Hop Weight, plus a penalty. The penalty is at least p * w, where p (by default 2) is configurable as the CB Fail Penalty Hops parameter. This means the node gets another chance after p rings have been tested. In the old way the node did not get another chance after all nodes had been tested.

[2 is the default] (D)

53

Download LAN IP or Network IP Address

Specifies whether to use the configured LAN IP or Network IP address as the Management IP Address to be used for ILMI Neighbor Discovery procedure.

[Lan is the default] (Lan/Nw)


* Enter value in either decimal (D) or hexadecimal (H).

Example (IGX)

This example demonstrates using parameter 53 for ILMI Neighbor Discovery, showing the available parameters on an UXM (IGX) Node.

bot TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.10 June 7 2000 07:01 GMT 31 FRP Link Status Alarm [ Y] (Y/N) 46 Modem polling timer [ 1] (D) 32 Job Lock Timeout [ 0] (D) 47 Verify CBA for non-FRP [ N] (Y/N) 33 Max Via LCONs [20000] (D) 48 Send A-bit early [ N] (Y/N) 34 Max Blind Segment Size [ 3570] (D) 49 A-bit Tmr Multiplier M [ 0] (D) 35 Max XmtMemBlks per NIB [ 3000] (D) 50 A-bit Tmr Granularity N [ 3] (D) 36 Max Mem on Stby Q (%) [ 33] (D) 51 CommBrk Hop Weight [ 25] (D) 37 Trk Cell Rtng Restrict [ Y] (Y/N) 52 CB Fail Penalty Hops [ 2] (D) 38 Stat Config Proc Cnt [ 1000] (D) 53 Dnld LanIP or NwIP [ Lan](Lan/Nw) 39 Stat Config Proc Delay [ 2000] (D) 40 Enable Degraded Mode [ Y] (Y/N) 41 Enable Rrt on Comm Fail[ N] (Y/N) 42 Auto Switch on Degrade [ Y] (Y/N) 43 Max Degraded Aborts [ 100] (D) 44 Max Htls Rebuild Count [ 100] (D) 45 Htls Counter Reset Time[ 1000] (D) This Command: cnfnodeparm 53 Enter 0 (LanIP) or 1 (NwIP):
Example (BPX)

Select LAN IP or NETW IP on BXM (BPX) Node.

cnfnodeparm 56

sw143 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.10 Aug. 9 2000 16:25 GMT 31 TFTP Write Retries [ 3] (D) 46 Max Htls Rebuild Count [ 100] (D) 32 SNMP Event logging [ Y] (Y/N) 47 Htls Counter Reset Time[1000] (D) 33 Job Lock Timeout [ 60] (D) 48 Send A-bit early [ N] (Y/N) 34 Max Via LCONs [50000] (D) 49 A-bit Tmr Multiplier M [ 0] (D) 35 Max Blind Segment Size [ 3570] (D) 50 A-bit Tmr Granularity N [ 3] (D) 36 Max XmtMemBlks per NIB [ 3000] (D) 51 FBTC with PPDPolicing [ N] (Y/N) 37 Max Mem on Stby Q (%) [ 33] (D) 52 CommBrk Hop Weight [ 25] (D) 38 Stat Config Proc Cnt [ 1000] (D) 53 CB Fail Penalty Hops [ 2] (D) 39 Stat Config Proc Delay [ 2000] (D) 54 Auto BXM upgrade [ Y] (Y/N) 40 Enable Degraded Mode [ Y] (Y/N) 55 LCN reprgrm batch cnt [ 100] (D) 41 Trk Cell Rtng Restrict [ Y] (Y/N) 56 Dnld LanIP or NwIP [ 1](Lan/Nw) 42 Enable Feeder Alert [ N] (Y/N) 43 Reroute on Comm Fail [ N] (Y/N) 44 Auto Switch on Degrade [ Y] (Y/N) 45 Max Degraded Aborts [ 100] (D) This Command: cnfnodeparm 56

cnfnwip (configure network IP address)

Configures an IP address and subnet mask for the node. The network IP address and subnet mask support statistics collection for Cisco WAN Manager. The cnfnwip command defines the IP address the system uses to pass messages between Cisco WAN Manager and the node. The Statistics Master process in Cisco WAN Manager Network collects statistics. The Statistics Manager requests and receives statistics using TFTP Get and Put messages. These TFTP messages pass between the node and the Statistics Master using IP Relay. (See the cnfstatmast description for details on setting the Statistics Master address.)

Syntax

cnfnwip <IPAddr> <IPSubnetMask>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<IPAddr>

IP address of the node: the format is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where nnn can be 1-255

<IPSubnetMask>

subnet mask: the format is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Example
cnfnwip 199.35.96.217 255.255.255.0

where 199.35.96.217 is the IP address, and 255.255.255.0 is the subnet mask.

axiom TN Bootzilla IGX 32 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:25 GMT Active Network IP Address: 169.134.90.106 Active Network IP Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Last Command: cnfnwip 169.134.90.106 255.255.255.0 Next Command:

cnfphyslnstats (configure physical line statistics)

Configures parameters for circuit line statistics collection on a UXM card. This is a debug command that applies to physical lines on a UXM card using Inverse Multiplexing Over ATM (IMA)—a logical trunk or logical line configuration. It primarily applies to debugging and not standard network operation.

Use the cnfphyslnstats command to customize statistics collection on each physical line. To see the statistics available for each type of interface, refer to the actual screens for each interface, as in the subsequent examples.

Since Release 9.2, for virtual trunking, physical line statistics apply to each physical port. In the case of IMA trunks, the physical line statistics are tallied separately for each T1 port.

IMA physical line alarms are a special case. Each IMA trunk or line has a configurable number of retained links. If the number of non-alarmed lines is less than the number of retained links, the logical trunks on the IMA trunk or line are placed into major alarm.

For example, consider IMA virtual trunks 4.5-8.2 and 4.5-8.7, with the number of retained links on 4.5-8 configured to 2. If 4.5 and 4.6 go into LOS (loss of signal), physical line alarms are generated for these two physical lines. The logical trunks 4.5-8.2 do not go into alarm because the two retained links are still healthy. In this situation, the bandwidth on the logical trunks is adjusted downward to prevent cell drops, and the connections on those trunks are rerouted. If a third line goes into alarm, the logical trunks are then failed.

IMA Physical Line Statistics

The cnfphyslnstats command lets you configure the following additional physical line statistics (which support the ATM Forum-compliant Version 1.0 IMA protocol). A summary and description of these statistics follows in Table 3-40.


Table 3-40: cnfphyslnstats IMA Physical Line Statistics
Statistics Object Definition

IV-IMA

ICP Violations: count of errored, invalid or missing ICP cells during non-SES-IMA or non-UAS-IMA conditions.

Near End Severely Errored Seconds (SES-IMA)

Count of one-second intervals containing

30% of the ICP cells counted as IV-IMAs (see note 1), or one or more link defects (e.g., LOS, OOF/LOF, AIS or LCD), LIF, LODS defects during non-UAS-IMA condition.

Far End Severely Errored Seconds (SES-IMA-FE)

Count of one-second intervals containing one or more RDI-IMA defects during non-UAS-IMA-FE condition.

Near End Unavailable Seconds (UAS-IMA)

Unavailable seconds: unavailability begins at the onset of 10 contiguous SES-IMA and ends at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SES-IMA.

Far End Unavailable Seconds (UAS-IMA-FE)

Unavailable seconds at FE: unavailability begins at the onset of 10 contiguous SES-IMA-FE and ends at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SES-IMA-FE.

Near End Tx Unusable Seconds (Tx-UUS-IMA)

Tx Unusable seconds: count of Tx Unusable seconds at the NE LSM.

Near End Rx Unusable Seconds (Rx-UUS-IMA)

Rx Unusable seconds: count of Rx Unusable seconds at the NE LSM.

Far End Tx Unusable Seconds (Tx-UUS-IMA-FE)

Tx Unusable seconds at FE: count of seconds with Tx Unusable indications from the FE LSM.

Far End Rx Unusable Seconds (Rx-UUS-IMA-FE)

Rx Unusable seconds at FE: count of seconds with Rx Unusable indications from the FE LSM.

Near End Tx No. of Failures (Tx-FC)

Count of NE Tx link failure alarm conditions.

Near End Rx No. of Failures (Rx-FC)

Count of NE Rx link failure alarm conditions.

Syntax

cnfphyslnstats <port> <line> <stat> <interval> <e|d> [<samples> <size> <peaks>]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<port>

Specifies the port with the physical line to configure.

<line>

Specifies the physical line to configure.

<stat>

Specifies the type of statistic to enable/disable.

<interval>

Specifies the time interval of each sample.
Range: 1-255 minutes

<e|d>

Enables/disables a statistic. E to enable; D to disable.

[samples]

Specifies the number of samples to collect.
Range: 1-255

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspphyslnstats, dspphyslnstathist

Example (IMA)

cnfphyslnstats 7.1

------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- igxr03 VT Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.2V Jan. 18 2001 14:19 PST Line Statistic Types 1) Bipolar Violations 37) Severely Err Secs - Path 3) Out of Frames 38) Severely Err Frame Secs 4) Losses of Signal 40) Unavail. Seconds 5) Frames Bit Errors 41) BIP-8 Code Violations 6) CRC Errors 42) Cell Framing Errored Seconds 29) Line Code Violations 43) Cell Framing Sev. Err Secs. 30) Line Errored Seconds 44) Cell Framing Sec. Err Frame Secs 31) Line Severely Err Secs 45) Cell Framing Unavail. Secs. 32) Line Parity Errors 62) Total Cells Tx to line 33) Errored Seconds - Line 69) Total Cells Rx from line 34) Severely Err Secs - Line 98) Frame Sync Errors 35) Path Parity Errors 141) FEBE Counts 36) Errored Secs - Path 143) Cell Framing FEBE Err Secs This Command: cnfphyslnstats 7.1 Continue? ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- igxr03 VT Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.2V Jan. 18 2001 14:19 PST Line Statistic Types 144) Cell Framing FEBE Sev. Err. Secs. 202) Section BIP8 Err. Secs. 151) Yellow Alarm Transition Count 203) Line BIP24 Err. Secs. 152) Cell Framing Yel Transitions 204) Line FEBE Err. Secs. 153) AIS Transition Count 205) Path BIP8 Err. Secs. 193) Loss of Cell Delineation 206) Path FEBE Err. Secs. 194) Loss of Pointer 207) Section BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 195) OC3 Path AIS 208) Section Sev. Err. Framing Secs. 196) OC3 Path YEL 209) Line BIP24 Severely Err. Secs. 197) Section BIP8 210) Line FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 198) Line BIP24 211) Path BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 199) Line FEBE 212) Path FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 200) Path BIP8 213) Line Unavailable Secs. 201) Path FEBE 214) Line Farend Unavailable Secs. This Command: cnfphyslnstats 7.1 Continue? ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- igxr03 VT Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.2V Jan. 18 2001 14:20 PST Line Statistic Types 215) Path Unavailable Secs. 228) INVMUX: Tx Failure Count 216) Path Farend Unavailable Secs. 229) INVMUX: Rx Failure Count 217) HCS Uncorrectable Error 218) HCS Correctable Error 219) INVMUX: line violations 220) INVMUX: Severely Err. Secs. 221) INVMUX: Farend Sev. Err. Secs. 222) INVMUX: Unavailable Secs. 223) INVMUX: Farend Unavail Secs. 224) INVMUX: Tx Unusable Seconds 225) INVMUX: Rx Unusable Seconds 226) INVMUX: Farend Tx Unusable Secs. 227) INVMUX: Farend Rx Unusable Secs. This Command: cnfphyslnstats 7.1 Statistic Type:
Example (OC-3)

cnfphyslnstats 14.2

------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2Q Dec. 13 2000 14:31 PST Line Statistic Types 1) Bipolar Violations 37) Severely Err Secs - Path 3) Out of Frames 38) Severely Err Frame Secs 4) Losses of Signal 40) Unavail. Seconds 5) Frames Bit Errors 41) BIP-8 Code Violations 6) CRC Errors 42) Cell Framing Errored Seconds 29) Line Code Violations 43) Cell Framing Sev. Err Secs. 30) Line Errored Seconds 44) Cell Framing Sec. Err Frame Secs 31) Line Severely Err Secs 45) Cell Framing Unavail. Secs. 32) Line Parity Errors 62) Total Cells Tx to line 33) Errored Seconds - Line 69) Total Cells Rx from line 34) Severely Err Secs - Line 98) Frame Sync Errors 35) Path Parity Errors 141) FEBE Counts 36) Errored Secs - Path 143) Cell Framing FEBE Err Secs This Command: cnfphyslnstats 14.2 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2Q Dec. 13 2000 14:31 PST Line Statistic Types 144) Cell Framing FEBE Sev. Err. Secs. 202) Section BIP8 Err. Secs. 151) Yellow Alarm Transition Count 203) Line BIP24 Err. Secs. 152) Cell Framing Yel Transitions 204) Line FEBE Err. Secs. 153) AIS Transition Count 205) Path BIP8 Err. Secs. 193) Loss of Cell Delineation 206) Path FEBE Err. Secs. 194) Loss of Pointer 207) Section BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 195) OC3 Path AIS 208) Section Sev. Err. Framing Secs. 196) OC3 Path YEL 209) Line BIP24 Severely Err. Secs. 197) Section BIP8 210) Line FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 198) Line BIP24 211) Path BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 199) Line FEBE 212) Path FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 200) Path BIP8 213) Line Unavailable Secs. 201) Path FEBE 214) Line Farend Unavailable Secs. This Command: cnfphyslnstats 14.2 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2Q Dec. 13 2000 14:32 PST Line Statistic Types 215) Path Unavailable Secs. 228) INVMUX: Tx Failure Count 216) Path Farend Unavailable Secs. 229) INVMUX: Rx Failure Count 217) HCS Uncorrectable Error 218) HCS Correctable Error 219) INVMUX: line violations 220) INVMUX: Severely Err. Secs. 221) INVMUX: Farend Sev. Err. Secs. 222) INVMUX: Unavailable Secs. 223) INVMUX: Farend Unavail Secs. 224) INVMUX: Tx Unusable Seconds 225) INVMUX: Rx Unusable Seconds 226) INVMUX: Farend Tx Unusable Secs. 227) INVMUX: Farend Rx Unusable Secs. This Command: cnfphyslnstats 14.2 Statistic Type:
Example (UXM T3/636 Trunk)
------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2Q Dec. 13 2000 14:39 PST Line Statistic Types 1) Bipolar Violations 37) Severely Err Secs - Path 3) Out of Frames 38) Severely Err Frame Secs 4) Losses of Signal 40) Unavail. Seconds 5) Frames Bit Errors 41) BIP-8 Code Violations 6) CRC Errors 42) Cell Framing Errored Seconds 29) Line Code Violations 43) Cell Framing Sev. Err Secs. 30) Line Errored Seconds 44) Cell Framing Sec. Err Frame Secs 31) Line Severely Err Secs 45) Cell Framing Unavail. Secs. 32) Line Parity Errors 62) Total Cells Tx to line 33) Errored Seconds - Line 69) Total Cells Rx from line 34) Severely Err Secs - Line 98) Frame Sync Errors 35) Path Parity Errors 141) FEBE Counts 36) Errored Secs - Path 143) Cell Framing FEBE Err Secs This Command: cnfphyslnstats 8.1 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2Q Dec. 13 2000 14:41 PST Line Statistic Types 144) Cell Framing FEBE Sev. Err. Secs. 202) Section BIP8 Err. Secs. 151) Yellow Alarm Transition Count 203) Line BIP24 Err. Secs. 152) Cell Framing Yel Transitions 204) Line FEBE Err. Secs. 153) AIS Transition Count 205) Path BIP8 Err. Secs. 193) Loss of Cell Delineation 206) Path FEBE Err. Secs. 194) Loss of Pointer 207) Section BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 195) OC3 Path AIS 208) Section Sev. Err. Framing Secs. 196) OC3 Path YEL 209) Line BIP24 Severely Err. Secs. 197) Section BIP8 210) Line FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 198) Line BIP24 211) Path BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 199) Line FEBE 212) Path FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 200) Path BIP8 213) Line Unavailable Secs. 201) Path FEBE 214) Line Farend Unavailable Secs. This Command: cnfphyslnstats 8.1 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2Q Dec. 13 2000 14:42 PST Line Statistic Types 215) Path Unavailable Secs. 228) INVMUX: Tx Failure Count 216) Path Farend Unavailable Secs. 229) INVMUX: Rx Failure Count 217) HCS Uncorrectable Error 218) HCS Correctable Error 219) INVMUX: line violations 220) INVMUX: Severely Err. Secs. 221) INVMUX: Farend Sev. Err. Secs. 222) INVMUX: Unavailable Secs. 223) INVMUX: Farend Unavail Secs. 224) INVMUX: Tx Unusable Seconds 225) INVMUX: Rx Unusable Seconds 226) INVMUX: Farend Tx Unusable Secs. 227) INVMUX: Farend Rx Unusable Secs. This Command: cnfphyslnstats 8.1 Statistic Type:
Example (UXM E3/530 Trunk)
------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 07:41 PST Line Statistic Types 3) Out of Frames 42) Cell Framing Errored Seconds 4) Losses of Signal 43) Cell Framing Sev. Err Secs. 5) Frames Bit Errors 44) Cell Framing Sec. Err Frame Secs 6) CRC Errors 45) Cell Framing Unavail. Secs. 29) Line Code Violations 62) Total Cells Tx to line 30) Line Errored Seconds 69) Total Cells Rx from line 31) Line Severely Err Secs 98) Frame Sync Errors 32) Line Parity Errors 143) Cell Framing FEBE Err Secs 33) Errored Seconds - Line 144) Cell Framing FEBE Sev. Err. Secs. 34) Severely Err Secs - Line 151) Yellow Alarm Transition Count 38) Severely Err Frame Secs 152) Cell Framing Yel Transitions 40) Unavail. Seconds 153) AIS Transition Count 41) BIP-8 Code Violations 193) Loss of Cell Delineation This Command: cnfphyslnstats 3.1 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 07:41 PST Line Statistic Types 194) Loss of Pointer 207) Section BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 195) OC3 Path AIS 208) Section Sev. Err. Framing Secs. 196) OC3 Path YEL 209) Line BIP24 Severely Err. Secs. 197) Section BIP8 210) Line FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 198) Line BIP24 211) Path BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 199) Line FEBE 212) Path FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 200) Path BIP8 213) Line Unavailable Secs. 201) Path FEBE 214) Line Farend Unavailable Secs. 202) Section BIP8 Err. Secs. 215) Path Unavailable Secs. 203) Line BIP24 Err. Secs. 216) Path Farend Unavailable Secs. 204) Line FEBE Err. Secs. 217) HCS Uncorrectable Error 205) Path BIP8 Err. Secs. 218) HCS Correctable Error 206) Path FEBE Err. Secs. 219) INVMUX: line violations This Command: cnfphyslnstats 3.1 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 07:42 PST Line Statistic Types 220) INVMUX: Severely Err. Secs. 221) INVMUX: Farend Sev. Err. Secs. 222) INVMUX: Unavailable Secs. 223) INVMUX: Farend Unavail Secs. 224) INVMUX: Tx Unusable Seconds 225) INVMUX: Rx Unusable Seconds 226) INVMUX: Farend Tx Unusable Secs. 227) INVMUX: Farend Rx Unusable Secs. 228) INVMUX: Tx Failure Count 229) INVMUX: Rx Failure Count This Command: cnfphyslnstats 3.1 Statistic Type:
Example (T1)
------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- igxr02 VT Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.2V Jan. 18 2001 13:37 PST Line Statistic Types 1) Bipolar Violations 37) Severely Err Secs - Path 3) Out of Frames 38) Severely Err Frame Secs 4) Losses of Signal 40) Unavail. Seconds 5) Frames Bit Errors 41) BIP-8 Code Violations 6) CRC Errors 42) Cell Framing Errored Seconds 29) Line Code Violations 43) Cell Framing Sev. Err Secs. 30) Line Errored Seconds 44) Cell Framing Sec. Err Frame Secs 31) Line Severely Err Secs 45) Cell Framing Unavail. Secs. 32) Line Parity Errors 62) Total Cells Tx to line 33) Errored Seconds - Line 69) Total Cells Rx from line 34) Severely Err Secs - Line 98) Frame Sync Errors 35) Path Parity Errors 141) FEBE Counts 36) Errored Secs - Path 143) Cell Framing FEBE Err Secs This Command: cnfphyslnstats 31.8 Continue? ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- igxr02 VT Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.2V Jan. 18 2001 13:36 PST Line Statistic Types 144) Cell Framing FEBE Sev. Err. Secs. 202) Section BIP8 Err. Secs. 151) Yellow Alarm Transition Count 203) Line BIP24 Err. Secs. 152) Cell Framing Yel Transitions 204) Line FEBE Err. Secs. 153) AIS Transition Count 205) Path BIP8 Err. Secs. 193) Loss of Cell Delineation 206) Path FEBE Err. Secs. 194) Loss of Pointer 207) Section BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 195) OC3 Path AIS 208) Section Sev. Err. Framing Secs. 196) OC3 Path YEL 209) Line BIP24 Severely Err. Secs. 197) Section BIP8 210) Line FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 198) Line BIP24 211) Path BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 199) Line FEBE 212) Path FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 200) Path BIP8 213) Line Unavailable Secs. 201) Path FEBE 214) Line Farend Unavailable Secs. This Command: cnfphyslnstats 31.8 Continue? ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- igxr02 VT Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.2V Jan. 18 2001 13:38 PST Line Statistic Types 215) Path Unavailable Secs. 228) INVMUX: Tx Failure Count 216) Path Farend Unavailable Secs. 229) INVMUX: Rx Failure Count 217) HCS Uncorrectable Error 218) HCS Correctable Error 219) INVMUX: line violations 220) INVMUX: Severely Err. Secs. 221) INVMUX: Farend Sev. Err. Secs. 222) INVMUX: Unavailable Secs. 223) INVMUX: Farend Unavail Secs. 224) INVMUX: Tx Unusable Seconds 225) INVMUX: Rx Unusable Seconds 226) INVMUX: Farend Tx Unusable Secs. 227) INVMUX: Farend Rx Unusable Secs. This Command: cnfphyslnstats 31.8 Statistic Type:
Example (E1)
sw228 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:07 PST Line Statistic Types 3) Out of Frames 198) Line BIP24 4) Losses of Signal 199) Line FEBE 5) Frames Bit Errors 200) Path BIP8 6) CRC Errors 201) Path FEBE 62) Total Cells Tx to line 202) Section BIP8 Err. Secs. 69) Total Cells Rx from line 203) Line BIP24 Err. Secs. 151) Yellow Alarm Transition Count 204) Line FEBE Err. Secs. 153) AIS Transition Count 205) Path BIP8 Err. Secs. 193) Loss of Cell Delineation 206) Path FEBE Err. Secs. 194) Loss of Pointer 207) Section BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 195) OC-3 Path AIS 208) Section Sev. Err. Framing Secs. 196) OC-3 Path YEL 209) Line BIP24 Severely Err. Secs. 197) Section BIP8 210) Line FEBE Severely Err. Secs. This Command: cnfphyslnstats 11.4 Continue? y sw228 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:07 PST Line Statistic Types 211) Path BIP8 Severely Err. Secs. 212) Path FEBE Severely Err. Secs. 213) Line Unavailable Secs. 214) Line Farend Unavailable Secs. 215) Path Unavailable Secs. 216) Path Farend Unavailable Secs. 217) HCS Uncorrectable Error 218) HCS Correctable Error This Command: cnfphyslnstats 11.4

cnfport (configure port)

Configures the parameters of an ATM or Frame Relay port on the IGX and BPX. The command is used to:

When using the cnfport command, press Return to keep the current value of a parameter.

Release History

In Release 9.2, the Ports and Trunks feature lets you configure multiple trunk lines and circuit lines on a single BXM or UXM card simultaneously. In previous releases, when you upped a single port as a trunk (by using the uptrk command), all the remaining ports on that card were treated as a trunk. Similarly, when you up a single port as a circuit line (by using the upln command), all the remaining ports on the card are treated as circuit line ports. This feature allows BXM and UXM cards to be trunk line cards as well as circuit line cards at the same time. This allows trunks as well as circuit lines to coexist on these interface cards.

In Release 9.3.0, changing the line framing for BXM-T3 cards from PLCP to HEC no longer automatically changes the port's bandwidth to the new maximum. It merely raises the upper limit for the port's bandwidth. After changing the framing, you must use cnfport to increase the port's bandwidth, and cnfrsrc to increase the port's Auto Route bandwidth (PVC Max Bandwidth).

In Release 9.3.10, The ILMI Neighbor Discovery feature is supported on ports (not virtual ports) on both the UXM and BXM cards. This feature enables a network management system, such as Cisco WAN Manager or CiscoWorks 2000, to discover other attached ATM devices, such as Cisco ATM routers or switches. The attached devices also must support ILMI Neighbor Discovery for this feature to work. Also in Release 9.3.10, the ELMI (Enhanced Local Management Interface) Neighbor Discovery feature is supported on ports on the UFM. This feature serves the same purpose as the ILMI Neighbor Discovery feature.

In Release 9.3.20, the cnfport command supports the Universal Router Module (URM) introduced on the IGX 8400. The command is used to configure the internal ATM port on the embedded UXM.


Note   With Release 9.3.20, the cnfport command is used to configure VC shaping. This change applies to all ATM ports in the IGX, i.e., UXM and URM ports. In previous releases the cnfln command was used to enable or disable VC shaping on ATM ports in the IGX. With Release 9.3.20, the cnfln command cannot be used to configure the VC shaping parameter.

Frame Relay

Configures the parameters of a Frame Relay port. The cnfport command applies to the UFM/UFI, FRP/FRI, FRM/FRI, and FRM-2/FRP-2. (Note that a less commonly used command also exists for the concentrated link between the PCS and FRM-2 or FRP-2: cnffrcport.)

During port configuration, a prompt for each parameter appears. To keep the current value of the parameter, press the Return key without typing any characters. When a parameter is not configurable for an application, the parameter appears shaded or with dashed lines.

You can mix the data rate for each of the ports if the total for all ports does not exceed the maximum composite data rate that the card set supports. Table 3-41 shows the supported data rates for individual T1 and E1 lines.


Table 3-41:
T1 and E1 Data Rates
Data Rates at 56 Kbps Increments Data Rates at 64 Kbps Increments

56

112

168

224

64

128

192

256

280

336

392

448

320

384

448

512

504

560

616

672

576

640

704

768

728

784

840

896

832

896

960

1024

952

1008

1064

1120

1088

1152

1216

1280

1176

1232

1288

1344

1344

1408

1472

1536

1400

1456

1512

1568

1600

1664

1728

1792

1624

1680

1736

1792

1856

1920

1984

2048

Table 3-42 shows the available data rates on a single, PCS user-port. For the FRP-2 and FRM-2 cards, the maximum composite data rate over the 44 logical user-ports is 1.792 Mbps.


Table 3-42:
PCS Data Rates
Data Rates in Kbps

9.6

14.4

16

19.2

32

38.4

48

56

64

112

128

168

192

224

256

280

320

336

384

For a PCS, some additional rules for assigning data rates to the 44 ports apply:

Syntax (basic format)

cnfport <slot.port>[.<vport>] [<params>]

Syntax (T1/E1 ports on UFM-C)

cnfport <slot.port> <line.DS0_range> <port queue depth> <ecn queue threshold>
<de threshold> <signaling protocol> [protocol parameters]

Syntax (unchannelized ports on UFM-U)

cnfport <slot.port> <port type> <port queue depth> <ecn queue threshold>
<de threshold> <signaling protocol> [protocol parameters]

Syntax (T1/E1 ports on FRM or FRP)

cnfport <slot.port> <port queue depth> <ecn queue threshold> <de threshold>
<signaling protocol> [protocol parameters]

Syntax (all other ports—for an FRM or FRP)

cnfport <slot.port> <speed> <port queue depth> <clocking> <de_threshold> <min-flags-bet-frames> <ECN q_threshold> <port ID> <signaling protocol y/n>
[protocol parameters]


Note   Some parameters are mandatory for T1/E1 lines and optional for other line types.

Parameter

Parameter Description

slot.port[.vport]

Specifies the card slot, physical, and optional virtual port number (BXM only). At this time, virtual ports are not available for ASI or UXM cards.

nni/uni

Specifies whether the cell header format is NNI or UNI. UNI is the default. NNI cannot be configured on the URM embedded UXM port.

metro data cell header

Specifies whether the metro data cell header type is used (ASI-T3 cards only).

VPI Range

BPX only: VPI Range is configurable on Virtual Ports and defaults to 0-255/4095 for Physical Ports (based on UNI/NNI type). The VPI Range cannot overlap with any other VPI Range on the physical interface.

Bandwidth

BPX only: Bandwidth is configurable on all ports. For Virtual Ports, this parameter specifies the maximum bandwidth available for a Virtual Port. Each port has this parameter configurable. Connections within the Virtual Port may overbook the bandwidth if CAC Override is enabled, but the actual throughput will never be allowed to exceed the Virtual Port bandwidth.

CAC Reserve

BPX only: CAC Reserve is configurable on all ports, but only valid if CAC Override is disabled. This parameter specifies the amount of Automatic Routing Management Port Bandwidth not available for booking by connections if CAC Override is disabled. If CAC Override is enabled, overbooking is permitted. The purpose of this parameter is to reserve some bandwidth to handle bursts of traffic without cell discards. All ports have this parameter configurable.

shift h | n

Specifies whether a one-byte shift on the HCF field of the cell header occurs. Changing the HCF field for a physical port will affect all virtual ports supported on the physical port.

The choice of H (shift) or N (no shift) depends on whether the ATM cloud includes non-Cisco WAN Switching nodes and whether virtual trunking is in operation:

  • You typically select H (the default, or shift on) if the cloud includes non-Cisco WAN Switching nodes or if only a physical trunk is configured for the ASI port.

  • You typically select N (shift off) if virtual trunks are configured and the ATM cloud consists of Cisco WAN Switching nodes only.

For BPX or IGX ports performing virtual trunking within an ATM cloud to external Cisco equipment, ports should be configured to shift on (that is, shift H) for BNI cards; BXM ports should typically be configured to shift off (shift N).

Note   For UXM cards, you cannot configure the Shift parameter—the Shift setting is always N, or shift off.

For example, if the public ATM cloud consists of BPX nodes, the access points to the cloud might be ASI ATM UNI ports. Because the cells transmitted to the ASI trunk interface are coming from a Cisco device, for example, a BNI card, the 16 VCI bits have already been left-shifted by four (4) bits and contain 12 bits of VCI information and four (4) bits of ForeSight information. Therefore, the ASI cards at either end of the cloud should be configured to not shift (that is, shift off). In this case, you would configure shift N on the ASI port.

If the ATM cloud consists of non-Cisco nodes, then the 12 VCI bits + 4 ForeSight bits in the cells coming from the BNI card in the BPX are then passed through untouched as 16 VCI bits. Because it is a non-Cisco network, the ForeSight bits are ignored.

Make sure that you set the HCF field correctly for your network configuration before you add connections. For example, if you are acting as a service provider, and one of your customers wants to configure virtual trunking through the network, if your ports have been previously configured with the incorrect HCF shift field setting, you may need to go back and delete all the connections from each port, configure the port, and add the connections again.

Below are guidelines on how to set the Shift parameter when using BNI virtual trunking through a cloud of Cisco equipment using BXMs, and a cloud using ASIs and BNIs. Also shown is how to set the Shift parameter when using either BXM or UXM virtual trunking through a cloud of Cisco equipment (BXM cards), and a cloud of ASIs and BNIs.



%util

Enables/disables percent utilization. This parameter supports ATM VBR/ABR fairness for ASI terminated connections and applies to only VBR and ABR connections. To change the %util status of a port, no connections can be currently terminating on the port. Therefore, if connections terminate on the port, they must be deleted before cnfport execution then re-added after execution of cnfport.

When this feature is disabled, the port queue bandwidth is calculated using the sum of the MCRs or PCRs for the connections terminating on the port. This is identical to the port queue bandwidth calculation prior to the implementation of the% util feature.

The port queue bandwidth with %util feature disabled is:

  • For ABR connections Port Queue BW = sum (MCR)

  • For VBR connections Port Queue BW = sum (PCR)

  • For CBR connections Port Queue BW = sum (PCR)

When the %util feature is enabled, the port queue bandwidth is calculated for ABR and VBR connections as follows: for ABR connections, the port queue bandwidth is the sum of a percentage of the MCRs for the connections terminating on the port; for VBR connections, the port queue bandwidth is the sum of a percentage of the PCRs for connections terminating on the port. The feature is not applied to CBR connections.

In summary, the port queue bandwidth with feature %util enabled is:

  • For ABR connections Port Queue BW = sum (MCR * %util)

  • For VBR connections Port Queue BW = sum (PCR * %util)

  • For CBR connections Port Queue BW = sum (PCR)

For virtual ports, parameter can be set to Enable or Disable and is only pertinent to the specific virtual port.

CAC Override

This can be set to Enable or Disable for the specific port.

protocol

Specifies the use of either an LMI protocol, an ILMI protocol, or no specified protocol. No specified protocol is the default.

This parameter is not configurable for virtual ports. By default, this setting is No for virtual ports. LMI cannot be configured on the URM embedded UXM port as the embedded router does not support the LMI protocol.

Values for protocol are one of the following:

N-(NONE)

L-(LMI)

I-(ILMI)

The default LMI parameters are:

  • VPI for LMI connection : 0

  • VCI for LMI connection : 31

  • LMI Polling Enable? : N

  • LMI Status Enquiry Timer (T393) : 10 seconds

  • LMI Update Status Timer (T394) : 10 seconds

  • LMI Polling Timer (T396) : 10 seconds

  • LMI Status Enquiry Retry (N394) : 5

  • LMI Update Status Retry (N395) : 5

The default ILMI parameters are:

  • VPI for ILMI connection : 0

  • VCI for ILMI connection : 16

  • ILMI Address Registration Enable? : N

  • ILMI Polling Enable? : N

  • ILMI Trap Enable? : N

  • ILMI T491 Polling Interval : 30 seconds

  • ILMI N491 Error Threshold : 3

  • ILMI N492 Event Threshold : 4


      Note   An IMA configuration will display the same protocol values as shown above.

Protocol by Card

For the BPX, defines the card that runs the LMI/ILMI protocol. The LMI/ILMI protocol can run on either the interface card (BXM) or the controller card. Values are Y/N. The default is N.

  • Y - selects the interface card to run the LMI/ILMI protocol

  • N - selects the controller card to run the LMI/ILMI protocol

This parameter is applicable only when the ILMI protocol is selected and the card supports the ILMI protocol.

Protocol run on the card

For the IGX, defines the card that runs the ILMI protocol. The ILMI protocol can run on the interface card (UXM and URM) or the controller card. Values are Y/N. The default is Y.

  • Y - selects the interface card to run the ILMI protocol

  • N - selects the controller card to run the ILMI protocol

This parameter is applicable only when the ILMI protocol is selected and the card supports the ILMI protocol.

Note   For the URM, the ILMI protocol runs only on the card. The protocol is blocked from running on the NPM.

Neighbor Discovery

The Neighbor Discovery (IGX) and the NbrDisc Enabled (BPX) parameter enables the Neighbor Discovery procedure. Values are Y/N. The default is Y.

  • Y - the switch sends its topology information (such as, the switch management IP address and IfName) to its neighbor.

  • N - the switch does NOT send its topology information to its neighbor. Instead, the switch sends 0.0.0.0 as the management IP address and a NULL string as IfName to the neighbor

The user is prompted for this parameter when Protocol is ILMI, Protocol by Card (BPX) or Protocol run on the card (IGX) is set to Y, and the interface card supports the Neighbor Discovery feature.

Note   The setting of this parameter does not affect the incoming neighbor's topology information. If the neighbor sends its topology information to the switch, the switch processes and stores the information. The neighbor's topology information is displayed using the dspnebdisc command.

ILMI Reset Flag

BXM only. This indicates whether the ILMI session is to be reset when a PNNI controller is added. The default is Yes.

VC Shaping

IGX ports only. Specify one of the following:

Yes—Allows traffic to pass through VC queues and Qbins before leaving the card for traffic flow control.

No—Traffic does not pass through VC queues, only Qbins.

Parameters (Frame Relay)

Parameter Description

slot.port

Specifies the logical port on the FRP, FRM, or UFM-U in the format slot.port. For a T1/E1 line on an FRM or FRP, port is a logical number. For a UFM-C, the range for port is 1-250. (See the description of slot.port line in the Cisco IGX 8400 Series Reference manual.) For a Port Concentrator Shelf, port is to the logical port in the range 1-44.

port type
(for a UFM-U)

For port type on a
PCS, see next box.

Specifies whether a port on a UFM-U is DCE or DTE. The prompt appears if the system detects a UFM-U. The default is DCE. For an FRM or FRP, "port Type" is display-only because jumper blocks on the back cards set the mode.

When you use cnfport in a job, the "Enter mode (line or port)" prompt follows slot.port. Note that this mode is the interface type of the Frame Relay port rather than the mode of the UFM-U. Valid entries are HSSI, V35, X21, PORT (PORT is generically unchannelized), or LINE (LINE indicates T1 or E1). If the front card is a UFM-U, a subsequent prompt asks you to specify DCE or DTE.

port type
(for a PCS)

(For port type on
a UFM-U, see preceding box.)

Port type for a PCS tells switch software whether the port is V.35, V.11 or V.28. Port type for a PCS does not actually configure the port: to configure the port, you must install the appropriate card in the PCS.

See the port type description for the UFM-U for information on cnfport in a job.

interface type

Specifies an interface type for a Port Concentrator Shelf (PCS). This parameter appears if switch software detects a PCS. It applies to the user interface display only and not the PCS itself because system software does not detect the interface type within the PCS. To change the user-interface type, you must change a card in the PCS.

slot.port line

Specifies the UFM-C slot, port, and line number, where port can be 1-250, and line can be 1-8. Note that the maximum number of T1/E1 lines per node is 32. This maximum could be, for example, spread over 4 UFM-8C card sets that utilize all 8 lines on each back card.

speed

Specifies a port clock speed in Kbps for a 2.0 Mbps UFM, FRP, or FRM. The configured speed appears under the Configured Clock heading. The actual clock rate appears under the Measured Rx Clock heading. Note that this option does not apply to T1/E1 lines because these line types use 64 or 56 Kbps timeslots. The range of speeds according to the number of active ports is:

  • 1 port (selected speeds, 56-2048 Kbps)

  • 2 ports (selected speeds, 56-1024 Kbps)

  • 3 ports (selected speeds, 56-672 Kbps)

  • 4 ports (selected speeds, 56-512 Kbps)

Refer to the table at the beginning of this command description for the available clock rates for all port combinations.

clocking

Specifies the port's clock type for HSSI, V.35, and X.21 lines. Clocking does not apply to T1, E1, or Port Concentrator lines. The clock is either normal or looped.

Four combinations of clocking are available for the V.35 ports. Two combinations of clocking are available for HSSI and X.21. Note that the clock and data direction in DCE mode is the opposite of the direction for DTE mode. The possibilities are:

  • FRP, FRM, or UFM-U port is DCE with normal clocking (HSSI, V.35, X.21).

  • FRP, FRM, or UFM-U port is DCE with looped clocking (V.35 only).

  • FRP, FRM, or UFM-U port is DTE with normal clocking (HSSI, V.35, X.21).

  • FRP, FRM, or UFM-U port is DTE with looped clocking (V.35 only).

For a description of looped and normal clocking, refer to the appropriate configuration guide.

port ID

Specifies the DLCI associated with the port (0-1024) {0}. A node uses this number when you add bundled connections. Otherwise, port ID can be used as a network destination number in global addressing. The port ID does not apply to T1, E1, or PCS ports.

port queue depth

Specifies the maximum bytes in the transmission queue at the UFM, FRP, or FRM port.
Range: 0-65535 bytes
Default: 65535 bytes

ecn queue threshold

Specifies the threshold at which the system begins to generate explicit congestion notification (BECN and FECN bits) for the port.
Range: 0-65535 bytes
Default: 65535 bytes

signaling protocol

Specifies the LMI operation mode. The first time you execute cnfport on a port, the command line interface displays the following options for this parameter: "none, Strata LMI, a (for Annex A), and d (for Annex D)." If you enter "a" or "d," the subsequent prompt asks if the interface is NNI.

For the initial port specification and subsequent port specifications for a particular port, you can also use a single digit from the LMI definition list that follows. The total industry standard range is 0-255, but Cisco WAN Switching nodes recognize only the following (the default is internally recognized as LMI=2):

LMI = 0 LMI is disabled at this port.

LMI = 1 Cisco LMI and the asynchronous update process is enabled at this port. Greenwich Mean Time is also enabled.

LMI = 2 LMI is disabled at this port.

LMI = 3 Cisco LMI is enabled at this port, but asynchronous update process is disabled.

LMI = 4 The port configuration is UNI using CCITT Q.933 Annex A parameters.

LMI = 5 The port configuration is UNI using ANSI T1.617 Annex D parameters.

LMI = 6 The port configuration is NNI using CCITT Q.933 Annex A parameters.

LMI = 7 The port configuration is NNI using ANSI T1.617 Annex D parameters.

For any Frame Relay card set that has a maximum frame length of
4510 bytes, the use and type of a signaling protocol results in a limit on the possible number of connections per port (the port here is either physical or logical). The maximum number of connections per port for each protocol is as follows:

For Annex A: 899

For Annex D: 899

For Strata LMI: 562

Neither addcon nor cnfport prevents you from adding more than the maximum number of connections on a port. (You might, for example, use cnfport to specify an LMI when too many connections for that particular LMI already exist.) If the number of connections is exceeded for a particular LMI, the LMI does not work on the port, the full status messages that result are discarded, and LMI timeouts occur on the port. A port failure results and also subsequently leads to A-bit failures in other segments of the connection path.

de threshold

Specifies the port queue depth above which the system discards frames with a set Discard Eligibility (DE) bit.
Range: 0-100 percent
Default: 100 percent
A threshold of 100 percent disables DE for the port because a queue cannot contain more than 100 percent of its capacity.

asynchronous status

Specifies whether the node should send unsolicited LMI update messages when they appear or wait for the user-device to poll. Enter y (yes) or n (no).

polling verify timer

Specifies a Link Integrity Verification Timer heartbeat (keep-alive) period. Set the timer to 5 secs. more than the setting in the user equipment.
Range: 5-30
Default: 15

error threshold

Specifies the number of failures in the monitored events that cause the keep-alive process to report an alarm. A threshold of 0 reverts to 1. A threshold greater than 10 reverts to 10.
Theoretical range: 0-255
Valid range: 1-10

monitored events count

Specifies the number of monitored events for the keep-alive process. A port communication-fail condition is cleared after this number of successful polling cycles. A value of 0 reverts to 1, and a value more than 10 reverts to 10.
Theoretical range: 0-255
Valid range: 1-10

communicate priority

Specifies whether the system should communicate the SNA priority of the connections to the user-device on the port. Enter y (yes) or n (no). (SNA priority is either H or L.)

upper/lower RNR
threshold

Specifies the receiver not ready (RNR) thresholds. The upper threshold is the number of receiver not ready indications from the user equipment before an alarm is generated for this port. The lower RNR threshold is the number of indications from the user equipment before an alarm is cleared.
Range: 1-255
Default (upper RNR threshold): 75
Default (lower RNR threshold): 25

Enable EFCI to BECN mapping

Directs the system to map the ForeSight congestion bit (which is set in the FastPackets by a trunk card) to the FECN and BECN bits on the affected PVC.

ForeSight over port

Specifies whether the system should use CLLM over the port.

min. flags/frame

Specifies the minimum number of flags between frames when the direction of transmission is from the node to the user-equipment. Any value greater than 0 is valid on the UFM, FRP or FRM.
Range (Port Concentrator Shelf): 1-16
Default: 1

OAM FastPacket
threshold

Specifies how many OAM FastPackets must arrive from a remote NNI port before the local port generates "A-bit = 0" in the signaling protocol message to the locally attached device.
A 0 disables this function. The OAM FastPacket threshold setting applies to UNI and NNI ports. The following two paragraphs provide a more detailed explanation of the A-bit and OAM FastPacket threshold usage.
Range: 0-15 packets
Default: 3 packets

On any Frame Relay port (UNI or NNI) that is using a signaling protocol (Cisco LMI, Annex A, or Annex D), the FRP or FRM provides a Status message to the attached equipment in response to a Status Enquiry message or as an Asynchronous Update. These Status messages contain details about every PVC configured on the port. In particular, the PVC Active bit (the A-bit) represents whether a PVC is active (A-bit=1) or out of service (A-bit = 0). If the other end of the connection PVC on a UNI port, the only conditions that can cause the local Frame Relay card to send an A-bit=0 are:

  • The PVC is down (intentionally taken out of service)

  • The PVC has failed for any reason (such as a hardware failure, trunk failure with no ability to reroute, and so on)

If the other end of the PVC terminates on an NNI port, one additional condition can cause the local UFM, FRP, or FRM to send an A-bit=0 to the local device: if the remote NNI port on the card receives an A-bit=0 from the remote network over the remote NNI, then the local card can propagate an A-bit=0 out the local port. The mechanism by which the remote card notifies the local card of the A-bit=0 coming from the remote network is OAM FastPackets. The local node sends one OAM FastPacket every 5 seconds for as long as the A-bit coming from the remote network is 0.

link integrity timer
(T391)

Specifies the interval after which the system sends Status Enquiry messages across the NNI port. Both networks do not need to have the same T391 value.

Range: 5-30 seconds
Default: 6 seconds

On a Frame Relay NNI port, the Link Integrity Timer (T391) specifies how often the UFM, FRP, or FRM generates a Status Enquiry message to the attached network using the selected NNI signaling protocol (Annex A or Annex D). The card should receive a Status message for every Status Enquiry message it transmits. If the Frame Relay card receives either no responses or invalid responses, a Port Communication Failure results (and causes a minor alarm). Using the default values for N392 Error Threshold and N393 Monitored Events Count in an example: an error occurs when no response (or a bad response) arrives for 3 out of the last 4 Status Enquiry messages.
Default (392 Error Threshold): 3
Default (N393 Monitored Events Count): 4

N392 error threshold

Specifies the number of bad or undelivered responses to Status Enquiry messages that can occur before the system records a Port Communication Failure. See the description of the link integrity timer parameter for example usage.
Range: 1-10
Default: 3

N393 monitored events count

Specifies the number of Status Enquiry messages in a period wherein the system waits for responses to the enquiries. See the description of the link integrity timer parameter for example usage.
Range: 1-10
Default: 4

full status polling cycle (N391)

Specifies the interval at which the system sends the Full Status Report request for all PVCs across the NNI port. The Full Status reports the status of all the connections across the NNI.
Range: 1-255 polling cycles
Default: 10 cycles

card type

Specifies the card type when you enter the cnfport command in a job. This parameter is not available except when you specify cnfport in a job by using the addjob command. During the job specification, you enter the card type just after the slot.port during the command specification phase of addjob. Valid card types are "V.35," "X.21," "port," and "line," where "line" indicates a T1 or E1 line.

CLLM status Tx Timer

Specifies an interval for the system to send ForeSight congestion messages across the NNI. Both networks must be Cisco WAN Switching networks.
Range: 40 ms-350 ms
Default: 100 ms

IDE to DE mapping

Specifies whether the destination system should map the internal DE bit (IDE) status in the FastPacket or ATM cell to the Frame Relay DE bit at the destination. Enter y (yes) or n (no). If you specify the non-standard case of CIR=0 with either addcon or cnffrcls, you must first enable IDE to DE mapping. Refer to the appropriate configuration guide for important information on setting CIR=0.

interface control
template

Specifies the control leads available on the V.35 and X.21 physical Frame Relay ports and the meaning for each lead.

channel range

Specifies the DS0s for the T1 or E1 logical port. The value can be 1 or a contiguous combination in the range 1-24 for T1 or 1-31 for E1. For example, 7-12 indicates 6 DS0s for the port, starting with DS0 7. Before you use this command, specify the valid channel range with the addfrport command.

channel speed

Specifies the bandwidth available to a logical port. The speed is 64 Kbps times the number of DS0s you specify with the channel range parameter.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

upport, dnport, dspport, dspports, delport, addport

Universal Router Module (URM)

The URM provides IOS-based voice support and basic routing functions. It consists of an embedded UXM with one internal ATM port and an embedded IOS-based router. The URM is a two-processor card. UXM functionality is provided by Admin software running under VxWorks. The router functionality is provided by IOS running independently on a different processor. An internal IPC mechanism is used for Admin to IOS communication over the internal ATM port.

The external interface type of the URM ATM port is defined as internal. The internal interface is a logical internal ATM port. The internal ATM port speed is equivalent to an OC-3 port. The default port configuration is UNI with no protocol and is the same as the default configuration for a UXM port. The port cannot be configured as NNI. The protocol cannot be configured as LMI, as the embedded router does not support the LMI protocol. Switch software reserves the VPI.VCI pair 0.1023 for the internal IPC mechanism used for Admin to IOS communication.

Use the cnfport command to configure the internal ATM port. Set the protocol to ILMI and enable the Neighbor Discovery feature. Use the IOS-CLI to configure the router protocol to ILMI. With this configuration, the Management IP address of the embedded router is reported to the URM embedded UXM via ILMI.

With release 9.3.20, use the cnfport command to configure the VC Shaping parameter on IGX ATM ports.

ILMI Neighbor Discovery

When ILMI Neighbor Discover is enabled on a port, the BPX or IGX and the attached ATM device will exchange their management IP addresses together with other interface information with each other using the ILMI protocol. The exchanged information consists of the following:

Use parameter option 56 (BXM) or 53 (UXM) from the cnfnodeparm command to configure the ILMI Management IP address. The Management IP address is used by the NMS application to access the BPX, IGX, or the ATM device. Depending upon your network set up, you can configure the BPX or IGX to send either the LAN IP address or Network IP address as part of the neighbor information exchange with the attached ATM device. Enter 0 for LAN IP address, or 1 for Network IP address. The default is the network IP address for the BPX or IGX.

The command cnfnodeparm is a SuperUser command

Once the parameter is set in cnfnodeparm, enable Neighbor Discovery using the cnfport command. Set the parameters that follow, depending upon the switch.

Options that must be set for cnfport are shown in Table 3-43.


Table 3-43: cnfport—BXM Parameters to Set for ILMI Neighbor Discovery
Parameters Value

Protocol

ILMI

Protocol by Card

Yes

NebrDisc Enabled

Yes

ILMI Polling Enabled

Yes

ILMI Reset Flag

Yes

Options that must be set for a UXM port are shown in Table 3-44.


Table 3-44: cnfport—UXM Parameters to Set for ILMI Neighbor Discovery
Parameters Value

Protocol

ILMI

Protocol Run On The Card

Yes

Neighbor Discovery

Yes

ILMI Polling Enabled

Yes

"Protocol run on the card" or "Protocol By Card" is prompted only when the protocol is ILMI and the card supports ILMI on the card. The "Neighbor Discovery" is prompted only when "Protocol run on the card" or "Protocol By Card" is set to Yes.

When "Protocol run on the card" or "Protocol By Card" is set to Yes, "Neighbor Discovery" means whether the switch sends the switch's management IP address and IfName to the neighbor. The switch always processes the neighbor's management IP address and IfName.

Therefore when "Protocol run on the card" or "Protocol By Card" is Yes, and "Neighbor Discovery" is Yes, the switch sends the switch's management IP address and IfName to the neighbor.

If "Protocol run on the card" or "Protocol By Card" is Yes, and "Neighbor Discovery" is No, the switch sends 0.0.0.0 as the IP address and NULL string as IfName to the neighbor.

Use the dspnebdisc command to display all the neighbor's information discovered by the BPX or the IGX via the ILMI Neighbor Discovery procedure.

Feature Mismatching to Verify LMI/ILMI Support

The cnfport commands, in addition to other configuration commands, perform mismatch verification on the BXM, UXM, and URM cards. For example, the cnfport command will verify whether the cards both have LMI/ILMI configured.

The command cnfport will prevent disabling ILMI protocol on a port interface if a VSI ILMI session is active on a VSI partition of the port interface. Configure ILMI protocol running on a port interface to run on the BCC instead of the BXM.

Refer to "Feature Mismatching" in the BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration. The Feature Mismatching capability will not mismatch cards unless the actual feature has been enabled on the card. This allows for a graceful card migration from an older release.

ELMI Neighbor Discovery for UFM

Enhanced Local Management Interface (ELMI) provides a protocol to monitor the status of permanent virtual connections between two Cisco communication devices. Through ELMI for example, the network management system (NMS) becomes aware of the existing connectivity between an IGX 8400 switch and a Cisco IOS router running ATM or Frame Relay.

The enhanced version of ELMI on IOS is called ELMI-AR (Address Resolution). Note that, since IGX switches mainly are connected to routers. which run IOS, you must implement the same protocol on IOS, too.

The ELMI protocol enhancements for the UFM serves the same purpose as the ILMI enhancements for the UXM, and shares similar mechanisms to reach the neighbor discovery purpose. While ILMI Neighbor Discovery works with ATM links, ELMI Neighbor Discovery works with Frame Relay links. ELMI Neighbor Discovery is a Cisco standard, while ILMI is based on the standard ILMI protocol.

Use parameter option 53 from the cnfnodeparm command to configure the ILMI Management IP address. The Management IP address is used by the NMS application to access the IGX or the ATM device. Depending upon your network set up, you can configure the IGX to send either the LAN IP address or Network IP address as part of the neighbor information exchange with the attached ATM device. Enter 0 for LAN IP address, or 1 for Network IP address. The IGX switch default is the network IP address.

More information about this command can be found in the Cisco WAN Switching SuperUser Command Reference.

Once the parameter is set in cnfnodeparm, enable Neighbor Discovery using the cnfport command. Set the Neighbor Discovery parameter to "Yes" to enable the feature.

Traffic Shaping on the UXM and URM

The UXM and URM cards support the VC traffic shaping feature. VC traffic shaping shapes each connection by scheduling cells using the WFQ (Weighted Fair Queueing) technique to ensure conformance to the service provider's requirements. In general, traffic shaping provides a tight control on each connection's CDV in order to meet carrier requirements. The feature also prevents domination of bandwidth resources by any one connection.

On the UXM and URM, traffic shaping is configured on a per port basis. Once the traffic shaping parameter is turned on, all connections added afterward will have traffic shaping on. Refer to the Cisco WAN Switch Software Release 9.2 release notes for additional information on traffic shaping.

With Release 9.3.20, VC traffic shaping is configured using the cnfport command. In previous releases, the cnfln command was used to configure the traffic shaping feature. To configure VC traffic shaping, use the cnfport VC Shaping parameter. Specific "yes" to enable VC traffic shaping. This option allows traffic to pass through VC queues and Qbins before leaving the card for traffic flow control. Specify "no" to disable VC traffic shaping. With this option, traffic passes through Qbins only and not VC queues.

Traffic Shaping on the BXM

Traffic shaping lets you choose whether to have VC scheduling performed to your CBR, VBR, UBR, or ABRSTD with VSVD and without FCES traffic streams. You can configure the traffic shaping (which involves weighted fair queuing) option on each BXM interface. In release 9.3.05 onward, traffic shaping is enabled/disabled per QoS by using the cnfportq command.

Traffic shaping, and all traffic pertaining to the QoS for this release, is performed on a per-port basis. When a particular QoS is enabled, all traffic exiting the port is subject to the VC scheduling based on the appropriate service parameters you provision. When a particular port is configured to perform traffic shaping, all ATM cells, regardless of class of service, pass through the VC queues before leaving the card. When a traffic class is not configured for traffic shaping, its connections circumvent the VC queues and are scheduled by the Qbins.

No connections should exist on the port before changing the port traffic shaping parameter. If there are existing connections when the port traffic shaping parameter is toggled, then these connections will not be updated unless the card is reset, connections are rerouted, a switchcc occurs, or you modify the connection parameters. Also, traffic shaping is not enabled on a VSVD endpoint if an external segment has been enabled.

Redundant cards must either both support traffic shaping, or neither support traffic shaping. In the non-redundant case, traffic shaping is configurable regardless of whether the BXM card in the target slot supports traffic shaping. If the card does not support traffic shaping, then a BXM card that does support traffic shaping can be inserted later and the traffic shaping configuration will take effect. System software will not perform mismatch checking on the traffic shaping capabilities of the BXM.

The traffic shaping rate parameters are in Table 3-45. The MCR is the minimum cell rate for the connection. This is the lowest rate that the connection will be scheduled from the VC queue into the Qbin. The PCR is the peak cell rate, or the highest rate at which the connection will be scheduled from the VC queue into the Qbin.


Table 3-45:
cnfport—Traffic Shaping Rates
Service Type MCR PCR

CBR

PCR

PCR

VBR

SCR1%Util

PCR

UBR

0

PCR

ABR

MCR %Util

PCR

1Indicates that the system software issues a warning that traffic shaping is not supported on that specific BXM.


Note   Traffic shaping does not generate any alarms. There is no mismatch checking for BXMs that support traffic shaping, so if you insert a BXM card with firmware that does not support it, then the traffic shaping functionality will not exist.


Note   Cells can be momentarily received out of order when you reconfigure connections between traffic shaping and non-traffic shaping. This is a limitation of the hardware for which there is no workaround.

Configuring Traffic Shaping

Traffic shaping involves passing ATM traffic through the ATM interface at a VC queue, scheduled rate. With the introduction of traffic shaping, the customer will have the option to perform VC scheduling to his/her ABR, CBR, VBR, and UBR traffic streams. Traffic shaping is performed by the BXM hardware.

Traffic shaping will be performed on a per-port, per-CoS basis.

No connections should exist on the port before you change the port traffic-shaping parameter. If there are existing connections when you toggle the port traffic-shaping parameter, then these connections will not be updated unless you reset the card (by using the resetcd command), connections are rerouted, a switchcc occurs, or you modify the connection parameters. Also, it should be noted that traffic shaping is not enabled on a VSVD endpoint if external segment has been enabled.

Use cnfportq to configure traffic shaping parameters.

Redundancy Architecture

Software requires that redundant cards either both support the feature or neither support the feature. In the non-redundant case, the feature is configurable regardless of whether the BXM card in the target slot supports traffic shaping. If the card does not support the feature, then a BXM card that does support traffic shaping can be inserted later and the traffic-shaping configuration will take effect. Switch software will not perform mismatch checking on the traffic-shaping capabilities of the BXM.

Cisco WAN Manager in Release 9.2 has no changes to support traffic shaping. Switch software functionality is limited to enabling the traffic shaping option (involving weighted fair queuing) on a per-BXM interface case.

Refer to the Cisco WAN Switch Software Release 9.2 release notes for additional information on traffic shaping. No connections should be on the port before changing the port traffic shaping parameter. If there are existing connections when the port traffic shaping parameter is toggled, then these connections will not be updated unless the card is reset, connections are rerouted, a switchcc occurs, or you modify the connection parameters*. Also, it should be noted that traffic shaping is not enabled on a VSVD endpoint if an external segment has been enabled. In this case, the scheduling policies are based upon the ATMF 4.0 ABR rules.

Firmware Functionality (BXM)

The BXM firmware supports a new CommBus parameter to enable/disable traffic shaping. When you add a connection, the BXM firmware checks its database to see if traffic shaping is enabled for the port that the connection is to be mapped to. If traffic shaping is enabled, the BXM firmware sets up the ASIC hardware to perform the weighted fair queuing. In the background, the BXM firmware runs a rate-based algorithm.

Existing functionality, such as VC queuing, is used by the traffic shaping feature.

In this release, the BXM firmware supports a new CommBus (CBUS) parameter to enable/disable traffic shaping. When a connection is added, the BXM firmware checks its database to see if traffic shaping is enabled for the port that the connection is to be mapped to. If traffic shaping is enabled for the traffic class on the port, the BXM firmware sets up the ASIC hardware to perform the weighted fair queuing. In the background, the BXM firmware runs a rate-based algorithm similar to what is done today for explicit rate stamping (ERS). The only other interface change includes an egress SCR parameter in the channel (0x52) message.

The algorithm executed by the firmware involves the BXM firmware polling the cell arrival and transmit counters of the Qbins approximately every 15 msec. During this time, the firmware determines the congestion ratio:

rc = rp * out/in

where rp is the previous value of rc, "out" is the number of cells leaving the Qbin, and "in" is the number of cells arriving into the Qbin. Note that if the ratio of out/in is less than 1, then the Qbin is experiencing congestion. The BXM firmware takes the resulting "rc" and divides this value into the sum of all of the PCRs for the Qbin and uses this result as the congestion factor to be programmed into the hardware (SABRE).

Performance of Traffic Shaping

The weighted fair queuing (WFQ) algorithm for traffic shaping runs the same algorithm as the explicit rate stamping (ERS). This processing consumes 12 percent of the bandwidth. Because the algorithm runs once (even if both ERS and WFQ are enabled), traffic shaping will not increase the worst-case demand for BXM processor time.

Errors and Alarm Handling

No alarms will be generated regarding the traffic-shaping feature. As previously mentioned, there is no mismatch checking for BXMs that do not support the feature, so if you insert a BXM with firmware that does not support the feature, then the traffic shaping functionality will not be supported on that card.

It should be noted that cells can be momentarily received out of order when connections are reconfigured between traffic shaping and non-traffic shaping. This is a limitation of the hardware for which there is no workaround.

Virtual Ports

Virtual ports (Figure 3-18) are logical interfaces like virtual trunks, trunks, and ports. (A maximum of 31 logical entities are available on a BXM card.)

Virtual ports is an optional feature that must be configured by Cisco on the BPX.


Figure 3-18: Virtual Ports


One or more virtual ports may function on a single port connected to CPE devices, directly or through an ATM cloud. Although virtual ports, like ports, can connect directly to CPEs, they are generally used to connect indirectly.

Traffic shaping has previously been supported on ports and on connections. Virtual ports on BPX switches provide hierarchical traffic shaping, which means both virtual port traffic shaping and connection traffic shaping.

A virtual port may carry multiple PVCs or PVPs. VI traffic shaping capability is provided per virtual port. Additionally, connection traffic shaping is available on a QoS basis. While virtual port shaping is always ON, you can turn connection traffic shaping ON or OFF by using the cnfportq command.

Each virtual port supports all Automatic Routing Management (AutoRoute) traffic types that are currently supported by ports.

To set the maximum bandwidth available for use on that virtual port, use the Bandwidth parameter of the command cnfport (see Figure 3-19). This parameter is similar to the Bandwidth parameter used for ports. However, while the Bandwidth parameter is configurable on a virtual port, on a port, this parameter is not configurable; it is automatically set to the line speed.

You can configure a virtual port's bandwidth to the full port bandwidth or a subset thereof. However, the bandwidth sum of all virtual ports on a port cannot exceed the port's total bandwidth.


Figure 3-19: Port Bandwidth


Requirements

Virtual ports are available on the BXM card for the BPX. This feature is included in BPX Switch Software 9.3.10. and is independent of firmware. Virtual ports are not supported on ASI card connections.

On the BPX, this feature requires:

Virtual Port Examples

This section describes two of many possible examples of virtual port configurations.

The BPX switch software does not distinguish between the two types of virtual ports.

Depending on the interface type, UNI or NNI, the maximum number of PVPs will be 255 or 4095 respectively. The maximum number of VCIs is 65535.

Port Bandwidth and Line Speed

Figure 3-20 shows the types of bandwidth that make up the port's total bandwidth as configured by cnfport.


Figure 3-20: Port Bandwidth and Line Speed


Total Port Bandwidth

The total port bandwidth is the bandwidth of the port. It is configured by the cnfport command. Its units are cells per second. If there are multiple ports on a line (physical interface), then the sum of the "Total Port Bandwidths" on that line is limited to be less than or equal to the line speed.

For BXM T3 lines the line speed is based on the framing, PLCP or HEC, and can be reconfigured using the cnfln command.

Automatic Routing Management Bandwidth

The Automatic Routing Management Bandwidth is the bandwidth that can be used by Automatic Routing Management connections. It is user configured via the cnfrsrc command. Its units are cells per second. It can never be larger than the total port bandwidth.

VSI Bandwidth

The VSI bandwidth is the bandwidth that is currently used by the VSI partitions. It is a calculated value based on the VSI min-BW and max-BW values. Its units are in cells per second. It is "configurable by the user" when the min-BW and max-BW values are modified via the cnfrsrc command. When being configured, the min-BW and max- BW parameters cannot be set so that they would consume more than Total Port Bandwidth-Automatic Routing Management Bandwidth.

Unused Bandwidth

The unused bandwidth is whatever is left over. This occurs if some of the non-Automatic Routing Management bandwidth is unused by VSI.

Limitations

The BXM card has 31 Virtual Interfaces (VIs). These VIs can be used for Virtual Ports, Virtual Trunks, Physical Ports or Physical Trunks.

Example

Configure port 6 on the BPX card in slot 3.

cnfport 3.6 353208 N H L0 31 N 10 10 10 5 5 N 0 N N

Example

Configure port, when used with an IMA line, displays the IMA Port Group. It does not prompt for any new IMA configuration.

cnfport 5.1 N N N N

sw225 TRM StrataCom IGX 8420 9.3.a6 Mar. 10 2000 05:56 GMT Port: 5.1 [ACTIVE ] IMA Port Grp: 1-4 Interface: E1-IMA CAC Override: Enabled Type: UNI %Util Use: Disabled Speed: 17962 (cps) SIG Queue Depth: 640 Protocol: NONE This Command: cnfport 5.1 NNI Cell Header Format? [N]: Protocol [N]: Apply Percent Utilization? [N]: CAC Override Disable? [N]:
Example

Configure BXM port to enable/disable ILMI Neighbor Discovery.

cnfport 4.3 353208 N H I 0 16 Y Y Y 30 3 4 Y N 0 N Y Y

sw143 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.10 Aug. 9 2000 16:23 GMT Port: 4.3 [ACTIVE ] Bandwidth/AR BW: 353208/353208 Interface: LM-BXM CAC Override: Enabled VPI Range: 0 - 255 CAC Reserve: 0 Type: UNI %Util Use: Disabled Shift: SHIFT ON HCF (Normal Operation) SIG Queue Depth: 640 Port Load: 0 % Protocol: ILMI Protocol by Card: Yes NbrDisc Enabled: Yes VPI.VCI: 0.16 Addr Reg Enab: Y ILMI Polling Enabled: Y Trap Enabled: Y T491 Polling Interval: 30 N491 Error Threshold: 3 N492 Event Threshold: 4 ILMI Reset Flag:Y Last Command: cnfport 4.3 353208 N H I 0 16 Y Y Y 30 3 4 Y N 0 N Y Y
Example

Configure UXM port to enable/disable ILMI Neighbor Discovery.

cnfport 4.3

igxf1 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.10 July 26 2000 23:19 PST Port: 4.3 [ACTIVE ] IMA Port Grp: 3 Interface: E1-IMA CAC Override: Enabled Type: UNI %Util Use: Disabled Speed: 4377 (cps) GW LCNs: 200 SIG Queue Depth: 640 Reserved BW: 0 (cps) Alloc Bandwidth: 353208 (cps) VC Shaping: Disabled Protocol: ILMI Protocol run on the card: Yes VPI.VCI: 0.16 Neighbor Discovery: Yes ILMI Polling Enabled Y Trap Enabled Y T491 Polling Interval 30 N491 Error Threshold 3 N492 Event Threshold 4 This Command: cnfport 4.3
Example

Configure UFM port 5.1 for ELMI Neighbor Discovery. Set the Neighbor Discovery parameter to "Yes" to enable the feature.

cnfport 5.1 65535 65535 100 c N 15 3 4 N 75 25 3 N N Y 1 Y

top TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1H July 25 2000 09:38 GMT Port: 5.1 [ACTIVE ] Primary Interface: T1D Configured Clock: 1536 Kbps Clocking: None Measured Rx Clock: None Neighbor IP Add: 2.2.2.2 Neighbor IfIndex: 11 Port ID - Min Flags / Frames 1 Port Queue Depth 65535 OAM Pkt Threshold 3 pkts ECN Queue Threshold 65535 T391 Link Intg Timer 10 sec DE Threshold 100 % N391 Full Status Poll 6 cyl signaling Protocol Cisco LMI -E EFCI Mapping Enabled No Asynchronous Status No CLLM Enabled/Tx Timer No/ 0 msec T392 Polling Verif Timer 15 IDE to DE Mapping Yes N392 Error Threshold 3 Channel Speed 64 N393 Monitored Events Count 4 Line Number 1 Communicate Priority No Channel Range 1-24 Upper/Lower RNR Thresh 75%/ 25% Neighbor Discovery Enable Last Command: cnfport 5.1 65535 65535 100 c N 15 3 4 N 75 25 3 N N Y 1 Y
Example

Configure port 5.3 on a UXM card and set the VC Shaping parameter to "disabled".

cnfport 5.3 N N N N 200 0 N

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2a July 20 2000 15:35 GMT Port: 5.3 [ACTIVE ] Interface: OC3 CAC Override: Enabled Type: UNI %Util Use: Disabled Speed: 353208 (cps) GW LCNs: 200 SIG Queue Depth: 640 Reserved BW: 0 (cps) Alloc Bandwidth: 353208 (cps) VC Shaping: Disabled Protocol: NONE Last Command:cnfport 5.3 N N N N 200 0 N
Example

Configure the internal ATM port on the Universal Router Module (URM). Set the protocol to ILMI and enable Neighbor Discovery.

cnfport 11.1 N I 0 16 Y Y 30 3 4 N N 200 0 Y Y N

sw190 TRM Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.e9 Oct. 6 2000 05:20 GMT Port: 11.1 [ACTIVE ] Interface: INTERNAL CAC Override: Enabled Type: UNI %Util Use: Disabled Speed: 353208 (cps) GW LCNs: 200 SIG Queue Depth: 640 Reserved BW: 0 (cps) Alloc Bandwidth: 353208 (cps) VC Shaping: Disabled Protocol: ILMI Protocol run on the card:Yes VPI.VCI: 0.16 Neighbor Discovery: Yes ILMI Polling Enabled Y Trap Enabled Y T491 Polling Interval 30 N491 Error Threshold 3 N492 Event Threshold 4 Last Command:cnfport 11.1 N I 0 16 Y Y 30 3 4 N N 200 0 Y Y N
Signaling Protocol Timers

This section introduces the implementation of two signaling timers and related parameters you can specify through the cnfport command.

Periodically, devices use signaling to request the status of other, connected devices or networks. The signaling can be a simple confirmation of the other device's existence or more detailed information, such as the DLCIs, bandwidth, and state of all PVCs. The signaling described here occurs between:

Periodically, Frame Relay ports within the network transmit a Status Enquiry and wait for a Status response. These exchanges occur across the UNI and the NNI. At the UNI, the user-equipment periodically sends a series of Status Enquiries and awaits a Status response for each enquiry. At the NNI of any network, a Frame Relay port can generate Status Enquiries and, at alternate times, receive Status Enquiries. In this way, the signaling between networks mirror each other. (Figure 3-21 shows the three possible exchanges.) The timers for Status Enquiry and Status Response and other, related parameters are the:

In the preceding list, an event is either a Status Enquiry or a Status Response. The meaning of the event depends on whether the link integrity timer or the polling verification timer is waiting for the event. The link integrity timer waits for Status Responses. The polling verification timer waits for Status Enquiries.

Most Status Enquiries contain only a sequence number. After sending these simple Status Enquiries, the polling device checks for the sequence number. Periodically, a full status polling cycle takes place, in which the polling device waits for all applicable information, such as the status of all connections that cross the NNI. For signaling across the UNI, the Frame Relay Forum has recommended a full status polling cycle at every sixth polling cycle. The Frame Relay Forum has not recommended a frequency for the NNI. The cnfport command lets you select a frequency in the range of once every 1-10 polling cycles.

The Frame Relay port or user-device counts a user-specified number of errors out of a user-specified number of attempts before it signals a Port Communication Failure. These parameters are the error threshold and the monitored events count, respectively. The defaults for these parameters are 3 and 4, respectively. To use the defaults in an example: if 3 out of 4 events are either missing or erroneous within the specified time period, the port signals a Port Communication Failure (a minor alarm).

An event has a user-specified amount of time to arrive. The allowed time period for the arrival of a valid event is the number of seconds you assign to a timer. If an enquiry or response is missing or bad within the timer value, the event is failed. Again, using all default values in an example: if the polling verification timer is 15 seconds and no Status Enquiry arrives within that time, the port records a missing Status Enquiry. If no Status Enquiry arrives during the next two 15-second periods, the port signals a Port Communication Failure. In the UNI example in the figure, the third Status Enquiry does not arrive. Note that each time a Status Enquiry arrives, the polling verification timer restarts counting at 0 seconds rather than waiting until the specified number of seconds has elapsed.

Whether the port is on a UNI or NNI, the polling verification timer setting must be longer than the link integrity timer. (Refer to the cnfport parameters table for values.) You cannot set the link integrity timer for the user-equipment with cnfport. Usually, the link integrity timer on user-equipment is 10 seconds, which you can verify by executing dspportstats and counting the number of seconds between statistical updates. On the NNI, you can set both timers (they use either Annex A or Annex D).


Figure 3-21: Signaling Protocol Timing


The data rates available with the 1 Mbps FRI are shown in Table 3-46.


Table 3-46: Data Rates for the 1-Mbps FRI
Port Data Rates in Kbps for 1Mbps FRI

1024

512

256

128

896

448

224

112

768

384

192

64

672

336

168

56

The rules for assigning data rates to the four ports when using the 1 Mbps FRI are:

If the data rate of any port does not exceed 256 Kbps, you can specify all four ports with any available data rates of 256 Kbps or less.

Example

Change queue depths for port 8.1. An explanation of the screen appears after the screen example.

cnfport 5.1 256 n 12000 10000 100 a N N 15 3 4 3 y y 100 Y 1

padma VT SuperUser IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 16:39 GMT Port: 5.1 [ACTIVE ] Interface: FRI-V35 DCE Configured Clock: 256 Kbps Clocking: Normal Measured Rx Clock: 256 Kbps Min Flags / Frames 1 Port ID 0 Port Queue Depth 12000 OAM Pkt Threshold 3 pkts ECN Queue Threshold 10000 T391 Link Intg Timer 10 sec DE Threshold 100 % N391 Full Status Poll 6 cyl signaling Protocol Annex A UNI EFCI Mapping Enabled Yes Asynchronous Status No CLLM Enabled/Tx Timer Yes/100 msec T392 Polling Verif Timer 15 IDE to DE Mapping Yes N392 Error Threshold 3 Interface Control Template N393 Monitored Events Count 4 Lead CTS DSR DCD Communicate Priority No State ON ON ON Upper/Lower RNR Thresh 75%/ 25% Last Command: cnfport 5.1 256 NORMAL 0 12000 10000 100 a N N 15 3 4 3 y y 100 Y 1 Next Command:

The above display shows the following:

  • Port Speed (configured, measured)

256 Kbps
256 Kbps

The screen displays both the configured clock speed and the measured clock speed—256 Kbps for both in this case.

  • Clocking (type)

Normal

Of the two clocking types, the interface uses normal clocking.

  • Port ID

0

The optional Port ID has not been specified.

  • Port Queue Depth

12000

Depth of port queue is set at 12000 bytes.

  • ECN Queue Depth

10000

Port queue must reach 10000 bytes before FECN and BECN bits are set.

  • DE Threshold

100

Port buffer must be 100 percent full before DE frames are dropped.

  • Signaling Protocol

Annex A

The selected protocol for the UNI.

  • Asynchronous Status

N

No asynchronous messages to user-device; wait for polling from user-device.

  • Polling Verify Timer

15

15 seconds heartbeat period.

  • Error Threshold

3

3 failures trigger port communication failure.

  • Monitored Events Count

4

4 events are monitored.

  • Communicate Priority

N

Do not communicate port priority to user-device.

  • Upper RNR Threshold

75

75 percent of buffer capacity triggers receiver not ready condition.

  • Lower RNR Threshold

25

25 percent of buffer capacity clears a receiver not ready condition.

  • Minimum Flags/Frame

1

One flag exists for each FR data frame.

Example

Configure the parameters for the newly upped V.35 port at 13.1. In this case, the only change is the port type: the interface becomes a DTE in this example.

cnfport 13.1

sw180 TN SuperUser IGX 16 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 00:09 GMT Port: 13.1 [ACTIVE ] Interface: V35 DCE Configured Clock: 256 Kbps Clocking: Normal Measured Rx Clock: 0 Kbps Port ID 0 Min Flags / Frames 1 Port Queue Depth 65535 OAM Pkt Threshold 3 pkts ECN Queue Threshold 65535 T391 Link Intg Timer 10 sec DE Threshold 100 % N391 Full Status Poll 6 cyl Signaling Protocol None EFCI Mapping Enabled No Asynchronous Status No CLLM Enabled/Tx Timer No/ 0 msec T392 Polling Verif Timer 15 IDE to DE Mapping Yes N392 Error Threshold 3 Interface Control Template N393 Monitored Events Count 4 Lead CTS DSR DCD Communicate Priority No State ON ON ON Upper/Lower RNR Thresh 75%/ 25% Last Command: cnfport 13.1 DTE 256 NORMAL 0 65535 65535 100 n N N Y Next Command:
Example

Configure Frame Relay port 15.1.

cnfport 15.1

sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2T Dec. 19 2000 22:36 PST Port: 15.1 [ACTIVE ] Interface: FRI-T1 Configured Clock: 1536 Kbps Clocking: None Measured Rx Clock: None Port ID - Min Flags / Frames 1 Port Queue Depth 65535 OAM Pkt Threshold 3 pkts ECN Queue Threshold 65535 T391 Link Intg Timer 10 sec DE Threshold 100 % N391 Full Status Poll 6 cyl Signaling Protocol None EFCI Mapping Enabled No Asynchronous Status No CLLM Enabled/Tx Timer No/ 0 msec T392 Polling Verif Timer 15 IDE to DE Mapping Yes N392 Error Threshold 3 Channel Speed 64 N393 Monitored Events Count 4 Line Number 1 Communicate Priority No Channel Range 1-24 Last Command: cnfport 15.1
Example

Configure Frame Relay port 9.1.

cnfport 9.1

sw108 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.q2 Dec. 20 2000 09:38 GMT Port: 9.1 [ACTIVE ] Interface: V35 DCE Configured Clock: 256 Kbps Clocking: Normal Measured Rx Clock: 0 Kbps Port ID 0 Min Flags / Frames 1 Port Queue Depth 65535 OAM Pkt Threshold 3 pkts ECN Queue Threshold 65535 T391 Link Intg Timer 10 sec DE Threshold 100 % N391 Full Status Poll 6 cyl Signaling Protocol None EFCI Mapping Enabled No Asynchronous Status No CLLM Enabled/Tx Timer No/ 0 msec T392 Polling Verif Timer 15 IDE to DE Mapping Yes N392 Error Threshold 3 Interface Control Template N393 Monitored Events Count 4 Lead CTS DSR DCD Communicate Priority No State ON ON ON Upper/Lower RNR Thresh 75%/ 25% Last Command: cnfport 9.1
Example

Configure port 11.1 on a BXM card with LMI protocol.

cnfport 11.1 353208 N H l 0 31 N 10 10 10 5 5 N 0 N y

sw53 VT Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2o Dec. 5 2000 12:25 GMT Port: 11.1 [ACTIVE ] Bandwidth/AR BW: 353208/353208 Interface: LM-BXM CAC Override: Enabled VPI Range: 0 - 255 CAC Reserve: 0 Type: UNI %Util Use: Disabled Shift: SHIFT ON HCF (Normal Operation) SIG Queue Depth: 640 Port Load: 0 % Protocol: LMI Protocol by Card: Yes VPI.VCI: 0.31 LMI Polling Enabled: N T393 Status Enquiry Timer: 10 T394 Update Status Timer: 10 T396 Polling Timer: 10 N394 Max Status Enquiry Retry: 5 N395 Max Update Status Retry: 5 Last Command: cnfport 11.1 353208 N H l 0 31 N 10 10 10 5 5 N 0 N y
Example

Configure port 11.1 on a BXM card with no protocol.

cnfport 11.1 353208 N H N N 0 N

sw53 VT Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2o Dec. 5 2000 13:08 GMT Port: 11.1 [ACTIVE ] Bandwidth/AR BW: 353208/353208 Interface: LM-BXM CAC Override: Enabled VPI Range: 0 - 255 CAC Reserve: 0 Type: UNI %Util Use: Disabled Shift: SHIFT ON HCF (Normal Operation) SIG Queue Depth: 640 Port Load: 0 % Protocol: NONE Protocol by Card: No Last Command: cnfport 11.1 353208 N H N N 0 N
Example

ILMI, VC Shaping.

cnfport 4.2 N i 0 16 y y 30 3 4 N N 200 0 y y N

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.o9 Dec. 5 2000 13:24 GMT Port: 4.2 [ACTIVE ] Interface: T3 CAC Override: Enabled Type: UNI %Util Use: Disabled Speed: 96000 (cps) GW LCNs: 200 SIG Queue Depth: 640 Reserved BW: 0 (cps) Alloc Bandwidth: 96000 (cps) VC Shaping: Disabled Protocol: ILMI Protocol run on the card: Yes VPI.VCI: 0.16 Neighbor Discovery: Yes ILMI Polling Enabled Y Trap Enabled Y T491 Polling Interval 30 N491 Error Threshold 3 N492 Event Threshold 4 Last Command: cnfport 4.2 N i 0 16 y y 30 3 4 N N 200 0 y y N

cnfportq (configure port queue parameters)

Configures queue parameters for a port on an ASI or BXM card on the BPX, or a UXM card on the IGX. Pressing the Return key keeps the current value for the parameter.

You can use cnfportq to configure Qbin values separately for rt-VBR and nrt-VBR connection types on ports. (To configure the Qbin values for rt-VBR and nrt-VBR classes of service on trunks, use cnftrkparm.) The rt-VBR and nrt-VBR connections use different queues on a port: these are the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR queues, respectively.

For information on configuring trunk queues used by rt-VBR and nrt-VBR connections, see the cnftrkparm command.

The VBR class of service type can be either rt-VBR or nrt-VBR, depending on the way the corresponding port (service) queues (both ingress and egress) are configured. For the nrt-VBR class of service type in this release, the corresponding service queues are large enough to provide efficient bandwidth sharing with other non-real-time service types. The service queues for both rt-VBR and nrt-VBR service types can be configured on a node-by-node basis.

In Release 9.3.0, you can enable connection shaping for BXM queues. (See Hierarchical. Traffic Shaping on the BXM Card.)

Syntax

cnfportq <slot.port>[<.vport>] [<params>]

Parameters (ASI)

Parameter Description

slot.port[.vport]

Specifies the card slot, physical, and optional virtual port number (BXM only). At this time, virtual ports are not available for ASI or UXM cards.

nni/uni

Specifies whether the cell header format is NNI or UNI. Default: UNI

cbr queue parms

Specifies the CBR queue parameters of depth, cbr-hi, cbr-lo, and efci. The ranges are 0 to 24000 for depth and 0 to 100% for all others.

nrt-vbr queue parms

Specifies the nrt-VBR queue parameters of depth, vbr-hi, vbr-low, and efci. The ranges are 0 to 24000 for depth and 0 to 100% for all others.

rt-vbr queue parms

Specifies the rt-VBR queue parameters of depth, vbr-hi, vbr-low, and efci. The ranges are 0 to 24000 for depth and 0 to 100% for all others.

ubr/abr queue parms

Specifies the ABR queue parameters of depth, abr-hi, abr-low, and efci. The ranges are 0 to 24000 for depth and 0 to 100% for all others.

Parameters (UXM)

Parameter Description

slot.port[.vport]

Specifies the card slot, physical, and optional virtual port number (BXM only). At this time, virtual ports are not available for ASI or UXM cards.

nni/uni

Specifies whether the cell header format is NNI or UNI. UNI is the default.

cbr queue parms

Specifies the CBR queue parameters of depth, cbr-hi, cbr-lo, and efci. The ranges are 0 to 97250 for depth and 0 to 100% for all others.

nrt-vbr queue parms

Specifies the nrt-VBR queue parameters of depth, vbr-hi, vbr-low, and efci. The ranges are 0 to 97250 for depth and 0 to 100% for all others.

rt-vbr queue parms

Specifies the rt-VBR queue parameters of depth, vbr-hi, vbr-low, and efci. The ranges are 0 to 97250 for depth and 0 to 100% for all others.

ubr/abr queue parms

Specifies the ABR queue parameters of depth, abr-hi, abr-low, and efci. The ranges are 0 to 97250 for depth and 0 to 100% for all others. UBR traffic shares this queue with the ABR traffic.

The total queue size of the UXM card is 97250 cells.

Parameters (BXM)

Parameter Description

slot.port[.vport]

Specifies the card slot, physical port, and optional virtual port (BXM card only). The optional vport identifier must be between 1-31 inclusive.

VC traffic shaping, connection shaping

Weighted fair queuing (WFQ) can be enabled on a per QoS/Qbin basis. This field is only configurable for BXM cards that support VC shaping. As of Release 9.3.0, VC shaping for BXM cards is no longer enabled on a per line bases. It is now done on a per Qbin/QoS basis.

Enable/disable connection shaping within a virtual port. This feature is based on QoS. For example, all CBR connections can have traffic shaping, but all ABR connections may have traffic shaping disabled. The default setting is disabled.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

upport, dnport, dspportq

Example (BPX)

Configure the port queue for port 6.3 on a BXM card.

cnfportq 6.3

sw167 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 08:59 PST Port: 6.3 [ACTIVE ] Interface: LM-BXM Type: UNI AR Bandwidth: 353208 (cps) QUEUE DEPTH CLP HI CLP LO EFCI VC SHAPE /EPD CBR 600 80% 60% 60% DISABLED rt-VBR 5000 80% 60% 60% DISABLED nrt-VBR 5000 80% 60% 60% DISABLED UBR/ABR 20000 80% 60% 20% DISABLED Last Command: cnfportq 6.3
Example (IGX)

Configure the port queue for port 5.3 on a UXM card.

cnfportq 5.3

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 08:29 GMT Port: 5.3 [ACTIVE ] Interface: OC3 Type: UNI Speed: 353208 (cps) Alloc Bandwidth: 353208 (cps) CBR Queue Depth: 600 rt-VBR Queue Depth: 5000 CBR Queue CLP High Threshold: 80% rt-VBR Queue CLP High Threshold: 80% CBR Queue CLP Low Threshold: 60% rt-VBR Queue CLP Low Threshold: 60% CBR Queue EFCI Threshold: 60% rt-VBR Queue EFCI Threshold: 60% nrt-VBR Queue Depth: 5000 ABR Queue Depth: 20000 nrt-VBR Queue CLP High Threshold: 80% ABR Queue CLP High Threshold: 80% nrt-VBR Queue CLP Low Threshold: 60% ABR Queue CLP Low Threshold: 60% nrt-VBR Queue EFCI Threshold: 60% ABR Queue EFCI Threshold: 20% Last Command: cnfportq 5.3

cnfportstats (configure port statistics collection)

Configures parameters for statistics collection on ports. The primary purpose of this command is debugging. Table 3-47 lists the configurable statistics for a Frame Relay port. For port statistics in general, refer to the actual cnfportstats screens on a node. Not all statistic types are applied to all ports.

Qbin statistics are Cells Served, Cells Discarded, and Cells Received.

Here is a summary of all Qbin statistics collected by the BPX and IGX:

All other Qbins are unused, and the switch does not provide statistics for them. Starting in switch software release 9.3.10, the switch provides the collection of Qbin Cells Discarded statistics via SNMP for the above mentioned Qbins.

Syntax
cnfportstats <port> <stat> <interval> <e|d> [<samples> <size> <peaks>]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<port>

Specifies the port to configure.

<stat>

Specifies the type of statistic to enable/disable.

<interval>

Specifies the time interval of each sample.
Range:1-255 minutes

<e|d>

Enables/disables a statistic. E to enable; D to disable.

[samples]

Specifies the number of samples to collect.
Range: 1-255

[size]

Specifies the number of bytes per data sample.
Range: 1, 2 or 4

[peaks]

Enables the collection of one minute peaks. Y to enable; N to disable.


Table 3-47:
Configurable Statistics for a Frame Relay Port
Type Statistic

1-4

Total frames and bytes transmitted and received.

5-6

Frames transmitted with FECN and BECN set.

7-10

Frames received with problems: CRC errors, invalid format, frame alignment errors, wrong length frames.

11

Number of direct memory access (DMA) overruns on a Frame Relay port that are probably due to excessive user-data input.

12-17

LMI counts on UNI ports. These include status inquiries, status transmit and update requests, invalid inquiries, and LMI link time-outs.

18

Frames received with DLCIs in error.

19

Frames dropped with DE bit set.

20-24

LMI counts on NNI ports: status inquiries, status receive and update requests, LMI link time-outs, keep-alive sequence errors.

25-26

Frame and byte count totals for Consolidated Link Layer Message (CLLM) frames that transmit Optimized Bandwidth Management messages.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnftrkstats, dsportstathist, dsporterrs, dsptrkstathist, cnfstatparm, dspphyslnstats, dspphyslnstathist

Example (UXM on IGX)

cnfportstats 5.3

------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 07:57 GMT Port Statistic Types 34) PORT: Unknwn VPI/VCI cnt 48) PORT: # of cells rcvd 35) VI: Cells rcvd w/CLP=1 49) PORT: # of cells xmt 36) VI: OAM cells received 51) INVMUX: HEC cell errors 37) VI: Cells tx w/CLP=1 52) INVMUX: LCP cell errors 39) VI: Cells received w/CLP=0 53) INVMUX: Cell Hunt Count 40) VI: Cells discarded w/CLP=0 54) INVMUX: Bandwidth Change Count 41) VI: Cells discarded w/CLP=1 55) ILMI: Get Req PDUs rcvd 42) VI: Cells transmitted w/CLP=0 56) ILMI: GetNxt Req PDUS rx 43) VI: OAM cells transmitted 57) ILMI: GetNxt Req PDUS xmt 44) VI: RM cells received 58) ILMI: Set Req PDUs rcvd 45) VI: RM cells transmitted 59) ILMI: Trap PDUs rcvd 46) VI: Cells transmitted 60) ILMI: Get Rsp PDUs rcvd 47) VI: Cells received 61) ILMI: Get Req PDUs xmt This Command: cnfportstats 5.3 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 07:57 GMT Port Statistic Types 62) ILMI: Get Rsp PDUs xmt 75) LMI: Invalid LMI PDU length rcvd 63) ILMI: Set Req PDUs xmt 76) LMI: Unknown LMI PDUs rcvd 64) ILMI: Trap PDUs xmt 77) LMI: Invalid LMI IE rcvd 65) ILMI: Unknwn PDUs rcvd 78) LMI: Invalid Transaction IDs 66) LMI: Status messages xmt 79) INVMUX: Unavailable Seconds 67) LMI: Updt Status msgs xmt 80) INVMUX: Near End Fail Count 68) LMI: Status Ack msgs xmt 81) INVMUX: Last Proto Fail Code 69) LMI: Status Enq msgs rcvd 82) INVMUX: Slowest Link 70) LMI: Status Enq msgs xmt 86) Q2 Cells Tx 71) LMI: Status msgs rcvd 87) Tx Q2 CDscd 72) LMI: Updt Status msg rcvd 88) Egr CRx Q2 73) LMI: Status Ack msg rcvd 89) Q3 Cells Tx 74) LMI: Invalid LMI PDUs rcvd 90) Tx Q3 CDscd This Command: cnfportstats 5.3 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 07:58 GMT Port Statistic Types 91) Egr CRx Q3 113) Q11 Cells Tx 101) Q7 Cells Tx 114) Tx Q11 CDscd 102) Tx Q7 CDscd 115) Egr CRx Q11 103) Egr CRx Q7 116) Q12 Cells Tx 104) Q8 Cells Tx 117) Tx Q12 CDscd 105) Tx Q8 CDscd 118) Egr CRx Q12 106) Egr CRx Q8 119) Q13 Cells Tx 107) Q9 Cells Tx 120) Tx Q13 CDscd 108) Tx Q9 CDscd 121) Egr CRx Q13 109) Egr CRx Q9 122) Q14 Cells Tx 110) Q10 Cells Tx 123) Tx Q14 CDscd 111) Tx Q10 CDscd 124) Egr CRx Q14 112) Egr CRx Q10 125) Q15 Cells Tx This Command: cnfportstats 5.3 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 4----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 07:59 GMT Port Statistic Types 126) Tx Q15 CDscd 127) Egr CRx Q15 This Command: cnfportstats 5.3 Statistic Type:
Example (BXM on BPX) Node

cnfportstats 6.3

------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw167 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 08:14 PST Port Statistic Types 1) Unknown VPI/VCI count 24) Get Request PDUs transmitted 8) Number of cells received 25) Get Response PDUs transmitted 9) Number of cells rcvd w/CLP set 26) Trap PDUs transmitted 12) Number of cells xmitted 27) Unknown ILMI PDUs Received 13) OAM cells received count 28) Status messages transmitted 15) Number of cells xmitted w/CLP set 29) Update Status messages transmitted 18) Get Request PDUs received 30) Status Acknowledge msgs transmitted 19) Get Next Request PDUS received 31) Status Enquiry messages received 20) Get Next Request PDUS transmitted 32) Status Enquiry mesgs transmitted 21) Set Request PDUs received 33) Status messages received 22) Trap PDUs received 34) Update Status messages received 23) Get Response PDUs received 35) Status Acknowledge messages received This Command: cnfportstats 6.3 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw167 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 08:15 PST Port Statistic Types 36) Invalid LMI PDUs received received 48) Last unknown VPI/VCI pair 37) Invalid LMI PDU length received 49) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 0 38) Unknown LMI PDUs received 50) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 0 39) Invalid LMI IE received 51) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 0 40) Invalid Transaction IDs 52) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 1 41) Number of cells rcvd w/clp 0 53) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 1 42) Number of cells dscd w/clp 0 54) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 1 43) Number of cells dscd w/clp set 55) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 2 44) Number of cells tx w/clp 0 56) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 2 45) Tx OAM cell count 57) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 2 46) Rx RM cell count 58) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 3 47) Tx RM cell count 59) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 3 This Command: cnfportstats 6.3 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- sw167 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 08:16 PST Port Statistic Types 60) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 3 87) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 12 76) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 9 88) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 13 77) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 9 89) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 13 78) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 9 90) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 13 79) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 10 91) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 14 80) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 10 92) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 14 81) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 10 93) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 14 82) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 11 94) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 15 83) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 11 95) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 15 84) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 11 96) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 15 85) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 12 86) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 12 This Command: cnfportstats 6.3 Statistic Type:

cnfpref (configured preferred route for connections)

Specifies the preferred route for a connection or range of connections. Enter cnfpref only at a node that is an end point of the connection. This command applies only to connections that exist within a domain. Do not attempt to execute cnfpref on connections that exist between domains.

The preferred route for a connection is used when possible. If the preferred route is different from the existing route, the connection automatically moves to the preferred route whenever network conditions allow (for example, when trunks are out of alarm and sufficient bandwidth exists).

Syntax

cnfpref <channel | *> <route + | -> [d]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel | *>

Specifies the channel or range of channels for preferred route configuration. The channel specifier has one of the following formats:

  • Voice connection: slot.channel

  • Data connection: slot.port

  • Frame Relay connection: slot.port.DLCI

A "*" specifies all locally owned connections and applies only to the "+" and "-".

<route + | ->

Designates the preferred route for the connection(s) to take through the network. The route is designated by one or more "trunk/node name" pairs. At a given node alpha, for example, entering a route of "12/delta 6/epsilon", would route the connection from alpha to delta via delta's trunk 12. The connection would then go from delta to epsilon via epsilon's trunk 6. A "+" causes the connection's current route to become the preferred route. A "-" removes the connection's preferred route designation.

[d]

Specifies directed routing. If the preferred route is not available, the connection is failed.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsprts

Example

Select the preferred route for channel 14.1 to be through beta trunk 13 to beta then to gamma trunk 15. For gamma, the "d" in the command specifies that the route is directed.

cnfpref 14.1 13/beta 15/gamma d

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:22 PST From 14.1 Route 14.1 alpha 14--13beta 15--15gamma Pref:(D) alpha 14--13beta 15--15gamma Last Command: cnfpref 14.1 13/beta 15/gamma d Next Command:
Example

Remove the preferred route for channel 6.4.

cnfpref 6.4 -

Example

Designate the current routing of all locally owned connections to be the preferred routing. Using a "-" instead of a "+" in the command would remove the preferred routing designation of all locally owned connections.

cnfpref * +

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:48 PST Chan/Grp Route 5.1 alpha 10-- 7beta Pref: alpha 10-- 7beta 9.1.100 alpha 14--13beta 15--15gamma Pref: alpha 14--13beta 15--15gamma 9.1.200 alpha 10-- 7beta 15--15gamma Pref: alpha 10-- 7beta 15--15gamma 9.2.400 alpha 10-- 7beta Pref: alpha 10-- 7beta Last Command: cnfpref * + Next Command:

cnfprt (configure printing functions)

Configures the printing function. To obtain local or remote printing at a node, a printer must connect to the AUX PORT. Also, the configuration must include the correct baud rate and printer type for the port. Use the cnfterm and cnftermfunc commands to do this.

The cnfprt and cnftermfunc commands interact. If the auxiliary port on the node is configured for either an External Device Window or the Network Management Log, a "local" printing configuration automatically changes to "no printing." Printing is not possible because the auxiliary port is being used for another purpose.

Establishing a virtual terminal connection with a node does not affect the printing location established for the node that initiates the virtual terminal connection. For example, if node alpha is configured so that all alpha information goes to a printer at node beta and if alpha establishes a virtual terminal connection with node gamma, the results of print commands entered on the alpha keyboard still print at beta. Furthermore, this occurs regardless of the printing location configured for node gamma.

Syntax

cnfprt <mode> <remote node name>

Parameters

Parameter Description

mode

Specifies the printing mode. Enter:
"L" for local printing
"R" for remote printing
"n" for no printing

remote node name

Specifies the remote node whose printer is used for print commands issued by a user who is physically logged on to this node. This option is valid only when remote printing has been selected. A remote node is one within the domain, but not the node where the command is entered.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfterm, dsptermfunc

Example

Change the configured printing.

cnfprt

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8410 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 13:17 PST Printing Mode Remote Printing at beta Local Printing No Printing This Command: cnfprt Select Local (l), Remote (r), or None (n):

cnfpwd (configure password)

Changes the password associated with a User ID. To change a password, you must log into the node with the User ID whose password you want to change. Passwords are case-sensitive.

In a structured network, each domain requires you to have a password. In each domain, your password and associated privilege level can be the same as or different from those in the other domains. For each domain, you can change the password at any node within the domain, including a junction node.

Syntax

cnfpwd <old password> <new password>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<old password>

Specifies the old password.

<new password>

Specifies the new password. Passwords must have 6-15 characters. Only letters, numbers, "_", and "-" are allowed in a password. Spaces are not allowed.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsppwd, adduser, deluser, dspusers

Example

Change your password.

cnfpwd

cnfqbin (configure Qbin)

Configure the Qbin (class of service buffers) on a selected UXM or BXM port, physical trunk, or virtual trunk. The cnfqbin command prompts you whether "template" should be used for Qbin parameters.

As an option, you can accept the default values from the interface service class template. For example, you can type in Yes when prompted whether the interface service class template (SCT) should be used, and the command will use the Qbin values from the Qbin templates. You will not be allowed to enter values for any Qbin parameter in this case. If you do not choose the template option, you can enter desired values.

When a VSI interface is activated, the default template (MPLS1) is assigned to an interface. The corresponding Qbin template is copied into the card Qbin data structure for that interface. When you want to change this, by giving new values using the cnfQbin command, the Qbin is now user configured as opposed to template configured. This information is displayed on the dspQbin screen. It indicates whether the values in the Qbin are from the template assigned to the interface OR the values have been changed to user-defined values.

There are 16 Qbins (numbered 0 through 15) per interface. Only Qbins 10-15 are used by VSI and they are the only VSI Qbins you can configure.

To fine tune traffic delay, use the cnfqbin command to adjust the thresholds for the traffic arriving in the VSI Qbins for a given interface.

If you use the cnfqbin command to set an existing Qbin to disabled, the egress of the connection traffic to the network is disabled. Re-enable the Qbin to restore the egress traffic.


Note   Cell delay variation (CDV) is based on the Qbin depths and the transmission speed of the virtual switch interface. The default Qbin depths are specified in the service class templates (SCTs). You can configure the Qbin depths by using the cnfqbin command.
Cell tolerance delay (CTD), which is the fixed delay, is based on a fixed value, and is not configurable.

Syntax

cnfqbin <slot number>.<port number>.<vtrk>

Parameters (UXM)

Parameter Description

slot.port.vtrk

Specifies the UXM card slot, port, and virtual trunk number.

Qbin ID

Specifies the ID number of the Qbin available for use by the LSC (MPLS Controller) for VSI.
Range: 10-15

Enable Qbin

Answer yes or no to enable your Qbin configuration.

Qbin Discard Threshold

Specifies the Qbin depth in units of cells.

CLP Low Threshold

Specifies the threshold in percentage for CLP low.
Range: 0-100

CLP High Threshold

Specifies the threshold in percentage for CLP high.
Range: 0-100

EFCI threshold

Specifies the threshold in percentage for EFCI.
Range: 0-100

Parameters (BXM)

Parameter Description

slot.port

Specifies the BXM card slot and port number.

Qbin ID

Specifies the ID number of the Qbin available for use by VSI controller.
Range: 10-15

Enable Qbin

Answer yes or no to enable your Qbin configuration.

Minimum Bandwidth

Specifies the minimum bandwidth in cells per second available for the Qbin.
Range: 0-352207
Default: 0

Qbin Discard Threshold

Specifies the Qbin depth in units of cells.

CLP Low Threshold

Specifies the threshold in percentage for CLP low.
Range: 0-100

CLP High Threshold

Specifies the threshold in percentage for CLP high.
Range: 0-100

EFCI threshold

Specifies the threshold in percentage for EFCI.
Range: 0-100

Template

Specifies that the interface service class template should be used to configure the Qbin parameters. Thus the cnfqbin command will use the card's Qbin values from the Qbin template. If you do not choose the template option, you can enter your preferred values for the Qbin parameters.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Related Commands

dspqbin, dspqbint

Example (UXM)

Configure Qbin 10 for UXM port 3.1 on the IGX.

cnfqbin 3.1 10

bently TN Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.10 Aug. 3 2000 13:30 PST Qbin Database 3.1 on UXM Qbin 10 (Configured by MPLS1 Template) (EPD Enabled on this Qbin) Qbin State: Enabled Discard Threshold: 65536 c9.3.10ells EPD Threshold: 95% High CLP Threshold: 100% EFCI Threshold: 100% This Command: cnfqbin 3.1 10 'E' to Enable, 'D' to Disable [E]:
Example (UXM)

Configure the Qbin 10 for port 3.1. Change the Discard Threshold from 65535 to 64000 and change Low EDP Threshold from 95% to 90%.

cnfqbin 3.1 10

bently TN Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.10 Aug. 3 2000 13:36 PST Qbin Database 3.1 on UXM Qbin 10 (Configured by User) (EPD Enabled on this Qbin) Qbin State: Enabled Discard Threshold: 64000 cells EPD Threshold: 90% High CLP Threshold: 100% EFCI Threshold: 100% Last Command: cnfqbin 3.1 10 E N 64000 90 100 100 Next Command: Minor Alarm
Example

You can also set the previous parameters for Qbin 15:

cnfqbin 3.1 15 E N 64000 90 100 100

bently TN Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.10 Aug. 3 2000 13:39 PST Qbin Database 3.1 on UXM Qbin 15 (Configured by User) (EPD Enabled on this Qbin) Qbin State: Enabled Discard Threshold: 64000 cells EPD Threshold: 95% High CLP Threshold: 100% EFCI Threshold: 100% Last Command: cnfqbin 3.1 15 E N 64000 95 100 100 Next Command:
Example (BXM)

Configure the parameters of Qbin 10 on BXM OC-3 port 4.1.

cnfqbin 14.1 10

sw143 TRM Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.10 Aug. 2 2000 17:01 GMT Qbin Database 4.1 on BXM Qbin 10 (Configured by MPLS1 Template) (EPD Enabled on this Qbin) Qbin State: Enabled Discard Threshold: 105920 cells EPD Threshold: 95% High CLP Threshold: 100% EFCI Threshold: 100% This Command: cnfqbin 4.1 10 'E' to Enable, 'D' to Disable [E]:
Example (BXM)

Configure Qbin 11 for BXM OC-3 trunk 4.2. Change the Qbin Discard threshold from 105920 to 100000 cells.

cnfqbin 4.2 11

sw143 TRM Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.10 Aug. 2 2000 17:10 GMT Qbin Database 4.2 on BXM Qbin 11 (Configured by User) (EPD Enabled on this Qbin) Qbin State: Enabled Discard Threshold: 100000 cells EPD Threshold: 95% High CLP Threshold: 100% EFCI Threshold: 100% Last Command: cnfqbin 4.2 11 E N 100000 95 100 100
Example (BXM)

You can also set the previous parameters for Qbin 15:

cnfqbin 4.2 15 E N 100000 95 100 100

sw143 TRM Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.10 Aug. 2 2000 17:16 GMT Qbin Database 4.2 on BXM Qbin 15 (Configured by User) (EPD Enabled on this Qbin) Qbin State: Enabled Discard Threshold: 100000 cells EPD Threshold: 95% High CLP Threshold: 100% EFCI Threshold: 100% Last Command: cnfqbin 4.2 15 E N 100000 95 100 100 Next Command:

Qbin Dependencies

The available Qbin parameters are shown in Table 3-48. Notice that the Qbins available for VSI are restricted to Qbins 10-15 for that interface.

There are 9 Qbin templates. Each Qbin template is associated with one corresponding service class template. For Qbin default settings, see Table 3-49.

Only MPLS1 (template 1) may be used with IGX.


Table 3-48: Available Qbin Parameters
Template Object Name Template Units Template Range/Values

Qbin Number

enumeration

0-15 (10-15 valid for VSI)

Max Qbin Threshold

msec

1-2000000

Qbin CLP High Threshold

% of max Qbin threshold

0-100

Qbin CLP Low Threshold

% of max Qbin threshold

0-100

EFCI Threshold

% of max Qbin threshold

0-100

Discard Selection

enumeration

1: CLP Hysteresis
2: Frame Discard

Weighted Fair Queueing

enable/disable

0: Disable
1: Enable

This table lists cnfqbin parameters with possible values and ranges.

.


Table 3-49: Qbin Default Settings
Qbin Max Qbin Threshold (usec) CLP High CLP Low/EPD EFCI Discard Selection
LABEL
Template 1

10 (Null, Signaling, Tag0,4)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

11 (Tag1,5)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

12 (Tag2,6)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

13 (Default, Tag3,7)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

14 (Tag Abr)

300,000

100%

95%

6%

EPD

15 (Tag unused)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

PNNI
Templates 2 (with policing) and 3

10 (Null, CBR)

4200

80%

60%

100%

CLP

11 (VbrRt)

53000

80%

60%

100%

EPD

12 (VbrNrt, Signaling)

53000

80%

60%

100%

EPD

13 (Default, Ubr)

105000

80%

60%

100%

EPD

14 (Abr)

105000

80%

60%

20%

EPD

15 (Unused)

105000

80%

60%

100%

EPD

Full Support for ATMF and reduced support for Tag CoS without Tag-Abr
Templates 4 (with policing) and 5

10 (Tag 0,4,1,5, Default, UBR, Tag-Abr*)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

11 (VbrRt)

53000

80%

60%

100%

EPD

12 (VbrNrt, Signaling)

53000

80%

60%

100%

EPD

13 (Tag 2,6,3,7)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

14 (Abr)

105000

80%

60%

20%

EPD

15 (Cbr)

4200

80%

60%

100%

CLP

Full Support for Tag ABR and ATMF without Tag CoS Templates 6 (with policing) and 7

10 (Tag 0,4,1,5,2,6,3,7 Default, UBR)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

11 (VbrRt)

53000

80%

60%

100%

EPD

12 (VbrNrt, Signaling)

53000

80%

60%

100%

EPD

13 (Tag-Abr)

300,000

100%

95%

6%

EPD

14 (Abr)

105000

80%

60%

20%

EPD

15 (Cbr)

4200

80%

60%

100%

CLP

Full Support for Tag CoS and reduced support for ATMF Templates 8 (with policing) and 9

10 (Cbr, Vbr-rt)

4200

80%

60%

100%

CLP

11 (Vbr-nrt, Abr, Signaling)

53000

80%

60%

20%

EPD

12 (Ubr, Tag 0,4)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

13 (Tag 1, 5, Tag-Abr)

300,000

100%

95%

6%

EPD

14 (Tag 2,6)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

15 (Tag 3, 7)

300,000

100%

95%

100%

EPD

cnfrcvsig (configure receive signaling)

Configures the receive signaling bits for a voice channel. Channel signaling bit options are:

If signaling is set to "not used" (-) by using cnfchtp, the following condition is maintained: A=1, B=1, C=0, D=1.

Syntax

cnfrcvsig <channel(s)> <[A/]Conv> <[B/]Conv> <[C/]Conv> <[D/]Conv>

Parameters

Parameter Description

channel

Specifies the channel or range of channels to receive signaling.

A/

Optionally specifies the conversion applied to the A bit. <Conv> can be one of:

1: bit is asserted.
0: bit is inhibited.
T: bit is passed transparently.
I: bit is inverted.

B/

Optionally specifies the conversion applied to the B bit.

C/

Optionally specifies the conversion applied to the C bit.

D/

Optionally specifies the conversion applies to the D bit.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfxmtsig, dspsigqual

Example

Configure channel 8.1 signaling to transparent for the A-bit, inhibited for the B-bit, inverted for the C-bit and D-bits.

cnfrcvsig 8.1 A/T B/0 C/I D/I

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 11:36 MST Signaling Qualifiers From 8.1 TXA-bit TXB-bit TXC-bit TXD-bit RXA-bit RXB-bit RXC-bit RXD-bit 8.1 T T T T T 0 I I 8.2-31 T T T T T T T T Last Command: cnfrcvsig 8.1 A/T B/0 C/I D/I Next Command:

cnfrobparm (configure robust alarms parameters)

Sets parameters associated with the Robust Alarms feature. Robust Alarms is a protocol for node-to-Network Management System (NMS) communications. When a node has statistics or alarm information for the NMS, it requires a confirmation from the NMS that the database has been updated.

In Release 9.2 and higher, there are robust alarms for certain alarm conditions that appear in the maintenance log or in the node user interface but are not also reported as SNMP traps to the customer NMS. (Such traps are generated by the Cisco WAN Manager RTM proxy upon receiving Robust Alarms from a switch.) Robust Alarm messages are generated by the following alarm conditions:

The BPX and the IGX generate power supply, temperature, and fan alarms.

Syntax

cnfrobparm <index> <value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<index>

Specifies the parameter to configure.

<value>

Specifies new value to be entered for the parameter.

Parameter Values

No. Parameter Description Default

1

Robust State wakeup timer

The Robust State machine becomes active after the specified time period has elapsed. If this timer value increases, the state machine operates less often and places less load on the controller card. Units of measure are seconds.

10 seconds

2

Robust update timer

Once a message has gone to the NMS, another message does not go until this timer expires. Units of measure are seconds.

10 seconds

3

Robust acknowledgment time-out

An acknowledgment must be returned by the NMS within this time period or it is assumed the communications link is down. Units of measure are seconds.

600 seconds

4

Robust acknowledgment reset timeout

After a downed link has been repaired, the next message goes out after this time period has elapsed. The purpose of this time period is to let the link settle after the repair. Units of measure are seconds.

60 seconds

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

No

BPX, IGX

Yes

Example (IGX)

cnfrobparm

a34 TRM SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:02 PDT Robust Parameters 1 Robust State wakeup timer (sec) .................................. 10 2 Robust update timer (sec) ........................................ 10 3 Robust acknowledge timeout (sec) .................................600 4 Robust acknowledge reset timeout (sec) ...........................60 This Command: cnfrobparm Which parameter do you wish to change:

cnfrsrc (configure resource)

Use the cnfrsrc command to partition resources for:

If you want to configure resources for a VSI-MPLS controller or PNNI SVCs, refer to the subsequent BPX- and IGX-specific command definitions.

Up to two controllers of the same type can be attached to a node and assigned the same partition to provide controller redundancy on that partition. A different set of controllers can be attached to the node and be assigned a different partition to provide controller redundancy on this second partition.

You can configure a virtual trunk to be dedicated to VSI or to Automatic Routing Management. You cannot configure a virtual trunk for both VSI and Automatic Routing Management.

This command supports physical trunks and virtual trunks. After VSI has been enabled, the virtual trunk becomes a "dedicated" VSI virtual trunk. If the trunk has already been added or if the VPI value has not been configured, switch software will prevent you from configuring the VPI value.

The switch software:

Configurable Resources

You can use cnfrsrc to configure these resources:

The resources that you can configure are the number of connection IDs (conids) and the trunk bandwidth. You use the cnfrsrc command to configure the cell rate and number of connections on a BXM card only. (You cannot use the cnfrsrc command on the IGX.)

You configure all port and trunk attributes by using cnftrk, cnftrkparm, or cnfrsrc. When you change a physical port attribute, you are notified that all the logical (physical and virtual) trunks on the port are affected.

When using cnfrsrc to configure partition resources for Automatic Routing Management PVCs, you are prompted whether you want to configure VSI options. Enter "n" for No. You will not be prompted to enter any VSI options.

Use the cnfrsrc command to configure conids (lcns) and bandwidth. The conid capacity indicates the number of connection channels on the trunk port which are usable by the virtual trunk.

This number cannot be greater than the total number of connection channels on the card. The maximum number of channels is additionally limited by the number of VCI bits in the UNI cell header. For a virtual trunk, the number is divided by the maximum number of virtual trunks on the port to determine the default. Use the cnfsrc command to configure this value on the BPX. Table 3-50 lists the number of connection IDs for virtual trunks on various cards.


Table 3-50: Maximum Connection IDs (LCNs)
Port Type Maximum Conids Default

BXM/UXM

1-(number of channels on the card)

256

BNI T3/E3

1-1771

256

BNI OC-3

1-15867 (3837 max/vtrk

256

Syntax

cnfrsrc <slot>.<port> <.vport> <maxpvclcns> <maxpvcbw> <partition> <e/d> <minvsilcns> <maxvsilcns> <vsistartvpi> <vsiendvpi><vsiminbw> <vsimaxbw>

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port.vtrk

Specifies the BXM card slot and port number and virtual trunk.

Maximum PVC LCNs

The maximum number of LCNs allocated for Automatic Routing Management PVCs for this port. The range depends upon the card type; (1-11771 for the BNI T/E3 and 1-15867 for the BNI OC) 256 is the default. The default is 256 only if 256 are available. If other ports and trunks on the card have been configured to use LCNs such that there are only 100 remaining, then the default value for the newly added port would be 100. In this instance trunk upping would be blocked indicating that there are not enough LCNs to support the trunk.

For trunks, there are additional LCNs allocated for Automatic Routing Management that are not configurable.

You can use the dspcd <slot> command to display the maximum number of LCNs you can configure using the cnfrsrc command for the given port. For trunks, configurable LCNs represent the LCNs remaining after the BCC has subtracted the networking LCNs needed. A trunk has 270 networking LCNs, or channels. You can use the dspcd command to display VSI channels also.

For a port card, a larger number is shown, as compared with a trunk card. This is because a trunk uses 270 networking LCNs, as compared with a port card, which uses no networking LCNs. You can use dspcd to display VSI channels also.

Setting this field to "0" would disable Automatic Routing Management PVCs on the specified port.


    Note   You must specify a value greater than 0 for the Maximum PVC LCNs, Maximum PVC Bandwidth, and Maximum VSI LCNs parameters. Otherwise, you will not be able to create any Automatic Routing Management connections on a BXM card. Also, if these parameters do not have values greater than 0, you will be unable to change the connection channel amount when you configure the BXM trunk by using cnftrk.

Logical Interface (slot.port [.vtrk] for trunks and slot.port for lines).

The bandwidth is logical interface based.

Default: the line rate of this interface.

Maximum PVC Bandwidth

Specifies the maximum bandwidth of the port allocated for Automatic Routing Management use depends upon the card type; (1-11771 for the BNI T/E3 and 1-15867 for the BNI OC); 256 is the default. The default is 256 only if 256 is available. If other ports and trunks on the card have been configured to use LCNs such that there are only 100 remaining, then the default value for the newly added port would be 100. In this instance trunk upping would be blocked indicating that there are not enough LCNs to support the trunk.

You can configure the Maximum PVC Bandwidth value for ports, but not for trunks.


    Note   You must specify a value greater than 0 for the Maximum PVC LCNs, Maximum PVC Bandwidth, and Maximum VSI LCNs parameters. Otherwise, you will not be able to create any Automatic Routing Management PVCs on the BXM card.

You can define the PVC VPI ranges for AutoRoute connections by using the cnfrsrc command. However, overlapping of the PVC and VSI VPI ranges are allowed only on a physical port or feeder trunk interface. When configuring the overlapping ranges, you will receive a warning of "Warning - VPI overlaps with AR range x". The command will be stopped if you answer y and will proceed if you answers n. The cnfrsrc screen contains a warning message: Note that the "*" next to the VPI fields indicate the overlapping PVC (AutoRoute and VSI VPI ranges).

Configure PVC VCI Range

You will be prompted when configuring a port or feeder trunk only. Answer Yes or No to begin configuring the PVC VPI range. Enter Y if you are migrating PVCs on this interface to PNNI SPVCs, otherwise answer N. If you enter Y, you will be prompted for the four PVC VPI ranges.

Start of PVC VPI range x

You can define 4 VPI ranges. ALl the existing PVCs have to be using a VPI in one of the defined PVC VIP ranges.

End of PVC VPI range x

Together with Start of PVC VPI range, it defines a VPI range for PVCs.

Configure Partition

Answer yes or no to begin configuring resources for the partition. To configure Automatic Routing Management PVCs, enter n for No. You will not be prompted to enter VSI options to configure VSI partition resources.
However, if you want to configure VSI options, enter y for yes, and you will be prompted to configure partition resources for VSI. (Refer to the cnfrsrc command in "VSI Commands" chapter for more information on VSI-related options

Partition ID

Specifies the ID number of the partition. In previous releases, use 1. In release 9.1, use 1 for the partition ID.
Default: 0
Range: 1 - 3

Enable Partition

Answer yes or no to enable your configured partition.

Minimum VSI LCNs

The minimum number of LCNs guaranteed for this partition. Range is from 0 to card limit: 0 is the default. The VSI controller guarantees at least this many connection endpoints in the partition, provided there are sufficient free LCNs in the common pool to satisfy the request at the time the partition is added. When a new partition is added or the value is increased, it may be that existing connections have depleted the common pool so that there are not enough free LCNs to satisfy the request. The BXM gives priority to the request when LCNs are freed. The net effect is that the partition may not receive all the guaranteed LCNs (min LCNs) until other LCNs are returned to the common pool.

You can increase this value dynamically when there are enough unallocated LCNs in the port group to satisfy the increase.

You may not decrease the value dynamically. All partitions in the same port group must be deleted first and reconfigured in order to reduce this value.

To avoid this deficit condition, which could occur with maximum LCN usage by a partition or partitions, it is recommended that all partitions be configured ahead of time before adding connections. Also, it is recommended that all partitions be configured before adding a VSI controller by using the addshelf command.

Maximum VSI LCNs

The total number of LCNs the partition is allowed for setting up connections. The min LCNs is included in this calculation. If max LCNs equals min LCNs, then the max LCNs are guaranteed for this partition.

Otherwise, (max - min) LCNs are allocated from the common pool on a FIFO basis.

If the common pool is exhausted, new connection setup requests will be rejected for the partition, even though the maximum LCNs has not been reached.

You may increase this value dynamically when there are enough unallocated LCNs in the port group to satisfy the increase.

You may not decrease the value dynamically. All partitions in the same port group must be deleted first and reconfigured in order to reduce this value.

Different types of BXM cards support different maximum values. If you enter a value greater than the allowed maximum, a message is displayed with the allowable maximum value.


    Note   You must specify a value greater than 0 for the Maximum VSI LCNs, Maximum PVC Channels, and Maximum PVC Bandwidth parameters. Otherwise, you will not be able to add any connections on a BXM card.

Start VSI VPI

By default the LSC (for example, the 6400, 7200 or 7500 series router) will use either a starting VSI VPI of 1 or 2 for MPLS, whichever is available. If both are available, a starting VSI VPI of 1 is used. The VPI range should be 2-15 on a BPX  8620 VSI. The VSI range for MPLS on the BPX 8620 is configured as a VSI partition, usually VSI partition number 1. VSI VPI 1 is reserved for Automatic Routing Management PVCs. (This restriction applies only to trunks, not to ports. For a port, you can use any VPI value.) For a port UNI, the VPI range is 1 to 255. For a port NNI, the range is 1 to 4095. For trunks that do not have Automatic Routing Management configured, the VPI ranges are the same as for ports.

The VSI partition for MPLS should start at VPI 2. If VPI 2 is not to be used, you can use the MPLS VPI interface configuration on the LSC to override the defaults.

For trunks with Automatic Routing Management configured, the range is 2 to 4095. Always set to 2 for trunks. For ports in port mode it should be set to "1". By default the LSC (for example, 6400, 7200 or 7500 series router) will use either a starting VSI VPI of 1 or 2 for label switching, whichever is available. Default: 1

End VSI VPI

Two VPIs are sufficient, although it may be advisable to reserve a larger range of VPIs for later expansion, for example, VPIs 2-15.

Range: <Start VSI VPI > value to 4095.

Minimum VSI Bandwidth

The minimum port bandwidth that can be used by this partition in cells per second.

Range: 0 to <Maximum Line Rate>.
For example, the OC-3 line rate is 352207.
Default: 0

Maximum VSI Bandwidth

The maximum port bandwidth that can be used by this partition. This value is used for VSI Qbin bandwidth scaling.

Range: 0 to <Maximum Line Rate>.
For example, the OC-3 line rate is 352207.
Default: 0

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

No

BPX (BXM cards only)

No

Related Commands

dsprsrc

Example

Configure resource for port 9.1, to use Automatic Routing Management PVCs.

cnfrsrc 9.1 256 9600 N N

sw215 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.f9 May 31 2000 15:29 GMT Port : 9.1 Full Port Bandwidth: 96000 Maximum PVC LCNS: 256 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 96000 (CAC Reserve: 0) PVC VPI RANGE [1]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [2]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [3]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [4]: -1 /-1 Partition : 1 2 3 Partition State : Disabled Disabled Disabled VSI LCNS (min/max): 0 /0 0 /0 0 /0 VSI VPI (start/end): 0 /0 0 /0 0 /0 VSI BW (min/max): 0 /0 0 /0 0 /0 VSI ILMI Config: CLR CLR CLR Last Command: cnfrsrc 9.1 256 96000 N N Next Command:
Example

Configure the resource of a virtual port 9.6.1 on the BXM card in slot 9 with a maximum of 256 PVC LCNS and a bandwidth of 3096.

cnfrsrc 9.6.1 256 3096

w215 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.f9 May 31 2000 15:28 GMT Port : 9.6.1 Full Port Bandwidth: 3096 Maximum PVC LCNS: 256 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 3096 (CAC Reserve: 0) PVC VPI RANGE [1]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [2]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [3]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [4]: -1 /-1 Partition : 1 2 3 Partition State : Disabled Disabled Disabled VSI LCNS (min/max): 0 /0 0 /0 0 /0 VSI VPI (start/end): 0 /0 0 /0 0 /0 VSI BW (min/max): 0 /0 0 /0 0 /0 VSI ILMI Config: CLR CLR CLR Last Command: cnfrsrc 9.6.1 256 3096

Next Command:

cnfrsrc (configure VSI resources for IGX)

Configures resources on ports, physical trunks, and virtual trunks.

This command supports both physical trunks and virtual trunks. After VSI has been enabled, the virtual trunk becomes a "dedicated" VSI virtual trunk.

The switch software will prevent you from configuring VSI:

You can configure a virtual trunk to be dedicated to VSI or to Automatic Routing Management. You cannot configure a virtual trunk for both VSI and Automatic Routing Management.

Syntax

cnfrsrc <slot.port.vtrk>

or

cnfrsrc <slot>.<port>.<vtrk> <maxpvclcns> <maxpvcbw> <partition> <e/d> <minvsilcns> <maxvsilcns> <vsistartvpi> <vsiendvpi><vsiminbw> <vsimaxbw>

Parameters

Parameter Description

slot.port.vtrk

Specifies the UXM card slot and port number and virtual trunk.

Maximum PVC LCNs

The maximum number of LCNs allocated for Automatic Routing Management PVCs for this port.

Range: 1-8000
Default: 256

You can use the dspcd <slot> command to display the maximum number of LCNs you can configure using the cnfrsrc command for the given port. For trunks, configurable LCNs represent the LCNs remaining after the NPM card has subtracted the networking LCNs needed. A trunk has 270 networking LCNs, or channels.

By default, when a port or trunk is upped, in addition to the 256 PVC LCNs, 200 Gateway LCNs are allocated for that port/trunk. The Gateway LCNs are used for non-UXM to UXM connections (like Frame Relay or ATFR). When PVC LCNs are reduced using the cnfrsrc command, the Gateway LCNs are also reduced so that it is always less than the PVC LCNs. However, when PVC LCNs are increased, the Gateway LCNs are not increased.

Use the command dspchuse to display the channel usage for all ports, trunks, and virtual trunks of a given slot.

Setting this field to "0" would disable Automatic Routing Management PVCs on the specified port.


    Note   You must specify a value greater than 0 for the Maximum PVC LCNs and Maximum PVC Bandwidth. Otherwise, you will not be able to create any Automatic Routing Management connections on that UXM port or trunk.

Maximum PVC Bandwidth

Specifies the maximum bandwidth of the port allocated for Automatic Routing Management use. You can configure the maximum PVC Bandwidth value for ports, but not for trunks.

Range: 0-352207

Default: The bandwidth is based on the logical interface (slot.port). The default value for this object is the line rate of this interface.

Card Type | Bandwidth
--------------------------------------------------

UXM E3 | 80000
UXM T3 | 96000
UXM OC-3             | 353208
UXM E1                 |       4528
UXM T1                 |       3622

You must specify a value greater than 0 for the maximum PVC LCNs and maximum PVC Bandwidth. Otherwise, you will not be able to create Automatic Routing Management PVCs on the UXM port or trunk.

This parameter is not prompted and is not configurable for trunks and virtual trunks.

Edit VSI Parms?

To configure AR PVCs or AR bandwidth only, enter n for No. You will not be prompted to enter VSI options to configure VSI partition resources.
However, if you want to configure VSI options, enter y for yes, and you will be prompted to configure partition resources for VSI.

Partition ID

Specifies the ID number of the partition.
Range: 1-3

Enable Partition

Answer e to enable or d to disable your configured partition.

Minimum VSI LCNs

The minimum number of LCNs guaranteed for this partition.

Range: 0-8000
Default: 0

If there are not enough LCNs on the slot to guarantee this minimum number, the switch software will prompt you with the number of available LCNs.

You can increase this value dynamically when there are enough unallocated LCNs on the slot to satisfy the increase.

Maximum VSI LCNs

The total number of LCNs the partition is allowed for setting up connections.

You may increase or decrease this value dynamically when there are enough unallocated LCNs on the slot to satisfy the change.

Note that you must specify a value greater than 0 for the maximum VSI LCNs. Otherwise, you will not be able to add any VSI connections on that partition.

Start VSI VPI

VSI connections on this partition start from this VPI.

Range:

Port UNI: 0-255
Port NNI: 0-4095
Trunk with Automatic Routing Management configured: 2-4095
Trunk with NNI and no Automatic Routing Management configured: 1-4095
Trunk with UNI: 2-255

If the specified VPI is used by Automatic Routing Management connections or the control channel of the VSI controller, a warning will appear and then a prompt for the Start VSI VPI.

End VSI VPI

VSI connections on this partition can use VPIs up to this VPI. The End VSI VPI should be equal to or greater than the Start VSI VPI.

Minimum VSI Bandwidth

The minimum port bandwidth that can be used by this partition in cells per second.

Range: 0 to <Maximum Line Rate>.
For example, the OC-3 line rate is 352207.
Default: 0

Maximum VSI Bandwidth

The maximum port bandwidth that can be used by this partition.

Range: 0 to <Maximum Line Rate>.
For example, the OC-3 line rate is 352207.
Default: 0

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Related Commands

dsprsrc

Increasing the Number of VSI LCNs Guaranteed for a VSI Partition

You can increase the number of LCNs guaranteed for a given VSI partition by increasing the Minimum VSI LCNs of the desired partition.

If the new number does not cause the total VSI LCNs to be increased (that is, if your want to increase the minimum VSI LCNs at the expense of the common pool), the request will be denied if there isn't enough free VSI LCNs in the common pool. The UXM card cannot find enough free VSI LCNs to give to the specified partition. More AR LCNs must be made available to VSI for the request to succeed. The cnfrsrc will display a message: Resource not available, maximum available LCN(s) is 50. 100 more LCN needed. This indicates the number of AR LCNs that should be made available to the VSI.

cnfrsrc 12.1 256 20000 y 1 e 900 1500 300 400 4000 6000

Decreasing the VSI LCNs

You can decrease the VSI LCN range in order to make more LCNs available to AR:

♦ If the formula result used to compute the number of VSI LCNs, was obtained by using the Minimum VSI LCNs, then you can decrease the VSI LCN range by decreasing the Minimum VSI LCNs of any VSI partition.

♦ If the formula result was obtained by using the Maximum VSI LCNs, then you can decrease the VSI LCN range by decreasing the Maximum VSI LCNs of the VSI partition whose max was used to get the result of the formula.

In some cases, decreasing the VSI LCN range will fail because there are not enough free VSI LCNs to give to AR. The cnfrsrc command will display a failure message giving the number of VSI channels that can be made available to AR (There are only 100 free VSI channels). You can then re-execute the cnfrsrc requesting a smaller number of VSI LCNs to be given to AR.

If you must give more VSI LCNs to AR than what is currently free, go to the VSI master and delete or re-route the necessary number of VSI connections to free up the required VSI LCNs by executing the proper commands on the VSI master. You can then reattempt the cnfrsrc command.

Sometimes the LCNs that were freed by the VSI master are reused prior to reexecuting the cnfrsrc command. You can delete more connections on the VSI master than what is required. Or you can freeze the VSI master so that it does not add any new VSI connections until the cnfrsrc command is reexecuted.

cnfrsrc 12.1 256 20000 y 1 e 900 1500 300 400 4000 6000

Expanding the VSI VPI Range

You can expand the VSI VPI range by changing the parameters Start VSI VPI and End VSI VPI. The command cnfrsrc checks whether the new VPI range overlaps with:

Shrinking the VSI VPI Range

You can shrink the VSI VPI range by increasing the parameter Start VSI VPI and/or by decreasing the the parameter End VSI VPI. This works only if no VSI connections use the old VPI range. For example, if there is a VSI connection and VPI 10; and if the current VSI VPI range is [5,11], then the VSI VPI range cannot be shrunk to [5,9].

Increasing VSI Bandwidth

You can increase the bandwidth of VSI by increasing the Minimum VSI Bandwidth and/or Maximum VSI Bandwidth of the appropriate VSI partition. Increasing the bandwidth of VSI may cause AR connections on a trunk to be re-routed in order to free the necessary bandwidth for VSI. You will see a warning (Warning - increasing Max VSI Bandwidth will reroute all connections on this trunk). The command will proceed only if you choose to proceed.

cnfrsrc 12.1 256 20000 y 1 e 900 1500 300 400 4000 6000

Decreasing VSI Bandwidth

You can decrease VSI bandwidth of VSI by reducing the values of Minimum VSI Bandwidth and/or Maximum VSI Bandwidth. This works only if the VSI connections are not using the existing bandwidth.

Example

Changing the PVC max lcn and PVC max bandwidth for a port.

cnfrsrc 4.1 1000 300000 N

sw188 TRM Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1c Aug. 17 2000 10:52 PST Line : 4.1 Maximum PVC LCNS: 1000 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 300000 State Partition 1: D Partition 2: D Partition 3: D Last Command: cnfrsrc 4.1 1000 300000 N Cnfrsrc successful. Next Command:
Example

Changing the PVC max lcn and PVC max bandwidth for a port.

cnfrsrc 5.1 2000 N

sw188 TRM Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1c Aug. 17 2000 10:53 PST Trunk : 5.1 Maximum PVC LCNS: 2000 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 3528 (Statistical Reserve: 1000) State Partition 1: D Partition 2: D Partition 3: D Last Command: cnfrsrc 5.1 2000 N Max PVC lcn maybe adjusted to be consistent with the other end. Next Command:
Example

Enable a partition on a port.

cnfrsrc 4.1 1000 300000 y 1 e 100 200 20 30 1000 50000

sw188 TRM Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1c Aug. 17 2000 11:05 PST Line : 4.1 Maximum PVC LCNS: 1000 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 300000 State MinLCN MaxLCN StartVPI EndVPI MinBW MaxBW Partition 1: E 100 200 20 30 1000 50000 Partition 2: D Partition 3: D Last Command: cnfrsrc 4.1 1000 300000 y 1 e 100 200 20 30 1000 50000 Cnfrsrc successful. Next Command:
Example

Enabling a partition on a trunk.

cnfrsrc 5.1 2000 y 2 e 500 2000 55 60 1000 2000

sw188 TRM Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1c Aug. 17 2000 11:06 PST Trunk : 5.1 Maximum PVC LCNS: 2000 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 1528 (Statistical Reserve: 1000) State MinLCN MaxLCN StartVPI EndVPI MinBW MaxBW Partition 1: D Partition 2: E 500 2000 55 60 1000 2000 Partition 3: D Last Command: cnfrsrc 5.1 2000 y 2 e 500 2000 55 60 1000 2000 Cnfrsrc successful. Next Command:
Example

Configure resources on card slot 4, port 2.

cnfrsrc 4.2 256 96000 N

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.r3 Dec. 19 2000 13:51 GMT Line : 4.2 Maximum PVC LCNS: 256 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 96000 State Partition 1: D Partition 2: D Partition 3: D Last Command: cnfrsrc 4.2 256 96000 N
Example

Configure resources on port 2 on the UXM card in slot 4.

cnfrsrc 4.2 256 3096 N

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.r3 Dec. 19 2000 13:48 GMT Line : 4.2 Maximum PVC LCNS: 256 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 3096 State Partition 1: D Partition 2: D Partition 3: D Last Command: cnfrsrc 4.2 256 3096 N Cnfrsrc successful.

cnfrsrc (configuring VSI resources for BPX)

Configures resources on ports, physical trunks and virtual trunks. You can partition resources for Automatic Routing Management PVCs, VSI-MPLS (Multiprotocol Label Switching), or PNNI.

This command supports both physical trunks and virtual trunks. After VSI has been enabled, the virtual trunk becomes a "dedicated" VSI virtual trunk.

The switch software will prevent you from configuring VSI:

You can configure a virtual trunk to be dedicated to VSI or to Automatic Routing Management. You cannot configure a virtual trunk for both VSI and Automatic Routing Management.

The switch software prevents a VSI partition from being disabled on a trunk interface if a PNNI controller is attached to the trunk interface controlling partition being disabled.

It is possible to have PVCs terminating on the Label Switch Controller itself. This example reserves approximately 10 Mbps (26000 cells per sec) for PVCs, and allows up to 256 PVCs on the switch port connected to the LSC.

The VSI maximum and minimum logical connections (LCNs) will determine the maximum number of virtual connections (VCs) that can be supported on the interface. The number of VCs required on the interface is controller dependent.

By default, the LSC will use either a starting VSI VPI of 1 or 2 for label switching, whichever is available. If both are available, a starting VSI VPI of 1 is used. The VPI range should be 2-3 on a BPX VSI connected to a 6400, 7200 or 7500 AIP. If VPI 2 is not to be used, you can use the label switching VPI interface configuration command on the LSC to override the defaults.

Syntax

cnfrsrc <slot.port.vtrk>

or on physical trunks:
cnfrsrc <slot>.<port>.<vtrk> <maxpvclcns> <maxpvcbw> <y/n> <partition> <e/d> <minvsilcns> <maxvsilcns> <vsistartvpi> <vsiendvpi><vsiminbw> <vsimaxbw>

or on feeder trunks/ports:
cnfrsrc <slot>.<port>.<vtrk> <maxpvclcns> <maxpvcbw><y/n> [<pvcstartvpi1> <pvcendvpi1> <pvcstartvpi2><pvcendvpi2><pvcstartvpi3><pvcendvpi3><pvcstartvpi4><pvcendvpi4>]<y/n> <partition> <e/d> <minvsilcns> <maxvsilcns> <vsistartvpi> <vsiendvpi><vsiminbw> <vsimaxbw>

Parameters

The table lists the cnfrsrc parameters used for configuring resources for VSI partitions (an MPLS controller, for example).

Object Name Range/Values Default Description

VSI partition

1-3

None

Identifies the partition.

Partition state

0 = Disable Partition

1 = Enable Partition

0

For Partition state = 1, the VSI parameters are mandatory.

Enable Partition

e or d

Enable Partition

Answer e to enable or d to disable your configured partition.

Min VSI LCNs

0 to port_group/card limit

None

Minimum LCNs (connections) guaranteed for this partition.

Max VSI LCNs

1 to port_group/card limit

None

Maximum LCNs permitted on this partition.

Start VSI VPI

0-4095

None

Partition Start VPI.

End VSI VPI

0-4095

None

Partition End VPI. VSI connections on this partition can use VPIs up to this VPI. The end VSI VPI should be equal to or greater than the Start VSI VPI.

Min VSI Bw

0-Line Rate

None

Minimum Partition bandwidth.

Max VSIBw

0-Line Rate

None

Maximum Partition bandwidth.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Related Commands

dsprsrc

Feature Mismatching to Verify VSI Support

The cnfrsrc and addshelf commands, in addition to other configuration commands, perform mismatch verification on the BXM (and UXM) cards. For example, the cnfrsrc and addshelf commands verify whether the cards both have VSI 2.0 support configured.

The Feature Mismatching capability does not check mismatched cards unless the actual feature has been enabled on the card. This allows for a graceful card migration from an older release.

Resource Partitioning

The VSIs must partition the resources between competing controllers: Automatic Routing Management, MPLS, and PNNI, for example. Different types of controllers can share a node's resources. For example, Automatic Routing Management, and MPLS, or Automatic Routing Management and PNNI (SVCs), but not PNNI and MPLS, can share resources.

Up to three partitions are supported and any three may be of a single type. The user interface will block the activation of partitions with ID higher than 1 if the card does not support multiple partitions.

The resources that you need to configure for a partition are shown in Table 3-51 for a partition designated ifci, which stands for interface controller 1, in this example.

The three parameters that must be distributed are:


Table 3-51: ifci—VSI Parameter Ranges
ifci parameters Min Max

lcns

min_lcnsi

max_lcnsi

bw

min_bwi

max_bwi

vpi

min_vpi

max_vpi

When you add a trunk, the entire bandwidth is allocated to Automatic Routing Management (formerly known as AutoRoute). To change the allocation to provide resources for a VSI, use the cnfrsrc command on the BPX switch.


Figure 3-22:
Graphical View of Resource Partitioning, Automatic Routing Management, and VSI


Partition Information Sent to Cisco WAN Manager

When the partition information is configured for the first time or any parameters are changed, Cisco WAN Manager is updated through a robust message.

Partitioning

On each interface (port or trunk) on the BXM cards used for PNNI/MPLS controllers, two sets of resources must be divided up between traditional PVC connections and switching connections. The traditional PVC connections are configured directly on the BPX platform, and switching connections are set up by the controllers using the VSI. These resources are partitioned on each interface:

As with all ATM switches, the BPX switch supports up to a specified number of connections. On the BPX switch, the number of connections supported depends on the number of port/trunk cards installed. On each interface, space for connections is divided up between traditional BPX switch permanent virtual circuit (PVC) connections, Label Switching VCs (LVCs), and PNNI Switching VCs (SVC).

Soft and Dynamic Partitioning

Release 9.3.10 introduces Soft Partitioning and Dynamic Partitioning in order to support the smooth introduction of another VSI controller into a BPX network already configured with an existing VSI controller, easier tuning of switch resources, and the migration of Automatic Routing Management to PNNI.

Soft Partitioning provides resource guarantees for LCNs and bandwidth per partition and a pool of resources available to all partitions in addition to the guaranteed resources. Dynamic Partitioning provides the ability to rather easily increase the allocation of a resource to a partition.

You define and manage the number of LCNs assigned to a given VSI partition by modifying the "Minimum VSI LCNs" and "Maximum VSI LCNs" fields of the cnfrsrc CLI command.

To give more LCNs from Automatic Routing Management to VSI, change the Min LCNs or Max LCNs to cause BPX software to produce a bigger number. To increase the LCNs reserved to a VSI partition, increase the "Minimum VSI LCNs" or "Maximum VSI LCNs" fields of the appropriate VSI partition. The VSI LCN boundary is moved into Automatic Routing Management if there are enough free Automatic Routing Management LCNs to fulfill the request.

If there are not enough free LCNs in the Automatic Routing Management (AR) space, the cnfrsrc command does not fulfill a request to increase the VSI LCN space. In such a case, the cnfrsrc command displays a failure message showing the number of currently free AR LCNs. You can reissue the cnfrsrc command specifying a smaller increase to the VSI partition. If that is not acceptable, you must first delete and reroute the necessary number of AR connections. Then you can attempt cnfrsrc again.

Moving the VSI LCN boundary into the Automatic Routing Management space might step over LCNs that are currently allocated. BPX software reprogram the necessary channels so that new channels out of the lower AR LCN space are picked instead. Before starting the process of reprogramming the necessary number of AR connections, the cnfrsrc command displays a warning message and waits for your permission to proceed. The warning message shows the number of Automatic Routing Management (AR) connections that will be re-programmed. After reprogramming the necessary channels the LCN boundary is moved into the Automatic Routing Management space.

Note   You can migrate Automatic Routing Management (AutoRoute) connections only if the VPI range of the recipient VSI partition is adjacent to Automatic Routing Management. To migrate Automatic Routing Management connections to a non-adjacent VSI partition requires different VPIs within the recipient VPI boundary.

Information about this feature also can be found in the BPX Installation and Configuration Manual, Release 9.3.10, Configuring BXM Virtual Switch Interface.

VSI Partitioning

VSI partitioning requires the following commands and procedures:

Defining the PVC VPI Range

You can define the PVC VPI ranges by filling the VSI fields described in the previous section. In the following sample system response of the cnfrsrc command, note that the * next to the VPI fields denote that the PVC and VSI VPI space overlap. You are prompted if the overlapping VSI partition is an MPLS partition. If it is, then the command will be abort because overlapping VPI ranges between Automatic Routing Management and MPLS is not supported.

Configuring the PVC VPI ranges requires the BXM card to have VSI level 3 support. An error message is displayed if you want to configured the PVC VPI ranges but the VSI level on the card is lower than 3.




Increasing the VSI LCN Range

You can increase the number of LCNs reserved for VSI by increasing the Minimum VSI LCNs and/or Maximum VSI LCNs of the appropriate VSI partition. Increasing the VSI LCN space may cause a number of AR connections to be reprogrammed. You will see a warning: "Channel conflict, max LCN w/o reprog = 5. LCN(s) to reprogram = 20." The command will proceed only if you so choose.




Increasing the Number of LCNs Guaranteed for a VSI Partition

You can increase the number of LCNs guaranteed for a given VSI partition by increasing the Minimum VSI LCNs of the desired partition. If the new number does not cause the total VSI LCNs to be increased (that is, if you want to increase the Minimum VSI LCNs at the expense of the common pool), the request will be denied if there isn't enough free VSI LCNs in the common pool. The BXM card cannot find enough free VSI LCNs to give to the specified partition. More AR LCNs must be made available to VSI for the request to succeed. The cnfrsrc will display a message: "Resource not available, maximum available LCN(s) is 50. 100 more LCN needed." This indicates the number of AR LCNs that should be made available to the VSI.




Increasing VSI Bandwidth

You can increase the bandwidth of VSI by increasing the Minimum VSI Bandwidth or Maximum VSI Bandwidth of the appropriate VSI partition.


Note   Increasing VSI bandwidth may trigger a rerouting of all connections on that trunk.




Disabling Connection Admission Control (CAC) on a Port

To oversubscribe the AR bandwidth on a given port, make sure that the CAC feature is disabled on the port. Use the cnfport command for this purpose; the CAC Override field should specify "Enabled".

cnfport <slot.port>[.vtrk] <options for E1 | T1 | E3 | T3 | OC-3 | OC-12 | E2 | HSSI | SR >




Oversubscribing AR Bandwidth on a Port

To oversubscribe the AR bandwidth on a given port, make sure that the CAC feature is disabled on the port. Refer to Disabling Connection Admission Control (CAC) on a Port for more details.

Use the cnfrsrc command to decrease the bandwidth allocated for AR and give it to the VSI partition that is going to receive the AR connections. The cnfrsrc command contains 4 fields that specify information about the bandwidth:

The cnfrsrc command verifies that the sum of the Maximum PVC Bandwidth, Statistical Reserve, and the VSI bandwidth of all VSI partitions on the port does not exceed the port speed.

You can decrease the AR bandwidth by decreasing the Maximum PVC Bandwidth field. To increase the VSI bandwidth:

♦ If the total bandwidth allocated for VSI was obtained by adding the Minimum VSI Bandwidth of all the VSI partitions on the port, you can give more bandwidth to VSI by increasing the Minimum VSI Bandwidth of a given partition.

♦ If the total bandwidth allocated for VSI was obtained by using the Maximum VSI Bandwidth of a given partition, you can give more bandwidth to VSI by increasing the Maximum VSI Bandwidth field of the partition that was used to compute the VSI bandwidth.

In the example below you can see that all of the AR bandwidth on the port was given to VSI. Note the * next the Maximum PVC Bandwidth shows that the AR bandwidth is oversubscribed.




Example

Configure the VSI partition1 for port 4.1 without defining PVC VPI ranges.

cnfrsrc 12.5 256 26000 N Y 1 e 512 16384 2 15 26000 100000

n4 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3.10     Apr. 4 2000    16:40 PST Port : 4.1 Full Port Bandwidth: 353208 Maximum PVC LCNS: 256 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 26000 (CAC Reserve: 0) PVC VPI RANGE [1]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [2]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [3]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [4]: -1 /-1 Partition : 1 2 3 Partition State : Enabled Disabled Disabled VSI LCNS (min/max): 512 /7000 0 /0 0 /0 VSI VPI (start/end): 2/15 0 /0 0 /0 VSI BW (min/max): 26000 /100000 0 /0 0 /0 VSI ILMI Config: CLR CLR CLR Last Command: cnfrsrc 12.5 256 26000 N Y 1 e 512 7000 2 15 26000 100000 Next Command:
Example

Configure the VSI partition1 for port 4.1, defining overlapping PVC VPI ranges. The overlapping VPI ranges are indicated by an asterisk * next to the range values.

cnfrsrc 12.5 256 26000 Y 0 255 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 Y 1 e 512 16384 2 15 26000 100000

n4 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3.10     Apr. 4 2000    16:40 PST Port : 4.1 Full Port Bandwidth: 353208 Maximum PVC LCNS: 256 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 26000 (CAC Reserve: 0) PVC VPI RANGE [1]: 0 */255 * PVC VPI RANGE [2]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [3]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [4]: -1 /-1 Partition : 1 2 3 Partition State : Enabled Disabled Disabled VSI LCNS (min/max): 512 /7000 0 /0 0 /0 VSI VPI (start/end): 2 */15 * 0 /0 0 /0 VSI BW (min/max): 26000 /100000 0 /0 0 /0 VSI ILMI Config: CLR CLR CLR Last Command: cnfrsrc 12.5 256 26000 Y 0 255 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 Y 1 e 512 7000 2 15 26000 100000 Next Command:
Example

Configure the VSI partition1 for trunk 12.5. You are not prompted for "configure PVC VPI ranges".

cnfrsrc 12.5 256 26000 Y 1 e 512 16384 2 15 26000 100000

n4 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3.10     Apr. 4 2000    16:40 PST Trunk: 4.1 Full Port Bandwidth: 353208 Maximum PVC LCNS: 256 Maximum PVC Bandwidth: 26000 (CAC Reserve: 1000) PVC VPI RANGE [1]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [2]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [3]: -1 /-1 PVC VPI RANGE [4]: -1 /-1 Partition : 1 2 3 Partition State : Enabled Disabled Disabled VSI LCNS (min/max): 512 /7000 0 /0 0 /0 VSI VPI (start/end): 2 /15 0 /0 0 /0 VSI BW (min/max): 26000 /100000 0 /0 0 /0 VSI ILMI Config: CLR CLR CLR Last Command: cnfrsrc 12.5 256 352207 Y 1 e 512 7000 2 15 26000 100000 Next Command:

cnfrtcost (display connection loading)

Configures the cost cap for a connection when cost-based routing is configured.

A maximum allowable cost value (cost cap) is used during route determination to prevent selection of a route that exceeds an acceptable cost. For routing based on delay, the cost cap is the acceptable end-to-end delay for the connection type. This cap is configured network-wide per delay-sensitive connection type.

For routing based on trunk cost, the cost cap is the acceptable end-to-end cost. This cap is configured per connection. The default cost cap is 100, which is derived from the maximum hops per route (10) and default cost per trunk (10). The cost cap can be changed at any time. If the cost cap is decreased below the current route cost, the connection is not automatically rerouted. A manual reroute is required to route the connection to fit under the new cost cap. This gives you more control over the connection reroute outage.


Note   The cnfrtcost command is valid only at the node where the connection was added.

Syntax

cnfrtcost <connection> <max cost>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<connection>

Indicates the connection endpoint (that is, slot.port.vpi.vci)

<max cost>

Indicates the maximum allowable route cost.
Range: 1-100

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspcon, cnfpref, dsprtcache

Example

After configuring the cost cap for a connection, you can check to see the configured value with the dspcon command, as is shown in the System Response example. This is the dspcon response for 9.2.5.100 with the additional fields of Max Cost (40) and Route Cost (1). For a route optimized on trunk delay, the cost labels are updated to indicate delay: Max Cost becomes Max Delay and Route Cost becomes Route Delay.

cnfrtcost 9.2.5.100 40 1

sw203 TN StrataCom BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:18 GMT Conn: 9.2.5.100 sw242 14.2.5.100 cbr Status:OK PCR(0+1) % util CDVT(0+1) Policing 50/50 100/100 10000/10000 4/4 Owner: LOCAL Restriction: NONE CoS: 0 TestRTD: 0 msec Trunk Cell Routing Restrict: Y Max Cost: 40 Route Cost: 1 Path: sw203 3.1.1-- 2.1.1sw242 Pref: Not Configured sw203 ASI-T3 : OK sw242 ASI-OC-3 : OK Line 9.2 : OK Line 14.2 : OK OAM Cell RX: Clear NNI : OK NNI : OK Last Command: dspcon 9.2.5.100 Next Command:

cnfrtr (configure router)

Configures the parameters for the URM embedded IOS-based router on a specified router slot. Configurable router parameters include the IOS configuration file source and the router serial port function. The cnfrtr command can be invoked on a logically active or standby slot.

The URM embedded router uses an IOS configuration file to define the configuration of the ATM PVCs on the internal ATM interface, the voice ports, and the dial peers for voice call routing. The IOS configuration file is an ASCII file that contains the list of commands that define the IOS configuration. The running IOS configuration file is not maintained by the NPM.

You configure the source of the IOS configuration file. You specify whether the configuration file located in the router BRAM is loaded or a blank factory default configuration file is loaded from the NPM. Upon a router reset or restart, the cnfrtr parameter configuration determines the source of the IOS configuration file.

By default, the URM is configured to load the blank factory default IOS configuration file from the NPM. This configuration is required when the URM is installed or replaced. When the URM is installed or replaced, the IOS configuration file is configured manually using the IOS CLI. In normal operation, the running configuration is saved in the router BRAM, and the router BRAM is configured as the source of the IOS configuration file. In the event of a card restart or rebuild, this configuration is required for the router to resume normal operation.

See Universal Router Module (URM) in this command definition.

Syntax

cnfrtr <router-slot> <IOS-config-file> <router-serial-port>

Parameters

Parameter Description

router-slot

Specifies the virtual shelf slot to support the URM embedded router.
Range: 1-32

Switch software manages the embedded router in the URM as if the router resides on a slot in a virtual shelf (of routers). Each slot in the IGX shelf has a corresponding router slot in the virtual shelf. A router slot is considered empty when the equivalent IGX slot is empty or contains an IGX card without an embedded router. If the IGX slot contains a URM card, the router slot is reported as hosting an IOS router.

IOS-config-file

Specifies the source of the router IOS configuration file.
Default: NPM (n)

n = NPM. This configuration specifies that the default blank, or basic, IOS configuration file is loaded from the NPM BRAM. This configuration is required at the time of initial card insertion or card replacement.

r = Router BRAM. This configuration specifies that the IOS configuration file is loaded from the embedded router BRAM. This configuration is required for the router to resume normal operation in the event of a card restart or rebuild.

router-serial-port

Specifies the function of the router serial port.
Default: CON

1 = CON (console). This configuration specifies that the router serial port functions as a console external interface.

2 = AUX (auxiliary). This configuration specifies that the router serial port functions as an auxiliary external interface. This configuration is typically used for monitoring purposes.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfrtrparm dsprtr, dsprtrslot, dsprtrslots, dspalms, rstrtr

Example

Configure parameters for the URM embedded router on router slot 6.

cnfrtr 6

sw108 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2E Sep. 5 2000 09:02 GMT Configuration for Router Slot 6: Snapshot IOS Configuration: Basic (from NPM) Router Serial Port: CON Last Command:cnfrtr 6
Example

Configure parameters for the URM embedded router on router slot 6. Select the NPM as the IOS configuration file source.

cnfrtr 6 n

IOS config file:(n)pm or (r)outer bram ? [n] sw108 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2E Sep. 5 2000 09:02 GMT Configuration for Router Slot 6: Snapshot IOS Configuration: Basic (from NPM) Router Serial Port: CON This Command:cnfrtr 6 n
Example

Configure parameters for the URM embedded router on router slot 6. Set the router serial port function to CON.

cnfrtr 6 n 1

Router serial port as:(1) CON (2) AUX ? [1] sw108 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2E Sep. 5 2000 09:03 GMT Configuration for Router Slot 6: Snapshot IOS Configuration: Basic (from NPM) Router Serial Port: CON Last Command:cnfrtr 6 n 1

Universal Router Module (URM)

The Universal Router Module (URM) is introduced with Release 9.3.20 on the IGX 8400. The URM is functionally equivalent to a UXM card with one ATM port and an IOS router. The URM front card provides basic routing functions. The URM front card and the 2FE2V back card provide IOS-based voice support.

The URM/2FE2V card combination supports the voice features currently available under IOS. The URM supports two T1 or E1 digital voice ports and two Fast Ethernet ports. Basic routing functions are supported concurrently with voice.

The URM hardware consists of an embedded UXM that provides the ATM interface to the IGX network and an embedded IOS-based router. The URM embedded UXM is based on UXM-E hardware. It is logically a one-port UXM without physical interfaces and provides functionality similar to the UXM/UXM-E modules in the IGX.

The URM is a two-processor card. UXM functionality is provided by Admin software running under VxWorks. The router functionality is provided by IOS running independently on a different processor. An internal IPC mechanism is used for Admin to IOS communication over the internal ATM port.

Management of the URM is different from other IGX cards. The IGX CLI is used to manage the embedded UXM and internal ATM port. The IOS CLI and IOS management applications are used to manage the embedded router.

The IGX CLI is enhanced to provide features that facilitate serviceability and monitoring of the URM embedded IOS-based router. Table 3-52 describes new and modified CLI commands used to monitor the embedded router.


Table 3-52: CLI Commands Used to Monitor the URM Embedded IOS-based Router
Command Description

cnfrtrparm

Configure certain router parameters on a specific router slot. Parameters include rommon action, router reset, and write to bootflash.

cnfrtr

Configure certain router parameters on a specific router slot. Parameters include IOS configuration file source and serial port function.

dsprtr

Report the router configuration on a specific router slot.

dsprtrslot

Report router operational information on a specific router slot. Operational information includes: card type, VIC type, IOS software image name, router operational state, and router alarm status.

dsprtrslots

Report router operational information for all router slots in the IGX. Operational information includes: card type, VIC type, and router alarm status.

dspalms

Report router IOS status alarms for all router slots in the IGX.

rstrtr

Reset the router on a specified router slot.

cnfrtrparm (configure router parameters)

Sets parameters for the embedded router in the Universal Router Module (URM) introduced on the IGX 8400 in Release 9.3.20. The URM provides IOS-based voice support and basic routing functions. It consists of an embedded UXM with one internal ATM port and an embedded IOS-based router.

Syntax

cnfrtrparm <router-slot> <index> <action>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<router-slot>

Specifies the virtual shelf slot to support the URM embedded router.
Range: 1-32

Switch software manages the embedded router in the URM as if the router resides on a slot in a virtual shelf (of routers). Each slot in the IGX shelf has a corresponding router slot in the virtual shelf. A router slot is considered empty when the equivalent IGX slot is empty or contains an IGX card without an embedded router. If the IGX slot contains a URM card, the router slot is reported as hosting an IOS router.

rommon action

Specifies what action ROMMON is to take when the URM embedded router boots up.
Range: 1, 2, 3, or 4
Default: 1, load IOS.

    1. IOS: if this parameter is set to IOS, the router loads the IOS image from the Flash.

    2. BootHelper: if this parameter is set to BootHelper, the router loads BootHelper from the Flash protected area.

    3. Rommon-CLI: if this parameter is set to Rommon-CLI, the router enters ROM monitor or maintenance mode. When the router is in this state, you can enter ROM monitor commands from the console port to manually load a system image.

    4. Cnfg-register: if this parameter is set to cnfg-register, the router performs the action that was configured in the router's Configuration Register Boot Field.

reset router on IOS IPC failure

Specifies whether the router IOS is reset in the event of an IOS IPC failure. Range: Y to enable or N to disable.
Default: Y, enable.

bootflash write enable

Enables write to router BootFlash.
Range: Y to enable or N to disable.
Default: N, disable.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfrtr, dsprtr, dsprtrslot, dsprtrslots, dspalms, rstrtr

Example: Configure Rommon Action
Configure the Rommon Action parameter by using the cnfrtrparm command. sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2J Nov. 7 2000 07:18 GMT 1 Rommon Action [ load IOS ] 2 Reset Router on IOS IPC Failure [ No ] 3 BootFlash Write Enable [ Yes ] This Command: cnfrtrparm 15 1 load (1)IOS, (2)BootHelper, (3)Rommon-CLI (4)Cnfg-register:
Example: Configure Reset Router Parameter

Configure the Reset Router on IOS IPC Failure parameter by using the cnfrtrparm command.

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2J Nov. 7 2000 07:19 GMT 1 Rommon Action [ load IOS ] 2 Reset Router on IOS IPC Failure [ No ] 3 BootFlash Write Enable [ Yes ] This Command: cnfrtrparm 15 2 Reset IOS on IPC failure ?
Example: Configure Reset Router Parameter

Configure the BootFlash Write Enable parameter by using the cnfrtrparm command.

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2J Nov. 7 2000 07:20 GMT 1 Rommon Action [ load IOS ] 2 Reset Router on IOS IPC Failure [ No ] 3 BootFlash Write Enable [ Yes ] This Command: cnfrtrparm 15 3 Enable write to router BootFlash?

cnfslotalm (configure slot alarm parameters)

Configure the alarm parameters for the various card types. Upon command entry, the system displays a screen with a choice of eight card-alarm types. It then displays "Enter Type" and waits for a number in the range 1-12. Upon entry of the alarm type, the system displays the error rates of the selected type.

Syntax

cnfslotalm <fail_type> <alarm_class> <rate> <alarm_time> <clear_time>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<fail_type>

Error type

<alarm_class>

Either major or minor

<rate>

Error frequency

<alarm_time>

Duration of prescribed error frequency required to declare an alarm.

<clear_time>

The alarm will clear after this amount of time if the alarm threshold is no longer met

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

Yes

Yes

BPX

Yes

Related Commands

dspslotalmcnf, dspslotalms

Example

Configure the alarm parameters.

cnfslotalm 10

pubsbpx1 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 19:43 PST Slot Alarm Types 1) Standby PRBS Errors 11) Poll Clk Errors 2) Rx Invalid Port Errs 12) CK 192 Errors 3) PollA Parity Errors 4) PollB Parity Errors 5) Bad Grant Errors 6) Tx Bip 16 Errors 7) Rx Bip 16 Errors 8) Bframe parity Errors 9) SIU phase Errors 10) Rx FIFO Sync Errors This Command: cnfslotalm Enter Type:

The screen display after selecting alarm type 10:

pubsbpx1 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 19:47 PST Slot Alarm Configuration Minor Major Violation Rate Alarm Time Clear Rate Alarm Time Clear 1) SPRBS .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 100 sec 100 sec 2) InvP .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 100 sec 100 sec 3) PollA .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 100 sec 100 sec 4) PollB .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 100 sec 100 sec 5) BGE .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 100 sec 100 sec 6) TBip .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 100 sec 100 sec 7) RBip .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 100 sec 100 sec 8) Bfrm .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 100 sec 100 sec 9) SIU .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 100 sec 100 sec 10) RFifo .1% 10 min 3 min 1% 100 sec 100 sec Last Command: cnfslotalm 10 Next Command:

cnfslotstats (configure slot statistics collection)

Configures the statistics for a card slot. This command is primarily a troubleshooting tool for use when hardware errors are experienced that might not be detected by the individual care self-test routines. An associated display command (dspsloterrs) is available for all users.

This command sets the collection interval for each of the BPX node slot statistics. The default is for no statistics to be collected. The collection interval range is 1 minute-255 minutes (4 1/4 hours).

You must enter the statistic type (1-9) to set the collection interval. When you enter the command, the system responds with the following prompt:

Collection Interval (1-255 minutes): __

Table 3-53 lists the statistics associated with each slot in the BPX node.

Syntax

cnfslotstats <port> <stat> <interval> <e|d> [<samples> <size> <peaks>]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<port>

Specifies the port to configure.

<stat>

Specifies the type of statistic to enable/disable.

<interval>

Specifies the time interval of each sample (1-255 minutes).

<e|d>

Enables/disables a statistic. E to enable; D to disable.

[samples]

Specifies the number of samples to collect (1-255).

[size]

Specifies the number of bytes per data sample (1, 2 or 4).

[peaks]

Enables the collection of one minute peaks. Y to enable; N to disable.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

Yes

Yes

BPX

Yes

Related Commands

dspsloterrs


Table 3-53: Statistics Associated with Each Slot in a BPX Node
Error Description

Standby Bus Errors

Indicates a background test over the standby bus produced an error.

Rx Invalid Port Errors

Indicates port number was out of the range 1-3.

Polling Bus A Errors

Parity error occurred on this polling bus.

Polling Bus B Errors

Parity error occurred on this polling bus.

Bad Grant Errors

Error indicates arbiter did not issue a grant to send data before a time-out.

Tx BIP-16 Errors

Data frame transmitted had a checksum error.

Rx BIP-16 Errors

Data frame received with a checksum error.

Bframe parity errors

Errors detected in the BPX frame on the StrataBus or in a memory operation.

SIU Phase Errors

Serial Interface Unit on the card did not detect the frame synch properly.

Rx FIFO Sync Errors

First-In-First-Out buffer synchronization errors.

Poll Clk Errors

Polling clock errors.

CK 192 Errors

Clock 192 errors.

Monarch Specific Errors

Errors that occur on only the BXM.

Example

cnfslotstats 8

sw81 TN SuperUser BPX 15 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:42 PST Card Statistics Types 1) Standby PRBS Errors 2) Rx Invalid Port Errs 3) PollA Parity Errors 4) PollB Parity Errors 5) Bad Grant Errors 6) Tx Bip 16 Errors 7) Rx Bip 16 Errors 8) Bframe parity Errors 9) SIU phase Errors 10) Rx FIFO Sync Errors 11) Poll Clk Errors 12) CK 192 Errors 13) Monarch Specific Errors This Command: cnfslotstats 8

cnfsnmp (configure SNMP parameters)

Configures the SNMP GET and SET community strings.

Syntax

cnfsnmp <GET community string> <SET community string>

Parameters

Parameter Description

get community string

Specifies the GET community string.

set community string

Specifies the SET community string.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspsnmp, dspsnmpstats

Example

Configure the SNMP GET and SET community string parameters.

cnfsnmp

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 09:06 GMT Get Community String: audit Set Community String: private Trap Community String: private SNMP Set Request Queue Size: 110 SNMP Queued Request Timeout (secs): 21600 SNMP Trap Event Queue Size: 100 Last Command: cnfsnmp

cnfstatmast (configure statistics master SV+ address)

Configures an IP address for the Statistics Master process in WAN Manager. The cnfstatmast command defines the IP address for routing the messages to and from the Statistics Master in WAN Manager.

The Statistics Master process requests and receives network statistics by using TFTP Get and Put messages. These TFTP messages pass between the node and the Statistics Master over IP Relay. See the cnfnwip description for details on setting a node address.

Syntax

cnfstatmast <IP Address>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<IP Address>

Specifies the IP address for the Statistics Master. IP addresses have 32-bits. The format of an IP address is x.x.x.x, where x is a value in the range 1-255.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfnwip, dspnwip

Example

Configure 199.35.96.217 as the IP address for the Statistics Master.

cnfstatmast 199.35.96.217

cnfstatparms (configure TFPT statistics parameters)

Configures collection of TFTP statistics for the BPX and IGX. This is primarily a Debug command.

Syntax

cnfstatparms <retry> <timeout> <bucket interval> <file interval> <peak> <option>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<retry>

Number of times TFTP should try again when a TFTP error (such as timeout) occurs. Range: 0-5

<timeout>

TFTP acknowledgement timeout. Range: 0-100 seconds

<bucket interval>

Length of the bucket interval. Valid values: 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes

<file interval>

Length of the file interval. Valid values: 15, 30, 60 minutes. Must be a multiple of Bucket Interval.

<peak>

Enable peak statistics. Values: T(rue) | F(alse)

<option>

Enable all statistics or individually selected ones. Values: 1 (All), 2 (User Defined) Depending on the value entered here, you are prompted for more questions.

Related Commands

dspstatparms, dsptrkerrshist

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

Yes

BPX

No

Example (UXM on the IGX)

cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2

sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Available Statistic Object Types: 1: Connections 2: Service Interfaces 3: Trunks 4: Ports 5: Physical Lines .: Quit This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Object Type (numeric value): 3 sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Available Object Sub-types: 1: Narrow Band 2: 3: BPX 8600 ATM 4: IGX 8400 ATM .: Quit This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Object Sub Type (numeric value): 4 Enter Peak Value (secs): 300 sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Virtual Interface Statistic Types 1) QBIN: Voice Cells Tx to line 14) QBIN: Tx BData A Cells Discarded 2) QBIN: TimeStamped Cells Tx to ln 15) QBIN: Tx BData B Cells Discarded 3) QBIN: NTS Cells Tx to line 16) QBIN: Tx CBR Cells Discarded 4) QBIN: Hi-Pri Cells Tx to line 17) QBIN: Tx ABR Cells Discarded 5) QBIN: BData A Cells Tx to line 18) QBIN: Tx nrt-VBR Cells Discarded 6) QBIN: BData B Cells Tx to line 19) QBIN: Tx NTS Cells Received 7) QBIN: Tx CBR Cells Served 20) QBIN: Tx Hi-Pri Cells Received 8) QBIN: Tx nrt-VBR Cells Served 21) QBIN: Tx Voice Cells Received 9) QBIN: Tx ABR Cells Served 22) QBIN: Tx TS Cells Received 10) QBIN: Tx NTS Cells Discarded 23) QBIN: Tx BData A Cells Received 11) QBIN: Tx Hi-Pri Cells Discarded 24) QBIN: Tx BData B Cells Received 12) QBIN: Tx Voice Cells Discarded 25) QBIN: Tx CBR Cells Received 13) QBIN: Tx TS Cells Discarded 26) QBIN: Tx ABR Cells Received This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Virtual Interface Statistic Types 27) QBIN: Tx nrt-VBR Cells Received 40) CGW: Packets Rx From Network 28) VI: Cells rcvd w/CLP=1 41) CGW: Cells Tx to Line 29) VI: OAM cells received 42) CGW: NIW Frms Relayed to Line 30) VI: Cells tx w/CLP=1 43) CGW: SIW Frms Relayed to Line 31) VI: Cells received w/CLP=0 44) CGW: Aborted Frames Tx to Line 32) VI: Cells discarded w/CLP=0 45) CGW: Dscd Pkts 33) VI: Cells discarded w/CLP=1 46) CGW: 0-Length Frms Rx from Network 34) VI: Cells transmitted w/CLP=0 47) CGW: Bd CRC16 Frms Rx from Network 35) VI: OAM cells transmitted 48) CGW: Bd Lngth Frms Rx from Network 36) VI: RM cells received 49) CGW: OAM RTD Cells Tx 37) VI: RM cells transmitted 50) CF: Egress Packet Sequence Errs 38) VI: Cells transmitted 51) CF: Egress Bad HEC from cellbus 39) VI: Cells received 52) CF: Egress Packets from cellbus This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Virtual Interface Statistic Types 53) CF: Egress Cells Tx to Line 66) CF: Ingress Cells from Line 54) CGW: Packets Tx to Network 67) IE: Egress Packets to Extract Buf 55) CGW: Cells Rx from Line 68) IE: Egress Cells injected 56) CGW: NIW Frms Relayed from Line 69) IE: Egress Packets Extract Buf full 57) CGW: SIW Frms Relayed from Line 70) IE: Ingress Cells to Extract Buf 58) CGW: Abrt Frms 71) IE: Ingress Packets injected 59) CGW: Dscd Cells 72) IE: Ingress Cells Extract Buf full 60) CGW: 0-Lngth Frms Rx from Line 73) QBIN: Tx Q10 Cells Served 61) CGW: Bd CRC32 Frms Rx from Line 74) QBIN: Tx Q10 Cells Discarded 62) CGW: Bd Lngth Frms Rx from Line 75) QBIN: Tx Q10 Cells Received 63) CGW: OAM RTD Cells Rx 76) QBIN: Tx Q11 Cells Served 64) CGW: OAM Invalid OAM Cells Rx 77) QBIN: Tx Q11 Cells Discarded 65) CF: Ingress Packets to cellbus 78) QBIN: Tx Q11 Cells Received This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Virtual Interface Statistic Types 79) QBIN: Tx Q12 Cells Served 80) QBIN: Tx Q12 Cells Discarded 81) QBIN: Tx Q12 Cells Received 82) QBIN: Tx Q13 Cells Served 83) QBIN: Tx Q13 Cells Discarded 84) QBIN: Tx Q13 Cells Received 85) QBIN: Tx Q14 Cells Served 86) QBIN: Tx Q14 Cells Discarded 87) QBIN: Tx Q14 Cells Received 88) QBIN: Tx Q15 Cells Served 89) QBIN: Tx Q15 Cells Discarded 90) QBIN: Tx Q15 Cells Received This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Statistic Type ('.' to quit): ============================================================================= *** cnfstatparms for IGX UXM Port Statistics ============================================================================= sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Available Statistic Object Types: 1: Connections 2: Service Interfaces 3: Trunks 4: Ports 5: Physical Lines .: Quit This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Object Type (numeric value): 4 sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Available Object Sub-types: 1: Frame Relay Ports 2: ATM Ports 3: .: Quit This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Object Sub Type (numeric value): 2 Enter Peak Value (secs): 300 sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Port Statistic Types 1) Frames Received 14) LMI UNI Status Update Count 2) Frames Transmitted 15) LMI Invalid Status Enquiries 3) Bytes Received 16) LMI UNI Link Timeout Errors 4) Bytes Transmitted 17) LMI UNI Keepalive Sequence Errors 5) Frames Transmitted with FECN 18) Receive Frames Undefined DLCI Count 6) Frames Transmitted with BECN 19) DE Frames Dropped 7) Receive Frame CRC Errors 20) LMI NNI Status Enquiries 8) Invalid Format Receive Frames 21) LMI NNI Status Receive Count 9) Receive Frame Alignment Errors 22) LMI NNI Status Update Count 10) Illegal Length Receive Frames 23) LMI NNI Keepalive Sequence Errors 11) Number of DMA Overruns 24) LMI NNI Link Timeout Errors 12) LMI UNI Status Enquiries 25) CLLM Frames Transmitted 13) LMI UNI Status Transmit Count 26) CLLM Bytes Transmitted This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Port Statistic Types 27) CLLM Frames Received 40) VI: Cells discarded w/CLP=0 28) CLLM Bytes Received 41) VI: Cells discarded w/CLP=1 29) CLLM Failures 42) VI: Cells transmitted w/CLP=0 30) Tx Frames Discarded - Queue Overflow43) VI: OAM cells transmitted 31) Tx Bytes Discarded - Queue Overflow 44) VI: RM cells received 32) Tx Frames while Ingress LMI Failure 45) VI: RM cells transmitted 33) Tx Bytes while Ingress LMI Failure 46) VI: Cells transmitted 34) PORT: Unknwn VPI/VCI cnt 47) VI: Cells received 35) VI: Cells rcvd w/CLP=1 48) PORT: # of cells rcvd 36) VI: OAM cells received 49) PORT: # of cells xmt 37) VI: Cells tx w/CLP=1 50) INVMUX: maximum diff delay 38) PORT: Last unknown VPI/VCI pair 51) INVMUX: HEC cell errors 39) VI: Cells received w/CLP=0 52) INVMUX: LCP cell errors This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Port Statistic Types 53) INVMUX: Cell Hunt Count 66) LMI: Status messages xmt 54) INVMUX: Bandwidth Change Count 67) LMI: Updt Status msgs xmt 55) ILMI: Get Req PDUs rcvd 68) LMI: Status Ack msgs xmt 56) ILMI: GetNxt Req PDUS rx 69) LMI: Status Enq msgs rcvd 57) ILMI: GetNxt Req PDUS xmt 70) LMI: Status Enq msgs xmt 58) ILMI: Set Req PDUs rcvd 71) LMI: Status msgs rcvd 59) ILMI: Trap PDUs rcvd 72) LMI: Updt Status msg rcvd 60) ILMI: Get Rsp PDUs rcvd 73) LMI: Status Ack msg rcvd 61) ILMI: Get Req PDUs xmt 74) LMI: Invalid LMI PDUs rcvd 62) ILMI: Get Rsp PDUs xmt 75) LMI: Invalid LMI PDU length rcvd 63) ILMI: Set Req PDUs xmt 76) LMI: Unknown LMI PDUs rcvd 64) ILMI: Trap PDUs xmt 77) LMI: Invalid LMI IE rcvd 65) ILMI: Unknwn PDUs rcvd 78) LMI: Invalid Transaction IDs This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Port Statistic Types 79) INVMUX: Unavailable Seconds 92) 80) INVMUX: Near End Fail Count 93) 81) INVMUX: Last Proto Fail Code 94) 82) INVMUX: Slowest Link 95) 83) 96) 84) 97) 85) 98) 86) Q2 Cells Tx 99) 87) Tx Q2 CDscd 100) 88) Egr CRx Q2 101) Q7 Cells Tx 89) Q3 Cells Tx 102) Tx Q7 CDscd 90) Tx Q3 CDscd 103) Egr CRx Q7 91) Egr CRx Q3 104) Q8 Cells Tx This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? sw144 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.1x Date/Time Not Set Port Statistic Types 105) Tx Q8 CDscd 118) Egr CRx Q12 106) Egr CRx Q8 119) Q13 Cells Tx 107) Q9 Cells Tx 120) Tx Q13 CDscd 108) Tx Q9 CDscd 121) Egr CRx Q13 109) Egr CRx Q9 122) Q14 Cells Tx 110) Q10 Cells Tx 123) Tx Q14 CDscd 111) Tx Q10 CDscd 124) Egr CRx Q14 112) Egr CRx Q10 125) Q15 Cells Tx 113) Q11 Cells Tx 126) Tx Q15 CDscd 114) Tx Q11 CDscd 127) Egr CRx Q15 115) Egr CRx Q11 116) Q12 Cells Tx 117) Tx Q12 CDscd This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Statistic Type ('.' to quit):
Example (BXM on the BPX)

cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2

rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:37 GMT Available Statistic Object Types: 1: Connections 2: Service Interfaces 3: Trunks 4: Ports 5: Physical Lines .: Quit This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Object Type (numeric value): 3 rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:37 GMT Available Object Sub-types: 1: Narrow Band 2: 3: BPX 8600 ATM 4: IGX 8400 ATM .: Quit This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Object Sub Type (numeric value): 3 rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:38 GMT Virtual Interface Statistic Types 1) Tx Voice Overflow Drpd Cells 14) Tx Bdata B CLP Drpd Cells 2) Tx TS Overflow Drpd Cells 15) Tx Voice CLP Drpd Cells 3) Tx NTS Overflow Drpd Cells 16) Tx TS CLP Drpd Cells 4) Tx Hi-Pri Overflow Drpd Cells 17) Tx NTS CLP Drpd Cells 5) Tx BData A Overflow Drpd Cells 18) Tx Hi-Pri CLP Drpd Cells 6) Tx BData B Overflow Drpd Cells 19) Tx CBR Cells Served 7) Tx Voice Cells Served 20) Tx VBR Cells Served 8) Tx TS Cells Served 21) Tx ABR Cells Served 9) Tx NTS Cells Served 22) Tx CBR CLP Drpd Cells 10) Tx Hi-Pri Cells Served 23) Tx nrt-VBR CLP Drpd Cells 11) Tx BData A Cells Served 24) Tx ABR CLP Drpd Cells 12) Tx BData B Cells Served 25) Tx CBR Overflow Drpd Cells 13) Tx Bdata A CLP Drpd Cells 26) Tx nrt-VBR Overflow Drpd Cells This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? y rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:38 GMT Virtual Interface Statistic Types 27) Tx ABR Overflow Drpd Cells 40) Egress TS Cells Rx 28) Tx NTS Cells Discarded 41) Egress BData A Cells Rx 29) Tx Hi-Pri Cells Discarded 42) Egress BData B Cells Rx 30) Tx Voice Cells Discarded 43) Egress CBR Cells Rx 31) Tx TS Cells Discarded 44) Egress ABR Cells Rx 32) Tx BData A Cells Discarded 45) Egress VBR Cells Rx 33) Tx BData B Cells Discarded 46) Total Cells Tx from port 34) Tx CBR Cells Discarded 47) Cells RX with CLP0 35) Tx ABR Cells Discarded 48) Cells Rx with CLP1 36) Tx VBR Cells Discarded 49) Cells RX Discard with CLP0 37) Egress NTS Cells Rx 50) Cells RX Discard with CLP1 38) Egress Hi-Pri Cells Rx 51) Cells TX with CLP0 39) Egress Voice Cells Rx 52) Cells TX with CLP1 This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? y rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:38 GMT Virtual Interface Statistic Types 53) BXM: Total Cells RX 66) Egress Q12 Cells Rx 54) Ingress OAM Cell Count 67) Tx Q13 Cells Served 55) Egress OAM Cell Count 68) Tx Q13 Cells Discarded 56) Ingress RM cell count 69) Egress Q13 Cells Rx 57) Egress RM cell count 70) Tx Q14 Cells Served 58) Tx Q10 Cells Served 71) Tx Q14 Cells Discarded 59) Tx Q10 Cells Discarded 72) Egress Q14 Cells Rx 60) Egress Q10 Cells Rx 73) Tx Q15 Cells Served 61) Tx Q11 Cells Served 74) Tx Q15 Cells Discarded 62) Tx Q11 Cells Discarded 75) Egress Q15 Cells Rx 63) Egress Q11 Cells Rx 64) Tx Q12 Cells Served 65) Tx Q12 Cells Discarded This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 3 3 60 Enter Statistic Type ('.' to quit): =============================================================================== *** cnfstatparms for BPX BXM Port Statistics ================================================================================ rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:41 GMT Available Statistic Object Types: 1: Connections 2: Service Interfaces 3: Trunks 4: Ports 5: Physical Lines .: Quit This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Object Type (numeric value): 4 rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:41 GMT Available Object Sub-types: 1: Frame Relay Ports 2: ASI 3: FTC .: Quit This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Object Sub Type (numeric value): 2 rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:42 GMT Port Statistic Types 1) Unknown VPI/VCI count 13) OAM cells received count 2) Cell buff overflow (ingress) 14) Tx payload err cnt BIP-16 err 3) Non-zero GFC count 15) Number of cells xmitted w/CLP set 4) ISU discard count 16) Number of cells xmitted w/EFCI set 5) ISU free list empty count 17) Tx header err discard 6) Receive AIS cell count 18) Get Request PDUs received 7) Receive FERF cell count 19) Get Next Request PDUS received 8) Number of cells received 20) Get Next Request PDUS transmitted 9) Number of cells rcvd w/CLP set 21) Set Request PDUs received 10) Number of cells rcvd w/EFCI set 22) Trap PDUs received 11) Number of BCM cells rcvd 23) Get Response PDUs received 12) Number of cells xmitted 24) Get Request PDUs transmitted This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:42 GMT Port Statistic Types 25) Get Response PDUs transmitted 37) Invalid LMI PDU length received 26) Trap PDUs transmitted 38) Unknown LMI PDUs received 27) Unknown ILMI PDUs Received 39) Invalid LMI IE received 28) Status messages transmitted 40) Invalid Transaction IDs 29) Update Status messages transmitted 41) Number of cells rcvd w/clp 0 30) Status Acknowledge msgs transmitted 42) Number of cells dscd w/clp 0 31) Status Enquiry messages received 43) Number of cells dscd w/clp set 32) Status Enquiry mesgs transmitted 44) Number of cells tx w/clp 0 33) Status messages received 45) Tx OAM cell count 34) Update Status messages received 46) Rx RM cell count 35) Status Acknowledge messages received47) Tx RM cell count 36) Invalid LMI PDUs received received 48) Last unknown VPI/VCI pair This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:42 GMT Port Statistic Types 49) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 0 61) 50) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 0 62) 51) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 0 63) 52) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 1 64) 53) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 1 65) 54) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 1 66) 55) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 2 67) 56) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 2 68) 57) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 2 69) 58) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 3 70) 59) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 3 71) 60) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 3 72) This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Continue? rogue TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.1Z July 14 2000 11:43 GMT Port Statistic Types 73) 85) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 12 74) 86) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 12 75) 87) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 12 76) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 9 88) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 13 77) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 9 89) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 13 78) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 9 90) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 13 79) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 10 91) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 14 80) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 10 92) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 14 81) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 10 93) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 14 82) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 11 94) Tx Cells Served on Qbin 15 83) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 11 95) Tx Cells Discarded on Qbin 15 84) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 11 96) Tx Cells Received on Qbin 15 This Command: cnfstatparms 5 5 5 15 1 2 Enter Statistic Type ('.' to quit):

cnfsysparm (configure system parameters)

Configures various system (or network) parameters. Network-wide parameters are configurable only when all nodes in the network are reachable. The parameters you specify with this command apply throughout the network regardless from which node you execute the command. Take special note of the consequences of how you resolve conflicting values when networks are joined.

You can select each parameter by its index number. The next subsection describes each parameter by index number. Table 3-53 lists the defaults and ranges for each parameter.


Warning Using cnfsysparm requires caution because network rerouting or loss of data may result from changes in system parameters. If necessary, consult with the TAC before you use cnfsysparm.

System Parameters

The configurable system parameters are listed by index number:

In Release 9.1, when cost-based routing is configured, the delay cost cap is the maximum allowable end-to-end delay for the connection type. Use parameters 3 through 12 to configure this delay network-wide for all delay-sensitive connections.

Syntax

cnfsysparm <index> <value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<index>

Specifies a numerical value that refers to the specific parameter to be changed. Index numbers and descriptions of the system-wide parameters are in the table that precedes the command summary.

<value>

Specifies a numerical value that applies to the selected parameter. See Table 3-53.

Parameter Values

System Parameters
Index System-Wide Parameter Default Range

1

Max Time Stamped Packet Age (in milliseconds).

40

1-60

2

Fail Connections On Communication Break.

No

y or n

3

Max Network Delay for "v" connections (in milliseconds).

14

1-255

4

Max Network Delay for "c" connections (in milliseconds).

27

1-64

5

Max Network Delay for "d" connections (in milliseconds).

14

1-255

6

Max Network Delay for "a" connections (in milliseconds).

27

1-255

7

Max Network Delay for High-Speed Data connections (in milliseconds).

40

1-255

8

Max Network Delay for CDP or CVM to CDP or CVM "v" connections (in milliseconds).

64

1-255

9

Max Network Delay for CDP or CVM to CDP or CVM "c" connections (in milliseconds).

64

1-64

10

Max Network Delay for CDP or CVM to CDP or CVM "t & p" connections (in milliseconds).

64

1-255

11

Max Network Delay for CDP or CVM to CDP or CVM "a" connections (in milliseconds).

64

1-255

12

Max Network Delay for CDP or CVM to CDP or CVM High-Speed Data connections (in milliseconds).

64

1-255

13

Enable Discard Eligibility (DE).

No

y or n

14

Use Frame Relay standard parameters Bc and Be.

No

y or n

15

Obsolete: Max Local Delay for Interdom CDP to CDP "v" connections.

27

1-255

16

Obsolete: Max Local Delay for Interdom CDP to CDP "c" connections.

27

1-64

17

Obsolete: Max Local Delay for Interdom CDP to CDP "t & p" connections.

27

1-255

18

Obsolete: Max Local Delay for Interdom CDP to CDP "a" connections.

27

1-255

19

Obsolete: Max Local Delay for Interdom CDP to CDP High-Speed Data connections.

27

1-255

20

Obsolete: Max Local Delay for Interdom High-Speed Data connections (in milliseconds).

28

1-255

21

FastPAD Dejitter Buffer Depth (in milliseconds).

15

0-255

22

Number of Consecutive Invalid Login Attempts to Cause Major Alarm.

0

3-9

23

Enable Connection Deroute Delay.

Yes

y or n

24

Frame Relay VCs Polling Rate is the number of minutes between polling cycles for both ATM and Frame Relay virtual connections in the network.

5

5, 10, or 15

25

Port Polling Rate is the number of minutes between polling cycles for interval statistics gathered for all ports in the network. As the number of connections in a network grows, greater intervals between cycles may be appropriate. The suggested intervals for the numbers of connections are:

  • 5 minutes for up to 300 connections

  • 10 minutes for up to 500 connections

  • 15 minutes for more than 500 connections.

5

5, 10, or 15

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Example
------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 09:34 GMT System-Wide Parameters 1 Max Time Stamped Packet Age (msec) ................................ 32 2 Allow CPU Starvation of Fail Handler .............................. No 3 Max Network Delay for 'v' connections (msec)....................... 14 4 Max Network Delay for 'c' connections (msec)....................... 27 5 Max Network Delay for 't' & 'p' connections (msec)................. 14 6 Max Network Delay for 'a' connections (msec)....................... 27 7 Max Network Delay for High Speed Data connections (msec)........... 32 8 Max Network Delay for CDP-CDP 'v' connections (msec)............... 64 9 Max Network Delay for CDP-CDP 'c' connections (msec)............... 64 10 Max Network Delay for CDP-CDP 't' & 'p' connections (msec)......... 64 11 Max Network Delay for CDP-CDP 'a' connections (msec).............. 64 This Command: cnfsysparm Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 09:35 GMT System-Wide Parameters 12 Max Network Delay for CDP-CDP High Speed Data connections (msec)... 64 13 Enable Discard Eligibility......................................... No 14 Use Frame Relay Standard Parameters Bc and Be...................... No 15 Max Local Delay for Interdom CDP-CDP 'v' conns (msec).............. 27 16 Max Local Delay for Interdom CDP-CDP 'c' conns (msec).............. 27 17 Max Local Delay for Interdom CDP-CDP 't' & 'p' conns (msec)........ 27 18 Max Local Delay for Interdom CDP-CDP 'a' conns (msec).............. 27 19 Max Local Delay for Interdom CDP-CDP High Speed Data conns (msec).. 27 20 Max Local Delay for Interdom High Speed Data conns (msec).......... 28 21 FastPAD Jitter Buffer Size (msec)................................. 15 22 Number of Consecutive Invalid Login Attempts to Cause Major Alarm . 0 This Command: cnfsysparm Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 09:35 GMT System-Wide Parameters 23 Enable Connection Deroute Delay feature ........................... Yes 24 Interval Statstics polling rate for ATM/Frame Relay VCs............ 5 25 Interval Statistics polling rate for ports......................... 5 This Command: cnfsysparm Which parameter do you wish to change:

cnftcpparm (configure TCP parameters)

Configures the TCP parameter. This command specifies the number of times per second that the BCC checks the IP addresses for attention requests.

Syntax

cnftcpparm <network ip throttle>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<network ip throttle>

Specifies the number of times that the BCC card polls the LAN for attention requests.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsptcpparm

Example

cnftcpparm

sw81 TN SuperUser BPX 15 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:46 PST NWIP Bandwidth Throttle (Kbytes/sec): 32 This Command: cnftcpparm Enter NWIP Bandwidth Throttle (Kbytes/sec):

cnfterm (configure terminal port)

Configures data transmission parameters for the control and auxiliary ports. The IGX and BPX nodes support two EIA/TIA-232 serial ports on the upper bus expansion card. The top port is called the Control Terminal port. The lower port is called the Auxiliary Port (AUX).

Parameters can vary with the equipment connected to the port. The control port may connect to a control terminal, a direct-dial modem, or an external EIA/TIA-232 device. The auxiliary port may connect to either a printer or an external EIA/TIA-232 device. After you have set the data transmission parameters for a port, use the SuperUser command cnftermfunc to specify the equipment attached to the port. The configuration parameters must match the equipment physically attached to the port.

Syntax

cnfterm <a | c> <baud> <parity> <data_bits> <stop_bits><output flow control><input flow control>
<CTS flow control><y | n>

Parameters

Parameter Description

a | c

Specifies the port to be configured, where "a" means auxiliary port, and "c" means control port.

baud rate

Specifies the baud rate. The rates are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 bps.

parity

Specifies parity checking for character transmission to and from the port. Valid parity choices are "E" for even parity, "O" for odd parity, and "N" for no parity.

data bits

Specifies the number of bits to be sent for each transmitted character and the number of bits to be expected for each received character. A "7" indicates 7 bits for each character. An "8" indicates 8 bits for each character.

stop bits

Specifies the number of stop bits to be sent with each transmitted character and the number of stop bits to be expected with each received character. A "1" indicates one stop bit with each character; a "2" indicates two stop bits with each character.

output flow control

Specifies the output flow control. An "X" specifies XON/XOFF flow control; an "N" specifies no flow control.

input flow control

Specifies input flow control. An "X" specifies XON/XOFF flow control; an "N" specifies no flow control.

cts flow control

Configures cts flow control. An "X" specifies XON/XOFF flow control; an "N" specifies no flow control. This parameter should be turned off if working with modems on a BPX node.

y | n

Specifies whether the node requires DTR to be asserted to allow or maintain a Login. A "Y" causes the node to require the presence of DTR before allowing a login. A "N" causes the node to ignore DTR.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfterm, cnfprt, window

Example

Configure an auxiliary control port.

cnfterm

lpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 11:58 PST Control port Auxiliary port Baud Rate: 1200 Baud Rate: 9600 Parity: None Parity: None Number of Data Bits: 8 Number of Data Bits: 8 Number of Stop Bits: 1 Number of Stop Bits: 1 Output flow control: XON/XOFF Output flow control: XON/XOFF Input flow control: XON/XOFF Input flow control: XON/XOFF Use DTR signal: Yes DTR signal: Yes This Command: cnfterm Select Control port (c) or Auxiliary port (a):

cnftermfunc (configure terminal port functions)

Configures port functions for the IGX or BPX control and auxiliary ports. The IGX nodes support two EIA/TIA-232 asynchronous serial ports on the SCC and SCM, respectively. The BPX node supports two EIA/TIA-232 asynchronous serial ports on the BCC. In all cases, the top port is the Control Terminal port, and the lower port is the Aux Port. The Control Terminal port can connect to a control terminal, Cisco WAN Manager, a direct dial-in modem, or any external EIA/TIA-232 device. The Aux Port can connect to a printer, an auto-dial modem to call a control center, or an external EIA/TIA-232 device.

The interface specified for the port must match the equipment physically attached to the port. The baud rate and other data transmission parameters for the port are set with the cnfterm command. If either port is configured as an external device window, enter the window command to begin a session with the external device.

If the auxiliary port is configured as an auto-dial modem, designate a network ID and a phone number. Configuring the auxiliary port for an auto-dial modem enables the following to occur: When a change in alarm status happens anywhere in the network, the auto-dial modem attached to the auxiliary port dials the specified phone number. If the call goes to the TAC, the alarm is logged under the specified network ID. With this log, Cisco engineers are automatically notified of any problems that occur in the network.

Syntax

cnftermfunc <a | c> <index> [escape_string | (Network_ID_string)] [dial_string]

Parameters

Parameter Description

<a | c>

Specifies port.
a specifies that the auxiliary port will be configured.
c specifies that the control port will be configured.

<index>

Control port:
1. VT100/Cisco WAN Manager
2. VT100
3. External device window

Auxiliary port:
1. Okidata 184 printer
2. Okidata 184 printer with LOG
3. VT100
4. Alarm Message Collector
5. External Device Window
6. Autodial Modem

escape string

Specifies a string of 1 to 8 characters used to terminate a session with an external device. This parameter is valid only for "External Device Window" interfaces. Default: quit

network id string

Specifies a string of 1-12 characters used to identify the network during an auto-dial connection to the TAC. This parameter is valid only for "Autodial Modem" interfaces. Any alarm status change in the network is automatically logged at Cisco by using this network ID. Contact TAC for the ID to use.

dial string

Specifies the telephone number to be dialed when the network is reporting alarm status changes via the auto-dial modem. This parameter is valid only for "Autodial Modem" interfaces. The phone number can be up to 16 characters long and normally consists of digits and commas only. A comma is used to indicate that the auto-dial modem should pause two seconds before continuing to dial. For example, the number "9,4083700736" would cause the modem to dial a "9," pause two seconds, then dial the remaining digits. Contact Cisco TAC for the number.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfterm, cnfprt, dsptermfunc

Example

Configure an IGX or BPX node control or auxiliary port.

cnftermfunc

Without an argument on the command line, the switch displays a list of parameters:

TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 03:46 GMT Control port Auxiliary port 1. VT100/StrataView 1. Okidata 182 Printer 2. VT100 2. Okidata 182 Printer with LOG 3. External Device Window 3. VT100 4. Alarm Message Collector 5. External Device Window 6. Autodial Modem This Command: cnftermfunc Select Control port (c) or Auxiliary port (a)
Example

Configure an auxiliary port. The port configuration screen appears with "Autodial Modem" highlighted to indicate that this interface has been chosen for the auxiliary port. When an alarm occurs on the network, the modem dials 18007674479 to reach the TAC. The alarm is logged on a Cisco computer under the name Intrepid.

cnftermfunc a 5 Intrepid 18007674479

cnftime (configure time)

Sets the time for the entire network. The time is broadcast to all nodes in the network. The time displayed at each node is adjusted for the node's time zone. (See the cnftmzn command for more about time zone.) This command can be executed only if the date for the network has already been configured using the cnfdate command. If hour, minute, or second is not entered, the current value is kept.

Syntax

cnftime <hour> <minute> <second>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<hour>

Sets the time for the entire network. The time is broadcast to all nodes in the network. The time displayed at each node is adjusted for the node's time zone.
(See the cnftmzn command for more information.) This command can only be executed if the date for the network has already been configured using the cnfdate command. If hour, minute, or second is not entered, the current value is kept.

<minute>

Specifies the current minute. Range: 0-59

<second>

Specifies the current second. Range: 0-59

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfdate, cnftmz

Example

Configure time to 7:31 in the evening. The system displays two warning prompts before it changes the time.

cnftime 19 31 00

pubsigx1 TN SuperUser IGX 8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 19:31 GMT This Command: cnftime 19 31 00 Warning: Changing time of day affects StrataView statistics timestamps Hit RETURN to change clock, DEL to abort

cnftlparm (configure trunk-based loading parameters)

Configures the trunk-based loading (TBL) parameters. Use the cnftlparm command to control the rate of update messages in conjunction with trunk-based loading.


Note   Cisco Systems recommends that you leave all parameters at the default values. If you need to change a TBL parameter, first call TAC.

Syntax

cnftlparm <index>

Parameters

No. Index Description Range Default

1

Enable

Enables or disables automatic TBL update messages. Do not disable unless you first contact TAC.

Yes/No

Yes

2

Normal Interval

Specifies the time interval between checks to determine if the node should send out a TBL update signaling a non-critical change in the trunk load.

0-65000 (times
100 msecs)

150

3

Fast Interval

Specifies the time interval between checks to determine if the node should send out a TBL update signaling a critical change in the trunk load.

0-65000 (times
100 msecs)

50

4

Low Threshold

Algorithm parameters for complex update algorithm.

1-100%

50

5

High Threshold

Algorithm parameters for complex update algorithm.

1-100%

90

6

Min. Percent Chg, Mid 1

Algorithm parameters for complex update algorithm.

1-100%

10

7

Min. Percent Chg, Mid 2

Algorithm parameters for complex update algorithm.

1-100%

6

8

Min. Percent Chg, Mid 3

Algorithm parameters for complex update algorithm.

1-100%

3

9

Min. Percent Chg, Upper

Algorithm parameters for complex update algorithm.

1-100%

2

10

Background Updt Count

Specifies a periodic update. 0=update disabled. If Background Updt Count is greater than 0, switch software multiplies it by the value you specify for Normal Interval.

0-1000%

0

11

Update Algorithm

Selects the update algorithm. 0=default. 1=complex update algorithm.

0 or 1

0

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfcmparm

Example

cnftlparm

sw66 TN SuperUser BPX 15 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 22:31 GMT 1 Enable [ Yes] 2 Normal Interval [ 150] (100msecs) 3 Fast Interval [ 50] (100msecs) 4 Low Threshold [ 50] (D) 5 High Threshold [ 90] (D) 6 Min Percent Chg, Mid 1 [ 10] (D) 7 Min Percent Chg, Mid 2 [ 6] (D) 8 Min Percent Chg, Mid 3 [ 3] (D) 9 Min Percent Chg, Upper [ 2] (D) 10 Background Updt Count [ 0] (D) 11 Update Algorithm [ 0] (D) This Command: cnftlparm Enter parameter index:

cnftmzn (configure time zone)

Configures the time zone for the node. Configuring the time zone for a node ensures that the node's time is correct for the local area regardless of the node at which the network date and time are set. Once configured, the time zone for the node is saved in battery-backed memory. After a power failure, a node's date and time are restored if at least one other node in the network has the current time and date.

Syntax

cnftmzn <timezone | g+ | - hours>

Parameters

Parameter Description

time zone

  • gmt (or g)—Greenwich Mean Time

  • cst (or c)—Central Standard Time

  • est (or e)—Eastern Standard Time

  • mst (or m)—Mountain Standard Time

  • pst (or p—Pacific Standard Time

  • yst (or y)—Yukon Standard Time

  • cdt—Central Daylight Savings Time

  • edt—Eastern Daylight Savings Time

  • mdt—Mountain Daylight Savings Time

  • pdt—Pacific Daylight Savings Time

  • ydt—Yukon Daylight Savings Time

g+ | - hours

Specifies the difference in hours between local time and Greenwich Mean Time. Instead of entering the time zone, you can enter the hours from Greenwich Mean Time. For example, instead of entering pdt for Pacific Daylight Time, you could enter g-7, which is Greenwich Mean Time minus 7 hours.
Range: -12 to +12 hours.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfdate

Example

Configures the time zone to Pacific Standard Time.

cnftmzn pst

alpha TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 13:19 PST Last Command: cnftmzn pst Next Command:

cnftrk (configure trunk)

Configures trunk parameters. This is the typical procedure:

    1. Use uptrk to first "up" or activate the trunk, which has a default configuration.

    2. Then use cnftrk to configure trunk parameters. You must execute cnftrk at both ends of a trunk. (You also use cnftrk to configure an interface shelf.)

    3. Next you use addtrk to add it to the network.

In the display for cnftrk, the current value for each parameter appears on screen. At the command line prompt for each parameter, the current or default value appears in parentheses and stays the same if you press Return without entering anything. Configurable parameters depend on the trunk type. For example, an NTM card and a BNI support different parameters. If a displayed parameter is not available for the current interface, its name displays at half-intensity, and the value field contains dashes. (Note that Clock Rate is a required parameter for only HSSI. The Clock Rate range is 4 Mbps-50.84 Mbps. The actual clock limits depend on the front card.)

If you specify cnftrk in a job, prompts appear for line format and line options when you create or edit the job by using addjob or editjob, respectively.

Since Release 9.1, you can configure cost-based routing from either end of the trunk. You can change the cost before or after the trunk has been added to the network. You can also change the cost after connections have been routed over the trunk. Any cost change is updated network-wide. Every node in the network stores the cost of every trunk in the network.

The cnftrk command configures a logical trunk (physical or virtual), so when you change a physical parameter, all trunks on the port (both physical and virtual) are affected. For example, if you change the line framing on a virtual trunk, all virtual trunks on the port are automatically updated to have the modified line framing.

You can use cnftrk to configure the Transmit Trunk Rate for all BPX cards, except for the BXM card. For BXM cards, you must use the cnfrsrc command to configure the Transmit Trunk Rate (trunk load). For IGX cards, you can configure the Transmit Trunk Rate after a trunk has been added.

You can use the cnftrk command to assign a VPI value. You will not be able to configure the VPI value if the virtual trunk is already configured for VSI. Also note that if the VSI feature is enabled, and you execute cnftrk to decrease the transmit rate, you must confirm whether the Qbin configuration is set up correctly by using the cnfqbin command to change the value. The reason for this is that when the transmit rate is decreased, the Qbin depth will be automatically recalculated.

The cnftrk command supports the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR traffic classes. Similarly, the virtual trunk type can be rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.

You can configure the ILMI protocol running on a trunk interface to run on the BCC instead of the BXM.

With Release 9.3.10, you can configure the ILMI protocol to run on both a BXM and a UXM interface card (UXM) instead of on the BCC and NPM controller cards (BCC). The ILMI Neighbor Discovery feature is available for use on virtual trunks on the BXM card and UXM card. This feature enables a network management system, such as Cisco WAN Manager or CiscoWorks 2000, to discover other attached ATM devices, such as Cisco ATM routers or switches. The attached devices also must support ILMI Neighbor Discovery for this feature to work.

When ILMI Neighbor Discover is enabled on a virtual trunk, the BPX or IGX and the attached ATM device will exchange their management IP addresses together with other interface information with each other using the ILMI protocol. The exchanged information consists of the following:

Use parameter option 56 (BXM) or 53 (UXM) from the cnfnodeparm SuperUser command to configure the ILMI Management IP address. The Management IP address is used by the NMS application to access the BPX, IGX, or the ATM device. Depending upon your network set up, you can configure the BPX or IGX to send either the LAN IP address or Network IP address as part of the neighbor information exchange with the attached ATM device. Enter 0 for LAN IP address, or 1 for Network IP address. The default is the network IP address for the BPX or IGX.

Once the parameter is set in cnfnodeparm, enable Neighbor Discovery by using the cnftrk command. Use the parameter ILMI Run On The Card for the UXM, and Protocol By The Card for the BXM.

Use the dspnebdisc command to display all the neighbor's information discovered by the BPX or the IGX via the ILMI Neighbor Discovery procedure.

Syntax

cnftrk <slot.port>[.vtrk] <options for E1 | T1 | E3 | T3 | OC-3 | OC-12 | E2 | HSSI | SR >

Parameters

Trunk Option Type Description Possible Entries Default

slot.port

All

The number of the trunk to configure.

Any valid slot and port. For cards with one port, use slot.

N/A

Trunk Identification
(display only—not configurable)

All

Displays trunk number, trunk type and bandwidth supplied; and the card type and slot number of the unit supporting the trunk.

T3, E3, T1, E1, E2, fractional T1, fractional E1 subrate, ATM, NTC, NTM, OC-3, STM1, OC-12, STM4.

none

Clock Rate

ATM

This clock rate is for only HSSI.

4 Mbps-50.84 Mbps

Transmit Trunk Rate

(display only—not configurable)

ATM

This indicates the trunk load, and is configurable by using cnfrsrc command for BXM cards (BPX platform). This parameter appears on the cnftrk screen for display purposes only.

On IGX, Transmit Trunk Rate is configurable after a trunk has been added.

Note   The trunk load, which displays in brackets at the end of the first line on the cnftrk display, may vary from the Transmit Trunk Rate value. This is due to the way that cells are converted to DS0s, and vice versa, and the way the Rcv Trunk Rate determines the Transmit load at the other end of the trunk. The Transmit Trunk Rate in cells per second (cps) may not fit in the full DS0 thus the resulting value may be truncated. The result is that the values displayed in Trunk load field and Transmit Trunk Rate fields may display different values.

Subrate interface

PKT

Subrate physical interface type.

X.21 | V.35

X.21

Subrate data rate

PKT

Subrate data rate in Kbps. Allows you to specify, in Kpbs, the clock rate for the selected subrate interface. Acceptable values are any multiple of 64 Kpbs up to a maximum of 1920 Kbps.

64 Kbps, 128 Kbps,
256 Kbps, 384 Kbps, 1.024Mbps, 1.536 Mbps, and 1.920Mbps

1920 Kbps

DS0 map

PKT

Specifies the DS0s to use for a fractional T1 or E1 bundle. Optional "a" = "use alternating channels" (for example, 20-30a means 20, 22, 24, and so on).

x - y[a]

0-31 (E1) 0-23 (T1)

Pass sync

All

Enables the trunk to pass a clock for network synchronization.

Yes | No

Yes for standard, no for virtual trunks

Loop Clock

All

Loop receive clock back to transmit.

Yes | No

No

Statistical
Reserve

All

This trunk bandwidth is reserved for non-standard traffic, such as internode controller messages or user traffic diverted because of a failure.

With Release 9.3.0 switch software, the default values for statistical reserves are increased to accommodate sufficient bandwidth for control traffic. The statistical reserve can be changed. However, if you modify the reserves below the recommended statistical reserve, a warning message is displayed. For example, if the statistical reserve is changed below recommended values for "upped" trunks, the warning message that follows is displayed:

WARNING: Changing stats reserve
< {1000| 300 } may cause a drop in CC traffic

0-10666

The recommended stats reserve for T3/E3/OC3/OC12 is 1000 cps and 300 cps for T1/E1 virtual trunks.

Header Type

ATM

Selects the ATM cell header type: UNI, NNI, or STI. UNI is the default for virtual trunks but you may need to configure this parameter to NNI to match the header type of the VPC provided by the ATM cloud. In this release, this parameter is configurable for physical and virtual trunks. See the Cisco WAN Switching System Overview for a description.

UNI | NNI | STI

STI

Gateway Type

ATM

Defines the type of addressing mode for this trunk. See Cisco WAN Switching System Overview for a description.

BPX-BPX (BAM)
Cloud (CAM)
Simple (SAM)

BAM

VPI Address

ATM

Virtual path address in ATM cell. The VPI configured for a virtual trunk must match the VPI for the VPC in the cloud. Valid VPC VPIs depend on the port type. Must be non-0 for a virtual trunk.

BXM/UXM (UNI)—1-255
BXM/UXM (NNI)—1-4095
BNI T3/E3—1-255
BNI OC-3—1-63

0

VCI Address

ATM

Virtual circuit address in ATM cell.

0-65,535

0

Idle code

All

HEX code either in the payload space of an ATM idle cell or on an idle FastPacket trunk (idle packets do not exist)

0-FF (hex)

54 (E1)
7F (T1, ATM)

SVC Channels

ATM

The number of channels reserved for SVCs.

T3: 0-1771
E3: 0-1771
OC-3: 0-16199

0

SVC Bandwidth

ATM

The bandwidth reserved for SVCs.

T3: 96000 cps
E3: 80000 cps
OC-3: 353208 cps

0

Restrict CC traffic (requires SuperUser privilege)

All

Restrict node controller messages from
a trunk. Restricting CC traffic can cause serious problems. Contact the TAC through Cisco Customer Engineering before you change it.

Y | N

No

Link type

All

Terrestrial or Satellite link.Link Type applies to configuring a route so it can "avoid satellite."

T | S

T

Routing Cost

ATM

The administrative cost of a trunk for when cost-based routing is configured.

1-50

10 (upon trunk activation)

Line framing

PKT

T1 line framing

D4 | ESF

D4

Line coding

PKT

E1 line coding
T1 line coding

HDB3 | AMI
ZCS | B8ZS | AMI

HDB3
ZCS

Line CRC

PKT

E1 CRC-4

Yes | No

No

Recv impedance

PKT

E1 receive impedance.

1 = 75W unbalanced
2 = 75W balanced
3 = 120W balanced

1

Cable type and
cable length

PKT



ATM

Length and type of cable used for trunk. Designates the software configurable line build-out to match the cable length from the IGX node to the DSX cross-connect.



For BPX, the choices are 0-225 feet and over 225 feet. Cable type is not selectable for BPX. Not applicable to MMF or SMF.

1 = 0-220' MAT
2 = 220-440' MAT
3 = 440-655' MAT
4 = 0 -133' ABAM
5 = 133-266' ABAM
6 = 266-399' ABAM
7 = 399-533' ABAM
8 = 533-655' ABAM

0= 0-225
1= greater than 255

4








0

HCS Masking

ATM

Mask the ATM cell header checksum to disable error checking. HCS Masking applies to E3, OC-3, and OC-12 only.

Yes | No

Yes

Payload Scramble

ATM
BNI

Scramble the cell payload.

Yes | No

Yes for BNI-E3
No for all others

End supp BData

PKT
ATM

Indicates whether the far end of a trunk supports bursty, Frame Relay data.

Yes | No

No

End supp FST

PKT
ATM

Indicates whether the far end of the trunk supports Optimized Bandwidth Management for Frame Relay.

Yes | No

No

Gateway
Efficiency

ATM

How many packets to stuff into an ATM cell. Does not apply to BNI.

1 | 2 | 3

2

IMA Differential Delay

Range: 0-200 milliseconds.
Default: Differential delay of 200 msec.

Because all physical links share the same line configuration, any changes made to this parameter and IMA Clock Mode parameter will be applied to all physical links of the specified IMA group.

This parameter is configurable on virtual trunks that are on top of IMA ports.

0-200 msec

0-200 msec

IMA Clock Mode

Two clock mode options are available: Common Transmit Clock Source (CTC mode), and Independent Transmit Clock Source (ITC mode). CTC mode is the default.

This parameter is configurable on virtual trunks that are on top of IMA ports.

CTC mode

IMA Group member

Lets you add or delete physical lines of an existing IMA group. You are prompted to enter the physical lines using the following format, for example:

IMA Group member: 1,3,5,7
or
IMA Group member:

where 1,3,5,7 are physical lines that comprise the IMA group.

You can configure this parameter on virtual trunks that are on top of IMA ports.

IMA Group member is a set of physical lines comprising an IMA group. You can specify the group member as an expression consisting of the primary link followed by a "," (comma), or a hyphen (-), and additional physical links. You then use the following syntax to up a trunk when you specify an IMA group on a UXM trunk:

uptrk slot.group_member.vtrk

primary link (slot.port)

No default

Retained links

Total number of physical links in the group must be greater than or equal to the number of retained links.

IMA Protocol Option

Lets you enable/disable the IMA Protocol on trunks that have only one physical line.

Enabled/Disabled

Default: IMA protocol disabled on these trunk types

Deroute Delay Time

All

Indicates how long in seconds the network will wait before rerouting connections on a failed trunk. This helps when statistical errors are occurring or when a trunk momentarily moves into a failure state then returns to normal operation. This feature is relevant when rerouting the connections is more of a disruption than the errors caused by the intermittent trunk.

Causes each node not to recognize the trunk as failed until this timer expires at the nodes used by the trunk. This indirectly affects the time that A-bit notifications are sent out because the connection deroute is also delayed.

Regarding the A-bit Notifications feature in Release 9.1.07, this parameter specifies the maximum number of connections that can be derouted at the same time when the connection management (CM) state machine runs.

0-600

0

Optional Parameters

Virtual Trunk Parameter Type Description Possible Entries Default

Connection Channels

BNI

The maximum number of connection channels per trunk. All virtual trunks on the port share this total. The number of connections added to the port cannot exceed the number of connection channels configured for the port.

Number of connection channels, or LCNs, on the trunk port that are usable by the virtual trunk. This number cannot be greater than the total number of connection channels on the card. The maximum number of channels is additionally limited by the number of VCI bits in the UNI cell header. For a virtual trunk, divide this number by the maximum number of virtual trunks on the port to get the default.

BNI-T3/E3: max 1771

BNI-OC-3: max 15867 (3837 maximum/virtual trunk)

BXM/UXM: 1-(number of channels allowable on card)

BNI-T3/E3: 1771

BNI-OC-3: 15867

For Virtual Trunks:

BNI-T3/E3: 55

BNI-OC-3: 1442

Valid Traffic Classes

BNI, BXM

The valid types of traffic for a virtual trunk. The recommended traffic classes for each virtual trunk type:

On a CBR trunk: ATM CBR, NTS, TS, voice. All traffic classes are recommended on a CBR trunk.
On a VBR trunk: ATM VBR, bursty data A, bursty data, bursty data B (Optimized Bandwidth Management), ABR
On an ABR trunk: ATM ABR and bursty data B (Optimized Bandwidth Management).

V—voice
TS—timestamped
NTS—non-timestamped
FR—Frame Relay
FST—Optimized Bandwidth Management (formerly ForeSight)
CBR—constant bit rate
VBR—variable bit rate
ABR—available bit rate

Virtual Trunk Type

BNI, BXM, UXM

This choice usually comes from the carrier that provides the ATM cloud. This is the VPC type provided by the ATM cloud.

CBR, VBR, ABR

CBR

Virtual Trunk VPI

BNI, BXM, UXM

Virtual trunks must be configured to have a greater-than-0 VPI before connections are added by addcon. This value usually comes from the carrier that provides the ATM cloud.

VPI configured for a virtual trunk matches VPI for VPC in the ATM cloud. Every cell transmitted to this trunk has this VPI value. Valid VPC VPIs depend on the port type.

1-255 for BXM/UXM (UNI)

1-4095 for BXM/UXM (NNI)

1-255 for BNI T3/E3

1-63 for BNI OC-3 (STM1)

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Related Commands

addtrk, dsptrkcnf

Subrate and Fractional Trunks

For FastPacket trunks, which the NTC and NTM front cards support, you can configure the Subrate interface and Subrate data rate fields only if the back card is a BC-SR. The interface types for a subrate trunk are:

Set the data rate to match the subrate facility within the range 64 Kbps-1.920 Mbps.

The DS0 map is used to define fractional E1 and T1 trunks. It consists of a repeating set of specifications in the form:

<x[-y[a]]>
where
"x" and the optional "y" are DS0 numbers 0-23, and
the optional "a" indicates alternating.

The value of "y" must be greater than the value of "x." The values of both "x" and "y" cannot be less than 0 or greater than the maximum number of DS-0s for the line type. In the DS0 map for unframed E1, use 0-31. For framed E1, use 1-31. For 30 DS-0 E1, use 1-15, 17-31.

Receive and Transmit Rates on Physical Trunks

The parameters RCV Trunk Rate and Transmit Trunk Rate apply to physical ATM trunks on an IGX node. On a BPX node, only Transmit Trunk Rate is available. These parameters let you configure lower rates than the maximum line rate for the trunk type. If you adjust a rate, you need to do this at both ends of the trunk. For example, if RCV Trunk Rate on an IGX is 40,000 packets per second (pps), Transmit Trunk Rate on the far end must be 20,000 cells per second (cps). The typical relationship between pps and cps is two FastPackets for each cell.

The default value for Transmit Trunk Rate is the maximum rate for the back card type. You can reduce this rate to any number of cells per second that is less than or equal to the physical port rate. If E3 or T2 is selected, the bandwidth is reduced from the T3 rate.


Note   You can configure the Transmit Trunk Rate parameter, which indicates the trunk load, by using the cnfrsrc command on BXM cards. On both IGX and BPX nodes, the trunk load displays in cps (cells per second), and the value is displayed in brackets on the first line of the cnftrk display.

On the cnftrk screen, the Transmit Rate and Transmit Load are always displayed in cps (cells per second). (The Transmit Load displays in brackets above the Transmit Rate field, for example, TRK 13.1.1 Config T3 [2867 cps].) Because switch software performs an internal conversion from DS0s to cells for the receive rate, this receive rate dictates the transmit load at the other end of the trunk, and vice versa. Because the Transmit Load (in cps) may not fit into the full DS0, the resulting number that appears in the Transmit Load field (for example, [2867 cps], could be truncated. For example, if you were to change the Transmit Rate on a routing trunk from 96000 to 104268, cnftrk will prompt you to enter a Transmit Rate of 0-104268, and will accept 104268, but it may assign a value of 104150 instead of 104268. The Transmit Load would be the same, for example, 104150 cps, regardless of whether the user configured the Transmit Rate as 104268 or 104269 or 104270.

This shows how the transmit rate is calculated internally by switch software:

1 DS0 = 64000 bits/sec
or
DS0 = 8 bits x 8000 samples/sec = 64000 bits/sec
1 cell long unit = 424 bits/sec
therefore:
Number of cells per second (cps) = DS0 * 8000 / 53 bytes per ATM cell

For any user-provided Transmit Trunk Rate value in T1 cells per second (cps).

Rcv Trunk Rate = T1 x 53 /8000 (in DS0)

(This is the actual value used for everything and dictates the Transmit Trunk Load value at the other end of the trunk.)
The conversion occurs again at the other end:

T2 = R1 * 8000 / 53 (in cps)

The Transmit Load number displayed in brackets is the same, that is, 104150 cells per second, whether the user has given the Transmit Rate as 104268 or 104269 or 104270.

Receive and Transmit Rates on Virtual Trunks

The implementation of XMT Trunk Rate on a virtual trunk differs from the implementation on a physical trunk. On a physical trunk, XMT Trunk Rate limits the rate at which the back card physically generates cells. For a virtual trunk, XMT Trunk Rate does not limit the rate at which the back card generates cells: the line rate stays at the maximum for the line type. However, XMT Trunk Rate is the maximum transmission rate allowed on a virtual trunk.

The provider of the virtual trunk service assigns the value for XMT Trunk Rate. You must have this provider-assigned value for XMT Trunk Rate and enter it when you use cnftrk.

The total bandwidth of all the virtual trunks in one port cannot exceed the maximum bandwidth of the port. The trunk loading (load units) is maintained per virtual trunk, but the cumulative loading of all virtual trunks on a port is restricted by the transmit and receive rates for the port.

Physical and Virtual Trunk Configuration

Physical and virtual trunk configuration is similar. See Table 3-54 for default statistical reserves for physical trunks. See Table 3-55 for default statistical reserves for virtual trunks.

When you configure a port-level characteristic of a virtual trunk, all the virtual trunks on the port are modified with that characteristic. When the port characteristics of a trunk are modified, all characteristics related to that trunk port are updated.

Virtual trunks appear in the routing topology map as available trunks for routing. The existing physical trunk characteristics, such as bandwidth and satellite/terrestrial type, apply to virtual trunks. The routing algorithm must take into account special restrictions and conid assignments for a virtual trunk. For example, VPCs cannot be routed over a virtual trunk. Also, each virtual trunk has a configurable number of connection channels reserved from the card. The routing algorithm checks for adequate channel availability on a virtual trunk before selecting the trunk for the route.

The connection channel management scheme for the UXM and BXM cards is the same as in the previous release. The conids are selected on a per logical trunk basis. The associated LCNs are selected from a pool of LCNs for the entire card. Each virtual trunk can use the full range of acceptable conid values. The range consists of all the 16-bit values (1-65535), excluding the node numbers and blind addresses. A port uses the VPI to differentiate connections that have the same conid.

The number of channels per virtual trunk can be changed after the trunk has been added to the network. Decreasing the number of channels on an added virtual trunk causes connection reroutes where increasing the number of channels on an added virtual trunk will not cause connection reroutes.


Table 3-54: Default Statistical Reserves for Physical Trunks
BNI BXM UXM ALM NTM

IMA-T1/E1

N/A

N/A

5000cps > T2, E2

1000 cps < T2, E2

N/A

N/A

T1/E1

N/A

N/A

1000 cps

N/A

1000 cps

T3/E3

5000 cps

5000 cps

5000 cps

5000 cps

N/A

OC3

5000 cps

5000 cps

5000 cps

N/A

N/A

OC12

N/A

5000 cps

N/A

N/A

N/A

T2 = 14490 cps (96 DS0s)
E2 = 19900 cps
N/A = not available


Table 3-55: Default Statistical Reserves for Virtual Trunks
BNI BXM UXM

T1/E1

N/A

N/A

300 cps

T3/E3

1000 cps

1000 cps

1000 cps

OC3

1000 cps

1000 cps

1000 cps

OC12

N/A

1000 cps

N/A

N/A = not available

Configuring an IMA-Compliant Trunk

The cnftrk command has a parameter that lets you add or delete physical lines of an existing IMA group (IMA Group member parameter). You are prompted to enter the physical lines. When you add or delete a physical link, these rules are enforced:

Primary Link—In an IMA group, you must select one of the physical links to be a primary link. This primary link number is used to refer to this IMA group or trunk. You can use cnftrk to add additional links to the group or delete existing links.

When deleting existing links from an IMA group, you cannot delete the primary link. You must first deactivate the trunk using deltrk, then use dntrk to remove the primary link.

Refer to 9.2 release notes for up-to-date feature support and system requirements.

Specifying a Set of Physical Lines (Comprising an IMA Group)

In Release 9.1, it was a requirement that the IMA group had to consist of consecutive physical lines. In this release, you can define an IMA trunk consisting of non-consecutive physical lines. In addition, you can change the group member by deleting a physical line from an existing IMA trunk.

Use the following syntax to specify an IMA group on a UXM trunk:

where:

slot is the slot number

group_member is a set of physical lines composing an IMA group. You can specify the member in an expression consisting of the primary link followed by a, or - and additional physical links.

vtrk is the optional virtual trunk number. If at least one virtual trunk already exists on this port, you only have to specify the primary link as the group_member.

For example, 9.1-4 defines trunk 9.1 to consist of four physical links, that is, 1, 2, 3 and 4, where physical link 1 is the primary link. (This example is compatible with Release 9.1.)

For example, 9.1-3,5 defines trunk 9.1 to consist of four physical links, that is, 1, 2, 3 and 5 where physical link 1 is the primary link.

For example, 9.5-7,2-3 defines trunk 9.5 to consist of five physical links, that is, 2, 3, 5, 6 and 7 where physical link 5 is the primary link.

For example, 9.8,2,4,6 defines trunk 9.8 to consist of all even number of physical links where physical link 8 is the primary link.

Physical and Virtual Trunk Parameters

Table 3-56 below shows the trunk parameters that you can configure by using cnftrk. You can specify all physical options on virtual trunks. If you change a physical option on a virtual trunk, the change is propagated to all virtual trunks on the trunk port.

An X indicates that the parameter is configurable. An X* in the Virtual column indicates that the parameter is a physical parameter, and changing the value for one virtual trunk on the port will automatically cause all virtual trunks on the port to be updated with the same value.


Table 3-56: cnftrk—Parameters That are Configurable on Physical and Virtual Trunks
Descriptions BXM UXM
Physical Virtual Physical Virtual

Transmit Trunk Rate (configurable using cnfrsrc)

X

X

X

X

Receive Trunk Rate

X

X

X

X

Pass Sync

X

X*

X

X*

Loop Clock

X

X*

X

X*

Statistical Reserve

X

X

X

X

Header Type NNI

X

X*

X

X*

Trunk VPI

X

X

X

Routing Cost

X

X

X

X

Virtual Trunk Type

X

X

Idle Code

X

X*

X

X*

Restrict PCC traffic

X

X

X

X

Link Type

X

X*

X

X*

Line Framing

X

X*

X

X*

Line Coding

X

X*

Line Cable type

X

X*

Line cable length

X

X*

X

X*

HCS Masking

X

X*

X

X*

Payload Scramble

X

X*

X

X*

Connection Channels

X

X

X

X

Gateway Channels

X

X

Valid Traffic classes

X

X

X

X

Frame Scramble

X

X*

X

X*

Deroute Delay Time

X

X

X

X

VC (Traffic) Shaping

X

X

X

X

Protocol by the Card

X

X

X

X

IMA Differential Delay

X

X

IMA Clock Mode

X

X

IMA Group member

X

X

Retained links

X

X

IMA Differential Delay

X

X

Virtual Trunk Traffic Classes

All types of Cisco traffic are supported through an ATM cloud. Every trunk is defaulted to carry every type of traffic. The CBR, VBR (rt-VBR and nrt-VBR), and ABR virtual trunks within the cloud should be configured to carry the correct type of traffic. The CBR trunk is suited to carry all types of traffic. The VBR trunk is best suited to carry IGX Frame Relay and BPX VBR traffic, as well as Optimized Bandwidth Management (formerly called ForeSight) and ABR traffic. The ABR trunk is best suited to carry Optimized Bandwidth Management and ABR traffic. You can change the type of traffic each trunk carries. However, to avoid unpredictable results, it is best to stick to the recommended traffic types for a given VPC type.

Two-stage queueing at the egress of virtual trunks allows shaping of traffic before it enters the cloud. However, the traffic is still routed on a single VPC and may be affected by the traffic class of the VPC selected.

You can configure any number of virtual trunks between two ports up the maximum number of virtual trunks per slot and the maximum number of logical trunks per node. These trunks can be any number of three trunk types.

The unique characteristics of CBR, VBR (rt-VBR and nrt-VBR), and ABR traffic are maintained through the cloud as long as the correct type of virtual trunk is used. The traffic classes allowed per virtual trunk are configured with cnftrk. The routing algorithm excludes virtual trunks whose traffic class is not compatible with the candidate connection to be routed.

Adding a Single Virtual Trunk

The example in this section describes a typical scenario of adding one virtual trunk across an ATM network. One one side of the cloud is a BPX with a BXM trunk in slot 4. On the other side of the cloud is an IGX with a UXM trunk card in slot 10. A virtual trunk is added between port 3 on the BXM and port 2 of the UXM.

Use the same steps that follow to add a virtual trunk on top of IMA ports on the IGX platform.

Once you up a virtual trunk, and the IMA port has been allocated during the uptrk command, then you up additional virtual trunks using ONLY the primary IMA port, for example, 10.2.2, 10.2.3, and so on.

You must configure a VPC within the cloud first.

    1. On BPX_A, up virtual trunk #1 on BXM trunk port 4.3.1.

uptrk 4.3.1

    2. On BPX_A, configure the VPI, VPC type, traffic classes, number of connection channels, and header type.

cnftrk 4.3.1

    3. On IGX_A, up the virtual trunk #1 on the UXM trunk port 10.

uptrk 10.2.1

    4. On IGX_A, configure the VPI, VPC type, traffic classes, number of connection channels, and header type.

cnftrk 10.2.1

    5. On BPX_A, add a virtual trunk between the two nodes. (Executing addtrk 10.2.1 at IGX_A would also add a virtual trunk between the two nodes.)

addtrk 4.3.1

The VPI values you chose during cnftrk must match those used by the cloud VPC. Also, both ends of the virtual trunk must match on Transmit Rate, VPC type, traffic classes supported, and number of connection channels supported. The addtrk command checks for matching values before allowing the trunk to be added to the network topology.

The network topology from BPX_A's perspective after you add the trunk will be:

BPX_A 4.3.1-10.2.1/IGX_A

This release supports virtual trunking on both the BPX and IGX. IMA trunk ports are referenced by the first physical line of the trunk port after uptrk has been executed. For example, you can uptrk 1.5-8.9. You can then up a second trunk (which, in this case, is a virtual trunk on slot.port 1.5) on the same trunk port using uptrk 1.5.11.

Example (ATM on BPX)

Configure trunk 3.2.3 (a virtual trunk on an ATM T3).

cnftrk 3.2.3

bpx04 VT Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2V Jan. 19 2001 08:10 PST TRK 3.2.3 Config T3 [2867 cps] BXM slot: 3 Transmit Rate: 3000 VPC Conns disabled: -- Protocol By The Card: -- Line framing: PLCP VC Shaping: No coding: -- Hdr Type NNI: No recv impedance: -- Statistical Reserve: 250 cps cable type: -- Idle code: 7F hex length: 0-225 ft. Connection Channels: 256 Pass sync: No Traffic:V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,N&RT-VBR,ABR Loop clock: No Restrict CC traffic: No HCS Masking: Yes Link type: Terrestrial Payload Scramble: No Routing Cost: 21 Frame Scramble: -- Virtual Trunk Type: CBR Virtual Trunk VPI: 3 Deroute delay time: 0 seconds Last Command: cnftrk 3.2.3
Example (IGX)

Configure trunk 10.1 (an E3 trunk on a UXM).

cnftrk 10.1

sw228 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:42 PST TRK 10.1 Config E3 [80000cps] UXM slot: 10 Transmit Trunk Rate: 80000 cps Rcv Trunk Rate: 80000 cps Line Framing: HEC Pass sync: Yes Cable Length 0-255 ft. Loop clock: No Statistical Reserve: 1000 cps Idle code: 7F hex Restrict PCC traffic: No Link type: Terrestrial Routing cost: 10 HCS Masking: Yes Payload Scramble: Yes Connection Channels: 256 Gateway Channels: 256 Valid Traffic Classes: V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,rt-VBR,nrt-VBR,ABR Last Command: cnftrk 10.1 Next Command:
Example (IGX)

Configure an IMA trunk 7.1 (a T1 trunk on a UXM), which consists of consecutive physical lines 1 through 8.

cnftrk 7.1

igxr03 VT Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.2V Jan. 18 2001 14:24 PST TRK 7.1(8) Config T1/190 [28679 cps] UXM slot:7 IMA Group Member(s): 1-8 Line coding: B8ZS Retained links: 8 Line cable type: ABAM Transmit Trunk Rate: 28679 cps Line cable length: 0-131 ft. Rcv Trunk Rate: 28679 cps HCS Masking: Yes Pass sync: Yes Payload Scramble: No Loop clock: No Connection Channels: 256 Statistical Reserve: 600 cps Gateway Channels: 200 Header Type: NNI Traffic:V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,N&RVBR,ABR VPI Address: 1 IMA Protocol Option: Enabled Routing Cost: 10 IMA Max. Diff. Dly: 200 msec. Idle code: 7F hex IMA Clock Mode: CTC Restrict PCC traffic: No Deroute delay time: 0 seconds Link type: Terrestrial VC Shaping: No Line framing: ESF VPC Conns disabled: No Last Command: cnftrk 7.1
Note   The ATM Forum-compliant ATM Inverse Multiplexing standard does not support the IMA link autodisable option. Previous to Release 9.2, the IMA link auto disable parameter displayed for IMA links, but it does not display in Release 9.2.

The IMA group member and IMA Differential delay parameters are configurable. The IMA Clock Mode parameter is fixed at CTC and is not configurable.

Also, note that you can configure IMA trunk parameters on virtual trunks that are on top of IMA ports.

Example (IGX)

Configure trunk 10.1 (a T1 trunk on a UXM).

cnftrk 10.1

sb-reef TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:46 PDT TRK 10.1-5 Config T1/115 [17358 cps] UXM slot: 10 IMA group member 1,3,5,7 Transmit Trunk Rate: 17358 cps Connection Channels: 256 Rcv Trunk Rate: 17358 cps Gateway Channels: 256 Pass sync: Yes Valid Traffic Classes: Loop clock: No V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,rt-VBR,nrt-VBR,ABR Statistical Reserve: 600 cps Retained links: 5 Idle code: 7F hex IMA Protocol Option: Disabled Restrict PCC traffic: No IMA Max. Diff. Dly: 200 msec. Link type: Terrestrial IMA Clock Mode: CTC Line framing: ESF Line coding: B8ZS Line cable type: ABAM Line cable length: 0-131 ft. HCS Masking: Yes Payload Scramble: No Last Command: cnftrk 10.1
Note   The ATM Forum-compliant ATM Inverse Multiplexing standard does not support the IMA link auto-disable option. If the IMA link auto disable option is disabled, the Window size, Max transition counts, and Link reenable time parameters will not display. Because the ATM Forum-compliant ATM Inverse Multiplexing standard does not support the IMA link auto disable option, these parameters do not display.

Example (OC-3 trunk on IGX)

Configure virtual trunk 4.3.1 (an OC-3 trunk on a UXM) with ILMI running on the card.

cnftrk 10.1

igxf3 VT Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.10 July 26 2000 23:41 PST TRK 4.3.1 Config OC3 [2867 cps] UXM slot:4 Transmit Trunk Rate: 3000 cps Gateway Channels: 200 Rcv Trunk Rate: 2867 cps Traffic:V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,N&RVBR,ABR Pass sync: No Virtual Trunk Type: CBR Loop clock: No Virtual Trunk VPI: 10 Statistical Reserve: 1000 cps Frame Scramble: Yes Header Type: UNI Deroute delay time: 0 seconds Routing Cost: 10 VC Shaping: No Idle code: 7F hex ILMI run on the card: Yes Restrict PCC traffic: No Link type: Terrestrial Line framing: STS-3C HCS Masking: Yes Payload Scramble: Yes Connection Channels: 256 This Command: cnftrk 4.3.1
Example (OC-3 trunk on BPX)

Configure trunk 4.2 (an OC3 trunk on a BXM) setting Protocol by Card to Y.

cnftrk 10.1

sw143 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.10 July 28 2000 18:54 PST TRK 4.2 Config OC3 [353207cps] BXM slot: 4 Transmit Rate: 353208 VPC Conns disabled: No Protocol By The Card: Yes Line framing: STS-3C VC Shaping: No coding: -- Hdr Type NNI: Yes recv impedance: -- Statistical Reserve: 5000 cps cable type: -- Idle code: 7F hex length: -- Connection Channels: 256 Pass sync: No Traffic:V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,N&RT-VBR,ABR Loop clock: No SVC Vpi Min: 0 HCS Masking: Yes SVC Channels: 0 Payload Scramble: Yes SVC Bandwidth: 0 cps Frame Scramble: Yes Restrict CC traffic: No Virtual Trunk Type: -- Link type: Terrestrial Virtual Trunk VPI: -- Routing Cost: 10 Deroute delay time: 0 seconds Last Command: cnftrk 4.2 353208 Y Y 5000 7F V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,NRT-VBR,ABR, RT-VBR 0 0 0 N TERRESTRIAL 10 0 N N Y Y Y N
Example (BNI T3 on BPX)

cnftrk 3.1

sw167 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 11:17 PST TRK 3.1 Config T3 [96000 cps] BNI-T3 slot: 3 Transmit Rate: 96000 VPC Conns disabled: -- Protocol By The Card: -- Line framing: PLCP VC Shaping: -- coding: -- Hdr Type NNI: -- recv impedance: -- Statistical Reserve: 5000 cps cable type: Idle code: 7F hex length: 0-225 ft. Connection Channels: 1771 Pass sync: No Traffic:V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,N&RT-VBR,ABR Loop clock: No Restrict CC traffic: Yes HCS Masking: Yes Link type: Terrestrial Payload Scramble: No Routing Cost: 10 Frame Scramble: -- Virtual Trunk Type: -- Virtual Trunk VPI: -- Deroute delay time: 0 seconds Last Command: cnftrk 3.1
Example (OC-3 on IGX)

cnftrk 14.2.1

sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 11:34 PST TRK 14.2.1 Config OC3 [2867 cps] UXM slot:14 Transmit Trunk Rate: 3000 cps Gateway Channels: 200 Rcv Trunk Rate: 2867 cps Traffic:V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,N&RVBR,ABR Pass sync: No Virtual Trunk Type: CBR Loop clock: No Virtual Trunk VPI: 1 Statistical Reserve: 1000 cps Frame Scramble: Yes Header Type: UNI Deroute delay time: 0 seconds Routing Cost: 10 VC Shaping: No Idle code: 7F hex Restrict PCC traffic: No Link type: Terrestrial Line framing: STS-3C HCS Masking: Yes Payload Scramble: Yes Connection Channels: 256 Last Command: cnftrk 14.2.1
Example (UXM T-3 on IGX)

cnftrk 8.1

sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 11:35 PST TRK 8.1 Config T3/636 [96000 cps] UXM slot:8 Transmit Trunk Rate: 96000 cps Payload Scramble: No Rcv Trunk Rate: 96000 cps Connection Channels: 256 Pass sync: Yes Gateway Channels: 200 Loop clock: No Traffic:V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,N&RVBR,ABR Statistical Reserve: 5000 cps Deroute delay time: 0 seconds Header Type: NNI VC Shaping: No VPI Address: 1 VPC Conns disabled: No Routing Cost: 10 Idle code: 7F hex Restrict PCC traffic: Yes Link type: Terrestrial Line framing: PLCP Line cable length: 0-225 ft. HCS Masking: Yes Last Command: cnftrk 8.1

cnftrkalm (configure trunk alarms)

Configures trunk alarm reporting. When trunks are upped and added to the network, alarm reporting automatically is enabled. The cnftrkalm command lets you disable alarms on a trunk. Disabling alarms may be useful, for example, for trunks that are connected to the node but not yet in service or if the node is experiencing occasional bursts of errors but is still operational.

When the alarms are enabled, they cause an alarm output from the DTI Group Alarm Connector (if present) and an alarm indication on the Cisco WAN Manager terminal.

A virtual trunk also has trunk port alarms that are shared with all the other virtual trunks on the port. These alarms are cleared and set together for all the virtual trunks sharing the same port.

Statistical alarms are provided on cell drops from each of the Advanced CoS Management queues. These alarms are maintained separately for virtual trunks on the same port.

On an IGX node, enabled alarms cause an output from the ARC or ARM card or an indication to Cisco WAN Manager.

Syntax

cnftrkalm <slot.port>[.vtrk] <e | d>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.port>

Specifies the trunk number.

[.vtrk]

Specifies the virtual trunk number. Optional.

<e | d>

Enables or disables the alarm.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-5

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dspalms, dsptrks

Trunk Alarms

Table 3-57 shows physical and logical trunk alarms, with the alarm type, the physical interface type, and whether the alarm is a logical, statistical, or integrated alarm.


Table 3-57: Physical and Logical Trunk Alarms Supported on IGX and BPX
Alarm Type Physical Logical Statistical Integrated
T1 E1 T3 E3 SONET

LOS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

OOF

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

AIS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

YEL

X

X

X

X

X

X

PLCP OOF

X

X

LOC

X

X

X

LOP

X

X

PATH AIS

X

X

PATH YEL

X

X

PATH TRC

X

X

SEC TRC

X

X

ROOF

X

X

X

FER

X

X

X

AIS16

X

X

X

X

IMA

X

X

X

NTS Cells Dropped

X

X

TS Cells Dropped

X

X

Voice Cells Dropped

X

X

Bdata Cells Dropped

X

X

BdatB Cells Dropped

X

X

HP Cells Dropped

X

X

CBR Cells dropped

X

X

VBR Cells dropped

X

X

ABR Cells dropped

X

X

Statistical alarms are provided on cell drops from each of the Advanced CoS Management queues. These alarms are maintained separately for virtual trunks on the same port.

A virtual trunk also has trunk port alarms that are shared with all the other virtual trunks on the port. These alarms are cleared and set together for all the virtual trunks sharing the same port.

IMA physical line alarms are a special case. Each IMA trunk port has a configurable number of retained links. If the number of non-alarmed lines is less than the number of retained links, the logical trunks on the IMA trunk port are placed into major alarm.

For example, suppose there are IMA virtual trunks 4.5-8.2 and 4.5-8.7. Further, the number of retained links on 4.5-8 has been configured to 2. If 4.5 and 4.6 go into LOS, physical line alarms are generated for these 2 physical lines. The logical trunks 4.5-8.2 and 4.5-8.7 do not go into alarm because the two retained links are still healthy. In this situation, the bandwidth on the logical trunks is adjusted downwards to prevent cell drops, and the connections on those trunks are rerouted. If a third line goes into alarm, the logical trunks are then failed. See Table 3-58 for a list of physical and trunk alarms that are supported on IMA lines.


Table 3-58: Physical and Logical Alarms Supported on IMA Physical Lines
Alarm Type Physical Logical Statistical Integrated
T1 E1 T3 E3 SONET

LOS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

OOF

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

AIS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

YEL

X

X

X

X

X

X

PLCP OOF

X

X

LOC

X

X

X

LOP

X

X

PATH AIS

X

X

PATH YEL

X

X

PATH TRC

X

X

SEC TRC

X

X

ROOF

X

X

X

FER

X

X

X

AIS16

X

X

X

X

IMA

X

X

X

NTS Cells Dropped

X

X

TS Cells Dropped

X

X

Voice Cells Dropped

X

X

BDATA Cells Dropped

X

X

BDATB Cells Dropped

X

X

HP Cells Dropped

X

X

CBR Cells Dropped

X

X

VBR Cells Dropped

X

X

ABR Cells Dropped

X

X

Example

Disable trunk alarms on trunk 7.

cnftrkalm 7 d

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:21 MST PLN Type Current Line Alarm Status Other End 7 E1/32 Clear - Line OK alpha.10 9 T1/24 Clear - Line OK gamma.10 13 T1/24 Clear - Line OK alpha.14 15 T1/24 Clear - Line OK gamma.15 20 T3/3 Major - AIT Missing - Last Command: cnftrkalm 7 d Next Command:
Example

Enable the alarms after they have been disabled.

cnftrkalm 8 d

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 09:44 GMT TRK Type Current Line Alarm Status Other End 8 T1/24 Clear - OK sw108/14 Last Command: cnftrkalm 8 d
Example

cnftrkalm 8 e

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 09:48 GMT TRK Type Current Line Alarm Status Other End 8 T1/24 Clear - OK sw108/14 Last Command: cnftrkalm 8 e

cnftrkict (configure trunk interface control template)

Configures the output lines of an interface control template for a subrate trunk. Table 3-59 shows the configurable signals.


Table 3-59: Configurable Signals in an Interface Control Template
Interface Type Output Signal Inputs

X.21

C, I

V.35

RTS, DTR

CTS, DSR

MIL-188

IS, LL, RL, RS, SF, SS, TR

DM, CS

Syntax

cnftrkict <line> <output> <source>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<line>

Specifies the trunk for the interface control template.

<output>

Specifies the output lead to be configured. Configurable output leads vary depending on the type of data interface used (X.21or V.35).

<source>

Specifies how the specified output lead is to be configured. The options are as follows:

  • On, which means the output lead is asserted.

  • Off, which means the output lead is inhibited.

  • l (lower case L) Output follows a local input lead.

  • Input, which specifies the name of the local input lead that the output lead follows.

Input leads vary according to the type of data interface supported (X.21 or V.35).

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsptrkict, prttrkict

Example

Configure output lead "c" as "on" in the interface control template for subrate trunk 9.

cnftrkict 9 c on

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:15 MST Packet Line: 9 Interface: X.21 DTE Interface Control Template for Trunk Line Lead Output Value Lead O Output Value C /DTR ON Last Command: cnftrkict 9 c on Next Command:

cnftrkparm (configure trunk card parameters)

Sets specified trunk parameters for these front cards:

Use the cnftrkparm command to optimize a network for particular traffic mixes. Use this command to configure any of the trunk-specific parameters associated with a trunk card. It applies to either a FastPacket trunk or a ATM trunk.

For ATM trunks, cnftrkparm applies to both physical and virtual trunks. BXM and UXM virtual trunks have the same configuration parameters for queues as physical trunks.

The integrated alarm thresholds for major alarms and the gateway efficiency factor is the same for all virtual trunks on the port. Note that BNI VTs are supported by a single queue and do not support configuration of all the OptiClass queues on a single virtual trunk.

You can also use this command to reconfigure trunk queue depths to meet the CEPT requirement for a maximum end-to-end delay of 10 milliseconds. For this purpose, enter:

cnftrkparm <trunk number> <parameter index> <parameter value>

where:

trunk number specifies the trunk.
parameter index is 2 (which corresponds to the NTS queue).
parameter value is 7 (which is the maximum allowable queue depth).

When the system receives this command and a trunk number, it displays the configurable parameters with an index number for each. The parameters vary with the trunk type, as the subsequent figures and tables show.

Configuring Trunk Queues Used by Real-Time VBR and Non-Real-Time VBR Connections

Qbin values on both ports and trunks used by rt-VBR connections and nrt-VBR connections can be configured separately. (To configure Qbin values on ports, use cnfportq.)

The rt-VBR traffic type (or connection class) is supported on the IGX UXM and BPX BXM, ASI, and BNI cards. However, the rt-VBR class of service is not supported for MGX 8850 or MGX 8220 interface shelves.

A rt-VBR connection uses the rt-VBR queue on a trunk. It shares this queue with voice traffic. The rt-VBR and voice traffic shares the default or user-configured parameters for the rt-VBR queue. These parameters are queue depth, queue CLP high and CLP low thresholds, EFCI threshold, and queue priority.

A nrt-VBR connection uses the nrt-VBR queue on a trunk. The configurable parameters are queue depth, queue CLP high and CLP low thresholds, EFCI threshold, and queue priority.

You can configure the Qbin values separately for rt-VBR and nrt-VBR classes on trunks using the cnftrkparm command. For rt-VBR, the cnftrkparm command configures Q-depth rt-VBR and Max Age rt-VBR. For nrt-VBR, the cnftrkparm command configures Q-depth nrt-VBR, Low CLP nrt-VBR, and High CLP nrt-VBR.

For information on configuring port queues used by rt-VBR and nrt-VBR connections, see the cnfportq command.

Syntax

cnftrkparm <trk number> <parm index> <parm value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<trk number>

Specifies the trunk to configure. To specify a virtual trunk, use this format: slot.port.vtrk.

<parm index>

Specifies the parameter to change.

<parm value>

Specifies the value of the parameter.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsptrkstathist, dsptrkstatcnf

Physical and Virtual Parameters Configurable with cnftrkparm

All virtual trunks on a BNI card are supported by a single queue; therefore, you cannot configure all the Advanced CoS Management queues on a single virtual trunk.

The UXM and BXM share the same queueing architecture. The egress cell traffic out a port is queued in two stages. First they are queued per virtual interface (VI), each of which supports a virtual trunk. Within each virtual interface, the traffic is queued according to its normal Advanced CoS Management traffic type. In other words, voice, Time-Stamped, Non-Time-Stamped, High-Priority, BData, BDataB, CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and ABR traffic is queued separately.

The overall queue depth of the virtual interface is the sum of all the queue depths for all the available queues. Since each virtual trunk occupies one virtual interface (VI), the overall queue depth available for the virtual trunk is that of its VI. You do not configure the virtual interface directly, however, you use the cnftrkparm command to configure the queues within the virtual trunk.

Although the traffic consists of Frame Relay in cells, the traffic can pass through a BPX node. Therefore, the Bursty Data queues exist in the BPX node.

BXM and UXM virtual trunks have all the configuration parameters for queues that physical trunks have. The integrated alarm thresholds for major alarms and the gateway efficiency factor is the same for all virtual trunks on the port. Note that BNI virtual trunks are supported by a single queue and do not support configuration of all the Advanced CoS Management (formerly OptiClass) queues on a single virtual trunk.

Table 3-60 provides a list of physical and virtual parameters that you can configure using cnftrkparm. X in the table indicates that the parameter is configurable. X* in the virtual trunk column indicates the parameter is a physical parameter, and changing the value for one virtual trunk on the port will automatically cause all virtual trunks on the port to be updated with the same value.


Table 3-60: cnftrkparm—
Configurable Parameters for Physical and Virtual Trunks
Description of cnftrkparm Parameters BXM UXM
Physical Virtual Physical Virtual

Queue Depth - rt-VBR

X

X

X

X

Queue Depth - NTS

X

X

X

X

Queue Depth - TS

X

X

X

X

Queue Depth - Bdata A

X

X

X

X

Queue Depth - Bdata B

X

X

X

X

Queue Depth - High Priority

X

X

X

X

Queue Depth - CBR

X

X

X

X

Queue Depth - nrt-VBR

X

X

X

X

Queue Depth - ABR

X

X

X

X

Max Age - rt-VBR

X

X

X

X

Red Alm - I/O

X

X*

X

X*

Yel Alm - I/O

X

X*

X

X*

Lo/Hi CLP and EFCN Bdata A

X

X

X

X

Lo/Hi CLP and EFCN Bdata B

X

X

X

X

Lo/Hi CLP for CBR

X

X

X

X

Lo/Hi CLP for VBR

X

X

X

X

Low/Hi CLP, and EFCN for ABR

X

X

X

X

EPD and EFCN for CBR and nrt-VBR

X

X

SVC Queue pool size

X

X

Gateway Efficiency

X

X*

Display Fields (IGX)

Index Parameter Description

1, 18

Yel/Red Alarm In/Out

Specifies a time period relating to when a trunk goes into a red or yellow alarm and after it comes out of the alarm state. The applicable type of alarm here stems from a physical line problem rather than from a statistical error. The purpose of this parameter is to prevent the switch from rerouting the connections after a very brief problem or from prematurely informing switch software that the trunk is back in service (after a failure). The implementation is

  • The "into" alarm value is the time the card waits after a local (red) or yellow (remote) problem occurs before the card alerts switch software of the problem.

  • The "out of" alarm value is the time the card waits after a local, physical problem is cleared before the card alerts switch software that the problem no longer exists.

2, 19

Rx/Tx Max. Age: - rt-VBR

Specifies a multiplier for 125-microsecond increments for the maximum age of rt-VBR (or voice) packets. For example, with the default of 20, the node discards rt-VBR (or voice) packets older than 2.5 seconds.

3, 20

Rx/Tx EFCN - BdataB

For packets or cells received from the trunk carrying Optimized Bandwidth Management Frame Relay, the node sets the FECN bit above this threshold.

4

Gateway Efficiency

Specifies an expected average number of FastPackets in each cell arriving from a trunk. The purpose of this parameter is to help switch software regulate bandwidth usage the cell bus in an IGX node. The range is 1.0-3.0. (This parameter does not apply to the BXM card.)

5

EFCN - Rx Space

Same as 3, 20 except that FECN - Rx Space sets the threshold in the Rx space queues in the AIT card. Rx space queues face toward the IGX node.

6, 7

Low-High CLP-Rx Space

Same as 8, 9 except this threshold is for setting CLP in receive spacer queues for data to send to the local node.

8, 9

Rx High CLP
(Bdata A/BdataB)

Frame Relay cells/packets received from trunk with CLP bit set above this high threshold will be dropped and will continue to be dropped until the low threshold is crossed. Separate queues for Optimized Bandwidth Management and non-Optimized Bandwidth Management data. Given in terms of percent of queue depth.

10, 11

Rx Low CLP
(Bdata A/BdataB)

Same as for 8, 9 except sets low threshold.

12-17

Receive Queue Depth (rt-VBR, NTS, TS, BData A, BData B, High Pri.)

Reserves RAM in the trunk card for each of the receive queues in terms of the number of packets.

25, 26

Tx High CLP

Same as 8, 9 except this is threshold for setting CLP in transmit queues for data to be output to the next link.

27, 28

Tx Low CLP

Same as for 25, 26 except sets low threshold.

29-34

Transmit Queue Depth

Reserves RAM in the trunk card for each of the transmit queues in terms of the number of packets.

Example (IGX)

cnftrkparm 13

sw83 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:58 PST PLN 13 Parameters: 1 Yel Alm-In/Out (D) [ 600/ 600] 18 Red Alm-In/Out (D) [ 2500/ 15000] 2 Rx Max Age - rt-VBR (D) [ N/A] 19 Tx Max Age - rt-VBR (D) [ 20] 3 Rx EFCN - BdataB (D) [ N/A] 20 Tx EFCN - BdataB (D) [ 30] 4 Gateway Efficiency (D) [ N/A] 5 EFCN - Rx Space (D) [ N/A] Tx Age Step2 (D) Tx Age Step (D) 6 Low CLP - Rx_Space (%) [ N/A] 21 BDataA [ 128] 23 BDataA [ 128] 7 High CLP - Rx_Space (%) [ N/A] 22 BDataB [ 128] 24 BDataB [ 128] Rx High CLP (%) Rx Low CLP (%) Tx High CLP (%) Tx Low CLP (%) 8 BDataA [ N/A] 10 BDataA [ N/A] 25 BDataA [ 100] 27 BDataA [ 100] 9 BDataB [ N/A] 11 BdataB [ N/A] 26 BDataB [ 75] 28 BDataB [ 25] Receive Queue Depth (D) Transmit Queue Depth (D) 12 rt-VBR [ N/A] 15 BDataA [ N/A] 29 rt-VBR [ 22] 32 BDataA [ 301] 13 Non TS [ N/A] 16 BDataB [ N/A] 30 Non TS [ 114] 33 BDataB [ 301] 14 TS [ N/A] 17 HighPri[ N/A] 31 TS [2616] 34 HighPri[ 100] Last Command: cnftrkparm 13 Next Command:


Note   For parameter 12, the system displays: "Warning—don't change Voice Q size, use Max Voice Age."

Display Fields (BPX)

Index Parameter Description

1

Q Depth - rt-VBR

Specifies the queue depth in cells for rt-VBR and voice traffic. This parameter relates to item 7, Max Age - rt-VBR: if you increase the value for Max Age - rt-VBR, the node increases the size of the rt-VBR (or voice) Packet Queue because more voice packets can accumulate due to a greater age.

In Release 9.2, for BXM trunks, the rt-VBR and voice service types share the same queue (the rt-VBR queue). Similarly, for BXM trunks, rt-VBR and voice traffic share the default or user-configured voice Qbin values.

2

Q Depth - Non-TS

Specifies the queue depth in cells for non-time-stamped traffic.

3

Q Depth - TS

Specifies the queue depth in cells for time-stamped traffic.

4

Q Depth - BData A

Specifies the depth in cells for the bursty data A queue.

5

Q Depth - BData B

Specifies the depth in cells for the bursty data B queue.

6

Q Depth - High Pri

Specifies the queue depth in cells for high priority traffic.

7

Max Age - rt-VBR

Specifies a multiplier for 125-microsecond increments for the maximum age of rt-VBR (or voice) packets. For example, with the default of 20 microseconds, the node discards rt-VBR (or voice) packets older than 2.5 seconds. This value is the same as the default queue delay.

The Max Age - rt-VBR (or voice) Qbin threshold can be calculated as follows: (20 * (125 microseconds) * num_ds0s/53 cells + 2) for any trunk.

This parameter relates to item 1, Q Depth - rt-VBR: if you increase the value for Max Age - rt-VBR, the node increases the size of the Voice (or rt-VBR) Packet Queue because more rt-VBR (or voice) packets can accumulate due to a greater age.

8

Red Alm - I/O (Dec)

Specifies a time period relating to when a trunk goes into red alarm and after it comes out of the alarm state. The applicable type of alarm here stems from a physical line problem rather than from a statistical error. The purpose of this parameter is to prevent the switch from rerouting the connections after a very brief problem or from prematurely informing switch software that the trunk is back in service (after a failure). The implementation is:

  • The "into" alarm value is the time the card waits after a local, physical problem occurs before the card alerts switch software of the problem.

  • The "out of" alarm value is the time the card waits after a local, physical problem is cleared before the card alerts switch software that the problem no longer exists.

9

Yel Alm - I/O (Dec)

Specifies a time period relating to when a trunk goes into yellow alarm and after it comes out of the alarm state. The applicable type of alarm here stems from a physical line problem rather than from a statistical error. The purpose of this parameter is to prevent the switch from rerouting the connections after a very brief problem or from prematurely informing switch software that the trunk is back in service (after a failure). The implementation is:

  • The "into" alarm value is the time the card waits after a remote, physical problem occurs before the card alerts local switch software of the problem.

  • The "out of" alarm value is the time the card waits after a remote, physical problem is cleared before the card alerts local switch software that the problem no longer exists.

10

Low CLP - BData A

Specifies a percent of the Bursty Data A queue. When the number of cells in the queue falls below this percentage, the switch stops discarding cells with CLP=1. The default of 100% disables the function, which causes the switch to discard all cells with CLP=1.

11

High CLP - BData A

Specifies a percent of the Bursty Data A queue. When the number of cells in the queue reaches this percentage, the switch begins to discard cells with CLP=1. The default of 100% disables the function, which causes the switch to discard all cells with CLP=1 regardless of the cell count in the queue.

12

Low CLP - BData B

Specifies a percent of the Bursty Data B queue. When the number of cells in the queue falls below this percentage, the switch stops discarding cells with CLP=1.

13

High CLP - BData B

Specifies a percent of the Bursty Data B queue. When the number of cells in the queue reaches this percentage, the switch begins to discard cells with CLP=1.

14

EFCN - BData B

Specifies the number of cells in the Bursty Data B queue that causes the switch to send congestion notification to the destination node. The default is low in relation to the default queue depth so that notification begins to go out as soon as congestion begins.

15

Q Depth - CBR

Specifies the depth of the queue dedicated to CBR traffic.

16

Q Depth - nrt-VBR

Specifies the depth of the queue dedicated to nrt-VBR traffic.

17

Q Depth - ABR

Specifies the depth of the queue dedicated to ABR traffic.

18

Low CLP - CBR

Specifies a percent of the CBR queue. When the number of cells in the queue falls below this percentage, the node stops discarding cells with CLP=1. The default of 100% disables the function, which causes the switch to discard all cells with CLP=1 regardless of the cell count in the queue. The reason the default is 100% is that, with CBR, congestion is not an expected condition.

19

High CLP - CBR

Specifies a percent of the CBR queue. When the number of cells in the queue reaches this percentage, the node begins to discard cells with CLP=1. The default of 100% disables the function, which causes the switch to discard all cells with CLP=1 regardless of the cell count in the queue. The reason the default is 100% is that, with CBR, congestion is not an expected condition.

20

Low CLP - nrt-VBR

Specifies a percent of the nrt-VBR queue. When the number of cells in the queue falls below this percentage, the node stops discarding cells with CLP=1. The default of 100% disables the function, which causes the switch to discard all cells with CLP=1 regardless of the cell count in the queue. The reason the default is 100% is that, with VBR, congestion is not an expected condition.

21

High CLP - nrt-VBR

Specifies a percent of the nrt-VBR queue. When the number of cells in the queue reaches this percentage, the node begins to discard cells with CLP=1. The default of 100% disables the function, which causes the switch to discard all cells with CLP=1 regardless of the cell count in the queue. The reason the default is 100% is that, with VBR, congestion is not an expected condition.

22

Low CLP - ABR

Specifies a percent of the ABR queue. When the number of cells in the queue falls below this percentage, the node stops discarding cells with CLP=1.

23

High CLP - ABR

Specifies a percent of the ABR queue. When the number of cells in the queue reaches this percentage, the node begins to discard cells with CLP=1.

24

EFCN - ABR

Specifies the number of cells in the ABR queue that causes the switch to send congestion notification to the destination node. The default is low in relation to the default queue depth so that notification begins to go out as soon as congestion begins.

25

SVC Queue Pool Depth

Specifies the collective size of the queue depth for all SVC connections.

Example (BPX)

cnftrkparm 1.1

pubsbpx1 TN SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 09:37 GMT TRK 1.1 Parameters 1 Q Depth - rt-VBR [ 242] (Dec) 15 Q Depth - CBR [ 600] (Dec) 2 Q Depth - Non-TS [ 360] (Dec) 16 Q Depth - nrt-VBR [ 1000] (Dec) 3 Q Depth - TS [ 1000] (Dec) 17 Q Depth - ABR [ 9070] (Dec) 4 Q Depth - BData A [ 1000] (Dec) 18 Low CLP - CBR [ 100] (%) 5 Q Depth - BData B [ 8000] (Dec) 19 High CLP - CBR [ 100] (%) 6 Q Depth - High Pri [ 1000] (Dec) 20 Low CLP - nrt-VBR [ 100] (%) 7 Max Age - rt-VBR [ 20] (Dec) 21 High CLP - nrt-VBR [ 100] (%) 8 Red Alm - I/O (Dec) [ 2500 / 15000] 22 Low CLP - ABR [ 25] (%) 9 Yel Alm - I/O (Dec) [ 2500 / 15000] 23 High CLP - ABR [ 75] (%) 10 Low CLP - BData A [ 100] (%) 24 EFCN - ABR [ 30] (Dec) 11 High CLP - BData A [ 100] (%) 25 SVC Queue Pool Size [ 144] (Dec) 12 Low CLP - BData B [ 25] (%) 13 High CLP - BData B [ 75] (%) 14 EFCN - BData B [ 30] (Dec) This Command: cnftrkparm 1.1 Which parameter do you wish to change:
Example (BXM OC-12 Trunk)
sw97 TRM SuperUser BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 13:14 GMT TRK 13.1 Parameters Trunk Type: NNI 1 Q Depth - rt-VBR [ 3000] (Dec) 15 Q Depth - CBR [ 1200] (Dec) 2 Q Depth - Non-TS [ 3000] (Dec) 16 Q Depth - rt-VBR [ 10000] (Dec) 3 Q Depth - TS [ 1000] (Dec) 17 Q Depth - ABR [ 30000] (Dec) 4 Q Depth - BData A [ 20000] (Dec) 18 Low CLP - CBR [ 100] (%) 5 Q Depth - BData B [ 20000] (Dec) 19 High CLP - CBR [ 100] (%) 6 Q Depth - High Pri [ 1000] (Dec) 20 Low CLP - rtVBR [ 100] (%) 7 Max Age - rt-VBR [ 20] (Dec) 21 High CLP - rt-VBR [ 100] (%) 8 Red Alm - I/O (Dec) [ 2500 / 15000] 22 Low CLP - ABR [ 25] (%) 9 Yel Alm - I/O (Dec) [ 2500 / 15000] 23 High CLP - ABR [ 75] (%) 10 Low CLP - BData A [ 100] (%) 24 EFCN - ABR [ 30] (Dec) 11 High CLP - BData A [ 100] (%) 25 SVC Queue Pool Size [ 144] (Dec) 12 Low CLP - BData B [ 25] (%) 13 High CLP - BData B [ 75] (%) 14 EFCN - BData B [ 30] (Dec) Last Command: cnftrkparm 13.1 Next Command:
Note   In Release 9.2.20 and higher, rt-VBR and voice connections both use the voice Qbin on the trunk. Similarly, rt-VBR and voice traffic both share the default or user-configured voice Qbin values for the trunk—Queue depth, CLP High/Low Threshold, EFCI Threshold, and Queue priority.

Example (BPX Virtual Trunk)

cnftrkparm 1.1.1

sw97 TN SuperUser BPX 15 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:11 GMT TRK 1.1.1 Parameters 8 Red Alm - I/O (Dec) [ 2500 / 10000] 9 Yel Alm - I/O (Dec) [ 2500 / 10000] 15 Q Depth - CBR [ 2678] (Dec) 18 Low CLP - CBR [ 100] (%) 19 High CLP - CBR [ 100] (%) This Command: cnftrkparm 1.1.1 Which parameter do you wish to change:
Example (IGX OC-3 Trunk)

cnftrkparm 6.3

sw228 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:25 PST TRK 6.3 Parameters: 1 Yel Alm-In/Out (D) [ 2500/ 10000] 18 Red Alm-In/Out (D) [ 2500/ 10000] 2 Rx Max Age - rt-VBR (D) [ 20] 19 Tx Max Age - rt-VBR (D) [ 20] 3 Rx EFCN - BdataB (D) [ 30] 20 Tx EFCN - BdataB (D) [ 30] 4 Gateway Efficiency (D) [ 2.0] 5 EFCN - Rx Space (D) [ N/A] Tx Age Step2 (D) Tx Age Step (D) 6 Low CLP - Rx_Space (%) [ N/A] 21 BDataA [ N/A] 23 BDataA [ N/A] 7 High CLP - Rx_Space (%) [ N/A] 22 BDataB [ N/A] 24 BDataB [ N/A] Rx High CLP (%) Rx Low CLP (%) Tx High CLP (%) Tx Low CLP (%) 8 BDataA [ 100] 10 BDataA [ 100] 25 BDataA [ 100] 27 BDataA [ 100] 9 BDataB [ 75] 11 BdataB [ 25] 26 BDataB [ 75] 28 BDataB [ 25] Receive Queue Depth (D) Transmit Queue Depth (D) 12 rt-VBR [ 1952] 15 BDataA [10000] 29 rt-VBR [ 1952] 32 BDataA [10000] 13 Non TS [ 2925] 16 BDataB [10000] 30 Non TS [ 2924] 33 BDataB [10000] 14 TS [ 1000] 17 HighPri[ 1000] 31 TS [ 1000] 34 HighPri[ 1000] This Command: cnftrkparm 6.3 sw228 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:26 PST TRK 6.3 Parameters: Rx Queue Depth(D) Tx Queue Depth(D) Rx EFCN (D) Tx EFCN (D) 35 CBR [ 600] 38 CBR [ 600] 36 nrt-VBR [ 5000] 39 rt-VBR [ 5000] 37 ABR [20000] 40 ABR [20000] 47 ABR [ 30] 48 ABR [ 30] Rx High CLP (%) Rx Low CLP (%) Tx High CLP (%) Tx Low CLP (%) 41 CBR [ 100] 44 CBR [ 100] 49 CBR [ 100] 52 CBR [ 100] 42 nrt-VBR [ 100] 45 nrt-VBR 100] 50 nrt-VBR [ 100] 53 VBR [ 100] 43 ABR [ 75] 46 ABR [ 25] 51 ABR [ 75] 54 ABR [ 25] This Command: cnftrkparm 6.3
Example (IGX) T3 or E3 Trunk
sw228 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:25 PST TRK 8.1 Parameters: 1 Yel Alm-In/Out (D) [ 2500/ 10000] 18 Red Alm-In/Out (D) [ 2500/ 10000] 2 Rx Max Age - rt-VBR (D) [ 20] 19 Tx Max Age - rt-VBR (D) [ 20] 3 Rx EFCN - BdataB (D) [ 30] 20 Tx EFCN - BdataB (D) [ 30] 4 Gateway Efficiency (D) [ 2.0] 5 EFCN - Rx Space (D) [ N/A] Tx Age Step2 (D) Tx Age Step (D) 6 Low CLP - Rx_Space (%) [ N/A] 21 BDataA [ N/A] 23 BDataA [ N/A] 7 High CLP - Rx_Space (%) [ N/A] 22 BDataB [ N/A] 24 BDataB [ N/A] Rx High CLP (%) Rx Low CLP (%) Tx High CLP (%) Tx Low CLP (%) 8 BDataA [ 100] 10 BDataA [ 100] 25 BDataA [ 100] 27 BDataA [ 100] 9 BDataB [ 75] 11 BdataB [ 25] 26 BDataB [ 75] 28 BDataB [ 25] Receive Queue Depth (D) Transmit Queue Depth (D) 12 rt-VBR [ 242] 15 BDataA [ 8000] 29 rt-VBR [ 242] 32 BDataA [ 8000] 13 Non TS [ 360] 16 BDataB [ 8000] 30 Non TS [ 360] 33 BDataB [8000] 14 TS [ 1000] 17 HighPri[ 1000] 31 TS [ 1000] 34 HighPri[ 1000] This Command: cnftrkparm 8.1 sw228 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 18:26 PST TRK 8.1 Parameters: Rx Queue Depth(D) Tx Queue Depth(D) Rx EFCN (D) Tx EFCN (D) 35 CBR [ 400] 38 CBR [ 400] 36 nrt-VBR [ 5000] 39 VBR [ 5000] 37 ABR [10000] 40 ABR [10000] 47 ABR [ 30] 48 ABR [ 30] Rx High CLP (%) Rx Low CLP (%) Tx High CLP (%) Tx Low CLP (%) 41 CBR [ 100] 44 CBR [ 100] 49 CBR [ 100] 52 CBR [ 100] 42 nrt-VBR [ 100] 45 nrt-VBR [ 100] 50 nrt-VBR [ 100] 53 nrt-VBR [ 100] 43 ABR [ 80] 46 ABR [ 60] 51 ABR [ 80] 54 ABR [ 60]
Example (BXM Trunk )

cnftrkparm 2.4

pubsbpx1 TN silves:1 BPX 8620 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 10:50 PDT TRK 2.4 Parameters 1 Q Depth - rt-VBR [ 885] (Dec) 15 Q Depth - CBR [ 600] (Dec) 2 Q Depth - Non-TS [ 1324] (Dec) 16 Q Depth - nrt-VBR [ 5000] (Dec) 3 Q Depth - TS [ 1000] (Dec) 17 Q Depth - ABR [20000] (Dec) 4 Q Depth - BData A [10000] (Dec) 18 Low CLP - CBR [ 60] (%) 5 Q Depth - BData B [10000] (Dec) 19 High CLP - CBR [ 80] (%) 6 Q Depth - High Pri [ 1000] (Dec) 20 Low CLP - nrt-VBR [ 60] (%) 7 Max Age - rt-VBR [ 20] (Dec) 21 High CLP - nrt-VBR [ 80] (%) 8 Red Alm - I/O (Dec) [ 2500 / 10000]22 Low CLP/EPD-ABR [ 60] (%) 9 Yel Alm - I/O (Dec) [ 2500 / 10000]23 High CLP - ABR [ 80] (%) 10 Low CLP - BData A [ 100] (%) 24 EFCN - ABR [ 20] (%) 11 High CLP - BData A [ 100] (%) 25 SVC Queue Pool Size [ 0] (Dec) 12 Low CLP - BData B [ 25] (%) 13 High CLP - BData B [ 75] (%) 14 EFCN - BData B [ 30] (Dec) This Command: cnftrkparm 2.4

cnftrkstats (configure trunk statistics collection)

Configures collection of Qbin statistics for a selected trunk.

You can enable collection of Qbin statistics collected by the BPX and IGX. Qbin statistics are Cells Served, Cells Discarded, and Cells Received.

All other Qbins are unused, and the switch does not provide statistics for them. Also starting in switch software release 9.3.10, the switch provides the collection of Qbin Cells Discarded statistics via SNMP for the above mentioned Qbins.

The cnftrkstats command is primarily a debug command. It configures the collection of statistics for a physical or virtual trunk. After displaying all statistic types for the trunk, the system prompts for "statistic type." Enter the index number associated with the statistic.

Not all types of statistics are available for all lines. Unavailable selections appear in half-tone. Table 3-61 lists the types of statistics that are configurable for FastPacket T1 trunks and ATM T3 trunks. The subsequent figures show the screens associated with T1 packet trunks and T3 ATM trunks.


Table 3-61:
Statistics Configurable for FastPacket T1 trunks and ATM T3 Trunks
Categories of Statistics Types Categories of Statistics Types

Line faults

Line errors and errored seconds

Frame Slips and Loss

Path errors

Transmit packets dropped

Cell framing errors

Packets transmitted for various packet types

EFCN packets transmitted to bus

Packets dropped for various packet types

Queue Service Engine (QSE) cells transmitted

Bursty data CLP packets and cells dropped

Spacer packets transmitted and dropped for each of the 16 queues

Errored seconds

The number of seconds in which errors occurred

Syntax
cnftrkstats <line> <stat> <interval> <e | d> [<samples> <size> <peaks>]

Parameter

Parameter Description

<line>

Specifies the trunk to configure.

<stat>

Specifies the type of statistic to enable/disable.

<interval>

Specifies the time interval of each sample. Range:1-255 minutes

<e | d>

Enables/disables a statistic. E to enable; D to disable.

[samples]

Specifies the number of samples to collect (1-255).

[size]

Specifies the number of bytes per data sample (1, 2 or 4).

[peaks]

Enables/disables collection of 10-second peaks. Y enables; N disables.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

dsptrkstatcnf, dsptrkstathist

Example (ATM on IGX's AIT Card)

These screens pertain to an ATM trunk (AIT card) on an IGX node. Other trunk types and cards have other parameters. To see the list of these, enter the command and continue from page to page without entering an index number.

sw83 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:45 PST Line Statistic Types 3) Out of Frames 22) BDA Packets Transmitted 4) Losses of Signal 23) BDB Packets Transmitted 10) Packet CRC Errors 24) Total Packets Transmitted 12) Tx Voice Packets Dropped 25) BDA CLP Packets Dropped 13) Tx TS Packets Dropped 26) BDB CLP Packets Dropped 14) Tx NTS Packets Dropped 27) BDA EFCN Pkts Transmitted 15) Tx CC Packets Dropped 28) BDB EFCN Pkts Transmitted 16) Tx BDA Packets Dropped 29) Line Code Violations 17) Tx BDB Packets Dropped 30) Line Errored Seconds 18) Voice Packets Transmitted 31) Line Severely Err Secs 19) TS Packets Transmitted 32) Line Parity Errors 20) NTS Packets Transmitted 33) Errored Seconds - Line 21) CC Packets Transmitted 34) Severely Err Secs - Line This Command: cnftrkstats 11 Continue? ___________________________________________________________ sw83 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:46 PST Line Statistic Types 35) Path Parity Errors 48) Tx nrt-VBR Cells Drpd 36) Errored Secs - Path 49) Tx TimeStamped Cells Drpd 37) Severely Err Secs - Path 50) Tx NTS Cells Dropped 38) Severely Err Frame Secs 51) Tx Hi-Pri Cells Drpd 39) AIS Signal Seconds 52) Tx BData A Cells Drpd 40) Unavail. Seconds 53) Tx BData B Cells Drpd 41) BIP-8 Code Violations 54) Voice Cells Tx to line 42) Cell Framing Errored Seconds 55) TimeStamped Cells Tx to ln 43) Cell Framing Sev. Err Secs. 56) NTS Cells Tx to line 44) Cell Framing Sec. Err Frame Secs 57) Hi-Pri Cells Tx to line 45) Cell Framing Unavail. Secs. 58) BData A Cells Tx to line 46) ATM Cell Header HEC Errs 59) BData B Cells Tx to line 47) Pkts. Rx from Muxbus 60) Half Full cells Tx to ln This Command: cnftrkstats 11 Continue? ______________________________________________________ sw83 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:47 PST Line Statistic Types 61) Full cells Tx to ln 74) Rx Hi-pri Pkts Dropped 62) Total Cells Tx to line 75) Rx BDA Pkts Dropped 63) Tx Bdata A CLP Cells Drpd 76) Rx BDB Pkts Dropped 64) Tx Bdata B CLP Cells Drpd 77) Voice pkts Tx to Muxbus 65) Bdata A EFCN Cells Tx ln 78) TS pkts Tx to Muxbus 66) Bdata B EFCN Cells Tx ln 79) NTS pkts Tx to Muxbus 67) Half Full Cells Rx from ln 80) Hi-pri pkts Tx to Muxbus 68) Full Cells Rx from line 81) Bdata A pkts Tx to Muxbus 69) Total Cells Rx from line 82) Bdata B pkts Tx to Muxbus 70) Total pkts Rx from line 83) Rx Bdata A CLP pkts drpd 71) Rx Voice Pkts Dropped 84) Rx Bdata B CLP pkts drpd 72) Rx TS Pkts Dropped 85) Bdata A EFCN Pkts Tx muxbus 73) Rx NTS Pkts Dropped 86) Bdata B EFCN Pkts Tx muxbus This Command: cnftrkstats 11 Continue? __________________________________________________________ sw83 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:48 PST Line Statistic Types 87) Total Pkts Tx to muxbus 100) Rx Spacer 2 Pkts dropped 88) Rx voice cells drpd 101) Rx Spacer 3 Pkts dropped 89) Rx TimeStamped Cells drpd 102) Rx Spacer 4 Pkts dropped 90) Rx NTS Cells dropped 103) Rx Spacer 5 Pkts dropped 91) Rx Hi-pri Cells dropped 104) Rx Spacer 6 Pkts dropped 92) Rx Bdata A Cells dropped 105) Rx Spacer 7 Pkts dropped 93) Rx Bdata B Cells dropped 106) Rx Spacer 8 Pkts dropped 94) Rx Bdata A CLP cells drpd 107) Rx Spacer 9 Pkts dropped 95) Rx Bdata B CLP cells drpd 108) Rx Spacer 10 Pkts dropped 96) Rx Spacer CLP Pkts drpd 109) Rx Spacer 11 Pkts dropped 97) Spacer EFCN Pkts Tx to Muxbus 110) Rx Spacer 12 Pkts dropped 98) Frame Sync Errors 111) Rx Spacer 13 Pkts dropped 99) Rx Spacer 1 Pkts dropped 112) Rx Spacer 14 Pkts dropped This Command: cnftrkstats 11 ___________________________________________________________ sw83 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:49 PST Line Statistic Types 113) Rx Spacer 15 Pkts dropped 126) Spacer 10 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 114) Rx Spacer 16 Pkts dropped 127) Spacer 11 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 115) Rx Spacer Pkts drpd 128) Spacer 12 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 116) Spacer 0 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 129) Spacer 13 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 117) Spacer 1 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 130) Spacer 14 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 118) Spacer 2 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 131) Spacer 15 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 119) Spacer 3 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 132) Spacer 16 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 120) Spacer 4 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 133) Rx Voice QSE Cells Tx 121) Spacer 5 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 134) Rx Time Stamped QSE Cells Tx 122) Spacer 6 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 135) Rx NTS QSE Cells Tx 123) Spacer 7 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 136) Rx Hi Priority QSE Cells Tx 124) Spacer 8 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 137) Rx BData A QSE Cells Tx 125) Spacer 9 Pkts Tx to Muxbus 138) Rx Bdata B QSE Cells Tx This Command: cnftrkstats 11 __________________________________________________________________ sw83 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:02 PST Line Statistic Types 139) Rx BData A EFCN QSE Cells Tx 152) Cell Framing Yel Transitions 140) Rx BData B EFCN QSE Cells Tx 153) AIS Transition Count 141) FEBE Counts 161) CGW Packets Rx From IGX Net 142) FERR Counts (M or F bit) 162) CGW Cells Tx to Line 143) Cell Framing FEBE Err Secs 163) CGW Frms Relayed to Line 144) Cell Framing FEBE Sev. Err. Secs. 164) CGW Aborted Frames Tx to Line 145) Cell Framing FEBE Counts 165) CGW Dscd Pkts From Abted Frms 146) Cell Framing FE Counts 166) CGW 0-Lngth Frms Rx from Line 147) ATM CRC Errored Seconds 167) CGW Packets Tx to IGX Net 148) ATM CRC Severely Err. Secs. 168) CGW Cells Rx from Line 149) Bdata A CLP Packets Tx to Line 169) CGW Frms Relayed from Line 150) Bdata B CLP Packets Tx to Line 170) CGW Aborted Frms Rx From Line 151) Yellow Alarm Transition Count 171) CGW Dscd Cells From Abted Frms This Command: cnftrkstats 11

________________________________________________________________

sw83 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 14:51 PST Line Statistic Types 172) CGW Bd CRC32 Frms Rx from Line 185) OAM Valid OAM Cells Rx 173) CGW Bd Lngth Frms Rx from Line 186) OAM Loopback Cells Rx 174) CGW Bd CRC16 Frms Rx from IGX 187) OAM AIS Cells Rx 175) CGW Bd Length Frms Rx from IGX 188) OAM FERF Cells Rx 176) CGW 0-Length Frms Rx from IGX 189) OAM RTD Cells Rx 177) OAM Valid OAM Cells Tx 190) OAM RA Cells Rx 178) OAM Loopback Cells Tx 191) OAM Invalid OAM Cells Rx 179) OAM AIS Cells Tx 192) OAM CC Cells Rx 180) OAM FERF Cells Tx 181) OAM RTD Cells Tx 182) OAM RA Cells Tx 183) OAM Invalid Supv Packets Rx 184) OAM CC Cells Tx This Command: cnftrkstats 11
Example (T1/24 Trunk on IGX)

cnftrkstats 8

sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 10:12 GMT Line Statistic Types 1) Bipolar Violations 18) Voice Packets Transmitted 3) Out of Frames 19) TS Packets Transmitted 4) Losses of Signal 20) NTS Packets Transmitted 5) Frames Bit Errors 21) CC Packets Transmitted 6) CRC Errors 22) BDA Packets Transmitted 9) Packet Out of Frames 23) BDB Packets Transmitted 10) Packet CRC Errors 24) Total Packets Transmitted 12) Tx Voice Pkts Dropped 25) BDA CLP Packets Dropped 13) Tx TS Packets Dropped 26) BDB CLP Packets Dropped 14) Tx NTS Packets Dropped 27) BDA EFCN Pkts Transmitted 15) Tx CC Packets Dropped 28) BDB EFCN Pkts Transmitted 16) Tx BDA Packets Dropped 149) Bdata A CLP Packets Tx to Line 17) Tx BDB Packets Dropped 150) Bdata B CLP Packets Tx to Line This Command: cnftrkstats 8 Statistic Type:
Example (UXM OC-3 Trunk on IGX)

cnftrkstats 5.1

------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 10:20 GMT Virtual Interface Statistic Types 1) QBIN: Voice Cells Tx to line 14) QBIN: Tx BData A Cells Discarded 2) QBIN: TimeStamped Cells Tx to ln 15) QBIN: Tx BData B Cells Discarded 3) QBIN: NTS Cells Tx to line 16) QBIN: Tx CBR Cells Discarded 4) QBIN: Hi-Pri Cells Tx to line 17) QBIN: Tx ABR Cells Discarded 5) QBIN: BData A Cells Tx to line 18) QBIN: Tx nrt-VBR Cells Discarded 6) QBIN: BData B Cells Tx to line 19) QBIN: Tx NTS Cells Received 7) QBIN: Tx CBR Cells Served 20) QBIN: Tx Hi-Pri Cells Received 8) QBIN: Tx nrt-VBR Cells Served 21) QBIN: Tx Voice Cells Received 9) QBIN: Tx ABR Cells Served 22) QBIN: Tx TS Cells Received 10) QBIN: Tx NTS Cells Discarded 23) QBIN: Tx BData A Cells Received 11) QBIN: Tx Hi-Pri Cells Discarded 24) QBIN: Tx BData B Cells Received 12) QBIN: Tx Voice Cells Discarded 25) QBIN: Tx CBR Cells Received 13) QBIN: Tx TS Cells Discarded 26) QBIN: Tx ABR Cells Received This Command: cnftrkstats 5.1 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 10:21 GMT Virtual Interface Statistic Types 27) QBIN: Tx nrt-VBR Cells Received 40) CGW: Packets Rx From Network 28) VI: Cells rcvd w/CLP=1 41) CGW: Cells Tx to Line 29) VI: OAM cells received 42) CGW: NIW Frms Relayed to Line 30) VI: Cells tx w/CLP=1 43) CGW: SIW Frms Relayed to Line 31) VI: Cells received w/CLP=0 44) CGW: Aborted Frames Tx to Line 32) VI: Cells discarded w/CLP=0 45) CGW: Dscd Pkts 33) VI: Cells discarded w/CLP=1 46) CGW: 0-Length Frms Rx from Network 34) VI: Cells transmitted w/CLP=0 47) CGW: Bd CRC16 Frms Rx from Network 35) VI: OAM cells transmitted 48) CGW: Bd Lngth Frms Rx from Network 36) VI: RM cells received 49) CGW: OAM RTD Cells Tx 37) VI: RM cells transmitted 54) CGW: Packets Tx to Network 38) VI: Cells transmitted 55) CGW: Cells Rx from Line 39) VI: Cells received 56) CGW: NIW Frms Relayed from Line This Command: cnftrkstats 5.1 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- sw180 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.p7 Dec. 14 2000 10:22 GMT Virtual Interface Statistic Types 57) CGW: SIW Frms Relayed from Line 78) QBIN: Tx Q11 Cells Received 58) CGW: Abrt Frms 79) QBIN: Tx Q12 Cells Served 59) CGW: Dscd Cells 80) QBIN: Tx Q12 Cells Discarded 60) CGW: 0-Lngth Frms Rx from Line 81) QBIN: Tx Q12 Cells Received 61) CGW: Bd CRC32 Frms Rx from Line 82) QBIN: Tx Q13 Cells Served 62) CGW: Bd Lngth Frms Rx from Line 83) QBIN: Tx Q13 Cells Discarded 63) CGW: OAM RTD Cells Rx 84) QBIN: Tx Q13 Cells Received 64) CGW: OAM Invalid OAM Cells Rx 85) QBIN: Tx Q14 Cells Served 73) QBIN: Tx Q10 Cells Served 86) QBIN: Tx Q14 Cells Discarded 74) QBIN: Tx Q10 Cells Discarded 87) QBIN: Tx Q14 Cells Received 75) QBIN: Tx Q10 Cells Received 88) QBIN: Tx Q15 Cells Served 76) QBIN: Tx Q11 Cells Served 89) QBIN: Tx Q15 Cells Discarded 77) QBIN: Tx Q11 Cells Discarded 90) QBIN: Tx Q15 Cells Received This Command: cnftrkstats 5.1 Statistic Type:
Example (BXM OC-12 Trunk on BPX)

cnftrkstats 11.2

------------------------------------SCREEN 1----------------------------------- sw167 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 10:48 PST Virtual Interface Statistic Types 7) Tx Voice Cells Served 32) Tx BData A Cells Discarded 8) Tx TS Cells Served 33) Tx BData B Cells Discarded 9) Tx NTS Cells Served 34) Tx CBR Cells Discarded 10) Tx Hi-Pri Cells Served 35) Tx ABR Cells Discarded 11) Tx BData A Cells Served 36) Tx VBR Cells Discarded 12) Tx BData B Cells Served 37) Egress NTS Cells Rx 19) Tx CBR Cells Served 38) Egress Hi-Pri Cells Rx 20) Tx VBR Cells Served 39) Egress Voice Cells Rx 21) Tx ABR Cells Served 40) Egress TS Cells Rx 28) Tx NTS Cells Discarded 41) Egress BData A Cells Rx 29) Tx Hi-Pri Cells Discarded 42) Egress BData B Cells Rx 30) Tx Voice Cells Discarded 43) Egress CBR Cells Rx 31) Tx TS Cells Discarded 44) Egress ABR Cells Rx This Command: cnftrkstats 11.2 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 2----------------------------------- sw167 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 10:49 PST Virtual Interface Statistic Types 45) Egress VBR Cells Rx 58) Tx Q10 Cells Served 46) Total Cells Tx from port 59) Tx Q10 Cells Discarded 47) Cells RX with CLP0 60) Egress Q10 Cells Rx 48) Cells Rx with CLP1 61) Tx Q11 Cells Served 49) Cells RX Discard with CLP0 62) Tx Q11 Cells Discarded 50) Cells RX Discard with CLP1 63) Egress Q11 Cells Rx 51) Cells TX with CLP0 64) Tx Q12 Cells Served 52) Cells TX with CLP1 65) Tx Q12 Cells Discarded 53) BXM: Total Cells RX 66) Egress Q12 Cells Rx 54) Ingress OAM Cell Count 67) Tx Q13 Cells Served 55) Egress OAM Cell Count 68) Tx Q13 Cells Discarded 56) Ingress RM cell count 69) Egress Q13 Cells Rx 57) Egress RM cell count 70) Tx Q14 Cells Served This Command: cnftrkstats 11.2 Continue? y ------------------------------------SCREEN 3----------------------------------- sw167 TN Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.2R Dec. 14 2000 10:49 PST Virtual Interface Statistic Types 71) Tx Q14 Cells Discarded 72) Egress Q14 Cells Rx 73) Tx Q15 Cells Served 74) Tx Q15 Cells Discarded 75) Egress Q15 Cells Rx This Command: cnftrkstats 11.2 Statistic Type:

cnftstparm (configure card test parameters)

Sets parameters for the internal diagnostic self-tests that you can perform for each card type in the node.

Upon receiving this command, the system displays a two-page screen illustrating each of the various card types equipped in the node along with their self-test parameters.

Each card has two tests run on standby cards:

Only background tests are executed on active cards.

Here are the configurable test parameters for each card type:

Universal Router Module

With Release 9.3.20, the IGX 8400 supports the Universal Router Module (URM). The URM provides IOS-based voice support and basic routing functions. The URM is a combination of a URM front card and a 2FE2V back card. The URM hardware consists of an embedded UXM that provides the ATM interface to the IGX network and an embedded IOS-based router. The embedded UXM is based on UXM-E hardware. It is logically a one-port UXM without physical interfaces and provides functionality similar to the UXM/UXM-E modules in the IGX.

The URM supports card self-test and background test. Use the cnftstparm command to enable, disable, or configure the self-test and background test on the URM. The tests apply only to the embedded UXM side of the card.

Syntax

cnftstparm <tp> <freq> <s_e> <s_inc> <s_thr> <s_to> <b_e> <b_inc> <b_thr>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<tp>

Specifies the card type.

<freq>

Specifies the time between the completion of one test and the start of the next (in seconds; default is card-dependent).
Range: 1 - 65535 seconds
Default for BCC card: 1600 seconds
Recommended value for the BCC card: 1600 seconds

<s_e>

Enables/disables the card self-test. E to enable; D to disable.

<s_inc>

Specifies the threshold counter increment for self-test failures. Counter for each card-type: each failure increments.
Default:100

<s_thr>

Specifies the failure threshold for self-tests.
Default: 300

<s_to>

Specifies time to wait for a self-test response (in seconds). How long to wait for a response depends on the card.

The recommended value for the self-test time-out value on the BCC card is 800 seconds. The value on the standby controller card will be maintained even if the active timeout value is less than 800, which prevents the self-test timeout value from changing during a switchover (after a switchcc command is run). For example, if you change the self-test time-out value to 900 on the standby controller card, and then do a switchcc, the self-test time-out value on the new active controller card will remain 900.

<b_e>

Enables/disables the card background test. E to enable; D to disable. Available tests depend on the card; some are not enabled.

<b_inc>

Specifies the threshold counter increment for background test failures.

<b_thr>

Specifies the failure threshold for background tests.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfdiagparm, dspcderrs, prtcderrs, tststats

Example (BPX)

Here is the first page of the cnftstparm display for a BPX node.

sw45 TN SuperUser BPX 15 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 16:04 PDT Card Test - - - - - - Self Test - - - - - - - - - Background Test - - - Type Freq Enable Inc Thresh Timeout Enable Inc Thresh ---- ----- -------- ------- ------- ------- -------- ------- ------- BCC 1600 Enabled 100 300 800 N/A 100 300 ASM 300 Disabled 100 300 60 N/A 100 300 BNI-T3 300 Enabled 100 300 150 N/A 100 300 BNI-E3 300 Enabled 100 300 150 N/A 100 300 ASI-E3 900 Enabled 100 300 800 Enabled 100 300 ASI-T3 900 Enabled 100 300 800 Enabled 100 300 ASI-155 900 Enabled 100 300 800 Enabled 100 300 BNI-155 300 Enabled 100 300 150 N/A 100 300 BXM 2000 Disabled 100 300 1800 Enabled 100 300 Last Command: cnftstparm Next Command:
Example (IGX with a URM)

Here is the cnftstparm display for an IGX node and the configuration of a Universal Router Module (URM).

sw190 TRM Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2l Oct. 10 2000 04:23 GMT Card Test - - - - - - Self Test - - - - - - - - - Background Test - - - Type Freq Enable Inc Thresh Timeout Enable Inc Thresh ---- ----- -------- ------- ------- ------- -------- ------- ------- PSM 300 Enabled 100 300 31 N/A 100 300 HDM 300 Enabled 100 300 80 Enabled 100 300 LDM 300 Enabled 100 300 80 Enabled 100 300 NTM 300 Enabled 100 300 31 N/A 100 300 FRM 300 Enabled 100 300 80 Enabled 100 300 MT3 300 Enabled 100 300 50 N/A 100 300 CVM 300 Enabled 100 300 300 N/A 100 300 NPM 180 Enabled 100 300 120 N/A 100 300 ARM 300 Enabled 100 300 60 N/A 100 300 BTM 300 Enabled 100 300 120 N/A 100 300 FTM 300 Enabled 100 300 80 Disabled 100 300 UFM 300 Enabled 100 300 80 Enabled 100 300 This Command:cnftstparm Continue? y --------- Screen 2 ---------- sw190 TRM Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2l Oct. 10 2000 04:24 GMT Card Test - - - - - - Self Test - - - - - - - - - Background Test - - - Type Freq Enable Inc Thresh Timeout Enable Inc Thresh ---- ----- -------- ------- ------- ------- -------- ------- ------- UFMU 300 Enabled 100 300 80 Enabled 100 300 ALM 300 Enabled 100 300 120 N/A 100 300 UVM 300 Disabled 100 300 60 N/A 100 300 UXM 300 Enabled 100 300 800 Enabled 100 300 URM 300 Enabled 100 300 800 Enabled 100 300 Last Command:cnftstparm URM 300 E 100 300 800 E 100 300

Enter the card type at the prompt to begin modifying the test parameter.

cnfuiparm (configure user interface parameters)

Sets control terminal user interface parameters. Use cnfuiparm to set user interface parameters for the control terminal on the local node.

It may be necessary to change these parameters in special circumstances, such as when you need to observe a screen for a long period of time or when modem password protection makes logging in difficult.

Syntax

cnfuiparm <parameter number> <value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<parameter number>

Specifies the index number of the parameter to set.

<value>

Specifies the new parameter value to enter.

Parameter Values

No. Parameter Description Default*

1

Logout Time

Idle time before a local user is logged out (0=never).

20 minutes

2

VT Logout Time

Idle time before a virtual terminal user is logged out.

4 minutes

3

Prompt Time

Idle time before a parameter prompt times out.

2 minutes

4

Command Time

Idle time before a continuous command times out.

3 minutes

5

UID Privilege Level

Privilege level of User ID allowed to use control terminal. The default is 6, the lowest user level.

6

6

Input Char Echo

If enabled, characters are echoed as you type them.

enabled

7

Screen Update Time

Time between screen updates.

2 seconds

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfnodeparm, dsptsmap

Example (IGX)

cnfuiparm

sw197 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 04:01 GMT 1. Logout Time ........... 999 minutes 2. VT Logout Time ........ 4 minutes 3. Prompt Time ........... 60 seconds 4. Command Time .......... 3 minutes 5. UID Privilege Level ... 6 6. Input Character Echo .. Enabled 7. Screen Update Time .... 10 seconds This Command: cnfuiparm Enter parameter index:

cnfuvmchparm (configure channel parameters on a UVM)

Configures default parameters for a channel or range of channels on a UVM. The parameters are:

Syntax

cnfuvmchparm <channel> <value>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel>

Specifies the channel or range of channels.

<value>

VCU is the Voice codec unit.
The value for this parameter is a noise level placed in a voice packet that is added in case a voice packet is dropped. The value you can enter is a multiplier for the base noise level of -10 dB.
Range: 1-15 (multiplied by -10 dB). For example, if you enter 6, the level of noise placed in a replacement packet is -60 dB.

PIU is the PCM interface unit.
The PIU performs a resampling and injects noise in case of lost packets.
Range: 1-15 (which is a multiplier for -10 dB). For example, if you enter 6, the level of noise placed in a replacement packet is -60 dB.

VAD is the Voice Activity Detection threshold.
If the decibel level falls below the specified limit, no packets are transmitted.
Range: 0-65535 and is a multiplier of -1 dB, but typical values are around 30-40.

Modem threshold is a threshold for modem tone detection.
Below this threshold, the tone is ignored (or "not detected").
Range: 0-255 and is a multiplier of -1 dB, but typical values are around 30-40.

The other values appear as numbered columns. These are placeholders reserved for future development.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Example

Configure the parameters for channels 1-23 on port 1 of the UVM in slot 7.

cnfuvmchparm 7.1.1

sw109 VT SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:25 PST From Parameter: VCU PIU VAD mdm 7.1.1 lvl lvl thld thld 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7.1.1-23 6 6 40 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7.2.1-23 6 6 40 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 This Command: cnfuvmchparm 7.1. Enter VCU Noise Level/-10dB [0-15]:

cnfvchparm (configure voice channel parameters)

Modifies CVM or CVM voice channel parameters for:

Different versions of firmware for the CVM present different ways of specifying the level of background noise you can select to cover awkward periods of silence at the ends of voice connections. For cards with Model A firmware, you specify the actual level in dBm (deciBels) or dBrnC0. For Model A cards, you can specify the noise levels with a granularity of 0.1 dBm or dBrnC0. For cards with Model B firmware, you enter a number that maps to a noise level.

After you enter cnfvchparm, the system displays "Enter channel(s)." After you enter the parameters, the system requests confirmation by displaying "Reconfigure active CDP channels? (y/n)."

Without the cnfvchparm command, the other ways to reconfigure channels are

Syntax

cnfvchparm <channel> <parameters>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<channel>

Specifies the voice channel numbers to configure.

<parameters>

Specifies values for the voice parameters.

VF Channel Parameters

Parameter Description Default

Sample delay for VAD connections

Adds processing to speech information to prevent front-end clipping due to speech detector latency. One increment is 125 micro seconds. Here are some sample delay values:

01 ------- 0.125 msec.
50 ------- 10 msec.
A8 ------- 21 msec.

A8 (H)

Sample delay for non-VAD connections

Same for non-VAD circuits.

01 (H)

Background Noise

Sets the level of background noise the far-end card adds to the connection while it receives no voice packets. For Model A firmware, specify levels in actual decibels in 0.1 dB increments. Injected noise levels for Model B firmware:

00 -------- Dynamically set noise level to match the noise detected at the other end. Requires Model B firmware on the CDP or CVM.
0 --------- 0 dBrnC0 or -90 dBm
1 --------- 18 dBrnC0 or -70 dBm
2 --------- 21 dBrnC0 or -67 dBm
3 --------- 23 dBrnC0 or -65 dBm
4 --------- 25 dBrnC0 or -63 dBm
5 --------- 27 dBrnC0 or -61 dBm
6 --------- 30 dBrnC0 or -58 dBm
7 --------- 49 dBrnC0 or -39 dBm

2 (H)

High Pass Filter mode

Enables/disables high-pass filter to assist in VAD and modem detect.

enabled

Floating Priority mode

When enabled, sets higher priority for modem detection on "c" and "v" channels. Effectively changes the trunk queue for the channel.

enabled

V.25 modem detect mode

Enables/disables V.25 modem-detect mode. The default is enabled with "detect-64K," which specifies that a 2100 Hz tone indicates the presence of V.25-type modem. The options with V.25 modem detect are "disable," "32" for 32K upgrade, and "64" for 64K upgrade. Enter "32" for fax transmission at 32 Kbps FAX Optimized ADPCM. Use the default "64" for fax transmission at 64 Kbps PCM.

enabled

32K

Auto-upgrade line to 32 Kbps ADPCM when a 32K modem is detected.

disabled

64K

Automatically upgrade line to 64 Kbps clear channel PCM when a high-speed modem is detected.

enabled

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

SuperUser

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfcvmparm, dspchan

Example (Model A)

The screen display illustrates cnfvchparm applied to a Model A CDP. The display for Model A cards shows the decibel level of the injected noise.

sw110 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:43 PDT CDP Models All None All UVM Models All None All Sample Delay Bkgnd Echo Suppression V.25 Xmit From 14.1 VAD Non-VAD Noise HPF Float Function Loss Detect Delay 14.1-15 A8 01 67 ON ON ON ON 64K 5 14.17-24 A8 01 67 ON ON ON ON 64K 5 This Command: cnfvchparm 14.1-6 A8 1 67 e e e e V.25 Modem detect, 'd' - disable, '32' - 32K upgrade, '64' - 64K upgrade:
Example (Model B)

The screen displays in the example illustrates cnfvchparm applied to a Model B CDP. The display for the Model B shows the number that corresponds to a decibel (or dBrnC0) level of background noise.

sw83 TN SuperUser IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:01 PST CDP Models All None All Sample Delay Bkgnd Echo Suppression V.25 Xmit From 11.1 VAD Non-VAD Noise HPF Float Function Loss Detect Delay 11.1-15 A8 01 2 ON ON ON ON ON 5 11.17-31 A8 01 2 ON ON ON ON ON 5 This Command: cnfvchparm Next Command:

cnfvchtp (configure interface type for voice channels)

Configures an interface signaling type for a voice channel. Most standard signaling types are maintained by the node, but you may build a custom template.

If you enter the cnfvchtp command without a specific interface number, the system will present you with a list of valid interface types and their associated on-hook and conditioning information.

To assign an interface type (and its associated on-hook and conditioning information) to the channel or set of channels, enter the number of the desired interface type. Type "1" requires user configuration. Interface type is ignored for "d" type connections.

Syntax

cnfvchtp <channel> <type> [<A> <B> <C> <D> <cond_code>]

Parameters

Parameter Description

channel

Specifies the channel or range of channels for the interface type configuration.

For a CVM or CDP, the format is slot.channel[-channel].
For a UVM, the format for channel is slot.line.channel[-channel].

interface type

Specifies the number of the interface type to assign to the channel or range of channels. These types are listed in the table "Interface Types" below. The on-hook column has A-bits on the left and B-bits on the right. The conditioning column has different types of conditioning specified. If you designate interface type number 1 to indicate a user-configured interface type, the system prompts for: on-hook A, on-hook B, on-hook C (if applicable), on-hook D (if applicable), conditioning A, conditioning B, conditioning C (if applicable), conditioning D (if applicable), and conditioning template information.

When the IGX receives A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, and D-bits corresponding to the on-hook values, that channel is known to be on-hook. If the A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, and D-bits do not correspond to the on-hook values, that channel is known be off-hook

on-hook A

A-bit value for the on-hook state of a channel or set of channels.

on-hook B

B-bit value for the on-hook state of a channel or set of channels.

on-hook C

C-bit value for the on-hook state of a channel or set of channels.

on-hook D

D-bit value for the on-hook state of a channel or set of channels.
Possible values:

1 + high
0 = low
X= don't care
? = don't know
- = not used

conditioning template

One of many predefined or user-defined conditioning templates in the range of 00000000 to 11111111. (See dspcond and cnfcond commands.) Each interface type, except for option 1, has a predetermined conditioning template associated with it. These represent the A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, D-bit values as well as the substitute PCM voice sample sent to the attached equipment in case the voice connection fails for any reason.

Interface Types

Interface Number Interface Type On-hook Conditioning

1

User Config

2

Unconfig

? ? - -

a

3

No Sig

? ? ? ?

a

4

Force Sig

? ? - -

a

5

2W E&M

0 X - -

a

6

4W E&M

0 X - -

a

7

FXO

11 - -

b

8

FXS G/S

01 - -

c

9

FXS L/S

0 X - -

d

10

DPO

0 X - -

a

11

DPT

0 X - -

a

12

RPO

0 X - -

a

13

RPT

0 X - -

a

14

SDPO

0 X - -

a

15

DX

0 X - -

a

16

ETO

? ? - -

e

17

PLAR

? ? - -

d

18

PLR

0 X - -

a

19

RD

? ? - -

a

20

R1 (SOCOTEL)

0 - - -

e

21

SSDC5A

1 1 0 1

f

22

R2 (backward)

1 1 - -

e

23

R2 (forward)

1 0 - -

d

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfchgn, cnfchdl, dspchcnf

Example

Configure the interface type for channel 13.1-24.

cnfvchtp 13.1-24

sw150 TN Cisco IGX 8420 9.3.2T Dec. 19 2000 23:48 PST No Intf. Type OnHk Cond No Intf. Type OnHk Cond 1 User Config 13 RPT 0 X - - a 2 Unconfig ? ? - - a 14 SDPO 0 X - - a 3 No Sig ? ? ? ? a 15 DX 0 X - - a 4 Force Sig ? ? - - a 16 ETO ? ? - - e 5 2W E&M 0 X - - a 17 PLAR ? ? - - d 6 4W E&M 0 X - - a 18 PLR 0 X - - a 7 FXO 1 1 - - b 19 RD ? ? - - a 8 FXS G/S 0 1 - - c 20 R1 (SOCOTEL) 0 - - - e 9 FXS L/S 0 X - - d 21 SSDC5A 1 1 0 1 f 10 DPO 0 X - - a 22 R2 (backward) 1 1 - - e 11 DPT 0 X - - a 23 R2 (forward) 1 0 - - d 12 RPO 0 X - - a Last Command: cnfvchtp 13.1
Example

Configure a user configurable interface type for channel 15.1 to 15.8. The channel configuration screen shows that channels 5-8 of circuit line 15 now has a user-configured interface type with an A-bit on-hook value of X, a B-bit on-hook value of X, an C-bit on-hook value of not used, D-bit on-hook value of not used, and conditioning template b.

cnfvchtp 15.5-8 1 X X - - b

cnfvsiif (assign a service class template to an interface)

Assign a service class templates (SCT) to an interface.

Use the dspvsiif command to display a service class template assigned to an interface, as well as display a summary of the resources allocated to the VSI partition on a given interface.

A default service template is assigned to a logical interface (VI) when you up the interface by using upport and uptrk.

For example:

This default template (MPLS1) has the identifier of 1. You can change the service template from service template 1 to another service template by using the cnfvsiif command. The dspvsiif command allows you to display the template associated with the interface. For example:

Syntax

cnfvsiif <slot.port.vtrk> <tmplt_id>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.port.vtrk>

Specifies the card slot and port number and virtual trunk.

<tmplt_id>

Specifies the ID number of the service class template to be assigned.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-6

No

Yes

BPX, IGX

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Related Commands

cnfrsrc, dsprsrc, cnfqbin, dspqbin

Example (IGX)

Assign service class template 2 to port interface 3.1. You will see a warning if partition 3 is active.

cnfvsiif 3.1 1

bently TN Cisco IGX 8430 9.3.10 Aug. 3 2000 13:49 PST Port: 3.1 service class template ID: 2 State MinLCN MaxLCN StartVPI EndVPI MinBW MaxBW Partition 1: D Partition 2: D Partition 3: E 100 200 100 200 10000 10000 Last Command: cnfvsiif 3.1 2 Interface has active VSI partition(s): changing SCT will be service affecting Next Command:
Example (BPX)

Assign service class template 2 to port interface 4.1.

cnfvsiif 4.1 2

sw143 TRM Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.10 Aug. 2 2000 17:58 GMT Port: 4.1 service class template ID: 2 VSI Partitions : channels bw vpi Part E/D min max min max start end ilmi 1 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 2 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 3 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D Last Command: cnfvsiif 4.1 2 Next Command:

cnfvsipart (configure VSI ILMI on VSI partition)

Enable or disable VSI ILMI support.

You may enable VSI ILMI on only one VSI partition on the interface.

Starting with Release 9.3, this command is used only on a trunk interface. To enable VSI ILMI on the port interface, use the cnfport command to enable ILMI and Protocol By Card.

Syntax

cnfvsipart <slot.port.[vtrk]> <part_id> <enable_option>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<slot.port.[vtrk]>

Slot, port (and virtual port if applicable) of the interface.

<part_id>

Partition ID corresponding to the VSI partition.

<enable_option>

This parameter indicates whether to enable or disable VSI ILMI functionality.

Valid values:

  • Y enables the VSI ILMI session.

  • N disables the VSI ILMI session.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

BPX

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Related Commands

cnfrsrc, dspvsipartcnf, cnfport, cnftrk

Example

Enable VSI ILMI on BXM trunk 4.2, VSI partition 1.

cnfvsipart 4.2 1 Y

sw143 TRM Cisco BPX 8620 9.3.10 Aug. 2 2000 18:20 GMT Trunk: 4.2 Partn: 1 ILMI: E LCN: 543 Topo: BPX NW IP Last Command: cnfvsipart 4.2 1 Y Next Command:

cnfxmtsig (configure transmit signaling)

Allows the node to pass A, B, C, and D channel signaling bits through unchanged, or to invert, or hold them at a given value for a CDP or CVM line. It affects signaling bits in the transmit direction (to the PBX or channel bank) in an E1 system. The command configures the transmit signaling. Channel signaling bit options are T (transparent), 0, 1, or I (invert). If signaling is set to "not used" (-) by cnfchtp, the following is maintained: A=1, B=1, C=0, D=1.

Syntax

cnfxmtsig <channel(s)> <[A/]Conv> <[B/]Conv> <[C/]Conv> <[D/]Conv>

Parameters

Parameter Description

channel

Specifies the channel or range of channels to receive signaling.

A/

Specifies the conversion applied to the A-bit. <Conv> can be one of:

1 = bit is asserted.
0 = bit is inhibited.
T = bit is passed transparently.
I = bit is inverted.

B/

Specifies the conversion applied to the B-bit.

C/

Specifies the conversion applied to the C-bit.

D/

Specifies the conversion applies to the D-bit.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfrcvsig, dspsigqual

Example

Configure the transmit signaling for channel 8.1 to inverted for the A-bit, inhibited for the B-bit, asserted for the C-bit and transparent for the D-bit.

cnfxmtsig 8.1 a/I b/0 c/1 d/t

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 8420 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 11:38 MST signaling Qualifiers From 8.1 TXA-bit TXB-bit TXC-bit TXD-bit RXA-bit RXB-bit RXC-bit RXD-bit 8.1 1 0 1 T T 0 I I 8.2-31 T T T T T T T T Last Command: cnfxmtsig 8.1 a/I b/O c/1 d/t Next Command:

compactrsrc (compact resources)

This command is used to compact the Automatic Routing Management CBAs on a particular slot. It deprograms all the connections (cross-connects) terminated on that card and reprograms them with new CBA values. You can use this command if you need to free up some CBAs to use them for VSI. The command affects all the connections that have been programmed.

Syntax

compactrsrc ar

Parameters

Parameter Description

ar

Select Automatic Routing Management (AutoRoute)

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1

No

No

IGX

No

Yes

Yes

No

Example

Compacts CBA resources used by Automatic Routing Management connections.

compactrsrc ar

sw100 TRM StrataCom IGX 8420 9.3.10   July 16 2000   12:18 PST WARNING - ALL AUTO ROUTE CONNECTIONS WILL BE RE-PROGRAMMED. THIS WILL CAUSE DROPPING OF CELLS IN ALL PVCs. This Command: compactrsrc ar OK to continue (y/n)?

cpyict (copy interface control templates)

Copies all control template information associated with a given channel: the active template information, the conditioned template information, and the looped template information for near and far ends.

Once copied, you can edit the control template information by using the cnfict command. See the cnfict command for more information on interface control templates.

On an IGX node, the applicable front cards are the LDM, HDM, FRM, and CVM (for data).

Syntax

cpyict <source_port> <destination_port>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<source_port>

Specifies the data channel or Frame Relay port of the interface control template information to copy.

<destination_port>

Specifies the data channel or Frame Relay port that will receive the copied control template information.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnfict, dspict

Example

Copy the interface control template for data channel 25.1 to channel 25.2.

cpyict 25.1 25.2

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX 8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 17:40 MST Data Channel: 25.2 Interface: EIA/TIA 232 DCE Clocking: Normal Interface Control Template for Connection while ACTIVE Lead Output Value Lead Output Value RI OFF DSR ON CTS ON SRxD ON DCR OFF DCD ON SCTS ON SDCD ON SQ ON Last Command: cpyict 25.1 25.2 Next Command:

cpytrkict (copy trunk interface control template)

Copies the interface control template of one trunk to another trunk. Once copied, the control information can be edited by using the cnftrkict command. See the cnftrkict description for more information on configuring the trunk interface control templates.

Syntax

cpytrkict <source_trunk> <destination_trunk>

Parameters

Parameter Description

<source_trunk>

Specifies the trunk number of the interface control template information to be copied.

<destination_trunk>

Specifies the trunk number to which the interface control template information is copied.

Attributes

Privilege Jobs Log Node Help History Lock Hipri

1-2

Yes

Yes

IGX

Yes

Related Commands

cnftrkict, dsptrkict

Example

Copy the interface control template for trunk 9 to trunk 11.

cpytrkict 9 11

beta TRM YourID:1 IGX8430 9.3 Apr. 13 2000 15:15 MST Packet Line: 9 Interface: X.21 DTE Interface Control Template for Trunk Line Lead Output Value Lead Output Value C/DTR ON Last Command: cpytrkict 9 11 Enter destination line number:

hometocprevnextglossaryfeedbacksearchhelp
Posted: Thu Aug 1 16:32:27 PDT 2002
All contents are Copyright © 1992--2002 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Important Notices and Privacy Statement.